JP7492761B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been equipped with a unit attached to the inner frame that integrates a gaming board member having components that form the play area, a movable device mechanism having various movable devices and drive members, and a liquid crystal display device that displays various display effects. In conventional gaming machines with this configuration, when changing the specifications at the gaming center or replacing gaming machines, the staff at the gaming center had to replace this unit with one that matches the specifications and model (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-047245 A

In the conventional gaming machines described above, when changing the specifications of amusement parlors that have a large number of gaming machines of various models, it was necessary to carry out replacement work such as replacing a unit that has multiple parts such as the game board parts and is quite heavy, which was a problem in that the replacement work was time-consuming. In addition, in the time-consuming replacement work, there were cases where the replaced parts were not installed securely or parts different from the parts that should have been installed were installed. In such cases, when the gaming machine was operated, the replaced parts were detached from the gaming machine and damaged, or the parts different from the original parts were installed and damaged depending on the operating mode. In addition, in the replacement work, the worker was required to change the setting value that determines the probability of the special game being executed according to the changed specifications, and it was desired to be able to perform the change work more easily than before along with the replacement work.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and one of its purposes is to make it easier than ever to determine whether a replaced part is the part that should have been installed and whether the replaced part is securely installed when replacing parts of an amusement machine, and to make it easier to change settings, thereby reducing the occurrence of malfunctions after replacement work and preventing a loss of interest in playing games that is caused by playing on a defective gaming machine.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described below in order to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way.

[Application example]
In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine (gaming machine 100) which is an application example to which the present invention is applied includes a gaming machine door (glass frame 150) which is arranged forward of a gaming board having a play area and can be opened and closed, a control means (performance control board 320) which controls the performance according to the progress of the game, a first means (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700) capable of executing a performance, a second means (role unit 102B, upper role main body part 650, lower role main body part 750) different from the first means, a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a notification of a predetermined type, and a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d) capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the attachment of the first means to the second means. In the gaming machine having the above-mentioned, the control means is capable of executing a first abnormality notification ( mis-attachment error notification: Figs. 14-1 to 14-4) by the plurality of notification means when a first abnormality state occurs in which the appropriate first means is not attached to the second means, and is capable of executing a second abnormality notification (door open error notification: Fig. 15-4 (A)) by the plurality of notification means when a second abnormality state occurs in which the gaming machine door is open, and is capable of executing only the first abnormality notification in a state where only the first abnormality notification is visible by the first notification means (main display device 131) when the second abnormality state occurs during the first abnormality state, and is capable of executing only the first abnormality notification in a state where only the first abnormality notification is visible when a predetermined state occurs in response to performing a RAM clear process capable of erasing information related to the progress of a game during the first abnormality state, and is capable of executing only the first abnormality notification in a state where only the first abnormality notification is visible by the second notification means (audio output device 33 In 1) , if the second abnormal state occurs while in the first abnormal state, only the first abnormality notification can be executed in an audible manner , and if the specified state occurs while in the first abnormal state, the specified notification to be executed when the specified state occurs can be executed in an audible manner, and then the first abnormality notification can be executed in an audible manner .

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment. This is an oblique view of the gaming machine 100 showing the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 in an open state relative to the outer frame 160. A diagram showing the functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM 301b of a main control board 300. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main RAM 301c of a main control board 300. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed on the main control board 300. FIG. A block diagram showing details of the performance control board 320. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed on the performance control board 320. These are oblique views of the upper unit 180, where (A) is a diagram showing the upper unit 180 fixed to the outer frame 160 so as to cover a portion of the upper part of the glass frame 150, and (B) is a diagram showing the upper unit 180 fixed only to the outer frame 160. 13A and 13B are perspective views of the rear of the upper unit 180, in which FIG. 13A is a perspective view of the right rear, and FIG. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams of the lantern member 1580 in the upper unit 180, in which (A) is a perspective view of the lantern member 1580, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the lantern member 1580 in an exploded state. 1A is a schematic diagram of the configuration at the upper part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160 with the upper unit 180 removed, and (B) is an oblique view showing the schematic configuration of the upper right part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160 with the upper unit 180 removed. 1A and 1B are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of a lock unit 190 of a glass frame 150, in which (A) shows the lock unit 190 in a locked state, and (B) shows the lock unit 190 in an unlocked state. FIG. 13 is a front view of the blade handle unit 135. 3A is a schematic diagram of the rear surface of the blade handle unit 135, and FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of the bottom surface of the blade handle unit 135. FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the top view of the configuration at the bottom of the glass frame 150. 1A and 1B are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the lower part of the glass frame 150, in which (A) is a bottom view of the lower part of the glass frame 150 and (B) is a rear view of the lower part of the glass frame 150. 1 is an oblique view of the front side of the game board unit 102. FIG. An oblique view of the back side of the game board unit 102. 1 is an oblique view of the front side of the game board 102A. This is an oblique view of the front side of the role unit 102B. This is an oblique view of the rear side of the main display device 131, which is provided with a performance control board unit 102C and a main control board unit 102D. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the reel mechanism 158 when the upper reel unit 154 and the lower reel unit 156 are in their initial positions, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the reel mechanism 158 when the upper reel unit 154 is in the first position. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the reel mechanism 158 when the upper reel unit 154 is in the second position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the reel mechanism 158 when the lower reel unit 156 is in the advanced position. 1A is a schematic diagram of the front side of the upper role decoration part 600 of the upper role unit 154, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the back side of the upper role decoration part 600. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of the surface of the upper role main body 650 of the upper role unit 154, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the upper role main body 650. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of the front side of the lower role decoration part 700 of the lower role unit 156, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the back side of the lower role decoration part 700. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of the surface of the lower role main body 750 of the lower role unit 156, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the lower role main body 750. FIG. (A) is an oblique view showing the state in which the second upper decorative engagement portion 645 and the second upper main body engagement portion 695 of the upper role unit 154 are in a locked state, and (B) is an oblique view showing the state in which the second upper decorative engagement portion 645 and the second upper main body engagement portion 695 are in an unlocked state. (A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the upper part decorative part 800, (B) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the upper part decorative part 800 in the state shown in (A), (C) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the upper part decorative part 800, and (D) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the upper part decorative part 800 in the state shown in (C). (A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the lower part decorative part 900, (B) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the lower part decorative part 900 in the state shown in (A), (C) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the lower part decorative part 900, and (D) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the lower part decorative part 900 in the state shown in (C). 1A and 1B are diagrams explaining the movement of the character reel 1550 when the upper unit 180 is attached or detached, in which (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a portion of the upper part of the glass frame 150 is covered by the character reel 1550, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a portion of the upper part of the glass frame 150 is not covered by the character reel 1550. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the glass frame 150 is open. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing the state in which the glass frame 150 is open, (A) being a schematic diagram showing the state in which only the game board 102A has been removed, and (B) being a schematic diagram showing the state in which the game board unit 102 has been removed. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are open. These are schematic diagrams of the state in which the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 are open, (A) is a schematic diagram of the state in which the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are removed, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the state in which the main display device 131 is removed. The figures show the manner in which an installation error is notified, where (A) shows the manner in which an upper decorative part is not installed error is notified, (B) shows the manner in which an upper decorative part is incorrectly installed error is notified, and (C) explains the timing of output in the upper decorative part not being installed error notification and the upper decorative part incorrectly installed error notification. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the manner of notifying an installation error, in which (A) shows the manner of notifying an error that the lower decorative part is not installed, and (B) shows the manner of notifying an error that the lower decorative part is incorrectly installed. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing modes of notification of a mounting error, in which (A) shows a mode of notification of an upper unit non-mounted error, and (B) shows a mode of notification of an upper unit erroneously mounted error. A figure showing other aspects of the installation error notification, where (A) is a figure showing other aspects of the upper decorative part not being installed error notification, (B) is a figure showing other aspects of the upper decorative part incorrectly installed error notification, and (C) is a figure showing other aspects of the upper decorative part not being installed error notification. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between a power restoration notification and an attachment error notification, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating the form of a power restoration notification, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a power restoration notification and an attachment error notification. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between a RAM clear notification and an installation error notification, in which (A) is a diagram illustrating the manner of a RAM clear notification, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a RAM clear notification and an installation error notification. 11A and 11B are diagrams for explaining the relationship between a setting change notification, a setting confirmation notification, and an attachment error notification, in which (A) is a diagram for explaining the mode of a setting change notification, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the mode of a setting confirmation notification. 1A and 1B are diagrams explaining the relationship between a door opening error notification and an installation error notification, where (A) is a diagram explaining the manner in which a door opening error notification is made, (B) is a diagram explaining the relationship between a door opening error notification and an installation error notification, and (C) is a diagram explaining the relationship between a door opening error notification and an installation error notification. 1A and 1B are diagrams explaining the relationship between magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and attachment error notification, where (A) is a diagram explaining the manner in which a magnetic error notification is performed, (B) is a diagram explaining the timing of output in a magnetic error notification, (C) is a diagram explaining the manner in which a radio wave error notification is performed, and (D) is a diagram explaining the relationship between a magnetic error notification and a radio wave error notification. 1A and 1B are diagrams explaining the relationship between a switch connection error notification and an attachment error notification, where (A) is a diagram explaining the manner in which a switch connection error notification is performed, (B) is a diagram explaining the timing of output in a switch connection error notification, and (C) is a diagram explaining the relationship between a switch connection error notification and an attachment error notification. These are figures explaining the relationship between vibration error notifications, etc. and mounting error notifications, where (A) is a figure explaining the relationship between vibration error notifications and mounting error notifications, (B) is a figure explaining the relationship between abnormal winning notifications and mounting error notifications, and (C) is a figure explaining the relationship between ejection error notifications and mounting error notifications. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between a plate full error notification and an installation error notification, where (A) is a diagram illustrating the manner in which a plate full error notification is made, and (B) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a plate full error notification and an installation error notification. 1A and 1B are diagrams explaining the relationship between left-handed hit notifications and mounting error notifications, where (A) is a diagram explaining the manner in which a left-handed hit notification is performed, (B) is a diagram explaining the relationship between a left-handed hit notification and mounting error notification, and (C) is a diagram explaining the relationship between a left-handed hit notification and mounting error notification. 1A and 1B are diagrams explaining the priority of output of various notifications, etc., where (A) is a diagram explaining the priority of output of frame lamps/board lamps for various notifications, etc., and (B) is a diagram explaining the priority of output of audio output devices for various notifications, etc. 1A and 1B are diagrams for explaining the output mode on the main display device 131 for various notifications, etc. (A) is a diagram for explaining the output mode on the main display device 131 for various notifications, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the output mode on the main display device 131 for a mounting error notification. A front view of a gaming machine 200 of a second embodiment. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine 200 showing the configuration of the gaming machine 200. FIG. A diagram showing the functional blocks of the gaming machine 200. 1 is a schematic diagram of the entire management system in a gaming machine 200. FIG. This is an oblique view of the gaming machine 200 showing the glass frame 2150 in an open state relative to the outer frame 2160. 2A and 2B are views of the rear of the gaming machine 200, in which (A) is a view with the rear cover 2600 attached, and (B) is a view with the rear cover 2600 removed. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams of the decorative unit 2180, in which (A) is an oblique view of the decorative unit 2180, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the decorative unit 2180 removed. 11 is a table illustrating various detection schemes according to other embodiments. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a transition of a game state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation presentation of the first variation path. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation presentation of the second variation path. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing the start period of fluctuation for the variable performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a change start presentation. An explanatory diagram showing the start period of fluctuation and the suggested period for stopping fluctuation according to the number of pending memories. An explanatory diagram showing the suggested period for the fluctuation performance to stop. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching of a fluctuation path. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching of a fluctuation path. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching of a fluctuation path. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching of a fluctuation path. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching of a fluctuation path. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of switching of a fluctuation path. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a continuous performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the operation presentation of a movable member. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an operation suggestion presentation for an operation button. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal reach presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a SP reach presentation. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the SP reach presentation. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a SP reach presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a promotion effect. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a change presentation of an advantageous gaming state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal reach presentation in a favorable gaming state. An explanatory diagram showing an example of an SP reach presentation in a favorable gaming state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship of the movement paths. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a SP reach presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a revival performance.

Below, we will explain gaming machine 100 and gaming machine 200 as embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention, with appropriate reference to the drawings. Note that the embodiments described below do not limit the present invention, and not all of the elements and combinations thereof described in the embodiments are necessarily essential to the solution of the present invention.

[Description of the gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment]
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to this embodiment. Figure 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine 100, showing a state in which a glass frame 150 and an inner frame 170 are open relative to an outer frame 160. The gaming machine 100 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches gaming balls based on a player's launching operation, and when a gaming ball wins a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls is paid out to the player based on the winning.

In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "X direction", and in particular, the right direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "+X direction", and the left direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "-X direction". The up-down direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "Y direction", and in particular, the upward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "+Y direction", and the downward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "-Y direction". Furthermore, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "Z direction", and in particular, the direction toward the back of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "+Z direction", and the direction toward the front of the gaming machine 100 is also referred to as the "-Z direction".

1 and 2, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 160 that is attached to the island equipment of the gaming establishment, an inner frame 170 that is supported rotatably with the outer frame 160 on the front side of the outer frame 160, and a glass frame 150 that is supported rotatably with the inner frame 170 on the front side of the inner frame 170. A glass member 151 is provided on the glass frame 150 so as to be freely attached and detached from the back side. In addition, a lock unit 190 is provided at a predetermined position on the glass frame 150 to make the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 160 and to make the upper unit 180, which will be described later, detachable, and details will be described later. In addition, a glass frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting that the glass frame 150 is opened is provided at a predetermined position on the glass frame 150, and an inner frame opening switch (not shown) for detecting that the inner frame 170 is opened is provided at a predetermined position on the inner frame 170.

The main mechanisms, various parts, and circuit boards that make up the gaming machine 100 are provided in the inner frame 170, and the gaming board unit 102 is also provided in a removable manner. A gaming area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the gaming board unit 102. This gaming area 106 includes a gaming ball flow area where gaming balls flow down, and a display screen area for the main display device 131.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board unit 102 is composed of a game board 102A constituting the play area 106, a role unit 102B equipped with various movable role pieces, a main display device 131, a performance control board unit 102C equipped with a performance control board 320, and a main control board unit 102D equipped with a main control board 300. Details of these components that make up the game board unit 102 will be described later. The game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is placed in this opening 102AZ. This makes it easier for the player to see the main display device 131. In addition, in the game board unit 102, the surface on the player side is also called the front side, and the surface on the back side (the surface opposite the front side) is also called the back side.

The performance operation unit BSU is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 150. The performance operation unit BSU is provided with a sword handle unit 135 and a performance operation stick 136. In addition, an upper tray 128 is provided on the back side of the performance operation unit BSU, and a launch handle device 103 is provided on the lower right of the performance operation unit BSU. Furthermore, an upper unit 180 that performs a predetermined related operation when a predetermined game state is reached is provided on the upper side of the glass frame 150 so as to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150. The details will be described later, but the upper unit 180 is attached to the outer frame 160 and is configured to engage with the glass frame 150. In addition, a first side display device 132 and a second side display device 133 for performing performance displays during play and non-play are provided on both the left and right sides of the glass frame 150.

The upper tray 128 is a tray for storing game balls to be launched into the game area 106, and is formed with a ball flow path, which is a flow path for game balls supplied from a ball dispensing machine (not shown) installed next to the game machine 100 and game balls that are prize balls when a prize is won. In addition, a full detection switch 314 is provided in the middle of the ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a full tray error in which the upper tray 128 is full of game balls. Note that while the full detection switch 314 detects that the upper tray 128 is full, the payout of game balls by the prize ball payout device described later is stopped. Furthermore, the game balls stored in the upper tray 128 are led to a launch rail (not shown), and are guided to a guide rail (not shown) via the launch rail with a predetermined launch strength by the launch handle device 103, and are launched into the game area 106 (game ball flow area). In this case, depending on how the player rotates the launch handle device 103, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 will pass through the left route 106a or the right route 106b of the game ball flow area included in the game area 106. Specifically, if the player rotates the launch handle device 103 relatively weakly, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 may pass through the left route 106a. On the other hand, if the player rotates the launch handle device 103 relatively strongly, the game ball launched from the launch handle device 103 may pass through the right route 106b.

A sword handle unit 135, modeled after the handle of a sword, is located in the center of the presentation operation unit BSU. The sword handle unit 135 is used to change the presentation mode through the player's operation, and also functions as a gadget that operates in various ways according to a specified game state to perform various presentations. In addition, a presentation operation stick 136, which is a joystick that is operated by the player to adjust the volume of the gaming machine 100, is provided on the left side of the presentation operation unit BSU.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 106 is provided with an upper role unit 154 at the rear of the upper part, a lower role unit 156 at the bottom of the game ball flow area, and a light guide panel unit 181 with a light guide panel positioned between these units and the game board 102A so as to cover these movable roles and the main display device 131.

The upper and lower unit 154 and 156 are movable parts (so-called gimmicks) provided in the unit 102B, and various effects are performed by moving these units 154 and 156 in a predetermined manner according to the progress of the game by the player. The light guide panel unit 181 is provided with a light guide panel made of a resin such as transparent acrylic, and a light emitting section for allowing light to enter the light guide panel. In the light guide panel unit 181, the effect display displayed on the main display device 131 is made visible through the light guide panel, and it is possible to display a pattern or the like by illuminating a part of the panel with light incident from the light emitting section. In the conventional light guide panel unit, the light emitting section is provided in a structure that covers the end of the light guide panel, but in the light guide panel unit 181, the light emitting section is provided so that light enters from the side of the light guide panel without covering the end of the light guide panel, so that the light emitting area of the light guide panel can be made wider than in the conventional case. In this application, the "movable part" is interpreted to mean a moving part. Additionally, "props" is interpreted broadly to include both movable and immovable props.

A first starting device 112 having a starting area where a game ball can enter is provided in an area approximately at the lower center of the game area 106. This first starting device 112 is a winning device of a general winning device type, and when a game ball enters, a jackpot random number is obtained and a jackpot determination is made, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, three balls) is paid out. In addition, above the first starting device 112, a stage 140 is provided where the game ball does not pass between the nails and so-called warps in the middle of the left route 106a of the game ball flow area, mainly in the middle of the game ball flow area, making it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting device 112. Note that a game ball that enters the stage 140 may return to the game ball flow area from a predetermined notch in the stage 140 after staying in the stage 140.

In addition, a second starting device 115 having a starting area where a game ball can enter is provided in the area on the lower right side of the game area 106. The second starting device 115 is a so-called attacca-type electric device, and has a starting port at its bottom and a movable piece 115b above the starting port. This movable piece 115b is movable between a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A and a retracted state in which it is retracted into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the game ball is guided from the starting port into the second starting device 115, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting device 115. Conversely, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the starting port, and the game ball cannot win the second starting device 115. In other words, in the second starting device 115, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, there is no chance of the game ball winning, and when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the chance of the game ball winning increases. When a game ball wins, the second starting device 115, like the first starting device 112, obtains a jackpot random number and determines whether or not there is a jackpot, and pays out, for example, the same prize balls (3 balls) as the first starting device 112.

In addition, in the area to the right of the game area 106, there are provided a normal symbol activation gate 113b having a normal area through which game balls can pass, a first large prize device 117 into which game balls can enter, and a second large prize device 127 into which game balls can enter. When a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a winning random number is obtained and a win determination is made. Note that even if a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, no prize balls based on that passage are paid out.

The first large prize device 117 is a so-called attacca-type electric device, and has an opening at the bottom and a movable piece 117b above the opening. This movable piece 117b is controlled to move between a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A and a retracted state in which it is retracted into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 117b is in the retracted state, the game ball is guided from the opening into the first large prize device 117, and the game ball can win in the first large prize device 117 (this state is also called "open" or "open state"). When the game ball wins in the first large prize device 117, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 117b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot win in the first large prize device 117 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state").

The second large prize winning device 127 is a so-called attacca-type electric device, and has an opening at the bottom and a movable piece 127b above the opening. This movable piece 127b is controlled to move between a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A and a retracted state in which it is retracted into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 127b is in the retracted state, the game ball is guided from the opening into the second large prize winning device 127, and the game ball can win in the second large prize winning device 127 (this state is also called "open" or "open state"). When the game ball wins in the second large prize winning device 127, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 127b is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the opening, and the game ball cannot win in the second large prize winning device 127 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state").

In addition, a winning assistance device (not shown) is provided above the second large winning device 127. This winning assistance device is designed to retain a predetermined time on the movable piece 127b when multiple game balls that have passed through the right route 106b of the play area 106 pass through the blocked movable piece 127b, and the movable piece 127b is opened at predetermined intervals to allow the retained multiple game balls to enter the second large winning device 127 at once, thereby increasing the player's interest.

At the bottom of the play area 106, there is provided an outlet 111 for discharging game balls that have not entered the first start device 112, the second start device 115, the first big prize device 117, or the second big prize device 127. In addition, in the area on the right side of the play area 106, there is provided a cover 116 that covers the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the second start device 115, the first big prize device 117, and the second big prize device 127 from the front side. This cover 116 has a guide portion that protrudes toward the play board 102A side to guide the game balls to the second start device 115, the first big prize device 117, and the second big prize device 127.

A main display device 131 consisting of a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like is provided in the approximate center of the game area 106, and this main display device 131 displays images during standby when no game is being played, and displays images according to the progress of the game. In particular, multiple decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of game balls by the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, and a specific combination of decorative symbols (e.g., 777, etc.) is displayed as a fixed stop, thereby notifying the result of the jackpot determination that it is a jackpot.

In other words, when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 described below, and are displayed stationary in accordance with the stationary display of the special symbols after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. In other words, the timing of the variable display of the decorative symbols by the main display device 131 and the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 120 and the second special symbol display device 122 is synchronized. Also, while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, various images, characters, etc. are displayed, or a pre-reading display of the reserved display related to the special symbols is displayed, giving the player a sense of expectation that he or she may win a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the main display device 131 is a liquid crystal display device, but a plasma display or an organic EL display may also be used, or a display device such as a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, or a rotating drum may also be used.

As shown in FIG. 1, a display 125 is provided on the lower left side of the play area 106. The display 125 has a normal symbol display 118, a normal symbol reserved display 119, a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a first special symbol reserved display 123, and a second special symbol reserved display 124. Details of the display 125 will be described later.

The main display device 131 is located approximately in the center of the game board unit 102, and displays three variably displayed decorative symbols and various effects. The effects displayed on the main display device 131 are executed based on the effect patterns described below. Below, the effects displayed on the main display device 131 are also simply referred to as "display effects." In this embodiment, the decorative symbols include the numbers 1 to 9 and special symbols.

In the display presentation on the main display device 131, if the player wins the jackpot determination described below, i.e., if there is a jackpot, three decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and a jackpot symbol arrangement indicating a jackpot (for example, a repeating number such as "7, 7, 7") is displayed. In addition, in the display presentation, if the player loses the jackpot determination described below, i.e., if there is a miss, three decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, and a miss symbol arrangement indicating a miss (for example, a scattered number such as "2, 5, 1") is displayed. This allows the player to recognize the result of the jackpot determination.

When the player performs a so-called "left hit" by rotating the launch handle device 103 at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area of the game area 106. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right hit" by maintaining the launch handle device 103 rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area of the game area 106. Therefore, a "right hit" is required to make the ball enter the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, or the second big winning device 127.

The first starting device 112 is a starting device that is always open. On the other hand, the second starting device 115 is normally closed by a movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second starting device 115 based on the result of a judgment that is based on the condition that a gaming ball enters the normal symbol activation gate 113b. In this case, a state in which the gaming ball is likely to enter is created. When a gaming ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are obtained, and the following four judgments can be executed.
(1) Determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (hereinafter, also referred to as jackpot determination).
(2) In the display 125, a pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a special pattern) indicating whether or not a jackpot has been reached is determined to notify the result of the jackpot determination (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot pattern determination).
(3) This is executed in the case of a jackpot pattern determination, and determines the pattern (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot pattern) that represents the type of jackpot.
(4) In the display performance on the main display device 131, a judgment as to whether or not to make a reach (hereinafter also referred to as a reach judgment), and a judgment as to which of a plurality of fluctuation patterns to use (hereinafter also referred to as a fluctuation pattern judgment).

Here, a "jackpot game" is a special game that opens the first big prize device 117 or the second big prize device 127. Also, a "reach" refers to a situation in which two of the three decorative patterns displayed variably on the main display device 131 are displayed stationary, and the two decorative patterns constitute two of the three decorative patterns that make up the jackpot pattern array. For example, this refers to a situation in which two of the three decorative patterns displayed variably on the main display device 131 are displayed stationary, and the two decorative patterns are in the same state. In this case, the decorative patterns that make up two of the three decorative patterns that make up the jackpot pattern array are also called reach patterns.

In the following description, the above four judgments that are executed on the condition that the gaming ball that has passed through the first starting device 112 wins are also referred to as the "first special pattern judgments," and the above four judgments that are executed on the condition that the gaming ball wins the second starting device 115 are also referred to as the "second special pattern judgments," and these judgments are collectively referred to as the "special pattern judgments."

When the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a normal symbol random number is obtained, and a determination is made as to whether or not to open the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115. Hereinafter, the determination made on the condition that the gaming ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b is also referred to as a "normal symbol determination." In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the probability of a win in the normal symbol determination, that is, the probability of determining to open the movable piece 115b, is designed to change depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100.

The first large prize winning device 117 has a movable piece 117b that opens depending on the result of the large prize pattern determination. The first large prize winning device 117 is usually blocked by this movable piece 117b. In contrast, if the result of the large prize determination is a large prize, a large prize game is executed in which the movable piece 117b is operated to open the first large prize winning device 117. Therefore, by performing a "right hit" during a large prize game, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a large prize game is not being played. The second large prize winning device 127 has a movable piece 127b that operates in a manner similar to that of the first large prize winning device 117, and is opened during a large prize game depending on the result of the large prize determination.

[Explanation of Display 125]
As shown in FIG. 1, the display 125 mainly displays information relating to jackpot pattern determination and normal pattern determination, and has a first special pattern display 120, a second special pattern display 122, a first special pattern reserved display 123, a second special pattern reserved display 124, a normal pattern display 118, and a normal pattern reserved display 119.

When the first special pattern determination is made, the first special pattern display 120 displays a variably displayed special pattern and then a static display, and notifies the result of the jackpot pattern determination in the first special pattern determination by the statically displayed special pattern. This first special pattern display 120 displays a static jackpot pattern indicating a jackpot, or a losing pattern indicating that the result of the first special pattern determination is a losing one, as the determination result of the jackpot pattern determination.

When the second special pattern determination is made, the second special pattern display 122 displays a variably displayed special pattern and then a static display, and notifies the result of the jackpot pattern determination in the second special pattern determination by the statically displayed special pattern. This second special pattern display 122 displays a static jackpot pattern indicating a jackpot, or a static loss pattern indicating that the result of the second special pattern determination is a loss, as the determination result of the jackpot pattern determination.

The gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that when a new gaming ball enters the first starting device 112 during the variable display of the special symbol related to the special symbol determination or during a jackpot game, the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the symbol are not immediately executed in response to the entry. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a hold function for holding the first special symbol determination and storing four pieces of random number information for the first special symbol determination as a set of hold information. The first special symbol hold display 123 displays the number of pieces of hold information for the first special symbol determination stored in this manner. Similarly, the gaming machine 100 also has a hold function for holding the second special symbol determination and storing four pieces of random number information for the second special symbol determination as a set of hold information in the case where a new gaming ball enters the second starting device 115 during the variable display of the special symbol related to the special symbol determination or during a jackpot game. The second special symbol pending display 124 displays the number of pending information for determining the second special symbol stored in this manner.

When a normal pattern determination is made, the normal pattern display 118 displays the normal pattern in a variable manner and then stops, and notifies the result of the normal pattern determination by the normal pattern that has stopped being displayed. However, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation gate 113b while the normal pattern display 118 is displaying a variable normal pattern, the normal pattern determination and the variable display of the normal pattern related to the normal pattern determination are not immediately executed. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 has a reservation function that reserves the normal pattern determination and stores information on the normal pattern random number for the normal pattern determination as reserved information. The normal pattern reservation display 119 displays the number of reserved information for normal pattern determinations stored in this way.

The gaming machine 100 of this embodiment is equipped with a right hit lamp (not shown) and a round lamp (not shown). The right hit lamp is lit during the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state described below, and encourages the player to hit the right (details will be described later). The round lamp is composed of one or more lamps. The round lamp transitions from an off state to an on state during a jackpot. When the round lamp is lit, it indicates the number of rounds of play depending on the type of jackpot at the time of the jackpot. For example, when there are two round lamps, the lighting of one round lamp indicates that four rounds of play will be played (i.e., it indicates a 4R jackpot), and the lighting of the other round lamp indicates that 16 rounds of play will be played (i.e., it indicates a 16R jackpot).

[Internal configuration of gaming machine 100]
The internal configuration of the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 4-3. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. FIG. 4-1 is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. 4-2 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table, in which (A) is a special 1 jackpot determination table for determining (jackpot determination) the special chart determination information acquired based on the winning (entry) of a gaming ball into the first starting device 112, and (B) is a special 2 jackpot determination table for determining (jackpot determination) the special chart determination information acquired based on the winning (entry) of a gaming ball into the second starting device 115. FIG. 4-3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. The gaming machine 100 includes a main control board 300, a payout control board 310, a performance control board 320, an image control board 330, a lamp control board 340, a launch control board 350, and a power supply board 360.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 300 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer 301. The one-chip microcomputer 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b, and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 also includes an input port and an output port (neither of which are shown) for main control. In addition, the board is equipped with a switch 302a for inputting a signal to clear the contents stored in the main RAM 301c or to update a setting value (probability of determining a jackpot), which is a stage of the advantageous degree of the game, a setting key switch 302b for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, by operating the setting key, an information display 302c for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 302c is composed of four seven-segment displays aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left form an identification segment for displaying identification information showing the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right form a numeric segment for displaying numerical information showing setting values and numerical values of the performance information. Note that static lighting is used when displaying setting values, and dynamic lighting is used when displaying performance information.

This main control input port is connected to a gate detection switch 303 that detects that a game ball has entered the normal symbol operation gate 113b, a first starter detection switch 304a that detects that a game ball has entered the first starter 112, a second starter detection switch 304b that detects that a game ball has entered the second starter 115, a first prize-winning device detection switch 306a that detects that a game ball has entered the first large prize-winning device 117, a second prize-winning device detection switch 306b that detects that a game ball has entered the second large prize-winning device 127, and a payout control board 310. Also connected are a magnetic detection sensor 305a for detecting abnormal magnetism from outside the gaming machine, a radio wave detection sensor 305b for detecting abnormal radio waves from outside the gaming machine, and a vibration detection sensor 305c for detecting abnormal vibrations applied to the gaming machine from outside. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 through this main control input port.

The output port for main control is also connected to the starter opening/closing solenoid 307 that opens and closes the movable piece 115b, the first large prize device opening/closing solenoid 308 that opens and closes the movable piece 117b, the second large prize device opening/closing solenoid 370 that opens and closes the movable piece 127b, the pattern indicators 118, 120, 122 that display special and normal patterns, the pattern reserve indicators 119, 123, 124 that display the number of reserved pieces of information for special pattern determination and the number of reserved pieces of information for normal pattern determination, the game information output terminal board 309 that outputs external information signals, the payout control board 310, and the performance control board 320.Various signals are output from the main control board 300 via this output port for main control.

The gaming information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting external information signals generated in the main control board 300 to the hall computer of the gaming establishment. The gaming information output terminal board 309 is connected to the main control board 300 via wiring, and the gaming information output terminal board 309 is provided with a connector for connecting to the hall computer of the gaming establishment.

In the one-chip microcomputer 301 of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 301b and performs calculations based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device or sends commands to other boards depending on the results of the calculations.

As shown in FIG. 4-1, the main ROM 301b stores game control programs and tables necessary for various games, such as a jackpot determination table T1, a jackpot symbol determination table T2, a reach determination table T3, a first variation pattern table T4, a second variation pattern table T5, and a normal symbol determination table T6. The jackpot determination table T1 is a table for determining a jackpot based on a jackpot random number. The jackpot determination table T1 includes two jackpot determination tables, namely, a special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and a special 2 jackpot determination table T1B.

As shown in FIG. 4-2, the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss), and for reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the rightmost column. The main CPU 110a refers to the special 1 jackpot determination table or the special 2 jackpot determination table, and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, the probability state, and the random number value for jackpot determination. For example, according to the special 1 jackpot determination table, when the setting value is "1" and the normal game mode is active, 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "100" to "299" are determined as "jackpots." Any random number value for jackpot determination other than those determined as a jackpot is determined as a "miss."

The jackpot symbol determination table T2 is a table for determining the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number. The jackpot symbol determination table T2 includes two jackpot symbol determination tables, namely, the special 1 jackpot symbol determination table T2A and the special 2 jackpot symbol determination table T2B.

The reach judgment table T3 is a table for making a reach judgment based on the reach judgment random number. The reach judgment table T3 includes four reach judgment tables (not shown), namely, a special 1 normal time reach judgment table, a special 1 special chance time reach judgment table, a special 2 normal time reach judgment table, and a special 2 special chance time reach judgment table. These four reach judgment tables are selected according to the game state and the type of special pattern. Specifically, the special 1 normal time reach judgment table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute a reach in a display presentation based on a ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-probability game state. The special 1 special chance time reach judgment table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute a reach in a display presentation based on a ball entering the first starting device 112 in a probability game state. The special 2 normal time reach judgment table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute a reach in a display presentation based on a ball entering the second starting device 115 in a non-probability game state. The special 2 probability variation reach judgment table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute a reach using a decorative pattern in a display performance based on a ball entering the second starting device 115 in a probability variation game state. Details of various game states, such as non-probability variation game states and probability variation game states, will be described later.

The first fluctuation pattern table T4 is a table for making a fluctuation pattern judgment based on a fluctuation pattern random number. The first fluctuation pattern table T4 includes four fluctuation pattern tables, namely, the first special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4A, the first special 1 high probability fluctuation pattern table T4B, the first special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4C, and the first special 2 high probability fluctuation pattern table T4D. These four fluctuation pattern tables can be selected according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the first special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-high probability game state. The first special 1 high probability fluctuation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a high probability game state. The first special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in a non-probability variable game state. The first special 2 probability variable time fluctuation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in a probability variable game state.

The second fluctuation pattern table T5 is a table for making a fluctuation pattern judgment based on a fluctuation pattern random number. The second fluctuation pattern table T5 includes four fluctuation pattern tables, namely, the second special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5A, the second special 1 high probability time fluctuation pattern table T5B, the second special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5C, and the second special 2 high probability time fluctuation pattern table T5D. These four fluctuation pattern tables can be selected according to the game state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the second special 1 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-high probability game state. The second special 1 high probability time fluctuation pattern table T5B is a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a high probability game state. The second special 2 normal time fluctuation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in a non-probability variable game state. The second special 2 probability variable time fluctuation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in a probability variable game state.

When determining the fluctuation pattern, one of the first fluctuation pattern table T4 and the second fluctuation pattern table T5 is selected, and they are not selected at the same time. The first fluctuation pattern table T4 is a table whose average fluctuation time (average performance time) is shorter than the second fluctuation pattern table T5, and is selected when the hold order information at the time of acquisition described below is "3" or "4". The second fluctuation pattern table T5 is a table whose average fluctuation time is longer than the first fluctuation pattern table T4, and is selected when the hold order information at the time of acquisition described below is "1" or "2".

These first and second variation pattern tables T4 and T5 have various variation patterns. Specifically, it is a variation pattern that combines various effects such as pseudo consecutive effects, normal miss effects, normal reach (miss or hit) effects, SP reach (miss or hit) effects (development effects after the execution of reach formation effects), SPSP reach (miss or hit) effects (development effects after the execution of SP reach effects), SPSP reach revival (hit) effects, effects in which a miss pattern arrangement is formed, and effects in which a jackpot pattern arrangement is formed with a specific pattern. Here, the pseudo consecutive effects (or pseudo continuous variation effects) are effects in which, during the variation display of a special pattern, a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner again, thereby repeating the variation display of the decorative pattern in a pseudo manner. In this case, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo consecutive performance, but this is not limited to this. The decorative symbols may not be temporarily stopped, but may be slowed down and then displayed in a variable manner.

The normal symbol determination table T6 is a table for determining normal symbols based on normal symbol random numbers. Details of the jackpot determination table T1, jackpot symbol determination table T2, and normal symbol determination table T6 described above will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4-3(A), the main RAM 301c functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the main CPU 301a, and has multiple storage areas, such as a reserved information storage area 301cx and a reserved information judgment area 301cy. The main RAM 301c also has a storage area (not shown) in which various flags (such as the probability bonus game flag, time-saving game flag, and jackpot game flag, which will be described later) and various recorded values are stored.

As shown in FIG. 4-3 (B), the pending information storage area 301cx has four pending information areas (first pending information area, second pending information area, third pending information area, and fourth pending information area) capable of storing pending information related to the first starting device 112 and pending order information at the time of acquisition in association with each other, and four pending information areas (first pending information area, second pending information area, third pending information area, and fourth pending information area) capable of storing pending information related to the second starting device 115.

In the pending information area corresponding to the first special symbol in the pending information storage area 301cx, the first pending information area is given top priority for storing pending information. If pending information is stored in the first pending information area, then the second pending information area is given priority for storing, then the third pending information area is given priority for storing, and finally the fourth pending information area is selected as the area to store. The same is true for the pending information area corresponding to the second special symbol. In FIG. 4-3 (B), pending information areas in which pending information is stored are indicated with a "◯", and pending information areas in which no pending information is stored are indicated with a "-".

The pending order information at the time of acquisition stored in the pending information area of the pending information storage area 301cx is information that indicates the pending order when the pending information was acquired. In detail, the pending order information at the time of acquisition corresponds to the number of the pending information area in which the pending information is stored when it is acquired. For example, when the pending information is acquired and the pending information is stored only in the first pending information area, the pending information is stored in the second pending information area, so the pending order information at the time of acquisition is "2". When the pending information is acquired and the pending information is stored in the first, second, and third pending information areas, the pending information is stored in the fourth pending information area, so the pending order information at the time of acquisition is "4". The pending information determination area 301cy is a determination area in which a special pattern determination is performed based on the pending information.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control board 310 controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. The payout control board 310 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer consisting of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. The payout CPU reads out a program stored in the payout ROM and performs calculation processing based on input signals from a payout ball measurement switch 311, which detects whether game balls have been paid out, a door opening switch 312, a full detection switch 314, and a timer, and transmits corresponding data to the main control board 300 based on the processing. In addition, a payout motor 313 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from a game ball storage section to a player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 310. The payout CPU reads a specific program from the payout ROM and performs calculations based on the payout number command sent from the main control board 300, and controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to pay out a specific number of prize balls to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during the payout CPU's calculations.

The performance control board 320 mainly controls each performance during play, standby, etc. This performance control board 320 is equipped with a sub-CPU 320a, a sub-ROM 320b, and a sub-RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so that it can communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320. The sub-CPU 320a reads out the programs stored in the sub-ROM 320b and performs calculations based on the various commands received from the main control board 300, the various units, the performance operation stick 136, and input signals from the timer, and transmits corresponding data to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 based on the processing.

For example, when the sub-CPU 320a receives a variation start command from the main control board 300, it determines a performance pattern for causing the main display device 131, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the audio output device 331, the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper role unit 154, the lower role unit 156, the role mechanism unit 158, the light guide panel unit 181, the performance board lighting device 341 (board lamp), and the performance frame lighting device 342 (frame lamp) to execute a game performance, and transmits a performance pattern designation command for executing the performance pattern to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Details of this performance pattern determination will be described later. In addition, the sub-ROM 320b stores a program for performance control, data necessary for determining various games, and multiple tables. Details of these tables will be described later. Furthermore, the sub-RAM 320c functions as a work area for data during calculation processing by the sub-CPU 320a, and stores game status, presentation patterns, decorative symbols, counting counters, firing operation information, etc. The sub-RAM 320c is provided with multiple storage areas. Details of these storage areas will be described later.

The image control board 330 is equipped with an image CPU, control ROM, control RAM, CGROM, VRAM, and VDP (not shown) for controlling the image display of the main display device 131, as well as an audio CPU, audio ROM, and audio RAM. This image control board 330 is connected to the performance control board 320 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally, and the main display device 131, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, and the audio output device 331 are connected to its output side.

The image CPU controls the VDP to display a specified image based on commands received from the performance control board 320. The control RAM functions as a data work area during the image CPU's calculation processing, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. The control ROM also stores programs for the image CPU's control processing, animation patterns for displaying animations based on performance patterns, animation scene information, and the like. The CGROM stores a large amount of image data such as decorative patterns and backgrounds to be displayed on the main display device 131, etc., and the image CPU reads out a specified program based on various commands sent from the performance control board 320, and expands the specified image data stored in the CGROM into the VRAM, controls the image data expanded in the VRAM to be displayed on the main display device 131, etc., to realize the display performance. The audio ROM stores a large amount of audio data to be output from the audio output device 331, and the audio CPU reads out a specific program based on various commands sent from the performance control board 320, and controls the audio output of the audio output device 331, such as the speakers provided in the glass frame 150, the first side display device 132, and the second side display device 133, to realize the audio performance.

The lamp control board 340 controls the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper role unit 154, the lower role unit 156, and the light guide panel unit 181, controls the performance board lighting device 341 (board lamp) such as a lamp provided on the decorative member of the game board unit 102, and controls the performance frame lighting device 342 (frame lamp) such as a lamp built into the launch handle device 103 and a lamp of a decorative member provided on the glass frame 150. Specifically, the lamp control board 340 drives and controls the motors provided on each of the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper role unit 154, the lower role unit 156, and the role mechanism unit 158 to realize a role movement performance by the movable role (movable body) of the unit. In addition, when the power is restored, for example, the initial operation is performed, which is a series of movements of the movable role, etc. from the initial position to the advanced position to the initial position as described later. In addition, the lamp control board 340 controls the light emitting portion of the light guide panel unit 181 to realize a light emitting performance by the light guide panel, controls the lighting/flashing of the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper role unit 154, the lower role unit 156, and the performance board lighting device 341 (board lamp) to realize a lighting performance, and controls the lighting/flashing of the performance frame lighting device 342 (frame lamp) to realize a lighting performance by the performance frame lighting device 342 (frame lamp). The lamp control board 340 is connected so that it can receive predetermined signals, which will be described later, from the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the role mechanism unit 158, etc.

The launch control board 350 inputs a touch signal from the touch sensor 351 provided on the launch handle device 103, and controls the energization of the launch solenoid 353 and the ball-feeding solenoid 354 based on the voltage supplied from the launch volume 352. The touch sensor 351 is composed of a capacitance-type proximity switch that utilizes the change in capacitance caused by the player touching the launch handle device 103, and when it detects that the player has touched the launch handle device 103, it outputs a touch signal to the launch control board 350 that allows the launch solenoid 353 to be energized. The launch volume 352 is composed of a variable resistor, and divides a constant voltage (e.g., 5V) applied to the launch volume 352 by the variable resistor, and supplies the divided voltage to the launch control board 350. Here, the rotation speed of the launch solenoid 353 is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from a frequency based on the output period of a crystal oscillator provided on the launch control board 350. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is approximately 99.9 (balls/minute), since one game ball is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid. In other words, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds. The touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and the voltage signal from the firing volume 352 are input to the performance control board 320. This makes it possible for the performance control board 320 to detect the firing of game balls.

The power supply board 360 is equipped with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, and supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100. Specifically, it supplies the power supply voltage to the main control board 300, the payout control board 310, the performance control board 320, and the launch control board 350. It also monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 100, and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 300 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 301a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 301a becomes inoperative. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery may be used.

[List of processes on the main control board 300]
4-4, a description will be given of the process executed by the main control board 300. FIG. 4-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of the process executed by the main control board 300.

As shown in FIG. 4-4, when power is supplied to the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300, it executes main processing based on the program stored in the main ROM 301b. In addition, while executing the main processing, the main CPU 301a repeatedly executes timer interrupt processing at regular intervals (e.g., every 4 milliseconds). Various types of processing for the main processing and timer interrupt processing are described below.

[Description of main processing]
The main process is a process for starting the control of the game and initializing various drive sources such as movable parts, and includes, for example, a power-on process, a power-on recovery process, a RAM clear process, a setting change process, and a setting confirmation process. The power-on process is a process executed when the power is turned on, and in this process, a power-on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state) is transmitted to the payout control board 310 and the performance control board 320. As a result, the performance control board 320 performs a process for executing a power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized. The power recovery process is a process executed when the progress state of the game (control state) returns (recovers) to the state before the power cut and it becomes possible to resume the game from the state before the power cut, and in this process, a power recovery designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the power cut is transmitted to the performance control board 320. As a result, the performance control board 320 performs a process for executing a power recovery notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was turned off. The RAM clear process is a process for initializing the game control state (initializing the game RAM area other than the setting value area) based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 302a, and in this process, a RAM clear designation command is sent to the performance control board 320. As a result, the performance control board 320 performs a process for performing a RAM clear notification. The setting change process is a process for transitioning to a setting change mode for changing (updating) a setting value (probability of being determined as a jackpot in a jackpot determination), which is a stage of the advantageous degree of the game, based on the operation of the setting key switch 302b or the RAM clear switch 302b, and in this process, a setting change designation command is sent to the performance control board 320. As a result, the performance control board 320 performs a process for executing a setting change notification to notify that the setting value is being changed (the setting change mode is in effect). The setting confirmation process is a process of switching to a setting confirmation mode for a game store clerk or the like to confirm the setting value, and in this process, a setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 320. As a result, a process is performed for executing a setting confirmation notification for notifying that the performance control board 320 is performing a setting confirmation (the setting confirmation mode is in effect).

[Explanation of timer interrupt processing]
The random number update process is a process for updating various random numbers such as the jackpot random number, the jackpot pattern random number, the reach random number, the variable pattern random number, and the normal pattern random number. The switch process is a process executed when a detection signal is input from each switch, and includes a starter switch process for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and storing it as reserved information when a ball is detected entering the first starter 112 or the second starter 115, a gate switch process for acquiring and storing a normal pattern random number when a game ball passes through the normal pattern operation gate 113b, a first large prize winning device switch process for detecting a game ball that has won the first large prize winning device 117 during the execution of a jackpot game (in a jackpot game state), and a second large prize winning device switch process for detecting a game ball that has won the second large prize winning device 127 in a jackpot game state. The starter switch process includes a pre-determination process for performing a jackpot determination, a jackpot pattern determination, etc. based on reserved information.

The special symbol processing is a processing related to the special symbol according to the processing result in the switch processing (first start device 112, second start device 115), and includes a reserved information shift processing for shifting the reserved information in the reserved information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c and the reserved order information at the time of acquisition when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, a jackpot determination processing for performing a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number of the reserved information shifted to the reserved information determination area 301cy by the reserved information shift processing and the jackpot determination table T1, and a jackpot determination processing for determining whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not based on the result of the jackpot determination. The process includes a jackpot pattern determination process that determines a jackpot pattern (special pattern) based on the jackpot pattern random number included in the reserved information and the jackpot pattern determination table T2, a reach determination process that executes a reach determination based on the reach random number included in the reserved information and the reach determination table T3, a fluctuation pattern setting process that sets a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation pattern random number of the reserved information, and a special pattern stop process that stops the fluctuation display of the first special pattern display 120 or the second special pattern display 122.

The normal pattern processing is processing related to the normal pattern according to the processing result in the switch processing (normal pattern activation gate 113b), and includes a normal pattern determination processing that determines the normal pattern based on the normal pattern random number and the normal pattern determination table T6 when there is reserved information for the normal pattern, an operation pattern setting processing that sets the operation pattern of the movable piece 115b when the normal pattern determination determines that there is a win, and an opening/closing member control processing that controls the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115 based on the operation pattern set in the operation pattern setting processing.

The large prize device opening control process is a process related to the opening and closing control of the first large prize device 117 and the second large prize device 127, and includes an opening pattern setting process that sets an opening pattern during the opening performance at the beginning of the large prize game, and a game status setting process that turns the large prize game flag OFF and the time-saving game flag ON when the final ending performance of the large prize game ends, and sets the time-saving fluctuation count to a predetermined number (e.g., 8,000 times). The payout process is a process that controls the payout of prize balls according to the detection result (winning of game balls) in the switch process. The command transmission process is a process that transmits various commands generated in the above processes and information necessary for determining the performance content to the performance control board 320.

The abnormality determination process is a process for determining whether various errors have occurred and for sending an error designation command corresponding to the occurred error to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 320 to execute a process for notifying various errors. Examples of various errors include a door opening error when the door opening switch 313 changes from an OFF state to an ON state, a switch connection error when various switches such as the gate detection switch 303 are in an abnormal state such as not being connected (incorrectly connected), a magnetic error when an abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 305a for a predetermined period of time, a radio wave error when an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 305b for a predetermined period of time, and a vibration error when an abnormal vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 305c for a predetermined period of time. - Abnormal winning errors occur when a game ball enters the large winning port when a special game is not in progress; discharge errors occur when the number of game balls entering the various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow; ball removal errors occur when the full detection switch 314 detects that the upper tray 128 is full; operation errors occur when the RAM clear switch 302a or setting key switch 302b is operated while the game is being controlled; and a right-hit state occurs when a game ball passes through the right-side route 106b when the game is not in a guaranteed variable game state.

[Electrical configuration of the performance control board 320]
The electrical configuration of the performance control board 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 4-5 and FIG. 4-6. FIG. 4-5 is a block diagram showing the details of the performance control board 320. FIG. 4-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a pre-determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. The performance control board 320 determines a performance pattern based on a command (including a variation pattern, etc.) transmitted from the main control board 300, and transmits a performance pattern designation command based on the performance pattern to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. As described above, the main display device 131 and the like are electrically connected to the image control board 330, and the sword handle unit 135 and the like are electrically connected to the lamp control board 340. With this configuration, the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 can execute display performance, sound performance, lighting performance, and role object movable performance based on the performance pattern designation command transmitted from the performance control board 320.

As shown in FIG. 4-5, the sub-ROM 320b stores a core display performance designation table TS1, a decorative pattern determination table TS2, and a chance-up determination table TS3. The core display performance designation table TS1 is a table for designating any one of the above-mentioned normal miss performance, normal reach (miss or win) performance, SP reach (miss or win) performance, SPSP reach (miss or win) performance, and SPSP reach revival (win) performance as the core performance in the display performance (hereinafter also referred to as the core display performance) based on the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300. In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300 and the core display performance correspond one-to-one. Note that multiple core display performances may be associated with the fluctuation pattern, and the sub-CPU 320a of the performance control board 320 may select the core display performance by lottery. In this way, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the performance content can be changed. Also, one core display effect may be associated with multiple variation patterns. The decorative pattern determination table TS2 is a table for determining the combination of decorative patterns for provisional stop display or definite stop display, and the reach pattern when a reach is executed, in a display effect based on a performance pattern. The chance up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a predetermined chance up effect in a display effect. Here, the chance up effect is an effect that executes a display effect of a different type from the normal effect, and increases the expectation of a jackpot compared to the normal effect.

As shown in FIG. 4-5, the sub-RAM 320c has a reserved memory area 320c1 and a pre-judgment information memory area 320c3. The sub-RAM 320c also has a flag memory area (not shown) in which predetermined flags and the like are stored. For example, the flag memory area stores a continuous execution effect flag and a pseudo continuous execution effect flag, which will be described later. The reserved memory area 320c1 is divided into eight areas: a first reserved area, a second reserved area, a third reserved area, and a fourth reserved area corresponding to the first special pattern, and a first reserved area, a second reserved area, a third reserved area, and a fourth reserved area corresponding to the second special pattern, and each of these areas can store one reserved flag. In the reserved area corresponding to the first special pattern in the reserved memory area 320c1, the priority order of storing the reserved flag is that the first reserved area is the storage target with the highest priority, and if a reserved flag is stored in the first reserved area, the second reserved area is the storage target with the highest priority, then the third reserved area is the storage target with the highest priority, and finally the fourth reserved area is selected as the storage target. The same is true for the reserved area corresponding to the second special pattern. When the performance control board 320 receives a reserved command from the main control board 300, it identifies the reserved area in which the reserved flag is stored in the reserved memory area 320c1, and stores the reserved flag in the reserved area that should be stored with the next highest priority after the reserved area. However, if a reserved flag is stored in the fourth reserved area and a reserved command is received, the reserved flag is not stored. The priority order for deleting pending flags is the opposite of the priority order for storing; that is, the fourth pending area is the top priority for deletion, and if no pending flag is stored in the fourth pending area, then the third pending area is the priority for deletion, then the second pending area is the priority for deletion, and finally the first pending area is selected for deletion. When the performance control board 320 receives a pattern determination command from the main control board 300, it identifies the pending area in which the pending flag is stored in the pending memory area 320c1, and deletes the pending flag of the pending area that should be deleted with priority. If no pending flag is stored in the first pending area, the deletion process is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 4-6, the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing pre-determination information (pre-determination special symbols, pre-determination variable patterns, and acquisition time reservation order information), and four storage areas (first storage area, second storage area, third storage area, and fourth storage area) are provided corresponding to the types of special symbols. In addition, each storage area is provided with a jackpot determination information column that stores jackpot determination information based on the pre-determination special symbols, a jackpot pattern information column that stores jackpot pattern information based on the pre-determination symbols, a variable pattern information column that stores variable pattern information based on the pre-determination variable pattern, an acquisition time reservation order information column that stores acquisition time reservation order information, and a continuous performance presence/absence information column that stores continuous performance presence/absence information indicating whether or not a continuous performance is activated. Details will be described later, but the continuous performance presence/absence information includes continuous performance activation information and continuous performance non-activation information.

The hold command sent from the main control board 300 includes pre-determination information (pre-determination special pattern, pre-determination variable pattern, and acquisition hold order information). These pieces of pre-determination information are stored in association with each other in the pre-determination information memory area 320c3. In the storage area for the first special pattern, the first storage area is given top priority for storing pre-determination information, and if pre-determination information is stored in the first storage area, the second storage area is given priority, then the third storage area is given priority, and finally the fourth storage area is selected as the storage area. The same applies to the storage area for the second special pattern. For example, when pre-determination information for the first special pattern is already stored in the third storage area for the first special pattern, and new pre-determination information for the first special pattern (specific pattern A, variable pattern 7B, acquisition time hold order information "4") is to be stored (see FIG. 4-6), information representing "4" is stored in the acquisition time hold order information column of the fourth storage area, information representing "variable pattern 7B" is stored in the variable pattern information column of the fourth storage area, information representing "specific pattern A" is stored in the jackpot pattern information column of the fourth storage area, and information representing "jackpot" is stored in the jackpot determination information column of the fourth storage area.

In FIG. 4-6, as the pre-determination information of the first storage area related to the first special symbol, the information "miss" is stored in the jackpot determination information column, the information "none" is stored in the jackpot pattern information column, the information "variation pattern 1" is stored in the variation pattern information column, and the information representing "3" is stored in the hold order information column at the time of acquisition. As the pre-determination information of the second storage area, the information "miss" is stored in the jackpot determination information column, the information "none" is stored in the jackpot pattern information column, the information "variation pattern 2AX" is stored in the variation pattern information column, and the information representing "1" is stored in the hold order information column at the time of acquisition. As the pre-determination information of the third storage area, the information "miss" is stored in the jackpot determination information column, the information "none" is stored in the jackpot pattern information column, the information "variation pattern 4BX" is stored in the variation pattern information column, and the information representing "2" is stored in the hold order information column at the time of acquisition. In addition, the continuous performance presence/absence information column stores continuous performance activation information indicating whether or not continuous performance is to be executed in the pre-reading process described later. In FIG. 4-6, the continuous performance information column corresponding to the fourth storage area for the first special symbol shows a "○" as continuous performance activation information, which is information indicating that a continuous performance will be activated, and the other storage areas show a "-" as continuous performance non-activation information, which is information indicating that a continuous performance will not be activated.

[List of processes on the performance control board 320]
4-7, the process executed by the performance control board 320 will be described. FIG. 4-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the performance control board 320.

As shown in FIG. 4-7, when power is supplied to the sub-CPU 320a of the performance control board 320, it executes the main performance processing based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 320b. In addition, while the main performance processing is being executed, the sub-CPU 320a repeatedly executes the performance timer interrupt processing at regular intervals (e.g., every 2 milliseconds). The various types of processing in the main performance processing and the performance timer interrupt processing are explained below.

[Description of the main processing]
The performance main processing is processing corresponding to the main processing in the main control board 300, and is processing including, for example, power-on notification processing, power recovery notification processing, RAM clear notification processing, setting change notification processing, and setting confirmation notification processing. The power-on notification processing is processing for executing a power-on notification based on a power-on designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a. The power recovery notification processing is processing for executing a power recovery notification based on a power recovery designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a. The RAM clear notification processing is processing for executing a RAM clear notification based on a RAM clear designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a. The setting change notification processing is processing for executing a setting change notification based on a setting change designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a. The setting confirmation notification processing is processing for executing a setting confirmation notification based on a setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main CPU 301a.

[Description of the performance timer interrupt process]
The random number update process is a process for updating various random numbers used in the performance (e.g., decorative pattern determination random numbers, chance-up random numbers). The command reception process is a process based on various commands transmitted from the main control board 300, and includes a look-ahead process for determining whether or not to perform a continuous performance or a pseudo consecutive performance based on a hold command, a performance pattern determination process for determining a performance pattern based on the core display performance designation table TS1, the decorative pattern determination table TS2, and the chance-up determination table TS3, a hold process for storing a hold flag in the hold memory area 320c1 of the sub-RAM 320c when a hold command is received and setting a hold display command for hold display on the main display device 131, a pre-determination information shift process for executing a shift process of the pre-determination information in the pre-determination information storage area 320c3 of the sub-RAM 320c when a change start command is received, a normal pattern performance process which is a process for performing a performance corresponding to the change of the normal pattern on the main display device 131 according to the determination result of the normal pattern determination, a pattern determination process which is a process for displaying the decorative pattern being changed on the main display device 131 as a fixed stop based on a pattern determination command, a jackpot process for executing an opening performance, an ending performance, or a round performance during a jackpot game, and an error notification process described later. The performance button process is a process of detecting an input via the sword handle unit 135 or the performance operation stick 136 and performing a predetermined performance. The command transmission process is a process of transmitting various commands generated in the above various processes to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Here, the continuous performance is a performance that can be executed in the main display device 131, and is a performance that can be executed during the start of the change performance over multiple variable displays in the special pattern. This continuous performance may be composed of only one type of performance, or may include multiple types of performance. When the continuous performance includes multiple types of performance, one of the multiple types of performance may be selected and executed. In addition, the continuous performance may be executed for one variable display in the special pattern. In addition, the pseudo consecutive performance may be composed of only one type of performance, or may include multiple types of performance. When the pseudo consecutive performance includes multiple types of performance, one of the multiple types of performance may be selected and executed.

The error notification process is a process for executing various types of error notifications according to the error specification commands etc. received by the sub-CPU 320a, and is a process for generating notification instruction commands for executing error notifications according to the type of error specification command etc. Here, "error specification commands" include a door open error specification command, a switch connection error specification command, a magnetic error specification command, a radio wave error specification command, a vibration error specification command, an abnormal winning error specification command, an ejection error specification command, a ball removal error specification command, an operation error specification command, a left hit state specification command, etc. Details of the types of error notifications according to each error specification command will be described later.

[Configuration of upper unit 180]
The configuration of the upper unit 180 will be described with reference to Figs. 5-1 to 5-3. Fig. 5-1 is a perspective view of the upper unit 180, (A) showing a state in which the upper unit 180 is fixed to the outer frame 160 so as to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, and (B) showing a state in which the upper unit 180 is fixed only to the outer frame 160. Fig. 5-2 is a perspective view of the rear of the upper unit 180, (A) showing a perspective view of the right rear face, and (B) showing a perspective view of the left rear face. Fig. 5-3 is a schematic view of the lantern member 1580 in the upper unit 180, (A) showing a perspective view of the lantern member 1580, and (B) showing a schematic view of the lantern member 1580 in a disassembled state.

As shown in FIG. 5-1, the upper unit 180 includes a first side portion 1510 and a second side portion 1530 with LEDs installed therein, a character part 1550 which is a movable part on which a logo of a specified character is formed, and a first support portion 1515 and a second support portion 1535 which movably connect the first side portion 1510 and the second side portion 1530 and are fixed to the outer frame 160.

The character role 1550 is composed of a main body 1555 on which a logo of a predetermined character is formed, and a drive unit 1570 for operating the main body 1555 in a performance according to the game state. The main body 1555 has a logo member on which the logo is formed that is movable, and a movable role (not shown) is stored inside. The drive unit 1570 is provided with a motor for operating the logo member and the movable role of the main body 1580, a link mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the motor to the logo member and the movable role, and a unit control unit (not shown) for controlling the operation of the upper unit 180, such as sending and receiving various signals from the lamp control board 340 and supplying power from the power supply board 360. The main body 1555 is provided with an LED (not shown), which performs various light-emitting performances in a performance according to the game state.

The first side portion 1510 is slidably connected to the first support portion 1515 and has a character role object 1550 fixed thereto. The second side portion 1530 is slidably connected to the second support portion 1535 and has a character role object 1550 fixed thereto. Furthermore, each of the first side portion 1510 and the second side portion 1530 is provided with lantern members 1580, 1585 (described below) which are decorative members that emit light depending on the game status and are modeled after a lantern. An identification display portion 1532 is provided on the side portion of the second side portion 1530. The identification display unit 1532 is composed of a code section displaying a code that can be read by a specified terminal device (e.g., a QR code (registered trademark) or the like, which displays information such as the model name when read by the specified terminal device), a warning section displaying warnings for installation (e.g., "Caution! Fingers will be pinched"), and a model name section displaying the name of the exact model to be installed (e.g., "Model ABC"). The first side section 1510 and the second side section 1530 are provided with LEDs (not shown), and various light-emitting effects are performed in the effects according to the game state. The first support section 1515 is provided with a first rail section provided with a rail (not shown), and a first sliding section (not shown) to which the first side section 1510 is fixed and which can slide along the rail of the first rail section. The second support portion 1535 is provided with a second rail portion having a rail (not shown) and a second sliding portion (not shown) to which the second side portion 1530 is fixed and which can slide along the rail of the second rail portion.

As shown in FIG. 5-1(B), when the upper unit 180 (see FIG. 5-1(A)), which is fixed to the outer frame 160 so as to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, is removed from the glass frame 150 (when it is fixed to the outer frame 160 but does not cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150), the first side 1510 fixed to the first sliding part, the second side 1530 fixed to the second sliding part, and the character role 1550 fixed to the first side 1510 and the second side 1530 are moved together in an upward diagonal forward direction on the front of the gaming machine along the rails of the first rail part of the first support part 1515 and the second rail part of the second support part 1535. In this way, by putting the upper unit 180 in the state shown in FIG. 5-1(B), the glass frame 150 is not covered by the character role 1550 of the upper unit 180, and can be opened and closed. Details regarding the structure for opening and closing the glass frame 150 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 5-2(A), the end of the first support portion 1515 is provided with a first support mounting portion 1517 that is attached to the outer frame 160. This first support mounting portion 1517 is provided with a first support mounting pin 1520 that is inserted into the outer frame 160, and a first support mounting piece 1525 that extends in the same direction as the first support mounting pin 1520. The first support mounting pin 1520 has a tapered shape formed at the tip, and a notch portion 1521 is provided in the portion where the taper is not formed. The left region of the back surface of the drive unit 1570 of the character role object 1550 that is attached to the glass frame 150 is provided with a first main body mounting pin 1590 that is inserted into the glass frame 150, and a first main body fitting hole 1593 that fits with a first glass frame protrusion portion described later. In addition, the first body mounting pin 1590 has a tapered shape formed at the tip, and a notch 1591 is provided in the part where the taper is not formed.

As shown in FIG. 5-2(B), the end of the second support portion 1535 is provided with a second support mounting portion 1537 having a configuration substantially similar to that of the first support mounting portion 1517 of the first support portion 1515. This second support mounting portion 1537 is provided with a second support mounting pin 1540 having a notch portion 1541 formed in substantially the same shape as the first support mounting pin 1520, and a second support mounting piece 1545 having substantially the same shape as the first support mounting piece 1525. In the right region of the back surface covering the glass frame 150 in the drive unit 1570 of the character role object 1550, a second main body mounting pin 1595 having a notch portion 1596 formed in the same shape as the first main body mounting pin 1590, and a second main body fitting hole 1598 that fits with the second glass frame protrusion portion 1735 described later are provided.

Furthermore, an upper unit connector 1575 is provided in the right area of the back surface covering the glass frame 150 of the drive unit 1570 of the character role device 1550 for electrically connecting to the control board, etc., of the game board unit 102. The upper unit connector 1575 is also provided with a spring (not shown) and is structured to be movable in the attachment/detachment direction. The upper unit connector 1575 thus structured is structured so that it can be pulled or pressed in the attachment/detachment direction with a predetermined force.

As shown in FIG. 5-3(A), lantern member 1580 is fixed to the front side of first side portion 1510, and although not described in detail, lantern member 1585 is fixed to the front side of second side portion 1530. Lantern member 1580 is a translucent member decorated with the letter "U" on the front side, and is a member for producing a light-emitting effect by illuminating an LED provided inside. Lantern member 1585 has the same configuration as lantern member 1580, and is for producing a similar light-emitting effect.

As shown in FIG. 5-3(B), the lantern member 1580 has a rear lantern case part 1581a, a front lantern case part 1581b, and a lantern base plate 1582. The rear lantern case part 1581a and the lantern base plate 1582 are fixed to the first side part 1510, and are structured so that when the front lantern case part 1581b is fitted into the rear lantern case part 1581a, the lantern base plate 1582 is enclosed. In other words, the front lantern case part 1581b is a detachable member in the upper unit 180. The lantern base plate 1582 is also provided with a number of LEDs, six reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f that irradiate a signal light to a detection object and receive and detect the reflected light from the detection object, and a lantern control part for controlling the operation of these LEDs and reflective sensors and the transmission and reception of various signals to and from the unit control part. Inside the front lantern case 1581b, there are five reflecting sections 1584a-1584e on which detection objects (e.g., aluminum members) that can be detected by the reflective sensors 1583a-1583f are provided. The lantern control section of the lantern board 1582 receives a signal for a performance from the lamp control board 340 via the unit control section, and causes the LEDs to perform a specified light emission performance, while activating the reflective sensors 1583a-1583f to transmit the detection results to the lamp control board 340 via the unit control section.

[Configuration of the upper part of the glass frame 150, the outer frame 160, and the inner frame 170]
The configuration of the upper part of the glass frame 150, the outer frame 160, and the inner frame 170, and the configuration of the lock unit 190 provided in the glass frame 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 6-1 and Fig. 6-2. Fig. 6-1 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the upper part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160, (A) is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the upper part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160 with the upper unit 180 removed, and (B) is a perspective view showing the configuration of the upper right part of the glass frame 150 and the outer frame 160 with the upper unit 180 removed. Fig. 6-2 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the lock unit 190 of the glass frame 150, (A) is a diagram showing the lock unit 190 in a locked state, and (B) is a diagram showing the lock unit 190 in an unlocked state. In addition, since Figure 6-1 shows a state in which the upper unit 180 has been removed from the gaming machine 100, the gaming board connector 1620 provided on the gimmick unit 102B of the gaming board unit 102 is exposed from the connector opening 1615.

As shown in FIG. 6-1(A), the glass frame 150 is provided with a first glass frame insertion hole 1600 into which the first main body mounting pin 1590 of the upper unit 180 is inserted, a second glass frame insertion hole 1610 into which the second main body mounting pin 1595 is inserted, a connector opening 1615 into which the upper unit connector 1575 is inserted, and an opening lever 1625 that is operated when opening the glass frame 150. The outer frame 160 is provided with a first support fixing part 1650 to which the first support mounting part 1517 is attached, a second support fixing part 1660 to which the second support mounting part 1537 is attached, and an outer frame unlocking operation part 1675 that is operated when switching from a locked state to an unlocked state in the outer frame locking mechanism described later.

As shown in FIG. 6-1(B), the second glass frame insertion hole portion 1610 is provided with a second glass frame insertion hole 1630 having a rounded chamfered portion formed on the opening edge, and a second glass frame protuberance 1635. The second glass frame insertion hole 1630 has a chamfered portion formed on the opening edge, which makes it easier to insert the second body mounting pin 1595 along the chamfered portion compared to a hole without a chamfered portion. The second glass frame protuberance 1635 is composed of a protrusion that fits into the second body fitting hole 1598 and a semicircular protrusion provided below the second glass frame insertion hole 1630. The semicircular protrusion formed on the second glass frame protuberance 1635 prevents the second body mounting pin 1595 from sliding out below the opening edge along the chamfered portion of the opening edge when the second body mounting pin 1595 is inserted into the second glass frame insertion hole 1630. In other words, the chamfered portion of the opening edge of the second glass frame insertion hole 1630 and the second glass frame raised portion 1635 function as a positioning guide when inserting the second body mounting pin 1595 into the second glass frame insertion hole 1630.

The first glass frame insertion hole 1600 has a structure similar to that of the second glass frame insertion hole 1610, and although not described in detail, it is provided with a first glass frame insertion hole and a first glass frame protrusion. In addition, the connector opening 1615 is provided with the game board connector 1620 in the game board unit 102 attached to the inner frame 170, so that when the character role 1550 is attached to the glass frame 150, the upper unit connector 1575 can be fitted into the game board connector 1620. Furthermore, the opening lever 1625 is connected to the lock unit 190, and when the opening lever 1625 is operated, the glass frame 150 can be opened. Note that when the character role 1550 is in a state in which it covers a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, the opening lever 1625 is arranged between the character role 1550 and the glass frame 150, making it difficult to operate.

The second support fixing part 1660 is provided with a second outer frame insertion hole 1662, a second outer frame insertion piece 1665, a second outer frame receiving part 1667, and a second outer frame pressing part 1670. The second outer frame insertion hole 1662 has a chamfered portion formed on the opening edge, which makes it easier to insert the second support mounting pin 1540 along the chamfered portion compared to a structure without a chamfered portion. In addition, the second outer frame insertion piece 1665 is a wall portion extending upward from the opening of the second outer frame insertion hole 1662, and prevents the second support mounting pin 1540 from entering any part other than the second outer frame insertion hole 1662 when the second support part 1535 is attached. Furthermore, the second outer frame pressing part 1670 is a member connected to the outer frame locking mechanism described below, and is pressed by the second support mounting piece 1545 when the second support part 1535 is attached.

The second outer frame receiving portion 1667 has a function of supporting the upper unit 180 by contacting the bottom surface of the second support portion 1535 when the second support portion 1535 is attached, and is a member that allows the second support mounting pin 1540 to be inserted into the second outer frame insertion hole 1662 while aligning the bottom surface of the second support portion 1535 when the second support portion 1535 is attached. In other words, the second outer frame insertion hole 1662, the second outer frame insertion piece 1665, and the second outer frame receiving portion 1667 function as a guide for positioning when the second support mounting pin 1540 is inserted into the second outer frame insertion hole 1662. The first support fixing portion 1650 has the same configuration as the second support fixing portion 1660, and is provided with a first outer frame insertion hole, a first outer frame insertion piece, a first outer frame receiving portion, and a first outer frame pressing portion.

[Configuration of Lock Mechanism of Upper Unit 180]
The locking mechanisms in the upper unit 180 include a glass frame locking mechanism using a lock unit 190 that can be switched between a locked state and an unlocked state with respect to the glass frame 150, and an outer frame locking mechanism that can be switched between a locked state and an unlocked state with respect to the outer frame 160. In particular, the glass frame locking mechanism is a locking mechanism for the glass frame 150 in the character role piece 1550 of the upper unit 180, and the outer frame locking mechanism is a locking mechanism for the outer frame 160 in the first support portion 1515 and the second support portion 1535 of the upper unit 180. The glass frame locking mechanism and the outer frame locking mechanism will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 6-2, the lock unit 190 constituting the glass frame lock mechanism is a mechanism provided on the back surface of the glass frame 150, and includes a rotating member 1680, a first link member 1681, a second link member 1685, and a third link member 1690. The rotating member 1680 is connected to a keyhole member provided on the glass frame 150, and is a member that rotates in conjunction with the rotation of a specific key inserted into the keyhole of the keyhole member. The first link member 1681 is a member that is provided on the right side surface of the glass frame 150 so as to be operable in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the rotating member 1680, and is provided so as to be able to act on the second link member 1685. The second link member 1685 is a member that is provided to interlock the third link member 1690 in response to the operation of the first link member 1681. The third link member 1690 is a member that is provided on the upper surface of the glass frame 150 so as to be operable in the left-right direction, and is provided so as to be operable by the first link member 1681 via the second link member 1685. The biasing force supply unit 1688 is provided with a spring that generates a biasing force, and is connected to the first link member 1681 by a wire so as to apply a downward biasing force to the first link member 1681. The sensor 1698 is a sensor that detects whether the lock unit 190 is in a locked or unlocked state according to the movement of the third link member 1690.

As shown in FIG. 6-2(A), when the lock unit 190 is in the locked state, the left end 1693 of the third link member 1690 fits into the notch 1591 of the first body mounting pin 1590 inserted into the first glass frame insertion hole 1600, and the right end 1695 of the third link member 1690 fits into the notch 1596 of the second body mounting pin 1595 inserted into the second glass frame insertion hole 1610. In other words, when the lock unit 190 is in the locked state, the character reel 1550 cannot be removed. When the character reel 1550 is not attached to the lock unit 190, a spring (not shown) applies a leftward biasing force to the third link member 1690, thereby maintaining the locked state as described above.

As shown in FIG. 6-2(B), when the lock unit 190 is in an unlocked state, the left end 1693 of the third link member 1690 is not fitted into the notch 1591 of the first main body mounting pin 1590, and the right end 1695 of the third link member 1690 is not fitted into the notch 1596 of the second main body mounting pin 1595. In other words, when the lock unit 190 is in an unlocked state, the character role piece 1550 can be removed.

Here, the operation of each member in the glass frame lock mechanism by the lock unit 190 when changing from a locked state to an unlocked state will be described. First, when a specific key inserted in the keyhole member is turned to the left, the rotating member 1680 rotates to the left, and operates the first link member 1681 in the upward direction. This movement of the first link member 1681 acts on the third link member 1690 via the second link member 1685, and the third link member 1690 operates to the right. In this way, the third link member 1690 operates to the right, and thus the left end 1693 of the third link member 1690 is released from the engagement with the notch portion 1591 of the first main body mounting pin 1590, and the right end 1695 of the third link member 1690 is released from the engagement with the notch portion 1596 of the second main body mounting pin 1595. On the other hand, when the character role piece 1550 is attached to the glass frame 150, the lock unit 190 is in a locked state, and the first body mounting pin 1590 and the second body mounting pin 1595 are inserted into the first glass frame insertion hole 1600 and the second glass frame insertion hole 1610. At this time, since the first body mounting pin 1590 and the second body mounting pin 1595 to be inserted have a tapered shape as described above, the third link member 1690 itself moves to the right so that the left end 1693 and the right end 1695 of the third link member 1690 each move to the right. When the first body mounting pin 1590 and the second body mounting pin 1595 are inserted, the third link member 1690 moves to the left due to the biasing force, and the left end 1693 and the right end 1695 of the third link member 1690 fit into the notches 1591 and 1596, locking the first body mounting pin 1590 and the second body mounting pin 1595.

The outer frame locking mechanism is a link mechanism composed of a first outer frame pressing part, a second outer frame pressing part 1670, and a number of other members (see FIG. 6-1), and can be switched between a non-removable locked state in which the first support part 1515 and the second support part 1535 of the upper unit 180 are locked relative to the outer frame 160, and a removable unlocked state by operating the outer frame unlocking operation part 1675. The outer frame locking mechanism is provided at a position sandwiched between the first support fixing part 1650 and the second support fixing part 1660 of the outer frame 160, and is provided so that when the upper unit 180 is attached to the glass frame 150, the outer frame unlocking operation part 1675 cannot be operated because it is not exposed by the character role 1550. In other words, when removing the upper unit 180 from the outer frame 160, the character role object 1550 is moved diagonally upwards on the front of the gaming machine so that it does not cover part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, and then the exposed outer frame unlock operation part 1675 is operated to unlock the first support fixing part 1650 and the second support fixing part 1660, and the entire upper unit 180 is removed.

Here, the electrical connection between the upper unit 180 and the game board unit 102 will be described. First, the case where the upper unit 180 and the game board unit 102 are electrically disconnected, that is, the connection between the upper unit connector 1575 and the game board connector 1620 will be described. The upper unit connector 1575 is a male connector provided on the back of the upper unit 180 (see FIG. 5-2 (B)). The game board connector 1620 is a female connector provided on the top of the game board unit 102 (gimmick unit 102B) (see FIG. 9-1 and FIG. 9-4). The upper unit connector 1575 and the game board connector 1620 are shaped to fit together. Also, as described above, the upper unit connector 1575 has a movable structure, but the game board connector 1620 has a structure that is not movable like the upper unit connector 1575. When the upper unit 180 is attached so as to cover part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, the upper unit connector 1575 is fitted into the game board connector 1620 exposed from the connector opening 1615, so that the upper unit 180 can receive power from the power supply board 360 via the game board unit 120, and is connected so that various signals can be sent and received between the unit control unit of the upper unit 180 and the lamp control board 340.

As described above, the upper unit connector 1575 has a predetermined movable range in the attachment/detachment direction by a spring (not shown), and is therefore structured so that it can be pulled. Therefore, the upper unit connector 1575 will not come off the game board unit 102 simply by setting the lock unit 190 in an unlocked state and moving the character role 1550 slightly away from the glass frame 150, and the upper unit connector 1575 will not come off the game board connector 1620 unless the character role 1550 is moved a predetermined distance away from the glass frame 150 (a range larger than the movable range of the upper unit connector 1575). In other words, in the gaming machine 100, for example, if a specific key is inserted into the keyhole of the lock unit 190 and turned to the left, the power supply from the power supply board 360 to the upper unit 180 is cut off. When the character role 1550 is moved diagonally upward in front of the gaming machine so that it does not cover part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, the power supply to the upper unit 180 is cut off by turning the specific key to the left, and then the upper unit connector 1575 is pulled and pulled out of the game board connector 1620. Therefore, with such a configuration, since a momentary interruption to the upper unit 180 is prevented, for example, a configuration can be made to prevent a malfunction due to a momentary interruption in the upper unit 180 caused by the character role 1550 being erroneously removed.

[Configuration of the sword handle unit 135]
The configuration of the handle unit 135 will be described with reference to Figures 7-1 and 7-2. Figure 7-1 is a front view of the handle unit 135. Figure 7-2 is a schematic view of the handle unit 135, where (A) is a schematic view of the rear surface of the handle unit 135, and (B) is a schematic view of the bottom surface of the handle unit 135.

As shown in Fig. 7-1 and Fig. 7-2, the sword handle unit 135 is provided with a sword handle portion 1700, an outer cover 1750, and a mechanism portion 1755. The sword handle portion 1700 is shaped to resemble the shape of the handle portion of a sword, and is configured to perform effects such as vibrations depending on the game state, and to be operable by the player by pressing, etc. The outer cover 1750 is configured in a shape that covers an opening 1880 formed in the glass frame 150 when attached to the lower part of the glass frame 150 described later. The mechanism portion 1755 includes a motor for operating the sword handle portion 1700, a control portion for controlling the driving of the motor, the emission of the LED (not shown), and the transmission and reception of various signals to and from the lamp control board 340, and a case that contains them. In addition, the mechanism portion 1755 is provided with a sword handle connector 1760 for connecting to a glass frame connector 1860 of the glass frame 150 described later for the transmission and reception of various signals between the control portion and the lamp control board 340 and the power supply from the power supply board 360. Furthermore, the case of the mechanism section 1755 is provided with a first blade handle lock hole 1780 and a second blade handle lock hole 1770 for locking the blade handle unit 135 to the glass frame 150.

[Configuration of the lower part of the glass frame 150]
The configuration of the portion of the lower part of the glass frame 150 to which the sword handle unit is attached will be described with reference to Fig. 8-1 and Fig. 8-2. Fig. 8-1 is a schematic diagram of the upper surface of the configuration of the lower part of the glass frame 150. Fig. 8-2 is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the lower part of the glass frame 150, where (A) is a bottom view of the lower part of the glass frame 150 and (B) is a rear view of the lower part of the glass frame 150.

As shown in Figures 8-1 and 8-2, the lower part of the glass frame 150 is provided with two speakers 1820, 1825, the performance operation stick 136, the upper tray 128, and an opening 1880 into which the mechanism 1755 of the sword handle unit 135 fits, and a glass frame lower decorative part 1810 shaped to contain the mechanism 1755 of the sword handle unit 135 is formed inside. In addition, the glass frame lower decorative part 1810 is provided with a first sword handle fixing part 1885 on the bottom surface, a second sword handle fixing part 1895 on the back surface of the glass frame 150, and an internal glass frame connector 1860. Furthermore, the first handle fixing part 1885 is composed of a first handle fixing pin 1887a, which consists of a pin-shaped part protruding upward from the bottom surface inside the opening 1880 and two protrusions extending radially from the center of the pin-shaped part, and a first handle fixing switching part 1887b provided on the bottom surface outside the glass frame 150. The first handle fixing part 1885 is structured so that when the first handle fixing switching part 1887b is rotated, the connected first handle fixing pin 1887a also rotates. The second handle fixing part 1895 has the same structure as the first handle fixing part 1885, and is composed of a second handle fixing pin 1897a and a second handle fixing switching part 1897b.

When attaching the sword handle unit 135 to the glass frame 150 configured in this way, first, connect the glass frame connector 1860 to the sword handle connector 1760, and insert the mechanism part 1755 of the sword handle unit 135 into the inside of the glass frame lower decorative part 1810 from the opening 1880. At this time, insert the mechanism part 1755 into the inside of the glass frame lower decorative part 1810 so that the first sword handle fixing pin 1887a fits into the first sword handle lock hole 1780 and the second sword handle fixing pin 1897a fits into the second sword handle lock hole 1770. Then, rotate the first sword handle fixing switching part 1887b and the second sword handle fixing switching part 1897b to lock the sword handle unit 135 to the glass frame lower decorative part 1810 of the glass frame 150. In this way, when the sword handle unit 135 is attached to the glass frame 150, the glass frame connector 1860 and the sword handle connector 1760 are connected, so that the sword handle unit 135 can be supplied with power from the power supply board 360, and the control unit of the sword handle unit 135 and the lamp control board 340 are connected so that various signals can be sent and received. When removing the sword handle unit 135 from the glass frame lower decorative part 1810 of the glass frame 150, the second sword handle fixing switching part 1897b (see FIG. 8-2 (B)) provided on the back of the glass frame 150 must be operated, so it is necessary to insert a specified key into the keyhole member of the lock unit 190 described above to open the glass frame 150.

[Configuration of game board unit 102]
The configuration of the game board unit 102 will be described with reference to Fig. 9-1 to Fig. 9-5. Fig. 9-1 is a perspective view of the front side of the game board unit 102, and Fig. 9-2 is a perspective view of the back side of the game board unit 102. Fig. 9-3 is a perspective view of the front side of the game board 102A. Fig. 9-4 is a perspective view of the front side of the gimmick unit 102B. Fig. 9-5 is a perspective view of the back side of the main display device 131 provided with the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D.

As shown in Figures 9-1 and 9-2, the game board unit 102 is composed of a game board 102A, a role unit 102B, a main display device 131, a performance control board unit 102C, and a main control board unit 102D. The game board 102A is detachably attached to the role unit 102B on the front side of the game board unit 102. The main display device 131 is detachably attached to the role unit 102B on the back side of the game board unit 102. The performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are each detachably attached to the main display device 131 on the back side of the game board unit 102.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the front side of the game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has one game board fixing portion 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a at each of the four corners. These game board fixing portions 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a each have a substantially similar structure and are composed of a fixed switching portion that is provided on the front side of the game board 102A so as to be rotatable, and a fixed pin consisting of a pin-shaped portion protruding from the back side of the game board 102A and two protrusions extending radially from the center of the pin-shaped portion. These game board fixing portions 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a are structured such that when each fixed switching portion is rotated, each fixed pin connected to the back side of the game board 102A also rotates. The lock holes 1912b, 1914b, 1916b, and 1918b provided in the role unit 102B for fitting the fixing pins of the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a will be described later. In addition, the upper part of the role unit 102B of the game board unit 102 is provided with a game board connector 1620 shaped to fit with the upper unit connector 1575 as described above, and the game board connector 1620 is not movable, unlike the upper unit connector 1575. Furthermore, the front side of the role unit 102B of the game board unit 102 is provided with unit engagement parts 1922, 1924, 1926, and 1928, which are pressed by the unit pressing parts 2022 and 2024 and the unit fixing parts 2026 and 2028 described later, at each of the four corners.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the back side of the game board unit 102 is provided with a main display device 131 that is detachable from the role unit 102B, and a performance control board unit 102C and a main control board unit 102D are detachably provided from the main display device 131. In addition, a relay board 1950 is provided in the role unit 102B to relay the power supplied from the power supply board 360 in the gaming machine 100 and various signals from the main control board 300, etc. The relay board 1950 is provided so that it cannot be detached from the role unit 102B, and is connected to each unit in the gaming machine 100 by a cable (not shown). In addition, a space is formed in the role unit 102B between the relay board 1950 and various movable roles in which the main display device 131 is provided, and a display device frame is provided in the space in which the main display device 131 slides and fits. Furthermore, the main display device 131 is provided with lock switching units 1970, 1975 that can be switched between an unlocked state, which is a removable state, and a locked state, which is a non-removable state, by fitting the main display device 131 into the display device frame and engaging with the role unit 102B.

[Configuration of game board 102A]
As shown in FIG. 9-3, the game board 102A is made of a transparent acrylic material, and multiple nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) are arranged on it. These nails and windmills have the function of changing the movement of the game ball and guiding it to a predetermined winning hole. In addition, the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a, the first starting device 112, the normal symbol operation gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, the second big winning device 127, and the movable pieces 115b, 117b, and 127b are provided. As described above, the game board 102A on which the starting devices and the like are provided is also provided with a gate detection switch 303 (not shown), a first starting device detection switch 304a, a second starting device detection switch 304b, a first winning device detection switch 306a, a second winning device detection switch 306b, a starting device opening/closing solenoid 307, a first large winning device opening/closing solenoid 308, and a second large winning device opening/closing solenoid 370. Furthermore, the game board 102A is also provided with a display cover 1925A on which is written an explanation of the contents suggested by the various displays on the display 125.

In this embodiment, the game board 102A is formed to be transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game board 102A may be formed to be translucent as long as it is light-transmitting. The game board 102A may also be formed from a material other than an acrylic material, for example, a transparent plastic material.

[Configuration of the accessory unit 102B]
As shown in Fig. 9-4, the role unit 102B is provided with an upper role unit 154, a lower role unit 156, a role mechanism unit 158 for operating the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 in various ways, a light guide panel unit 181, and unit engagement units 1922, 1924, 1926, and 1928. In addition, the role unit 102B is provided with a light emitting member 1925B, which is a member composed of a plurality of LEDs in the display 125, at a position covered by the display cover 1925A of the game board 102A. Furthermore, the role unit 102B is provided with lock holes 1912b, 1914b, 1916b, and 1918b. Here, the locking mechanism using the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a of the game board 102A and the lock holes 1912b, 1914b, 1916b, and 1918b of the accessory unit 102B will be described. When attaching the game board 102A to the accessory unit 102B, first, the game board is attached so that the fixing pins in the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a fit into the lock holes 1912b, 1914b, 1916b, and 1918b. Then, the game board 102A can be locked to the accessory unit 102B by rotating each of the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, and 1918a. In addition, in the role mechanism section 158, the rail section for operating the upper role unit 154 is covered by mechanism covers 155a, 155b which are decorated with a specific design so that the rail section is not exposed.

[Configuration of the main display device 131, etc.]
As shown in FIG. 9-5, the performance control board unit 102C is a board in which the performance control board 320 is contained in the performance control board case 1990, and the main control board unit 102D is a board in which the main control board 300 is contained in the main control board case 1980. The performance control board case 1990 is fixed to the main display device 131 by a sub-fixing part (not shown), and is configured to be detachable by operating the sub-fixing part. Furthermore, the main control board case 1980 is also fixed to the main display device 131 by a main fixing part (not shown), and is configured to be detachable by operating the main fixing part. In other words, the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are each configured to be detachable from the main display device 131. In addition, from the back of the main display device 131, the information display 302c mounted on the main control board 300 can be seen while being enclosed in the main control board case 1980, and the RAM clear switch 302a and setting key switch 302b provided on the main control board 300 can be operated.

[Configuration and operation of the accessory mechanism 158]
The configuration and operation of the role mechanism 158 will be described with reference to Figures 10-1 and 10-2. Figure 10-1 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the role mechanism 158 in a state where the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 are in the initial position, and Figure 10-1 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the role mechanism 158 in a state where the upper role unit 154 is in the first position. Figure 10-2 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the role mechanism 158 in a state where the upper role unit 154 is in the second position, and Figure 10-2 (B) is a schematic diagram showing the role mechanism 158 in a state where the lower role unit 156 is in the advanced position.

As shown in Figures 10-1 and 10-2, the reel mechanism 158 includes an upper left motor 410 provided at the upper left of the reel unit 102B, an upper left link 415, a left rail 430 provided at the left side of the reel unit 102B, a left connection 435, an upper right motor 460 provided at the upper right of the reel unit 102B, an upper right link 465, a right rail 480 provided at the right side of the reel unit 102B, a right connection 485, a lower motor 510 provided at the bottom of the reel unit 102B, a lower base 530 provided at the bottom of the reel unit 102B, a connection belt 550, a lower link 565, and a lower connection 585.

The upper left link 415 connects the upper left motor 410 and the upper role unit 154, and is configured to be interlocked with the drive of the upper left motor 410 by a gear not shown. The left connecting part 435 connects the upper role unit 154 and the left rail part 430, and is configured to slide up and down along the rail of the left rail part 430. The upper right link 465 connects the upper right motor 460 and the upper role unit 154, and is configured to be interlocked with the drive of the upper right motor 460 by a gear not shown. The right connecting part 485 connects the upper role unit 154 and the right rail part 480, and is configured to slide up and down along the rail of the right rail part 480. The lower link 565 connects the lower base part 530 and the lower role unit 156, and is configured to be interlocked with the drive of the lower motor 510 by a gear not shown provided on the lower base part 530. The lower base section 530 has a control section (not shown) capable of transmitting and receiving various signals to and from the performance control board 320 and the like. The lower connecting section 585 connects the lower role unit 156 to the right rail section 480, and is configured to slide vertically along the rail of the right rail section 480, and has a relay board (not shown) that is connected to the control section of the lower role unit 156 (described below) so that various signals can be transmitted and received. The connecting belt section 550 connects the control section of the lower base section 530 to the relay board of the lower connecting section 585 so that various signals can be transmitted and received.

The connection belt 550 is composed of a flat belt-shaped connection line and a cover member that covers the connection line. The connection line is a so-called flexible flat cable, and by electrically connecting the control unit of the lower base unit 530 and the relay board of the lower connecting unit 585, it connects the performance control board 320 and the control unit of the lower role main body unit 750 to be able to send and receive various signals. The cover member is a member molded from a resin that is flexible and transparent, and a plurality of notches are formed on one plane and both sides so as to be approximately perpendicular to the extension direction. In addition, the notches are shaped as if they are curved toward the extension direction of the cover member. Furthermore, in the connection belt 550 configured in this way, when connecting the control unit of the lower base unit 530 and the relay board of the lower connecting unit 585, one plane on which the notches of the cover member are formed is provided so as to become the outer peripheral surface when bending, and the other plane on which the notches are not formed is provided so as to become the inner peripheral surface when bending. With such a connection belt 550, the flat side of the cover member where the notch is formed is easily bent when bent, but the flat side where the notch is not formed prevents the connection line from bending excessively when bent. Also, when replacing the lower role decoration part of the lower role unit 156 and connecting the electrical wiring using the connection belt 550, the connection line of the connection belt 550 is covered with the cover member, so damage to the connection line during replacement work can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), first, when the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 are in their initial positions, the upper role unit 154 is in its uppermost position and the lower role unit 156 is in its lowermost position, with a portion of each being visible from the opening 102AZ (see, for example, FIG. 1). Next, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), when the upper role unit 154 is in the first position, the upper role unit 154 has moved approximately parallel from its initial position to a position lower than its initial position, with the entirety being visible from the opening 102AZ. When the upper role unit 154 moves from the initial position to the first position, the upper left motor 410 is driven to extend the upper left link section 415 downward, causing the left connecting section 435 to slide downward along the left rail section 430, and the upper right motor 460 is driven to extend the upper right link section 465 downward, causing the right connecting section 485 to slide downward along the right rail section 480.

As shown in FIG. 10-2(A), when the upper role unit 154 is in the second position, only the right side of the upper role unit 154 moves downward from the initial position, or only the left side moves upward from the first position, so that the upper role unit 154 is in a position where it is inclined diagonally, and the entirety is visible from the opening 102AZ. When the upper role unit 154 moves from the initial position to the second position, the upper left motor 410 is not driven, but the upper right motor 460 is driven to extend the upper right link portion 465 downward, so that the right connecting portion 485 slides downward along the right rail portion 480. Also, when the upper role unit 154 moves from the first position to the second position, the upper left motor 410 is driven to bend the upper left link portion 415 upward, so that the left connecting portion 435 slides upward along the left rail portion 430, but the upper right motor 460 is not driven. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-2(B), when the lower role unit 156 is in the advanced position, the lower role unit 156 moves from the initial position in a generally parallel manner to a position higher than the initial position, and the entirety of the lower role unit 156 is visible through the opening 102AZ. When the lower role unit 156 moves from the initial position to the advanced position, the lower motor 510 drives the lower link portion 565 to rise upward so as to lift the lower role unit 156, causing the lower connecting portion 585 to slide upward along the right rail portion 480.

In the above, the upper reel unit 154 has been described as moving from the initial position to the first position, from the initial position to the second position, and from the first position to the second position, but it may move in various ways. For example, the upper reel unit 154 may move from the second position to the first position, or from the first position or the second position to the initial position. The upper reel unit 154 may also perform a so-called swaying performance in an operating mode in which the process of moving from the second position to the first position is repeated multiple times. Furthermore, the lower reel unit 156 may also move in various ways, and for example, the process of moving from the initial position to the advanced position may be repeated multiple times to perform a so-called swaying performance. Note that the upper reel unit 154 at the first position or the second position and the lower reel unit 156 at the advanced position are configured not to come into contact with or interfere with each other, and a performance in which the movement of the upper reel unit 154 and the movement of the lower reel unit 156 are performed approximately simultaneously may be performed.

[Configuration of upper part unit 154 and lower part unit 156]
With reference to Figs. 11-1 to 11-4, the configuration of the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 will now be described. Fig. 11-1 (A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the upper role decoration part 600 of the upper role unit 154, and Fig. 11-1 (B) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the upper role decoration part 600. Fig. 11-2 (A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the upper role main body part 650 of the upper role unit 154, and Fig. 11-2 (B) is a schematic diagram of the internal configuration of the upper role main body part 650. Fig. 11-3 (A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the lower role decoration part 700 of the lower role unit 156, and Fig. 11-3 (B) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the lower role decoration part 700. Figure 11-4 (A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the lower role main body 750 of the lower role unit 156, and Figure 11-4 (B) is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the lower role main body 750.

As shown in Figures 11-1 and 11-2, the upper role unit 154 is composed of an upper role decoration part 600 that is decorated with a predetermined pattern, and an upper role main body part 650 that is connected to the upper left link part 415, left connecting part 435, upper right link part 465, and right connecting part 485 of the role mechanism part 158. As shown in Figures 11-3 and 11-4, the lower role unit 156 is composed of a lower role decoration part 700 that is decorated with a predetermined pattern, and a lower role main body part 750 that is connected to the lower link part 565 and lower connecting part 585 of the role mechanism part 158. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the upper role decoration part 600 in the upper role unit 154 is detachably attached to the upper role main body part 650 connected to the role mechanism part 158, and the lower role decoration part 700 in the lower role unit 156 is detachably attached to the lower role main body part 750 connected to the role mechanism part 158.

As shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the upper part decorative portion 600 comprises a first upper decorative member 605, a second upper decorative member 610, and a third upper decorative member 615, each of which is decorated with a specific design. The first upper decorative member 605 is configured to transmit light from a plurality of LEDs 653 of the upper part main body portion 650, which will be described later. The second upper decorative member 610 is decorated with a tire motif and is configured to be rotatable. The third upper decorative member 615 is decorated with a motorcycle exhaust pipe motif and is configured to repeatedly move up and down in conjunction with the rotation of the second upper decorative member 610.

As shown in FIG. 11-1(B), the upper accessory decorative part 600 is provided on the back with an upper accessory rotating shaft part 620, four reflecting parts 630a-630d, a first upper accessory locking part 640, a second upper accessory locking part 645, and two upper accessory fitting parts 647, 648. The upper accessory rotating shaft part 620 is a rotating shaft configured to be linked to the second upper accessory member 610 and the third upper accessory member 615 by a gear part (not shown), and by rotating, the second upper accessory member 610 rotates and the third upper accessory member moves up and down repeatedly. The first upper accessory locking part 640 and the second upper accessory locking part 645 are members that lock onto the upper accessory main body part 650 when the upper accessory decorative part 600 is attached to the upper accessory main body part 650, and the detailed configuration will be described later. The two upper decoration fittings 647, 648 are portions into which a part of the upper part main body 650 fits when the upper part decoration 600 is attached to the upper part main body 650. The four reflective portions 630a-630d are locations where detection objects (e.g., aluminum members) that can be detected by reflective sensors 680a-680d, which will be described later, are provided. Furthermore, an identification display portion 632 is provided on the back surface of the upper part decoration 600. The identification display portion 632 has the same configuration as the identification display portion 1532 of the upper unit 180 described above, and is composed of a code portion, a warning portion, and a model name portion.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(A), the upper role main body 650 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 653 and four reflective sensors 680a-680d that irradiate a signal light to a detection object and receive and detect the reflected light from the detection object on the upper body surface 651, which is covered by attaching the upper role decorative part 600. In addition, the first upper body sliding part 660, the second upper body sliding part 665, the upper body pressing part 670, the upper body rotating shaft part 675, the first upper body locking part 690, and the second upper body locking part 695 are partially exposed. In addition, on the back side of the upper body surface 651, where the plurality of LEDs 653 etc. are not provided, a control part (not shown) is provided that is connected to the performance control board 320 so as to be able to send and receive various signals.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the upper device main body 650 is internally provided with an upper body motor 655 and an upper body gear mechanism 678 composed of multiple gears. The upper body gear mechanism 678 is configured so that the first upper body sliding part 660, the second upper body sliding part 665, and the upper body rotating shaft part 675 are operated by driving the upper body motor 655. The first upper body sliding part 660 and the second upper body sliding part 665 are formed with rack gears that mesh with the gears connected to the upper body pressing part 670, and are configured to move in parallel in the left and right directions via the upper body gear mechanism 678 when the upper body motor 655 is driven. The upper body pressing part 670 is a member extended from one of the multiple gears that constitute the upper body gear mechanism 678, and is provided so as to be pressable from the surface of the upper body surface part 651. The upper body rotating shaft 675 is a member extended from one of the gears constituting the upper body gear mechanism 678, and is provided to engage with the upper decoration rotating shaft 620 of the upper accessory decoration part 600 attached from the surface of the upper body surface part 651. The first upper body locking part 690 and the second upper body locking part 695 are members that lock onto the upper accessory decoration part 600 when the upper accessory decoration part 600 is attached, and their detailed configurations will be described later. The upper body pressing part 670 is configured to be able to switch the manner in which the driving force of the upper body motor 655 in the upper body gear mechanism 678 is transmitted, such that the upper body rotating shaft 675 operates when not pressed, and the first upper body sliding part 660 and the second upper body sliding part 665 operate when pressed.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the lower part decorative part 700 is provided with a first lower decorative member 705 and a second lower decorative member 710, each of which is decorated with a specific design on the surface. The first lower decorative member 705 is configured to transmit light from a plurality of lower part light source parts 783 of the lower part main body part 750, which will be described later. The second lower decorative member 710 is a decoration based on the motif of a belt buckle, and is configured to be rotatable.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), the lower part decorative part 700 is provided on the back side with a lower part rotating shaft part 720, four reflecting parts 730a to 730d, a first lower part locking part 740, a second lower part locking part 745, and two lower part fitting parts 747, 748. The lower part rotating shaft part 720 is a rotating shaft configured to be linked to the second lower decorative member 710, and the second lower decorative member 710 rotates when it rotates. The first lower part locking part 740 and the second lower part locking part 745 are members that lock onto the lower part main body part 750 when the lower part decorative part 700 is attached to the lower part main body part 750, and the detailed configuration will be described later. The two lower part fitting parts 747, 748 are parts into which a part of the lower part main body part 750 fits when the lower part decorative part 700 is attached to the lower part main body part 750. The four reflective sections 730a-730d are locations where detection objects (e.g., aluminum members) that can be detected by reflective sensors 780a-780d (described below) are provided. Furthermore, an identification display section 732 is provided on the back surface of the lower part decoration section 700. The identification display section 732 has a similar configuration to the identification display section 1532 of the upper unit 180 and the identification display section 632 of the upper part decoration section 600 described above, and is composed of a code section, a warning section, and a model name section.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the lower role main body 750 has a lower main body surface 751, which is covered by the lower role decorative part 700, on the front side. The lower main body surface 751 is provided with multiple LEDs 753 and four reflective sensors 780a-780d that irradiate a signal light to a detection object and receive and detect the reflected light from the detection object. The first lower main body rotating shaft 770, the second lower main body rotating shaft 775, the first lower main body locking part 790, and the second lower main body locking part 795 are partially exposed. In addition, the back side of the lower main body surface 751, where the multiple LEDs 753 etc. are not provided, is provided with a control part (not shown) that is connected to the performance control board 320 via the relay board of the lower connection part 585 and the control part of the lower base part 530 so as to be able to send and receive various signals.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the lower role main body 750 is internally provided with a lower body motor 755 and a lower body gear mechanism 778 consisting of multiple gears. The lower body gear mechanism 778 is configured so that the first lower body rotation shaft 770 and the second lower body rotation shaft 775 are operated by the driving of the lower body motor 755. The first lower body rotation shaft 770 is an extended member from one of the multiple gears that make up the lower body gear mechanism 778. The second lower body rotation shaft 775 is an extended member from one of the multiple gears that make up the lower body gear mechanism 778, and is arranged to engage with the lower decoration rotation shaft 720 of the lower role decoration 700 attached to the surface of the lower body surface 751. The first lower body locking part 790 and the second lower body locking part 795 are members that lock onto the lower accessory decorative part 700 when the lower accessory decorative part 700 is attached, and their detailed configuration will be described later.

With reference to Figure 11-5, we will now explain how to attach and detach the upper role decoration part 600 to the upper role main body part 650 in the upper role unit 154. In the upper role unit 154, when attaching and detaching the upper role decoration part 600 to the upper role main body part 650, it is necessary to switch the state of the first upper decoration locking part 640 and the first upper main body locking part 690, and the state of the second upper decoration locking part 645 and the second upper main body locking part 695 to a locked state or an unlocked state. Figure 11-5 (A) is an oblique view showing the state in which the second upper decoration locking part 645 and the second upper main body locking part 695 of the upper role unit 154 are in a locked state, and Figure 11-5 (B) is an oblique view showing the state in which the second upper decoration locking part 645 and the second upper main body locking part 695 are in an unlocked state. The locking mechanism between the second upper decorative engaging portion 645 and the second upper main body engaging portion 695 described below has the same configuration as the locking mechanism between the first upper decorative engaging portion 640 and the first upper main body engaging portion 690, the locking mechanism between the first lower decorative engaging portion 740 and the first lower main body engaging portion 790, and the locking mechanism between the second lower decorative engaging portion 745 and the second lower main body engaging portion 795.

As shown in FIG. 11-5(A), when the upper role decorative part 600 is attached to the upper role main body part 650 in the upper role unit 154 and is in a locked state, the second upper decoration locking part 645 locks into the second upper main body locked part 696 of the upper role main body part 650, and the second upper main body locking part 695 locks into the second upper decoration locked part 646 of the second upper decoration locking part 645. Note that the second upper decoration locking part 645 and the second upper main body locking part 695 are biased in the direction of the locked state by springs (not shown) in each part, so the locked state is maintained. Also, a part of the upper role main body part 650 is fitted into the two upper decoration fitting parts 647, 648 of the upper role decorative part 600.

As shown in FIG. 11-5(B), when changing from a locked state to an unlocked state when removing the upper role decorative part 600 from the upper role main body part 650 in the upper role unit 154, the second upper main body engaging part 695 is disengaged from the second upper decoration engaged part 646 of the second upper decoration engaging part 645, and then the second upper decoration engaging part 645 is disengaged from the second upper main body engaged part 696 of the upper role main body part 650. And even in the locking mechanism using the first upper decoration engaging part 640 and the first upper main body engaging part 690, after changing to the unlocked state, the upper role decorative part 600 can be removed from the upper role main body part 650 by pulling out a part of the upper role main body part 650 that is engaged in the two upper decoration fitting parts 647, 648. In other words, when attaching or detaching the upper role decoration part 600 from the upper role main body part 650 in the upper role unit 154, the locking mechanism formed by the first upper decoration engaging part 640 and the first upper main body engaging part 690, and the locking mechanism formed by the second upper decoration engaging part 645 and the second upper decoration engaging part 695 must be switched to a locked state or an unlocked state. Also, when attaching or detaching the lower role decoration part 700 from the lower role main body part 750 in the lower role unit 156, the locking mechanism formed by the first lower decoration engaging part 740 and the first lower main body engaging part 790, and the locking mechanism formed by the second lower decoration engaging part 745 and the second lower main body engaging part 795 must be switched to a locked state or an unlocked state.

[Configuration of upper part decorative section 800 and lower part decorative section 900]
As described above, in the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156, the upper role decoration part 600 and the lower role decoration part 700 can be detached, so that the upper role decoration part 600 and the lower role decoration part 700 can be replaced as mounting members. Here, referring to Figs. 12-1 and 12-2, the configuration of the upper role decoration part 800, which has a different configuration from the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 900, which has a different configuration from the lower role decoration part 700, will be described. Fig. 12-1 (A) is a schematic diagram of the front surface of the upper role decoration part 800, Fig. 12-1 (B) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the upper role decoration part 800 in the state shown in (A), Fig. 12-1 (C) is a schematic diagram of the front surface of the upper role decoration part 800, and Fig. 12-1 (D) is a schematic diagram of the back surface of the upper role decoration part 800 in the state shown in (C). Figure 12-2 (A) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the lower part decorative part 900, Figure 12-2 (B) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the lower part decorative part 900 in the state shown in (A), Figure 12-2 (C) is a schematic diagram of the surface of the lower part decorative part 900, and Figure 12-2 (D) is a schematic diagram of the back side of the lower part decorative part 900 in the state shown in (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-1(A), the upper part decorative portion 800 comprises a first upper decorative member 805 and a second upper decorative member 810, each of which is decorated with a specific design. The first upper decorative member 805 is configured to transmit light from the multiple LEDs 653 of the upper part main body portion 650, and is decorated with a light-like form (see FIG. 12-1(C)) as described below. The second upper decorative member 810 is a diamond-shaped decoration that is provided to cover a portion of the first upper decorative member 805, and is configured to be movable so as to be divided into four parts.

As shown in FIG. 12-1(B), the upper accessory decorative part 800 is provided on the back side with an upper accessory protrusion 820, a first upper accessory sliding part 823, a second upper accessory sliding part 825, four reflecting parts 830a-830d, a first upper accessory locking part 840, a second upper accessory locking part 845, and two upper accessory fitting parts (not shown). The upper accessory protrusion 820 is a member that presses the upper body pressing part 670 when the upper accessory decorative part 800 is attached to the upper accessory main body part 650. The first upper accessory sliding part 823 and the second upper accessory sliding part 825 are slidable members configured to be linked to the second upper accessory member 810 by a gear part (not shown), and by sliding, the second upper accessory member 810 operates to split into four parts. The first upper decoration locking portion 840 and the second upper decoration locking portion 845 have the same configuration as the first upper decoration locking portion 640 and the second upper decoration locking portion 645 of the upper part decoration portion 600 described above, and the four reflecting portions 830a to 830d have the same configuration as the four reflecting portions 630a to 630d of the upper part decoration portion 600 described above. In other words, when the upper part decoration portion 800 having such a configuration is attached to the upper part main body portion 650, the upper decoration protrusion portion 820 presses the upper main body pressing portion 670 of the upper part main body portion 650, and the first upper decoration sliding portion 823 fits into the first upper main body sliding portion 660, and the second upper decoration sliding portion 825 fits into the second upper main body sliding portion 665.

As shown in Figures 12-1 (C) and (D), when the upper role decoration part 800 is attached to the upper role main body part 650, the upper body pressing part 670 of the upper role main body part 650 is pressed by the upper decoration protrusion part 820, so that the first upper body sliding part 660 and the second upper body sliding part 665 of the upper role main body part 650 slide left and right. In addition, in the upper role decoration part 800, the first upper decoration sliding part 823 is fitted into the first upper body sliding part 660, and the second upper decoration sliding part 825 is fitted into the second upper body sliding part 665, so that the first upper decoration sliding part 823 and the second upper decoration sliding part 825 slide left and right, and the second upper decoration member 810 operates to split into four, making part of the first upper decoration member 805 that it was covering visible.

As shown in FIG. 12-2(A), the lower accessory decorative section 900 comprises a first lower accessory member 905 and a second lower accessory member 910, each of which is decorated with a specific design. The first lower accessory member 905 is configured to transmit light from the multiple lower accessory light source sections 783 of the lower accessory main body section 750. The second lower accessory member 910 is decorated with a specific design and is configured to rotate and deform.

As shown in FIG. 12-2(B), the lower ornament decorative part 900 is provided on the back side with a lower ornament rotating shaft part 920, four reflecting parts 930a to 930d, a first lower ornament locking part 940, a second lower ornament locking part 945, and two lower ornament fitting parts (not shown). The lower ornament rotating shaft part 720 is a rotating shaft configured to be linked to the second lower ornament member 910 by a gear part (not shown), and the second lower ornament member 910 rotates and deforms when rotated. The first lower ornament locking part 940 and the second lower ornament locking part 945 have the same configuration as the first lower ornament locking part 740 and the second lower ornament locking part 745 of the lower ornament decorative part 700 described above, and the four reflecting parts 930a to 930d have the same configuration as the four reflecting parts 730a to 730d of the lower ornament decorative part 700 described above. In other words, when the lower part decorative part 900 having this configuration is attached to the lower part main body part 750, the lower decorative rotating shaft part 920 fits into the first lower main body rotating shaft part 770.

As shown in Figures 12-2 (C) and (D), when the upper part decorative part 800 is attached to the upper part main body part 650, the lower decorative rotating shaft part 920 is fitted into the first lower main body rotating shaft part 770, so that the lower decorative rotating shaft part 920 rotates, and the second lower decorative member 910 rotates and deforms.

[Attachment and detachment of various members in the gaming machine 100]
Attachment and detachment of various members in the gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to Figs. 13-1 to 13-5. Fig. 13-1 is a diagram for explaining the movement of the character role 1550 in the attachment and detachment operation of the upper unit 180, (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150 is covered by the character role 1550, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150 is not covered by the character role 1550. Fig. 13-2 is a schematic diagram of a state in which the glass frame 150 is opened. Fig. 13-3 is a schematic diagram of a state in which the glass frame 150 is opened, (A) is a schematic diagram of a state in which only the game board 102A is removed, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a state in which the game board unit 102 is removed. Fig. 13-4 is a schematic diagram of a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened. Figure 13-5 is a schematic diagram of the state in which the glass frame 150 and inner frame 170 are open, (A) is a schematic diagram of the state in which the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are removed, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the state in which the main display device 131 is removed.

[Attachment and Detachment of Upper Unit 180]
As shown in FIG. 13-1(A), the upper unit 180 is attached to the outer frame 160 with the character unit 1550 covering a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150. In the upper unit 180, the character role 1550 covers a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, and the first support 1515 and the second support 1535 are attached to the outer frame 160. When the upper unit 180 is attached in this manner, the character role 1550 covers a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, and the character role 1550, the first side 1510, the second side 1530, the first support 1515, and the second support 1535 are connected to be integrated, so that the glass frame 150 cannot be opened.

As shown in FIG. 13-1(B), when removing the attached upper unit 180, first, a specified key inserted in the keyhole member is turned to the left to put the lock unit 190 in an unlocked state, and the character role 1550 is moved diagonally forward upward on the front side of the gaming machine. At this time, the character role 1550 moves upward along the rails of the first support 1515 and the second support 1535, integrally with the first side 1510 and the second side 1530. At this time, the first support 1515 and the second support 1535 are attached to the outer frame 160. In this way, when the first side 1510, the second side 1530, and the character role 1550 are moved integrally, the glass frame 150 becomes openable. Also, when a specified key inserted in the keyhole member is turned to the left, the power supply from the gaming board unit 102 to the upper unit 180 is cut off. In addition, when only the character role 1550 is moved in this manner, the character role 1550 may return to its original position (as shown in FIG. 13-1(A)), so a character role fixing member (not shown) for fixing the moved character role 1550 (so as not to return to its original position) may be provided. If such a character role fixing member is used, when removing the upper unit 180 from the gaming machine 100 after moving the character role 1550, the operator can perform the work while preventing the character role 1550 from falling, etc., and can prevent fingers from being pinched by the character role falling, etc.

[Attachment and detachment of the game board unit 102]
As shown in FIG. 13-2, in the gaming machine 100, when the glass frame 150 is opened after the character unit 1550 of the upper unit 180 is moved, the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a, the unit pressing parts 2022, 2024, and the unit fixing parts 2026, 2028 are exposed and can be operated. In this state, when the game board fixing parts 1912a, 1914a, 1916a, 1918a are operated, only the game board 102A can be removed from the game board unit 102, and when the unit fixing parts 2026, 2028 are operated, the game board unit 102 can be removed from the inner frame 170. Here, the configurations of the unit pressing parts 2022, 2024 and the unit fixing parts 2026, 2028 will be described. The unit pressing parts 2022, 2024 are members that press the unit engagement parts 1922, 1924 provided on the left side of the role unit 102B arranged in the inner frame 170, thereby clamping the left side of the role unit 102B so that the role unit 102B does not come off from the inner frame 170. On the other hand, the unit fixing parts 2026, 2028 are lever-shaped members that press the unit engagement parts 1926, 1928 provided on the right side of the role unit 102B of the game board unit 102 to lock the role unit 102B to prevent it from coming off the inner frame 170, and are configured to be switched between a locked state by pushing in the lever and an unlocked state by pulling the lever.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(A), when only the game board 102A is removed from the game board unit 102, the upper role decoration part 600 in the upper role unit 154 and the lower role decoration part 700 in the lower role unit 156 can be attached and detached. Also, as shown in FIG. 13-3(A) and (B), when removing the role unit 102B from the inner frame 170, first, the unit fixing parts 2026, 2028 of the inner frame 170 are operated to set it in an unlocked state, so that the right side of the role unit 102B can be removed from the inner frame. Then, by moving the role unit 102B diagonally forward to the right, it goes from being pinched by the unit pressing parts 2022, 2024 to being unpinched, and the role unit 102B can be removed from the inner frame 170. The role unit 102B can be removed as a unit with the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D attached. Even if the game board 102A is attached to the role unit 102B, the unit fixing parts 2026 and 2028 are exposed and can be operated when the glass frame 150 is opened, so that the entire game board unit 102 can be removed from the inner frame 170.

As shown in FIG. 13-4, in the gaming machine 100, after moving the letter unit 1550 of the upper unit 180, the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened, exposing the back side of the game board unit 102, and the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D can be removed. In this state, it is possible to remove only one of the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D, or to remove both the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D. In addition, even if the glass frame 150 is integrated with the inner frame 170 and only the inner frame 170 is opened, the same state as described above is reached, and the back side of the game board unit 102 is exposed. In addition, an inner frame board unit 2030 having a power supply board 360 and the like is provided at the bottom of the inner frame 170. Furthermore, when the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened in this manner, the information display 302c (see FIG. 9-5) mounted on the main control board 300 becomes visible while being enclosed in the main control board case 1980, and it becomes possible to operate the RAM clear switch 302a and the setting key switch 302b (see FIG. 9-5) provided on the main control board 300, as well as the power switch provided on the power supply board 360. Note that operation of the setting key switch 302b involves inserting a specific key into the keyhole provided in the setting key switch 302b and rotating it to switch it ON or OFF.

Here, the procedures for the operation to execute the RAM clear process, the operation to execute the setting change process, and the operation to execute the setting confirmation process will be described. First, the RAM clear process can be executed by turning the power switch ON while the setting key switch 302b is in the OFF state and the RAM clear switch 302a is in the ON state (the RAM clear switch 302a is kept in the ON state for about 3 seconds after the power switch is turned ON). Then, after these operations, the RAM clear notification described later is started, and the information display 302c executes the initial operation (all lights are turned on and all lights are turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds), and then displays the numerical values related to the current performance information. Next, the setting change process can be started (transition to the setting change mode) by turning the power switch ON while the setting key switch 302b is in the ON state and the RAM clear switch 302a is in the ON state (the RAM clear switch 302a is kept in the ON state for about 3 seconds after the power switch is turned ON). After these operations, the setting change notification described later is started, and the information display 302c displays the current setting value. At this time, the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the RAM clear switch 302a, and the information display 302c displays the changed setting value. When the setting key switch 302b is turned OFF, the setting change notification (setting change mode) described later is ended, and the RAM clear notification described later is started, and the information display 302c executes the same initial operation as described above, and then displays the numerical value related to the current performance information. Next, the setting confirmation process can be started (transition to the setting confirmation mode) by turning the power switch ON while turning the setting key switch 302b ON and leaving the RAM clear switch 302a ON. After these operations, the setting confirmation notification described later is started, and the information display 302c displays the current setting value. At this time, the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the RAM clear switch 302a, and the information display 302c displays the changed setting value. Then, when the setting key switch 302b is turned OFF, the setting confirmation notification (setting confirmation mode) described later ends, and the power recovery process (power recovery notification described later) starts, and the information display 302c executes the same initial operation as described above, and then displays the numerical value related to the current performance information. In this way, in the gaming machine 100, if the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are open, operations for executing the RAM clear process, the setting change process, and the setting check process are possible. Also, if the glass frame 150 is integrated with the inner frame 170 and only the inner frame 170 is opened, operations for executing the RAM clear process, the setting change process, and the setting check process are possible. In other words, even if the glass frame 150 is closed, if the inner frame 170 is open, operations for executing the RAM clear process, the setting change process, and the setting check process are possible. Therefore, to rephrase the above, when the inner frame 170 is in an open state and the glass frame 150 is in an open state, when the inner frame 170 is in a closed state but the glass frame 150 is in an open state, when the inner frame 170 is in an open state and the glass frame 150 is in an open state, and when the inner frame 170 is in an open state but the glass frame 150 is in a closed state, operations for executing RAM clear processing, setting change processing, and setting confirmation processing are possible.

As shown in Figures 13-5 (A) and (B), the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D can be removed from the main display device 131. The main display device 131 can also be removed from the role unit 102B by sliding the main display device 131 toward the end opposite the end where the relay board 1950 is provided. Note that the performance control board unit 102C, the main control board unit 102D, and the main display device 131 can also be removed as a unit from the inner frame 170 by sliding the main display device 131 to which the performance control board unit 102C and the main control board unit 102D are attached.

[Replacing the upper and lower decorative parts]
In the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment having the above-mentioned configuration, various detachable members can be replaced. In particular, various detachable members that are not fixed by screws or the like and can be replaced without using tools such as a screwdriver can be replaced. For example, when changing a model other than the gaming machine 100 to the gaming machine 100, the glass frame 150, the outer frame 160, and the inner frame 170 of the gaming machine are left as they are, and after replacing the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320, the upper role decoration part 600 and the lower role decoration part 700 can also be replaced with these members corresponding to the gaming machine 100 from those of the model before the change, as described above. When replacing in this way, as described above, the power of the gaming machine is turned OFF and the replacement work is performed, and when the replacement work is completed and the power is turned ON, a predetermined signal is transmitted from the control part of the upper main body surface part 651 and the control part of the lower main body surface part 751 to the performance control board 320 via the lamp control board 340. Then, the performance control board 320 executes a judgment process based on the received predetermined signal, and judges whether the upper role decoration part 600 and the lower role decoration part 700 replaced by the replacement work are installed normally and whether they are correct. After executing the judgment process, the performance control board 320 executes the performance main process when the power of the gaming machine 100 is turned on, so that the gaming machine 100 is in a state where a game can be played, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting device 112, the main display device 131 displays a change in the decorative pattern.

Here, the judgment process for the above-mentioned upper part decoration part 600 and lower part decoration part 700 will be described in more detail below. First, the specified signal is a 4-bit signal generated by the control part of the upper main body surface part 651 and the control part of the lower main body surface part 751. This is a signal that indicates the detection result when each of the four reflective sensors 680a to 680d, etc. (see Figure 11-2) on the upper main body surface part 651, etc. irradiates signal light onto the back surface of the upper part decoration part 600, etc., and indicates the position of the reflective sensor 680a to 680d at which the reflected light corresponding to the upper part decoration part 600, etc. is irradiated. In this 4-bit signal, for example, when reflective sensor 680a detects reflected light, the 0th bit becomes "1", when reflective sensor 680b detects reflected light, the 1st bit becomes "1", when reflective sensor 680c detects reflected light, the 2nd bit becomes "1", and when reflective sensor 680d detects reflected light, the 3rd bit becomes "1". Note that the bit corresponding to the reflective sensor that did not detect reflected light indicates "0".

In this configuration, the generation of a predetermined signal and the judgment of the performance control unit 320 are described in more detail below. For example, in the four reflecting parts 630a to 630d (see FIG. 11-1) in the upper role decoration part 600, three reflecting parts 630a to 630c are provided with detection objects, and reflecting part 630d is not provided with a detection object. In this case, when the signal light is irradiated from the reflective sensors 680a to 680d to the back surface of the upper role decoration part 600, the reflective sensors 680a to 680c other than the reflective sensor 680d will detect the reflected light from the reflective parts 630a to 630c, unless there is a false detection due to the intrusion of external light. Then, the control part of the upper role main body part 650 generates a 4-bit signal of "0111" based on the detection results of each reflective sensor 680a to 680d. The generated signal is transmitted from the control unit of the upper role main unit 650 to the performance control board 320 via the lamp control board 340. In other words, since the reflective sensors 680a-680d can detect without directly contacting the reflectors 630a-630d, the detection method using the reflective sensors 680a-680d and the reflectors 630a-630c in this way can be said to be a so-called non-contact detection method.

The performance control board 320 stores the numerical data "0111" in advance in the sub-ROM 320d as the comparison information when the upper part decoration part 600 is attached. When the performance control board 320 receives the 4-bit signal "0111" generated by the control part of the upper part main body part 650 as described above, it uses the comparison information "0111" to execute a judgment process to determine whether the upper part decoration part 600 is attached properly and whether it is an appropriate attachment part. In this case, since all bit-corresponding numerical values of the received 4-bit signal "0111" and the comparison information "0111" match, the performance control board 320 judges that the attached upper part decoration part 600 is attached properly and is appropriate. Also, for example, when the upper role decoration part 600 is not installed or when the locking mechanism in the upper role decoration part 600 is in an unlocked state, all or any of the reflective sensors 680a to 680d cannot detect the reflected light, and the control part of the upper role main part 650 may not be able to generate a 4-bit signal. In such a case, the performance control board 320 determines that the installed upper role decoration part 600 is not installed properly, and generates an upper decoration part not installed error designation command for executing the upper decoration part not installed error notification (installation error notification) described later. Furthermore, for example, it is assumed that the performance control board 320 is replaced due to a change in model or specification, and the matching information stored in the sub-ROM becomes "0011" corresponding to the upper role decoration part 800. In this case, when the upper role decoration part 600 is installed, the control part of the upper role main part 650 generates a 4-bit signal of "0111" as described above, and the signal is transmitted to the performance control board 320. The performance control board 320 receives this 4-bit signal "0111", compares the signal with the matching information "0011", and determines that the corresponding value of the third bit is different. It determines that the installed upper role decoration part 600 is different from the original upper role decoration part 800 and is not appropriate, and generates an upper decoration part incorrect installation error designation command to execute the upper decoration part incorrect installation error notification (installation error notification) described below. Note that the judgment process when replacing the lower role decoration part 700, etc. is approximately the same as the judgment process when replacing the upper role decoration part 600, etc. described above.

[Mode of notification of mounting error regarding upper accessory decorative part]
With reference to Fig. 14-1, the manner of the upper decoration part non-attachment error notification and the upper decoration part erroneous attachment error notification, which are attachment error notifications regarding the upper accessory decoration part 600 in the gaming machine 100 described above, will be specifically described. Fig. 14-1 is a diagram showing the manner of attachment error notification, (A) is a diagram showing the manner of the upper decoration part non-attachment error notification, (B) is a diagram showing the manner of the upper decoration part erroneous attachment error notification, and (C) is a diagram explaining the output timing in the upper decoration part non-attachment error notification and the upper decoration part erroneous attachment error notification.

As shown in FIG. 14-1(A), in the upper decoration part not-installed error notification, the main display device 131 displays the installation error display 2020a together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2020a is displayed in a position (for example, the upper left corner) where the visibility of the decorative pattern, etc. on the main display device 131 is not hindered, and an error code "○○-□" expressed in numbers or the like that suggests that the upper role decoration part 600 is not installed properly is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound to identify the determined part, such as "Upper role error". Furthermore, in the upper decoration part not-installed error notification, the frame lamp (performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) flashes, and the board lamp (performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. Then, the upper unit 180 flashes without the upper and lower unit 154 and 156 performing the specified operation such as initial operation. The upper decorative part not installed error notification continues until the upper decorative part 600 is properly installed (the error is resolved). The frame lamp and the upper unit 180 may also flash in a specified light color or at a specified interval in the upper decorative part not installed error mode corresponding to the upper decorative part not installed error notification. When such an upper decorative part not installed error notification is executed, the worker replacing the part can easily recognize that the replaced part is not installed securely.

As shown in FIG. 14-1(B), in the upper decoration part incorrect installation error notification, the main display device 131 displays the installation error display 2020b together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2020b is displayed in a position (for example, the upper right corner) where the visibility of the decorative pattern, etc. on the main display device 131 is not hindered, and an error code "○○-△" expressed in numbers or the like that suggests that the upper role decoration part 600 is not the correct part is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound to identify the determined part, such as "Upper role error". Furthermore, in the upper decoration part incorrect installation error notification, the frame lamp (performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) flashes, and the board lamp (performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. Then, the upper unit 180 flashes without the upper and lower role units 154 and 156 performing the specified operation such as initial operation. The upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification continues to be executed until the correct upper decorative part is properly installed (the error is resolved). The frame lamp and the upper unit 180 may also flash in a specified light color or at a specified interval in the upper decorative part incorrect installation error mode corresponding to the upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification. When such an upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification is executed, the worker replacing the part can easily recognize that the replaced part is not the correct part.

As shown in FIG. 14-1(C), the above-mentioned upper decoration part not-attached error notification and upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification may be executed and terminated at a predetermined timing. For example, when the performance control board 130 receives an error-related designation command corresponding to an upper decoration part not-attached error or an upper decoration part incorrect attachment error (t0), the output of the attachment error display 2020a or the attachment error display 2020b on the main display device 131 may be started, the audio output device 331 may start to output a voice such as "Upper part error", the board lamp may be turned off, and the frame lamp may be flashed (on and off repeatedly at intervals of 250 ms) and the upper unit may be lit. Then, when the upper decorative part not-installed error or the upper decorative part incorrect installation error is resolved and one second has elapsed (t2) from the time when the performance control board 130 receives a command corresponding to the resolution of the error (t1), the output of the installation error display 2020a or the installation error display 2020b on the main display device 131 may be terminated, the output of the sound output device 331 may be terminated, the blinking of the frame lamp may be terminated, and the upper decorative part not-installed error notification or the upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification may be terminated. In other words, in the upper decorative part not-installed error notification and the upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, the notification may be executed for a predetermined period of time even if the error is resolved. When such an upper decorative part not-installed error notification and the upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification are executed, the notification continues for a predetermined period of time after the error is resolved and then ends, so that the worker replacing the parts can be sure that the problem that the replaced parts were not installed reliably or were not the correct parts has been resolved.

In addition, the upper decorative part not-attached error notification and the upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification were executed in different manners on the main display device 131, etc., but they may be executed in the same manner. For example, in the upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, the main display device 131 may display an attachment error display 2020a similar to the upper decorative part not-attached error notification. With such a notification, the worker can easily recognize that some kind of error has occurred due to the replacement work of the upper decorative part 600 of the upper role unit 154.

[Mode of notification of mounting error regarding lower accessory decorative part]
With reference to Fig. 14-2, a specific description will be given of the manner of the lower decoration part non-installation error notification and the lower decoration part erroneous installation error notification, which are the installation error notifications regarding the lower role decoration part 700 in the above-mentioned gaming machine 100. Fig. 14-2 is a diagram showing the manner of the installation error notification, (A) is a diagram showing the manner of the lower decoration part non-installation error notification, and (B) is a diagram showing the manner of the lower decoration part erroneous installation error notification.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), in the lower decoration part not being attached error notification, the main display device 131 displays the attachment error display 2030a together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The attachment error display 2030a is displayed in a position (for example, above the reserved icon display area and in the lower left corner) that does not impede the visibility of the decorative pattern, etc. in the main display device 131, and displays an error code "XX-□" expressed in numbers, etc., indicating that the lower role decoration part 700 is not properly attached. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound to identify the determined part, such as "lower role error". Furthermore, in the lower decoration part not being attached error notification, the frame lamp (performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) flashes, and the board lamp (performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. Then, the upper unit 180 flashes without the upper and lower unit 154 and 156 performing the specified operation such as initial operation. The lower decorative part not installed error notification continues until the lower decorative part 700 is properly installed (the error is resolved). The frame lamp and the upper unit 180 may also flash in a specified light color or at a specified interval in a lower decorative part not installed error mode corresponding to the lower decorative part not installed error notification. When such a lower decorative part not installed error notification is executed, the worker replacing the parts can easily recognize that the replaced parts are not installed securely.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), in the lower decoration part incorrect installation error notification, the main display device 131 displays the installation error display 2030b together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2030b is displayed in a position (for example, the lower right corner) where the visibility of the decorative pattern, etc. on the main display device 131 is not hindered, and an error code "XX-△" expressed in numbers or the like that suggests that the lower role decoration part 700 is not the correct part is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound to identify the determined part, such as "lower role error". Furthermore, in the lower decoration part incorrect installation error notification, the frame lamp (performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) flashes, and the board lamp (performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. Then, the upper unit 180 flashes without the upper and lower unit 154 and 156 performing the specified operation such as initial operation. The lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification continues until the correct lower decorative part is properly installed (the error is resolved). The frame lamp and the upper unit 180 may also flash in a specified light color or at a specified interval in a lower decorative part incorrect installation error mode corresponding to the lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification. When such a lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification is executed, the worker replacing the part can easily recognize that the replaced part is not the correct part.

In addition, the lower decorative part not-attached error notification and the lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification were executed in different ways on the main display device 131, etc., but they may be executed in the same way. For example, in the lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, the main display device 131 may display an attachment error display 2030a similar to the lower decorative part not-attached error notification. With such an alert, the worker can easily recognize that some kind of error has occurred based on the replacement work of the lower decorative part 700 of the lower role unit 156. Furthermore, in the lower decorative part not-attached error notification and the lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, the alert may be executed for a predetermined period of time even if the error is resolved, as in the above-mentioned upper decorative part not-attached error notification.

[Replacement of the front lantern case and notification of installation errors]
Next, the replacement of the above-mentioned front lantern case part 1581b, the judgment process, and the installation error notification will be described in more detail below. As with the above-mentioned upper role decoration part 600, for example, when changing a model other than the gaming machine 100 to the gaming machine 100, it is possible to replace the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320 of the gaming machine while leaving the glass frame 150, the outer frame 160, and the inner frame 170 of the gaming machine as they are, and then replace the front lantern case part 1581b, etc., from the model before the change to those corresponding to the gaming machine 100. Note that the procedure for the replacement work in the front lantern case part 1581b, etc. and the manner of the installation error notification are substantially similar to the procedure for the replacement work in the above-mentioned upper role decoration part 600, etc., and therefore a detailed description will be omitted, and a detailed description will be given of the differences. The specified signal in the judgment process when replacing the front lantern case part 1581b etc. is a 6-bit signal generated by the lantern control part, unlike the above-mentioned upper part decorative part 600 etc., and is a signal that indicates the detection result of the six reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f irradiating signal light to the back surface of the front lantern case part 1581b and indicating at which position of the reflective sensors 1583a to 1583f the reflected light is irradiated from the front lantern case part 1581b. Specifically, in the 6-bit signal, when the reflective sensor 1583a detects reflected light, the 0th bit becomes "1", when the reflective sensor 1583b detects reflected light, the 1st bit becomes "1", when the reflective sensor 1583c detects reflected light, the 2nd bit becomes "1", when the reflective sensor 1583d detects reflected light, the 3rd bit becomes "1", when the reflective sensor 1583e detects reflected light, the 4th bit becomes "1", and when the reflective sensor 1583f detects reflected light, the 5th bit becomes "1". Note that the bit corresponding to the reflective sensor that did not detect reflected light indicates "0". Then, the performance control board 320 executes an installation error notification such as a lantern not installed error notification or a lantern incorrect installation error notification based on the result of the judgment process, similar to the above-mentioned upper role decoration part 600, etc. When such a lantern not being installed error notification or lantern incorrectly installed error notification is issued, the worker replacing the part can easily recognize that the replaced part has not been installed securely or that the replaced part is not the correct part.

[Replacement of upper unit, etc. and mounting error notification]
Next, the replacement of the upper unit 180 and the sword handle unit 135, the judgment process, and the installation error notification will be described in more detail below. As with the above-mentioned upper role decoration unit 600, for example, when changing a model other than the gaming machine 100 to the gaming machine 100, it is possible to replace the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320 of the gaming machine while leaving the glass frame 150, the outer frame 160, and the inner frame 170 of the gaming machine as they are, and then replace the upper unit 180 from the model before the change to a unit corresponding to the gaming machine 100. Note that the procedure for the replacement work of the upper unit 180 is substantially the same as the procedure for the replacement work of the above-mentioned upper role decoration unit 600, and therefore a detailed description will be omitted. The predetermined signal in the judgment process when replacing the upper unit 180 is a 6-bit signal, and is a signal corresponding to model-specific information stored in the ROM in the control unit of the upper unit 180 (or the control unit of the sword handle unit 135). When each unit is attached to the glass frame 150, outer frame 160, inner frame 170, etc. of the gaming machine and power supply to the gaming machine is started, an IC provided in the control unit in each unit reads out model-specific information from the ROM and transmits a 6-bit signal corresponding to the model-specific information to the performance control board 320 via the unit control unit and lamp control board 340. For example, the 6-bit signal corresponding to the model-specific information of the upper unit 180 is "011111".

Here, the judgment process and the manner of notifying an installation error when replacing the upper unit 180 will be described. For example, the performance control board 320 stores numerical data "011111" in advance in the sub-ROM 320d as collation information when the upper unit 180 is installed. When the performance control board 320 receives the 6-bit signal "011111" transmitted from the control unit of the upper unit 180 as described above, it uses the collation information "011111" to execute a judgment process to determine whether the upper unit 180 is installed correctly and whether it is an appropriate installed part. In the case of this example, since all bit-corresponding numerical values of the received 6-bit signal "011111" and the collation information "011111" match, the performance control board 320 judges that the installed upper unit 180 is installed correctly and is appropriate. Also, for example, if the upper unit 180 is not installed or if the upper unit connector 1575 in the upper unit 180 is not securely fitted to the game board connector 1620, the performance control board 320 may not be able to receive the 6-bit signal. In such a case, the performance control board 320 determines that the upper unit 180 is not properly installed and generates an upper unit non-installation error designation command for executing an upper unit non-installation error notification (installation error notification) described later. In addition, in response to this, for example, it is assumed that the performance control board 320 is replaced due to a change in model or specification, and the collation information stored in the sub-ROM 320d becomes "001111". Even in this case, when the upper unit 180 is installed, the 6-bit signal "011111" is transmitted from the control unit of the upper unit 180 to the performance control board 320 as described above. The performance control board 320 receives the 6-bit signal "011111", compares the signal with the matching information "001111", and determines that the corresponding value of the 5th bit is different. It determines that the installed upper unit 180 is different from the original upper unit and is not the correct one, and generates an upper unit incorrect installation error designation command to execute the upper unit incorrect installation error notification (installation error notification) described below.

[Mode of Notification of Mounting Error Regarding Upper Unit]
With reference to Fig. 14-3, the above-mentioned upper unit non-installation error notification and upper unit erroneous installation error notification, which are installation error notifications related to the upper unit 180 in the gaming machine 100, will be specifically described. Fig. 14-3 is a diagram showing the installation error notification mode, (A) showing the mode of the upper unit non-installation error notification, and (B) showing the mode of the upper unit erroneous installation error notification. Note that the installation error notification mode described below is related to the upper unit 180, but the same installation error notification mode may also be executed for members or units that can be removed and replaced from the gaming machine, such as the sword handle unit 135, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, etc.

As shown in FIG. 14-3(A), in the upper unit not-installed error notification, the main display device 131 displays the installation error display 2050a together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2050a is displayed in a position (for example, the upper center) where the visibility of the decorative pattern, etc. on the main display device 131 is not hindered, and an error code "●●-□" expressed in numbers or the like that suggests that the upper unit 180 is not installed properly is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound to identify the determined component, such as "Upper unit error." Furthermore, in the upper unit not-installed error notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) is turned off, and the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is flashing. The upper unit 154 and the lower unit 156 perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation (for example, an operation in a manner that covers (overlaps) a part of the mounting error display 2050a), but the upper unit 180 is turned off. The upper unit not-mounted error notification is continued until the upper unit 180 is normally mounted (the error is resolved). The frame lamp and the board lamp may also perform a predetermined light emission color or flashing at a predetermined interval in an upper unit not-mounted error mode corresponding to the upper unit not-mounted error notification. When such an upper unit not-mounted error notification is executed, the worker replacing the component can easily recognize that the replaced component is not securely mounted. In addition, the mounting error display 2050a in the upper unit not-mounted error notification is displayed in the upper area of the main display device 131 and in a position close to the upper unit 180, so that it can be easily recognized that it is an error notification related to the upper unit 180. Furthermore, in the upper unit not being installed error notification, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, so even if there is an installation error regarding a replaceable part, it is easy to recognize that it is not an installation error regarding the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156.

As shown in FIG. 14-3(B), in the upper unit incorrect installation error notification, the main display device 131 displays the installation error display 2050b together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The installation error display 2050b is displayed in a position (for example, the upper center) where the visibility of the decorative pattern, etc. on the main display device 131 is not hindered, and an error code "●●-△" expressed in numbers or the like that suggests that the upper unit 180 is not the correct component is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound to identify the determined component, such as "Upper unit error." Furthermore, in the upper unit incorrect installation error notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) is turned off, and the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is flashing. The upper unit 154 and the lower unit 156 perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation (for example, an operation in a manner that covers (overlaps) a part of the mounting error display 2050b), but the upper unit 180 is turned off. The upper unit incorrect mounting error notification continues to be executed until the correct upper unit is normally mounted (the error is eliminated). The board lamp may also flash in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined interval in the upper unit incorrect mounting error mode corresponding to the upper unit incorrect mounting error notification. When such an upper unit incorrect mounting error notification is executed, the worker replacing the component can easily recognize that the replaced component is not the correct component. In addition, the mounting error display 2050b in the upper unit incorrect mounting error notification is displayed in the upper area of the main display device 131 and in a position close to the upper unit 180, so that it can be easily recognized that it is an error notification regarding the upper unit 180. Furthermore, in the upper unit incorrect installation error notification, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, so even if there is an installation error regarding replaceable parts, etc., it is easy to recognize that it is not an installation error regarding the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156.

In addition, the upper unit not-attached error notification and the upper unit incorrectly attached error notification were executed in different ways on the main display device 131, etc., but they may be executed in the same way. For example, in the upper unit incorrectly attached error notification, the main display device 131 may display an attachment error display 2050a similar to the upper unit not-attached error notification. With such an alert, the worker can easily recognize that some kind of error has occurred due to the replacement work of the upper unit 180. Furthermore, in the upper unit not-attached error notification and the upper unit incorrectly attached error notification, the alert may be executed at a predetermined time even if the error is resolved, as in the above-mentioned upper decorative part not-attached error notification.

[Other Aspects of Mounting Error Notification]
With reference to Fig. 14-4, other aspects of the mounting error notification regarding the upper decoration part 600 in the gaming machine 100 described above will be specifically described. Fig. 14-4 is a diagram showing other aspects of the mounting error notification, (A) is a diagram showing other aspects of the upper decoration part not-mounted error notification, (B) is a diagram showing other aspects of the upper decoration part incorrect mounting error notification, and (C) is a diagram showing other aspects of the upper decoration part not-mounted error notification.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(A), first, in this upper decoration part not installed error notification, the main display device 131 displays an installation error display 2060a in the same position as the above-mentioned upper decoration part not installed error notification (see FIG. 14-1). However, the installation error display 2060a may be configured to display, for example, "Upper decoration: not installed", which specifically suggests that the upper decoration part 600 is not installed properly. Note that the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, the board lamp, the upper decoration part unit 154 and the lower decoration part unit 156, and the upper unit 180 operate in the same manner as the above-mentioned upper decoration part not installed error notification. When such an upper decoration part not installed error notification is executed, the worker replacing the parts can specifically and more easily recognize that the replaced parts are not installed reliably. In addition, in the installation error display of the above-mentioned lower decoration part not installed error notification, the lantern not installed error notification, and the upper unit not installed error notification, similarly, content specifically suggesting that each part, etc. is not installed properly may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(B), in this upper decoration incorrect installation error notification, the main display device 131 may display an installation error display 2060b in a size that covers the decorative pattern. The installation error display 2060b may also be displayed to specifically suggest that the model of the gaming machine and the installed component are not appropriate, for example, "This gaming machine is model ABC. The upper part is model XYZ, which is not appropriate." Note that the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, the board lamp, the upper part unit 154 and the lower part unit 156, and the upper unit 180 operate in the same manner as the above-mentioned upper decoration incorrect installation error notification. When such an upper decoration incorrect installation error notification is executed, the operator who replaces the component can not only specifically and more easily recognize that the replaced component is not the appropriate component, but also recognize the appropriate component that should be replaced. In other words, the worker performing the replacement work can be encouraged to try replacing the parts again with the correct parts, leading to the replacement work being completed with the correct parts. Similarly, in the installation error display for the above-mentioned lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification, lantern incorrect installation error notification, and upper unit incorrect installation error notification, content that specifically suggests that the type of gaming machine and the installed parts are not correct may be displayed.

Here, a procedure different from the above-mentioned judgment process will be described for the judgment process for enabling the installation error notification by the installation error display that specifically suggests that the model of the gaming machine and the installed component are not appropriate. First, for example, a plurality of pieces of matching information corresponding to a plurality of specifications are stored in advance in the performance control board, and the correct matching information is determined. Then, a predetermined signal received from the replaced component is matched with the matching information to determine whether it is an appropriate component, and if the received predetermined signal does not match the correct matching information, the model corresponding to the matching information that matches the received predetermined signal is specified, and the above-mentioned notification is executed. More specifically, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, a table of numerical data corresponding to a plurality of models, such as "011111" for "model ABC", "011110" for "model OPQ", and "011100" for "model XYZ", is stored in the sub-ROM 320d of the performance control board 320 as the matching information, and it is defined that the control board 320 is "model ABC". For example, when the upper role decoration part of "Model XYZ" is attached, the performance control board 320 compares the predetermined signal "011100" received from the control part of the upper role main body with the matching information, and processes it as being different from the "011111" of "Model ABC" and matching the "011100" of "Model XYZ". The performance control board 320 then causes the main display device 131 to display an attachment error display 2260b.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(C), the upper decoration part not-installed error notification may be in a form in which the installation error display 2060c is displayed large without displaying any of the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, the icon display area, etc. on the main display device 131. In such a display of the installation error display 2060c, an error code represented by numbers or the like suggesting that the upper role decoration part is not installed properly is displayed in white letters on a black background with the entire display area of the main display device 131 being black, so that attention can be drawn only to the installation error display 2060c. Note that the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, the board lamp, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156, and the upper unit 180 are assumed to operate in the same manner as the above-mentioned upper decoration part not-installed error notification. In addition, in the installation error display of the above-mentioned lower decoration part not-installed error notification, the lantern not-installed error notification, and the upper unit not-installed error notification, similarly, content specifically suggesting that each component, etc. is not installed properly may be displayed in white letters on a black background. Furthermore, the same manner may be used for the mounting error display of the lower decorative part incorrect mounting error notification, the lantern incorrect mounting error notification, and the upper unit incorrect mounting error notification. In this mounting error display, the content displayed in white letters may be content that specifically suggests that each component is not properly mounted, or content that specifically suggests that the model of the gaming machine and the mounted components are not appropriate.

Here, a case where an installation error notification is executed for two or more units among the upper reel unit 154, the lower reel unit 156, the upper unit 180, etc. will be described. First, in the installation error display displayed on the main display device 131, the installation error display 2020a (2020b) for the upper reel unit 154, the installation error display 2030a (2030b) for the lower reel unit 156, and the installation error display 2050a, 2050b for the upper unit 180 are displayed at different positions on the main display device 131, so they can be displayed simultaneously. Specifically, when the power is turned on after the replacement work, if the lower reel decoration part 700 is not installed properly and an upper unit other than the correct upper unit 180 is installed, the installation error display 2030a is displayed in the lower left corner above the hold icon display area, and the installation error display 2050b is displayed in the center of the upper end on the main display device 131. In this case, the audio output device 331 (such as the speaker 1820) may be configured to alternately output the audio messages "Lower unit error" and "Upper unit error." With this type of mounting error notification, the worker replacing the parts can easily recognize which of the multiple parts that have been replaced has an error.

In addition, when multiple mounting error notifications are executed, the priority of each mounting error notification may be different. For example, the mounting error notification for the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may be set to a higher priority than the mounting error notification for the upper unit 180. Specifically, when the power is turned on after the replacement work, if the lower role decoration part 700 is not properly mounted and an upper unit different from the correct upper unit 180 is mounted, the main display device 131 may display a mounting error display 2030a in the lower left corner above the hold icon display area, and the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) may output a voice saying "Lower role error". Then, when the mounting error for the lower role unit 156 is resolved, the main display device 131 may display the mounting error display 2030a disappears, the mounting error display 2050b in the upper center, and the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) may output a voice saying "Upper unit error". This type of mounting error notification not only allows the worker replacing the components to easily and reliably identify which of the multiple components they replaced has an error, but also urges the worker to perform the replacement work again without fail.

Furthermore, for example, when replacing the above-mentioned mounting members, there may be an exchange mode in which the state of the gaming machine 100 is in a state in which the mounting members can be replaced, or there may be a check mode in which the units to which the replaceable mounting members are attached are operated and checked after the mounting members are replaced. For example, the gaming machine 100 may be switched to the exchange mode by pressing the RAM clear switch 302a for a predetermined number of seconds (e.g., 3 seconds) or more immediately after turning on the power. More specifically, for example, when the gaming machine 100 is in the exchange mode, a display such as "In exchange mode" is output on the main display device 131, and the units to which the replacement members are attached or replaced may be moved to an exchange position (e.g., an intermediate position between the initial position and the advanced position) where the replacement work can be easily performed. In addition, the exchange mode may be terminated by pressing the RAM clear switch for a predetermined number of seconds (e.g., 3 seconds) or more during the exchange mode after the replacement work is completed, and the check mode may be switched to for a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds). More specifically, for example, when the gaming machine 100 is in the check mode, a display such as "Check mode in progress" is output to the main display device 131, and the unit in which the replacement part is attached or replaced (including, for example, various solenoids other than the unit) may be operated for a predetermined period of time to determine whether the unit is operating normally. Note that during the exchange mode, operations of the gaming machine 100 other than the predetermined operation (movement to the exchange position, etc.) of the unit in which the replacement part is attached or replaced may be restricted. Also, the movement of the unit to the exchange position during the exchange mode may be slower than the speed of the normal movable performance.

In the above-mentioned multiple mounting error notifications, the frame lamps and board lamps, etc., during the execution of the mounting error notification may be illuminated in a unique illumination mode (a combination of on, blinking, and off) corresponding to each mounting error notification, but if a game is started during the execution of the mounting error notification (if a special pattern or decorative pattern starts to change based on a winning prize, etc.), an illumination mode different from that during the execution of the mounting error notification may be executed. Specifically, for example, the frame lamps and board lamps, etc., that were lit or blinking during the execution of the mounting error notification, may be turned off when the game is started. Also, in the illumination mode during the execution of the mounting error notification and the illumination mode after the start of the game, only a part of the frame lamps or board lamps may be turned on, and the remaining frame lamps or board lamps may be turned off. In other words, the illumination mode of the frame lamps and board lamps, etc. may be different during the execution of the mounting error notification, during the execution of the game while the mounting error notification is being made, and during normal play (when the mounting error notification is not being made). In this manner, the frame lamp emits different light when an attachment error notification is being issued and when playing the game, allowing the player to easily recognize when an attachment error notification is being issued.

As described above, the upper unit 180, the upper decoration part 600, and the lower decoration part 700, which are replaceable parts, are provided with an identification display part consisting of a code part, a warning part, and a model name part, so that the worker can work while checking the display of the identification display part. Specifically, the worker can work carefully by checking the display of the warning part of the identification display. Also, for example, in an installation error notification (see Figures 14-1 to 14-3) that notifies the worker that the installed part is not the correct part, such as an upper decoration part incorrect installation error notification, the installation error display that displays an error code may not allow the worker to determine the model name, etc., corresponding to the part, etc., installed by the worker. Even in such a case, the worker can check the output display of a specified terminal that has read the code part and the model name part to confirm the model name, etc., corresponding to the part, etc., installed by the worker, which can lead to the work of installing the correct part, etc.

[Relationship between various notifications and mounting error notification]
The relationship between various notifications and the above-mentioned mounting error notification will be described with reference to Fig. 15-1 to Fig. 15-9. Fig. 15-1 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a power recovery notification and a mounting error notification. Fig. 15-2 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a RAM clear notification and a mounting error notification. Fig. 15-3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a setting change notification and a setting confirmation notification and a mounting error notification. Fig. 15-4 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a door open error notification and a mounting error notification. Fig. 15-5 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a magnetic error notification and a radio wave error notification and a mounting error notification. Fig. 15-6 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a switch connection error notification and a mounting error notification. Fig. 15-7 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a vibration error notification and a mounting error notification. Fig. 15-8 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a tray full error notification and a mounting error notification. Fig. 15-9 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a left hit notification and a mounting error notification.

First, the various notifications that explain the relationship with the mounting error notification are, among the various notifications mentioned above, a power recovery notification, a RAM clear notification, a setting change notification, a setting confirmation notification, and an error notification in response to an error-related designation command. In addition, the notifications in response to error-related designation commands are, among the error-related designation commands mentioned above, a door open error notification in response to a door open error designation command, a switch connection error notification in response to a switch connection error designation command, a magnetic error notification in response to a magnetic error designation command, a radio wave error notification in response to a radio wave error designation command, a vibration error notification in response to a vibration error designation command, an abnormal winning error notification in response to an abnormal winning error designation command, an ejection error notification in response to an ejection error designation command, a ball removal error notification in response to a ball removal error designation command, and a left hit notification in response to a left hit state designation command. The relationship between the mounting error notification and these various notifications will be explained in detail below.

[Relationship between power restoration notification and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-1(A), for example, when the power is restored from a power cut in response to the occurrence of a magnetic error during a game such as during a special pattern change or during a round game, the performance control board 320 executes a power restoration notification to make the player recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power cut. In the power restoration notification, the power restoration display 2081 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The power restoration display 2081 is displayed in a size that covers most of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays a character such as "power restoration in progress" that suggests that the power is being restored. In addition, the sound output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound or the like that suggests that the power is being restored, such as "power restoration in progress" (for example, a power restoration notification sound such as a buzzer sound). Furthermore, in the power restoration notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150 or the like) flashes, and the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102 or the like) also flashes. The upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 execute a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned on. The power restoration notification may be performed by displaying the power restoration display 2081 on the main display device 131 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), outputting a sound or the like from the sound output device 331 (the speaker 1820 or the like) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), or flashing the frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds). The frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 may also flash in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined interval, such as a power restoration mode corresponding to the power restoration notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-1 (B), for example, when an operator operates a power switch or the like to restore power, if the operator touches the upper role unit 154 and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 is not properly attached, the upper role unit not-attached error notification is executed preferentially even during the period in which the power restoration notification is executed. Note that the mode of the upper role unit not-attached error notification is the same as that described above, so a detailed description is omitted. At this time, the mode of the upper role unit not-attached error notification is executed preferentially in the display mode on the main display device 131, the output mode on the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit, and the operation mode of the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156. Then, for example, if the error is resolved by the upper role decoration part 600 being properly attached within the period in which the power restoration notification is originally executed, the above-mentioned power restoration notification (FIG. 15-1 (A)) is executed. In other words, the upper role unit not-attached error notification is an alarm with a higher priority than the power restoration notification. Note that, although the relationship between the power restoration notification and the upper decorative part not-attached error notification has been described here, the same priority may be assigned to the power restoration notification and other attachment error notifications (such as an attachment error notification for the upper unit 180). In this way, if an attachment error notification such as an upper decorative part not-attached error notification is given priority over the power restoration notification, the worker can reliably and easily recognize that an attachment error has occurred, such as an interchangeable part not being securely attached.

On the other hand, the power restoration notification may be executed with priority over an attachment error notification such as an upper decorative part not being attached error notification. Specifically, during the period in which the power restoration notification is executed, the power restoration notification (FIG. 15-1 (A)) may be executed with priority, and after the end of the period, an attachment error notification (for example, FIG. 15-1 (B)) may be executed. In other words, the power restoration notification may be an notification with a higher priority than the upper part not being attached error notification. Even if the power restoration notification is executed with priority over the attachment error notification in this way, the worker can reliably and easily recognize that an attachment error has occurred, such as an exchangeable part not being securely attached. Furthermore, even if the attachment error notification is executed with priority over the power restoration notification, at least one of the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the board lamp may be executed in a manner corresponding to the power restoration notification. On the other hand, even if the power restoration notification is given priority over the mounting error notification, at least one of the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the board lamp may be executed in a manner corresponding to the mounting error notification. In this manner, the worker can easily recognize that the power is being restored and that a mounting error has occurred.

[Relationship between RAM clear notification and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-2(A), for example, when the RAM clear switch is pressed when the power is turned on, the performance control board 320 executes a RAM clear notification to make the player recognize that the RAM is being cleared. In the RAM clear notification, the main display device 131 displays a RAM clear display 2082 together with a decorative pattern (for example, the initial decorative pattern "135" when the power is turned on, etc.), a reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The RAM clear display 2082 is displayed in a size that covers most of the decorative pattern in the main display device 131, and displays a character such as "RAM clearing in progress" that suggests that the RAM clear process is in progress. In addition, the sound output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound such as "RAM clearing in progress" (RAM clear notification sound such as a buzzer sound) that suggests that the RAM clear process is in progress. In addition, in the RAM clear notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided in the glass frame 150, etc.) is lit, and the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided in the game board unit 102, etc.) is also lit. The upper and lower role units 154 and 156 perform predetermined operations such as initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned on. The RAM clear notification may be performed by displaying the RAM clear display 2082 on the main display device 131 for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), outputting a sound from the sound output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or blinking the frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit 180 for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds). The frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit 180 may be turned on or blinked in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined interval, such as a RAM clear mode corresponding to the RAM clear notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (B), for example, when an operator operates a power switch or a RAM clear switch to clear the RAM, if the operator touches the upper role unit 154 and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 is not properly attached, the main display device 131 displays the RAM clear display 2082 for the RAM clear notification together with the installation error display 2020a for the upper decoration part not being installed error notification. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, upper unit, and upper unit 180, etc., the mode in the RAM clear notification is executed preferentially, but the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may not execute the initial operation, etc. In other words, the RAM clear notification is a notification with a higher priority than the upper role not being installed error notification. And, for example, if the error is resolved by the upper role decoration part 600 being properly installed during the period in which the RAM clear notification is being executed, the installation error display 2020a on the main display device 131 is not displayed. Here, the relationship between the RAM clear notification and the upper decorative part not-attached error notification has been described, but the same priority may be given to the RAM clear notification and other mounting error notifications (such as a mounting error notification for the upper unit 180). In this way, if at least a part of a mounting error notification such as a not-attached upper decorative part error notification is executed even during a RAM clear notification, the worker can easily and reliably recognize that a mounting error has occurred, such as an exchangeable part not being securely attached, and that the RAM is being cleared. On the other hand, the mounting error notification may be executed after the RAM clear notification, just as in the case where the power restoration notification is executed with priority over the mounting error notification as described above.

[Relationship between setting change notification, setting confirmation notification and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-3(A), when the setting change process is executed, the performance control board 320 executes a setting change notification to make the player recognize that the setting value is being changed (the setting change mode is in effect). In the setting change notification, the main display device 131 displays a setting change display 2083a that is full-sized and is composed of characters such as "setting change in progress" which suggests that the setting value is being changed. In addition, the sound output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound such as "setting change in progress" (setting change notification sound such as a buzzer sound) which suggests that the power supply is being changed. Furthermore, in the setting change notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) is turned off, but the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is flashing. Then, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 do not execute a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. As described above, the setting change notification continues until the setting key switch 302b is turned OFF. The panel lamp may emit a predetermined light color or blink at a predetermined interval, which is a setting change mode corresponding to the setting change notification (setting change mode).

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), when the setting confirmation process is executed, the performance control board 320 executes a setting confirmation notification to make the user aware that the setting value is being confirmed (the setting confirmation mode is active). In the setting confirmation notification, the main display device 131 displays a full-screen setting confirmation display 2083b consisting of text such as "setting confirmation in progress," which suggests that the setting value is being confirmed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound such as "setting confirmation in progress" (setting confirmation notification sound such as a buzzer sound) which suggests that the power supply is being changed. In addition, in the setting confirmation notification, the frame lamp (performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) is turned off, but the board lamp (performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is flashing. In addition, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. As described above, the setting confirmation notification continues until the setting key switch 302b is turned OFF. The panel lamp may also flash in a predetermined color or at a predetermined interval, which is a setting confirmation mode corresponding to the setting confirmation notification (setting confirmation mode). If the sword handle unit 135 (performance button) or the like is operated while the setting confirmation notification is being executed, the main display device 131 may display a history list of changes to the setting values (for example, a list of the date and time of the change and the setting values before and after the change).

Here, for example, when an operator operates the setting key switch 302b or the RAM clear switch 302a to change or check the settings, even if the operator touches the upper role unit 154 and it is determined that the upper role decorative part 600 is not properly attached, an attachment error notification such as an upper decorative part not attached error notification is not executed, and an attachment error notification is executed after the setting change notification or setting confirmation notification is executed. In other words, the setting change notification and setting confirmation notification have a higher priority than the upper role not attached error notification. After the setting change notification is completed, the RAM clear notification is executed as described above, so that if the attachment error is not resolved, the attachment error display 2020a of the upper decorative part not attached error notification is displayed on the main display device 131 during the RAM clear notification (see FIG. 15-2 (B)). This allows the operator to easily and reliably recognize that an attachment error has occurred, such as an exchangeable part not being securely attached. Furthermore, after the setting confirmation notification is completed, the power restoration notification is executed as described above, and if the installation error is not resolved, the upper decorative part not installed error notification is executed first (see FIG. 15-1 (B)), allowing the operator to easily and reliably recognize that an installation error has occurred, such as an interchangeable part not being installed properly. Note that while the relationship between the setting change notification and setting confirmation notification and the upper decorative part not installed error notification has been described here, other installation error notifications (such as an installation error notification for the upper unit 180) may be in a similar manner. Note that while the setting change notification and setting confirmation notification are being executed, the game cannot be played because the game is in a setting change mode or the like and the setting change process or the like is being executed.

[Relationship between door open error notification and installation error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-4(A), for example, when the glass frame 150 is opened due to a jam of game balls during a game such as during a special pattern change or during a round game (when the door opening switch 312 is in an ON state), the performance control board 320 executes a door opening error notification to make the player recognize that the glass frame 150 is open. In the door opening error notification, the door opening display 2084 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The door opening display 2084 is displayed in a size that covers most of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays characters such as "The door is open" suggesting that the glass frame 150 is open. In addition, the sound output device 331 (the speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound such as "The door is open" (which may be a door opening notification sound such as a buzzer sound) suggesting that the glass frame 150 is open. Furthermore, in the door opening error notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) flashes, and the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. The upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 do not execute a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 flashes. The door opening error notification continues until the open glass frame 150, etc. is closed (the door opening switch 312 is turned OFF). The frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 may also execute a predetermined light emission color or flash at a predetermined interval, such as a door opening mode corresponding to the door opening error notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-4(B), for example, when the upper role unit 154 is touched during door opening and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 is not properly attached, the upper decoration part not attached error notification is executed preferentially even during the period in which the door opening error notification is executed. The mode of the upper decoration part not attached error notification is the same as that described above, so a detailed description is omitted. At this time, the mode of the upper decoration part not attached error notification is executed preferentially in the display mode on the main display device 131, the output mode on the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit, and the operation mode of the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156. Then, for example, when the error is resolved by the upper role decoration part 600 being properly attached while the door is open, the above-mentioned door opening error notification (FIG. 15-4(A)) is executed. In other words, the upper role part not attached error notification is an alarm with a higher priority than the door opening error notification. Note that, although the relationship between the door open error alert and the upper decorative part not being installed error alert has been described here, the door open error alert and other installation error alerts (such as an installation error alert for the upper unit 180) may be given the same priority. In this way, if an installation error alert such as an upper decorative part not being installed error alert is given priority over a door open error alert, the worker can reliably and easily recognize that an installation error has occurred, such as a replaceable part not being installed securely.

On the other hand, the door opening error notification may be executed with priority over an attachment error notification such as an upper decorative part not being attached error notification. Specifically, during the period in which the attachment error notification can be executed, the door opening error notification (FIG. 15-4(A)) may be executed with priority, and after the end of the period, the attachment error notification (for example, FIG. 15-4(B)) may be executed. Even if the door opening error notification is executed with priority over the attachment error notification in this way, the worker can reliably and easily recognize that an attachment error has occurred, such as an exchangeable part not being securely attached. Furthermore, even if the attachment error notification is executed with priority over the door opening error notification, at least one of the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the board lamp may be executed in a manner corresponding to the door opening error notification. On the other hand, even if the door opening error notification is executed with priority over the attachment error notification, at least one of the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the board lamp may be executed in a manner corresponding to the attachment error notification. In this way, the worker can easily recognize that the power is being restored and that an installation error has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 15-4(C), for example, in the same manner as described above, when it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 is not normally attached during the door opening error notification, the main display device 131 may display the door opening display 2084 of the door opening error notification together with the installation error display 2020a of the upper decoration part not being attached error notification. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, and upper unit 180, etc., the mode in the door opening error notification is executed preferentially, and the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may not execute the initial operation, etc. In other words, the door opening error notification may be an alarm with a higher priority than the upper role not being attached error notification. And, for example, if the error is resolved by the upper role decoration part 600 being normally attached during the period in which the door opening error notification is being executed, the installation error display 2020a on the main display device 131 may be hidden. Note that, although the relationship between the door open error alert and the upper decorative part not being installed error alert has been described here, the door open error alert and other installation error alerts (such as an installation error alert for the upper unit 180) may have the same priority. In this way, if at least some of the installation error alerts, such as the upper decorative part not being installed error alert, are executed even during a door open error alert, the worker can reliably and easily recognize that an installation error has occurred, such as an interchangeable part not being installed securely, and that the glass frame 150, etc., is open.

[Relationship between magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-5(A), for example, when an abnormal magnetism from the outside of the gaming machine is detected by the magnetic sensor 305a during a game, or when an abnormality such as a disconnection or a misconnection is detected in the magnetic sensor 305a, the performance control board 320 executes a magnetic error notification to make the player aware that a magnetic error has occurred. In the magnetic error notification, a magnetic error display 2085a consisting of characters such as "magnetic sensor error" and covering the entire surface of the main display device 131 is displayed, which indicates that a magnetic error is occurring. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound or the like indicating that a magnetic error is occurring, such as "Magnetic error" (which may be, for example, a magnetic error notification sound such as a buzzer sound). In addition, in the magnetic error notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided in the glass frame 150, etc.) is flashing, but the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided in the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. The upper and lower unit 154 and 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. The magnetic error notification continues until the power is turned off. In addition, in the case of a magnetic error notification in which the magnetic detection switch 305a is not connected, the magnetic error notification may be terminated by normally connecting the magnetic detection switch 305a, but the magnetic error notification may be continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) even after the magnetic detection switch 305a is normally connected. Furthermore, in the magnetic error notification, the magnetic error display 2085a covers all of the decorative patterns, etc., so that the decorative patterns, etc. are not visible. However, the magnetic error display 2085a may cover at least a part of the decorative patterns, etc., so that at least a part of the decorative patterns, etc. are visible. During the magnetic error notification, the operation sound of the sword pattern unit 135, etc. (performance button), the sound effect of the reserved change when winning, and the light emission of the frame lamp, the board lamp, etc. in the normal game mode may be restricted. Furthermore, when a magnetic error occurs during a game, for example, the upper role unit 154 during a moving performance may be stopped or continued, but the main display device 131 may display a completely black screen. Furthermore, the frame lamp and the board lamp may flash in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined interval, such as a magnetic error mode corresponding to a magnetic error notification, or may be the same as the light emission mode of the various mounting error notifications described above. Furthermore, the timing of the output of the sound, etc. from the sound output device 331 may be a predetermined timing such as a magnetic error mode corresponding to a magnetic error notification, or may be the same as the timing of the various mounting error notifications described above.

As shown in FIG. 15-5(B), the above-mentioned magnetic error notification may be executed and terminated at a predetermined timing. For example, when the magnetic detection sensor 305a detects a magnetic field for a period of 500 ms (detects a magnetic detection signal for 500 ms) and the performance control board 130 receives an error-related command corresponding to the magnetic error (t0), the main display device 131 starts outputting the magnetic error display 2085a, the audio output device 331 starts outputting the voice "magnetic error" and a siren sound, the board lamp is turned off, and the frame lamp flashes red (in a manner in which on and off are repeated at intervals of 250 ms). In addition, during the period from when the performance control board 130 receives the error-related command corresponding to the magnetic error until 0.4 seconds have elapsed (t0 to t1), the game information output terminal board 309 may repeatedly output an on output for 200 ms and then an off output for 200 ms. Then, when 30 seconds have elapsed (t2) since the performance control board 130 received the error-related designation command corresponding to the magnetic error, the output of the magnetic error display 2085a on the main display device 131 may be terminated, the output of the voice "Magnetic error" and the siren sound on the audio output device 331 may be terminated, the frame lamp may end its red flashing, and the magnetic error notification may be terminated. Note that, as with the above-mentioned upper decorative part not attached error notification, this magnetic error notification may also be continued for a predetermined period of time even if the error is resolved.

As shown in FIG. 15-5(C), when an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 305b from the outside of the gaming machine during a game, or when an abnormality such as a disconnection or incorrect connection is detected in the radio wave detection sensor 305b, the performance control board 320 executes a radio wave error notification to make the player aware that a radio wave error has occurred. In the radio wave error notification, a radio wave error display 2085b consisting of text such as "radio wave sensor error" that covers the entire surface of the main display device 131, which indicates that a radio wave error is occurring, is displayed. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound such as "radio wave error" (which may be, for example, a radio wave error notification sound such as a buzzer sound), which indicates that a radio wave error is occurring. In addition, in the radio wave error notification, the frame lamp (performance frame lighting device 342 provided in the glass frame 150, etc.) flashes, but the board lamp (performance board lighting device 341 provided in the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. The upper and lower role units 154 and 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. The radio error notification continues until the power is turned off. In addition, in the case of a radio error notification when the radio detection switch 305b is not connected, the radio error notification may be terminated by connecting the radio detection switch 305b normally, but the radio error notification may be continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) even after the radio detection switch 305b is normally connected. Furthermore, in the radio error notification, the radio error display 2085b covers all of the decorative patterns, etc., so that the decorative patterns, etc. are not visible. However, the radio error display 2085b may cover at least a part of the decorative patterns, etc., so that at least a part of the decorative patterns, etc. are visible. During the execution of the radio error notification, the operation sound of the sword pattern unit 135, etc. (performance button), the sound effect of the reserved change when winning, and the light emission of the frame lamp, the board lamp, etc. in the normal game mode may be restricted. Furthermore, when a radio wave error occurs during play, for example, the upper role unit 154 during a moving performance may be stopped or continued, but the main display device 131 may display a completely black screen. Furthermore, the frame lamp and board lamp may flash in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined interval, such as a radio wave error mode corresponding to a radio wave error notification, or may be the same as the light emission mode of the various mounting error notifications described above. Furthermore, the timing of the output of sound, etc. from the sound output device 331 may be a predetermined timing such as a radio wave error mode corresponding to a radio wave error notification, or may be the same as the timing of the various mounting error notifications described above.

Here, for example, even if it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 is not properly attached due to a malfunction of the upper role unit 154 caused by aging while a magnetic error or radio wave error is occurring, an attachment error notification such as an upper decoration part not attached error notification is not executed, and an attachment error notification is executed after the magnetic error notification or radio wave error notification is executed. In other words, since abnormalities related to the magnetic detection switch 305a or the radio wave detection switch 305b such as magnetic errors or radio wave errors are more serious errors than attachment errors, the magnetic error notification and radio wave error notification have a higher priority than the attachment error notification. Note that while the magnetic error notification and radio wave error notification are being executed, a serious error such as a magnetic error is occurring, and therefore it is not possible to play the game.

As shown in FIG. 15-5(D), when a radio error occurs during a magnetic error, the main display device 131 may display a magnetic error display 2085c and a radio error display 2085d. Specifically, when only a magnetic error occurs, only the magnetic error notification (FIG. 15-5(A)) is executed, and when a radio error occurs during a magnetic error, the magnetic error display 2085c and the radio error display 2085d are displayed. At this time, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) alternately outputs two types of audio, such as "There is a magnetic error" and "There is a radio error." In addition, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) is flashing, but the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is turned off. The upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 do not execute a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. If a magnetic error occurs during a radio error, the radio error notification mode will be changed to a mode in which the magnetic error display 2085c and the radio error display 2085d are displayed. In other words, since both the magnetic error and the radio error are serious errors, the priority of the magnetic error notification and the radio error notification is approximately the same, and the error notification corresponding to the error that occurred first will be executed first. With this notification mode, even if two or more serious errors occur, the player or the game manager can reliably and easily recognize the occurrence of two or more serious errors. In addition, as an abnormality such as a non-connection or incorrect connection in the magnetic detection sensor 305a and the radio detection sensor 305b, for example, specifically, in the main control board 300, the radio detection sensor 305b may be connected to a terminal to which the magnetic detection sensor 305a is normally connected, and the magnetic detection sensor 305a may be connected to a terminal to which the radio detection sensor 305b is normally connected.

Also, since a magnetic error is considered to be more serious than a radio error, a magnetic error notification may be given a higher priority than a radio error notification. Specifically, if a magnetic error occurs during a radio error, the execution of the radio error notification may be stopped and only the magnetic error notification may be executed. At this time, the main display device 131 may be configured to display the magnetic error display 2085c and the radio error display 2085d, but the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) may output only a sound such as "There is a magnetic error." In this manner, a player or a game manager can easily and reliably recognize the occurrence of a more serious error.

In addition, while the magnetic error notification or radio wave error notification is being executed, the error notification may be executed on the main display device 131, etc., and the reserved display on the reserved symbol indicators 119, 123, 124 (sub-reserved indicators (not shown) that display the presence or absence of reserved symbols, etc.) may not be displayed. In addition, when the power is turned on after a power outage, the effects that were reserved may be executed as normal play without executing the error notification. Furthermore, on the other hand, when a magnetic error or radio wave error is detected, the reserved display on the reserved symbol indicators 119, 123, 124 (sub-reserved indicators (not shown) that display the presence or absence of reserved symbols, etc.) may be continuously executed. And, even if the power goes out during the execution of the magnetic error notification or radio wave error notification and then returns to a restored state, the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, the board lamp, etc. may be used to execute the error notification in the above-mentioned manner. In addition, if a reset recovery is performed during the execution of the error notification, the normal recovery may be performed.

[Relationship between switch connection error notification and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-6(A), when an abnormality such as disconnection or erroneous connection is detected in any of the various switches such as the gate detection switch 303, the performance control board 320 executes a switch connection error notification to make the user aware that any of the various switches is abnormal. In the switch connection error notification, a switch error display 2086 is displayed on the main display device 131 together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The switch error display 2086 is displayed in a size that covers most of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays characters such as "switch abnormality" suggesting that an abnormality is occurring in any of the various switches. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound or the like that suggests that an abnormality is occurring in any of the various switches, such as "Switch error" (for example, it may be a switch error notification sound such as a buzzer sound). Furthermore, in the switch connection error notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.) is turned off, and the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.) is blinking. The upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 do not execute a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. The switch connection error notification is continuously executed until the abnormality of the switch in which the abnormality is detected is eliminated (the abnormality of all switches is eliminated). The frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 may also be lit or blinked in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined interval, such as a switch connection error mode corresponding to the switch connection error notification. Furthermore, during the execution of the switch connection error notification, an abnormality is occurring in any of the various switches, so that normal game execution is impossible.

As shown in FIG. 15-6(B), the switch connection error notification may be executed and terminated at a predetermined timing. For example, when various switches are disconnected (when the magnetic detection sensor 305a is ON for 1 second), and 100 ms have elapsed (t1) since the performance control board 130 received an error-related designation command corresponding to the switch connection error (t0), the main display device 131 may start outputting a switch error display 2086, the audio output device 331 may start outputting a voice message saying "Switch error" and a siren sound for 5 seconds repeatedly, the board lamp may be turned off, and the frame lamp may flash red (on and off repeatedly at 250 ms intervals). Then, when the disconnections in the various switches are resolved and the performance control board 130 receives an error system termination command corresponding to the switch connection error (t2), the output of the switch connection error display 2086 on the main display device 131 may be terminated, the audio output device 331 may end the repeated output of the voice "Switch error" and a 5-second siren sound, the frame lamp may end flashing red, and the switch connection error notification may be terminated.

As shown in FIG. 15-6 (C), for example, when replacing the performance control board 320, if any of the various switches are connected incorrectly and the upper role unit 154 is touched and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 is not properly attached, the main display device 131 displays a switch error display 2086 for a switch connection error notification along with an attachment error display 2020a for an upper decoration part not being attached error notification. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, upper unit, and upper unit 180, for example, the mode in the switch connection error notification is executed preferentially, and the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may not execute initial operation, etc. In other words, the switch connection error notification is a notification with a higher priority than the upper role not being attached error notification. Then, for example, if the error is resolved during the period in which the switch connection error notification is being executed, such as by the upper accessory decorative part 600 being normally attached, the attachment error display 2020a on the main display device 131 will not be displayed. Here, the relationship between the switch connection error notification and the upper accessory non-attachment error notification has been described, but the switch connection error notification and other attachment error notifications (such as the attachment error notification in the upper unit 180) may be in the same manner (priority). In this way, when at least a part of the attachment error notification, such as the upper accessory non-attachment error notification, is executed even during the switch connection error notification, the worker can reliably and easily recognize that an attachment error, such as an exchangeable member not being securely attached, has occurred and that an abnormality is occurring in one of the various switches. On the other hand, the attachment error notification may be executed after the switch connection error notification, similar to the case in which the power recovery notification is executed with priority over the attachment error notification as described above.

As described above, when various switches are not connected, the switch connection error notification is executed, but the mode and priority of the error notification may be set to be different depending on the type of switch that is not connected. For example, the switch connection error notification when the magnetic detection sensor 305a and the radio wave detection sensor 305b are not connected may be set to have a higher priority than the switch connection error notification when other switches are not connected. In addition, when the reflective sensors 680a to 680d and the reflective sensors 780a to 780d are not connected to the main control board 300 or the performance control board 320, an error notification in the same mode as the above-mentioned switch connection error notification may be executed. Furthermore, the above-mentioned switch connection error notification is a mode when various switches are not connected during play, but the same switch connection error notification may be executed even when various switches are not connected when the power is turned on. The various switches may become disconnected during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance, during the execution of various performances such as a SP reach performance including the operation of a movable role, during the execution of a big win performance, etc., and even if the various switches become disconnected at such times, the display of the switch error display 2086 on the main display device 131, the output from the audio output device 331, etc. may be executed in a manner similar to the above-mentioned switch connection error notification. On the other hand, when the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320 become disconnected, when the main display device 131 and the main control board 300 or the performance control board 320 become disconnected, when the main control board 300 and the game information output terminal board 309 become disconnected, when the payout control board 310 and the main control board 300 become disconnected, when the payout control board 310 or the main control board 300 become disconnected to the ball dispensing machine, etc., the above-mentioned switch disconnection error notification may not be executed.

[Relationship between vibration error notification, etc. and wearing error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-7(A), for example, when abnormal vibration from the outside of the gaming machine is detected by the vibration detection sensor 305c during a game, the performance control board 320 executes a vibration error notification to make the player aware that abnormal vibration is occurring. Specifically, in the vibration error notification, the main display device 131 displays a vibration error display 2087a consisting of the characters "abnormal vibration error" displayed in a size that covers most of the front decorative pattern, along with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. In addition, the sound output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound or the like that suggests that abnormal vibration is occurring, such as "abnormal vibration error" (for example, it may be a vibration error notification sound such as an alarm sound). Furthermore, in the vibration error notification, the frame lamp flashes, the board lamp is turned off, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. The vibration error notification may be performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the abnormal vibration is detected, and the frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 may perform lighting or blinking at a predetermined interval or with a predetermined luminous color such as a vibration error mode corresponding to the vibration error notification. During the execution of the vibration error notification, the game can proceed, but the game may be in a state where it is impossible to proceed for a predetermined period due to the occurrence of abnormal vibration. Then, for example, when it is detected that abnormal vibration is occurring and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 of the upper role unit 154 has shifted due to the abnormal vibration or the like and is not properly attached, the main display device 131 displays the attachment error display 2020a of the upper decoration part not attached error notification together with the vibration error display 2087a. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, upper unit, and upper unit 180, etc., for example, the mode of vibration error notification is executed preferentially, and the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may not execute the initial operation, etc. In other words, the vibration error notification is a notification with a higher priority than the upper role not-attached error notification. And, for example, when the attachment error display 2020a is displayed together with the vibration error display 2087a on the main display device 131, after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the vibration error notification may be stopped and the upper decorative part not-attached error notification may be executed. Note that, here, the relationship between the vibration error notification and the upper decorative part not-attached error notification has been described, but the vibration error notification and other attachment error notifications (such as the attachment error notification in the upper unit 180) may also be in the same mode (priority). In this way, when at least a part of the mounting error notification such as the upper decorative part not being attached error notification is executed even during the vibration error notification, the worker can easily and reliably recognize that a mounting error such as a replaceable part not being securely attached has occurred and that abnormal vibration is occurring. On the other hand, the mounting error notification may be executed after the vibration error notification, similar to the case where the power recovery notification is executed with priority over the mounting error notification as described above.

As shown in FIG. 15-7(B), for example, when a winning is detected by the first winning device detection switch 306a etc. when a special game is not being played due to a malfunction caused by aging of the first large winning device 117 etc., the performance control board 320 executes an abnormal winning notification to make the player aware that an abnormal winning has occurred. Specifically, in the abnormal winning notification, the main display device 131 displays an abnormal winning display 2087b consisting of the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area, as well as the text "Abnormal Winning Error" displayed in a size that covers most of the front decorative pattern. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820 etc.) outputs a sound or the like that suggests that an abnormal winning has occurred, such as "Abnormal winning error" (which may be, for example, an abnormal winning notification sound such as an alarm sound). Furthermore, in the abnormal winning notification, the frame lamp flashes, the board lamp is turned off, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 do not perform a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. The abnormal winning notification may be executed until the power is turned off, and the frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 may be lit or blinked in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined interval, such as an abnormal winning mode corresponding to the abnormal winning notification. In addition, while the abnormal winning notification is being executed, the game can be played, but since an abnormal winning has occurred, the game may be unable to be played for a predetermined period of time. For example, when an abnormal winning is detected and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 of the upper role unit 154 is not normally attached due to a malfunction caused by aging, the main display device 131 displays the abnormal winning display 2087b and the attachment error display 2020a of the upper decoration part not attached error notification. At this time, in the output mode of the sound output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, the board lamp, the upper unit, and the upper unit 180, etc., for example, the mode of the abnormal winning notification is executed preferentially, and the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may not execute the initial operation, etc. In other words, the abnormal winning notification is a notification with a higher priority than the upper role not installed error notification. And, for example, when the abnormal winning display 2087b and the installation error display 2020a are displayed on the main display device 131, if the power is restored but the malfunction of the upper role unit 154 is not resolved, the abnormal winning notification may be stopped and the upper decoration part not installed error notification may be executed. Note that, here, the relationship between the abnormal winning notification and the upper decoration part not installed error notification has been explained, but the abnormal winning notification and other installation error notifications (such as the installation error notification in the upper unit 180) may also be in the same mode (priority). In this way, even during an abnormal winning notification, if at least a part of the installation error notification, such as an upper decorative part not being installed error notification, is executed, the worker can easily and reliably recognize that an installation error, such as an exchangeable part not being installed properly, has occurred and that an abnormal winning has occurred. On the other hand, the installation error notification may be executed after the abnormal winning notification, similar to the case where the power restoration notification is executed with priority over the installation error notification as described above.

As shown in FIG. 15-7(C), for example, if the number of game balls entering the various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down due to a malfunction caused by aging in the winning ball flow path, the performance control board 320 executes a discharge error notification to make the player aware that an abnormal discharge of game balls has occurred. Specifically, in the discharge error notification, the main display device 131 displays a discharge error display 2087c consisting of the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area, as well as the text "discharge error" displayed in a size that covers most of the front decorative pattern. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound or the like that suggests that an abnormal discharge of game balls has occurred, such as "Discharge error" (which may be, for example, a discharge error notification sound such as an alarm sound). Furthermore, in the discharge error notification, the frame lamp flashes, the board lamp is turned off, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 do not execute a predetermined operation such as an initial operation, and the upper unit 180 is turned off. The discharge error notification may be executed until the power is turned off, and the frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 may execute lighting or flashing in a predetermined light color or at a predetermined interval, such as a discharge error mode corresponding to the discharge error notification. Furthermore, during the execution of the discharge error notification, since an abnormal discharge of the game balls has occurred, the game cannot be executed. And, for example, when an abnormal discharge of the game balls based on such a malfunction due to aging is detected and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 of the upper role unit 154 is not normally attached due to the malfunction due to aging, the main display device 131 displays the attachment error display 2020a of the upper decoration part not attached error notification together with the discharge error display 2087c. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, upper unit, and upper unit 180, etc., for example, the mode of the discharge error notification is executed preferentially, and the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may not execute the initial operation, etc. In other words, the discharge error notification is a notification with a higher priority than the upper role not-attached error notification. And, for example, when the attachment error display 2020a is displayed together with the discharge error display 2087c on the main display device 131, if the power is restored but the malfunction of the upper role unit 154 is not resolved, the discharge error notification may be stopped and the upper decoration part not-attached error notification may be executed. Note that, here, the relationship between the discharge error notification and the upper decoration part not-attached error notification has been described, but the discharge error notification and other attachment error notifications (such as the attachment error notification in the upper unit 180) may also be in the same mode (priority). In this way, if at least some of the installation error notifications, such as the upper decorative part not being installed error notification, are executed even during the ejection error notification, the operator can easily and reliably recognize that an installation error, such as an exchangeable part not being installed properly, has occurred and that an abnormal ejection of game balls has occurred. On the other hand, the installation error notification may be executed after the ejection error notification, similar to the case where the power restoration notification is executed with priority over the above-mentioned installation error notification.

[Relationship between tray full error notification and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-8(A), for example, when the full detection switch 314 detects that the upper tray 128 is full of game balls, the performance control board 320 executes a full tray error notification to encourage the player to remove the game balls from the upper tray 128. In the full tray error notification, the main display device 131 displays a full tray display 2088 together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The full tray display 2088 is displayed in a size that covers at least a part of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays characters such as "Please remove the balls" that encourage the player to remove the game balls from the upper tray 128. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs audio such as "Please remove the balls" that encourages the player to remove the game balls from the upper tray 128. Furthermore, in the case of the full plate error notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.), the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.), the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156, and the upper unit 180 can perform a performance in a light emitting mode or an operating mode according to the game state at that time. The full plate error notification is continuously performed until the game balls are removed from the upper plate 128 and it is detected that the full state has been eliminated based on the detection by the full plate detection switch 314. In addition, the frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 may perform lighting or blinking in a predetermined light emitting color or at a predetermined interval, such as a full plate error mode corresponding to the full plate error notification. Furthermore, during the execution of the full plate error notification, although the game is possible, the payout of game balls such as prize balls is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 15-8(B), for example, when it is detected that the upper tray 128 is full of game balls and it is determined that the upper accessory decoration part 600 of the upper accessory unit 154 is not properly installed due to a malfunction caused by aging, etc., the main display device 131 displays the installation error display 2020a of the upper accessory part not installed error notification together with the tray full display 2088 of the tray full error notification. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, upper unit, and upper unit 180, etc., for example, the mode of the upper accessory part not installed error notification is executed preferentially, and the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 may not execute the initial operation, etc. In other words, the upper accessory not installed error notification is an alarm with a higher priority than the tray full error alarm. For example, when it is detected that the full state in the upper tray 128 is resolved during the period when the upper decoration part not-installed error notification is being executed, the tray full display 2088 on the main display device 131 is not displayed. Here, the relationship between the tray full error notification and the upper decoration part not-installed error notification has been described, but the tray full notification and other installation error notifications (such as the installation error notification in the upper unit 180) may be in the same manner (priority). In this way, when at least a part of the tray full error notification is executed even during an installation error notification such as the upper decoration part not-installed error notification, the operator or player can reliably and easily recognize that an installation error such as an exchangeable member not being installed reliably has occurred and that the upper tray 128 is full of game balls. At this time, together with the display of the tray full display 2088 on the main display device 131, a sound such as "Please remove the balls" that encourages the player to remove the game balls from the upper tray 128 may be output from the audio output device 331 (such as the speaker 1820). In this manner, the player can more reliably and easily recognize that an installation error has occurred and that the upper tray 128 is full of game balls.

[Relationship between left-handed shot notification and mounting error notification]
As shown in FIG. 15-9(A), for example, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the right route 106b during a non-variable game state, the performance control board 320 executes a left-hand hit notification to encourage the player to hit the ball to the left so that the game ball passes through the left route 106a. In the left-hand hit notification, the main display device 131 displays a left-hand hit display 2089 together with the decorative pattern, the reserved icon display area, and the icon display area. The left-hand hit display 2089 is displayed in a size that covers at least a part of the decorative pattern on the main display device 131, and displays characters such as "left hit ←" that encourage left-hand hit. In addition, the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.) outputs a sound such as "Please return to left hit" that encourages the player to hit left instead of right-hand hit. Furthermore, in the left hit notification, the frame lamp (the performance frame lighting device 342 provided on the glass frame 150, etc.), the board lamp (the performance board lighting device 341 provided on the game board unit 102, etc.), the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156, and the upper unit 180 can perform a performance in a light emission mode or an operation mode according to the game state at that time. The left hit notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the passage of the game ball on the right route 106b is detected. In addition, the frame lamp, the board lamp, and the upper unit 180 may perform lighting or blinking in a predetermined light emission color or at a predetermined interval, such as a left hit mode corresponding to the left hit notification. Furthermore, during the execution of the left hit notification, the normal game can be performed.

As shown in FIG. 15-9(B), for example, when the game ball is detected to have passed through the right route 106b during a non-variable game state, and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 of the upper role unit 154 is not properly attached due to a malfunction caused by aging, the main display device 131 displays the left-hand hit display 2089 for the left-hand hit notification and the attachment error display 2020a for the upper decoration part not being attached error notification. At this time, in the output mode of the audio output device 331 (speaker 1820, etc.), which is a mode other than the main display device 131, the light emission mode of the frame lamp, board lamp, upper unit, and upper unit 180, for example, the mode of the upper decoration part not being attached error notification is executed preferentially, and the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may not execute the initial operation, etc. In other words, the upper role not being attached error notification is an alert with a higher priority than the left-hand hit notification. For example, if a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed during the period during which the upper ornamental part not-attached error notification is being executed, the left hit display 2089 on the main display device 131 will be hidden. Note that while the relationship between the left hit notification and the upper ornamental part not-attached error notification has been described here, the left hit notification and other attachment error notifications (such as the attachment error notification in the upper unit 180) may have a similar configuration (priority). In this way, if at least a part of the left hit notification is executed even during an attachment error notification such as the upper ornamental part not-attached error notification, the operator or player can easily and reliably recognize that an attachment error has occurred, such as an exchangeable part not being securely attached, and that a right hit is being performed despite the non-variable play state, etc.

As shown in FIG. 15-9(C), for example, when the game ball is detected to have passed through the right route 106b during a non-variable game state, and it is determined that the upper role decoration part 600 of the upper role unit 154 is not properly attached due to a malfunction caused by aging, the main display device 131 displays the left-hand hit display 2089 for the left-hand hit notification and the attachment error display 2020a for the upper decoration part not being attached error notification, as in the state described in FIG. 15-9(B). However, at this time, unlike the state described in FIG. 15-9(B), in the output state of the audio output device 331, which is a state other than the main display device 131, and the light emission state of the frame lamp and the board lamp, for example, the state of the left-hand hit notification is executed preferentially, and the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156 may not execute the initial operation, etc. For example, if a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed during the period during which the upper ornament part non-attached error notification is being executed and the attachment error has not been resolved, the left hit display 2089 on the main display device 131 may be hidden, and the output state of the audio output device 331 and the light emission state of the frame lamp and the board lamp may be in the upper non-attached error state. In other words, the left hit notification may be an alert with a higher priority than the upper role non-attached error notification. Note that the relationship between the left hit notification and the upper ornament part non-attached error notification has been described here, but the left hit notification and other attachment error notifications (such as the attachment error notification in the upper unit 180) may have the same mode (priority). In this manner, the player can more reliably and easily recognize that an attachment error has occurred and that he is hitting the right despite being in a non-variable game state, etc.

[Explanation of output priority of various notifications, etc.]
An example of the priority of the output of the above-mentioned various notifications and mounting error notifications will be described with reference to Fig. 15-10. Fig. 15-10 is a diagram for explaining the priority of the output of various notifications, etc., (A) is a diagram for explaining the priority of the output of the frame lamp/board lamp in various notifications, etc., and (B) is a diagram for explaining the priority of the output of the audio output device in various notifications, etc.

As shown in FIG. 15-10 (A), the priority of output of the frame lamp/board lamp for various notifications may be set by dividing the various notifications into three different priority groups. For example, the highest priority notification of "priority 1" may be an upper unit incorrect installation error notification, an upper decorative part not installed error notification, an upper decorative part incorrect installation error notification, a lower decorative part not installed error notification, and a lower decorative part incorrect installation error notification. The next highest priority notification of "priority 2" may be a power recovery notification, a RAM clear notification, a setting change notification, and a setting confirmation notification. And the lowest priority notification of "priority 3" may be an upper unit not installed error notification, a door open error notification, a magnetic error notification, a radio wave error notification, a switch connection error notification, a vibration error notification, an abnormal winning notification, an ejection error notification, and a tray full error notification. In such a priority, for example, when various notifications are executed in duplicate, the frame lamp/board lamp may be immediately executed in the form of a high priority notification. In addition, in such a priority, for example, when notifications with the same priority are executed in duplicate, the frame lamp/board lamp may be set to execute the notification that was executed first. Furthermore, for example, when notifications with different priorities are executed in duplicate, if the notification with a higher priority is finished and the notification with a lower priority is in execution time, the frame lamp/board lamp may start a new notification with the lower priority. Furthermore, in addition to the notifications described above, notifications corresponding to various events may be included in this priority, and for example, notifications regarding operation errors in the upper unit 180, the upper role unit 154, the lower role unit 156, and the role mechanism unit 158 may be set as "priority 8". When various notifications are output with such a priority, notifications regarding important errors that may hinder the progress of the game are prioritized, so that the manager of the gaming machine can more accurately grasp the occurrence of important errors.

As shown in FIG. 15-10(B), the priority of the output of the audio output device 331 for various notifications may be set so that each of the various notifications has a different priority. For example, the highest priority notification "priority 1" may be a RAM clear notification, the next highest priority notification "priority 2" may be a power recovery notification, the next highest priority notification "priority 3" may be an upper unit incorrect installation error notification, and the next highest priority notification "priority 4" may be an abnormal winning notification. Also, the next highest priority notification "priority 5" may be a magnetic error notification, the next highest priority notification "priority 6" may be an ejection error notification, the next highest priority notification "priority 7" may be a door open error notification, and the next highest priority notification "priority 8" may be a switch connection error notification. In such priorities, for example, when various notifications are executed in overlapping fashion, the audio output device 331 may immediately execute the notification with the higher priority. In addition, in such a priority, for example, when the same notification is executed in duplicate, the audio output device 331 may immediately execute the notification in the middle of the previously executed notification. Furthermore, for example, when notifications with different priorities are executed in duplicate, if the notification with a higher priority is finished during the execution time of the notification with a lower priority, the audio output device 331 may start a new notification with the lower priority. Note that, if the output of the notification with a higher priority is continued on the display device 131 after the output of the notification with a higher priority on the audio output device 331 is finished, the output of the new notification on the audio output device 331 may not be started. After the output on the audio output device 331, the state may be restored by a new predetermined command or restored to the state before the notification. Furthermore, in addition to the notifications described above, notifications corresponding to various events may be included in this priority, and for example, notifications regarding operation errors in the upper unit 180, the upper role unit 154, the lower role unit 156, and the role mechanism unit 158 may be set as "priority 8". When various notifications are output with this priority, notifications regarding important errors that may impede game progress are given priority, allowing the gaming machine manager to more accurately grasp the occurrence of important errors.

[Description of the manner of output of various notifications, etc. on the main display device]
With reference to Fig. 15-11, an example will now be described regarding the manner in which the above-mentioned various notifications and mounting error notifications are output from the main display device 131. Fig. 15-11 is a diagram for explaining the manner in which various notifications and the like are output from the main display device 131, where (A) is a diagram for explaining the manner in which the main display device 131 outputs various notifications, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the manner in which the main display device 131 outputs a mounting error notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-11 (A), for example, each display consisting of characters, etc., displayed on the main display device 131 for various notifications may be output in a position where they do not overlap, even if the notifications overlap. Furthermore, these displays may be output so as not to cover all of the various designs, such as decorative designs, displayed on the main display device 131. Furthermore, these displays may be output with a transparency of 25% so that the various images displayed on the main display device 131 are visible. Specifically, a door open display 2084x that is output in a door open error notification may be provided at the top, a magnetic error display 2085ax that is output in a magnetic error notification, a radio wave error display 2085bx that is output in a radio wave error notification, a switch error display 2086x that is output in a switch connection error notification, a vibration error display 2087ax that is output in a vibration error notification, an abnormal winning display 2087bx that is output in an abnormal winning notification, a discharge error display 2087cx that is output in a discharge error notification, and a full plate display 2088x that is output in a full plate error notification may be provided. Although these displays are output to the main display device 131, they may also be output to the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. In addition, when multiple notifications are executed, these displays may be output according to the priority of the various notifications described above.

As shown in FIG. 15-11(B), for example, various mounting error displays displayed on the main display device 131 in various mounting error notifications may be output in positions where they do not overlap, even if the notifications overlap. In addition, these displays may be output so as not to cover all of the various patterns, such as decorative patterns, displayed on the main display device 131. Furthermore, these displays may be output at a transparency of 25% so that the various images displayed on the main display device 131 are visible. Specifically, a mounting error display 2020ax output in an upper decorative part non-attachment error notification may be provided at the very top, a mounting error display 2020bx output in an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification may be provided below that, a mounting error display 2030ax output in a lower decorative part non-attachment error notification may be provided below that, a mounting error display 2030bx output in a lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification may be provided below that, a mounting error display 2050ax output in an upper unit non-attachment error notification may be provided below that, and a mounting error display 2050bx output in an upper unit incorrect attachment error notification may be provided below that. Although these displays are output to the main display device 131, they may also be output to the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. Furthermore, when multiple notifications are executed, these displays may be displayed according to the priority of the various notifications described above.

In addition, if another error occurs while a decorative error notification or various other error notifications are being executed, a specific notification means among multiple notification means (such as the main display device 131) that executes decorative error notifications, etc. may be capable of executing the same in parallel in the form of an error notification corresponding to the other error, and a specific notification means may be capable of executing decorative error notifications, etc. in priority over error notifications corresponding to the other errors.
In the above, the case where the decoration error notification by the predetermined notification means and the second abnormality notification by the specific notification means are executed in parallel has been described, but when a fraud with a high risk of fraud is detected, the decoration pattern, small pattern, number reservation, volume adjustment image, etc. displayed before the fraud may be made non-displayed, and the error notification for the fraud may be given priority on the full screen. Also, even during the execution of the magnetic error notification or radio wave error notification, the decoration pattern, background effect, number reservation, volume adjustment image, etc. on the main display device 131 may be displayed, and the magnetic error notification or radio wave error notification in the above-mentioned manner may be executed on the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the frame lamp, and the board lamp.

[Description of the Gaming Machine 200 of the Second Embodiment]
Next, the configuration of the gaming machine 200 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 16-1 to 16-7. Fig. 16-1 is a front view of the gaming machine 200 according to the second embodiment. Fig. 16-2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine 200 showing the configuration of the gaming machine 200. Fig. 16-3 is a diagram showing the functional blocks of the gaming machine 200. Fig. 16-4 is a schematic diagram of the entire management system in the gaming machine 200. Fig. 16-5 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 200 showing a state in which the glass frame 2150 is opened relative to the outer frame 2160. Fig. 16-6 is a rear view of the gaming machine 200, in which (A) is a view showing a state in which the rear cover 2600 is attached, and (B) is a view showing a state in which the rear cover 2600 is removed. Fig. 16-7 is a schematic diagram of the decorative unit 2180, in which (A) is a perspective view of the decorative unit 2180, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the decorative unit 2180 is removed.

The gaming machine 200 is defined as a so-called managed gaming machine, which is composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board, and circulates a certain number of gaming balls within the machine alone, eliminating the need to directly pay out gaming balls to players. Play becomes possible by connecting the gaming machine 200 to an IC card unit (hereinafter referred to as the dedicated unit 2300) dedicated to managed gaming machines, which has the same functions as conventional IC card units, but also has the added functions of monitoring the gaming machine 200 for fraud and displaying information on the balls dispensed in a game in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The dedicated unit 2300 is provided with a ball loan and return switch. In the following description of the gaming machine 200, detailed descriptions of components similar to those of the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in Fig. 16-1 and Fig. 16-2, the gaming machine 200 is composed of a gaming board 2102, an outer frame 2160 which is a gaming machine frame, a glass frame 2150 in which a back mechanism section 2170 and a front decoration 2120 are provided, an operation section 2130, and a glass member 2151. The gaming board 2102 has a gaming area formed therein, and is provided with various movable parts (not shown), a starting device, a winning device, a gaming board performance LED, a main liquid crystal display 2327, etc., which are detachably attached to the back mechanism section 2170. The back mechanism section 2170 is formed in a frame which corresponds to the inner frame of the gaming machine frame, and is provided with a launching mechanism 2190, a gaming ball circulation mechanism 2380, a connection terminal board 2370, a frame control board 2340, a power supply unit 2360, a ball polishing mechanism 2385, an iron ball detection mechanism 2650, etc., which will be described later. The glass frame 2150 is provided with a front ornament 2120, speakers 2132, 2133, and a decorative unit 2180, which will be described later. The operation unit 2130 is provided with a counting switch 2136, a game ball number display device 2125, a frame audio notification device 2131, a handle 2103, and a performance switch unit 2135, which will be described later. The glass member 2151 is colorless and transparent, and is configured so that the position of the game balls on the game board 2102 can be confirmed without obstructing the view of the overall structure of the game board 2102.

As shown in FIG. 16-3, the gaming machine 200 is provided with a main control board 2310, a performance control board 2320, a launch control board 2350, and a power supply unit 2360, which are configured similarly to the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 200 also has a frame control board 2340 having a one-chip microcomputer including a frame control CPU, frame control ROM, and frame control RAM (not shown). Furthermore, the frame control board 2340 has input and output ports for control (neither shown). To this input port, various detection switches similar to those of the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment, a counting switch 2136 described later, a gaming ball circulation mechanism 2380, a connection terminal board 2370, a ball polishing mechanism 2385, the main control board 2310, and the launch control board 2350 are connected. In addition, the counting switch 2136, the game ball number display device 2125, the frame voice notification device 2131, the game ball circulation mechanism 2380, the connection terminal board 2370, the ball polishing mechanism 2385, the main control board 2310, and the launch control board 2350 are connected to the output port for control. The connection terminal board 2370 is a board for outputting various information signals generated in the frame control board 2340 to the dedicated unit 2300 described later. The output port of the main control board 2310 is connected to the frame control board 2340, the performance control board 2320, and the main display/winning display board 2315 for controlling the pattern display device (not shown). The output port of the performance control board 2320 is connected to the frame performance LED board 2322 for controlling the multiple LEDs provided on the front decoration 2120, the game board performance board 2325 for controlling the movable role and LEDs (not shown) provided on the game board 2102, the main liquid crystal display 2327, etc. The output port of the launch control board 2350 is connected to the launch adjustment board 2355, which is used to control the launch device, as described below.

The performance display monitor 2345 is composed of a 7-segment LED mounted on the frame control board 2340, and displays performance data (number of game balls acquired per minute (base value), feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio, etc.), number of game balls (number of game balls acquired), and error codes occurring in the gaming machine 200. Note that performance data is data obtained by the frame control CPU on the frame control board 2340 performing calculations based on information from the main CPU on the main control board 2310. Also, the number of game balls (number of game balls acquired) is information obtained by counting in the main CPU, and is information that can be displayed on the performance display monitor 2345 when the frame control CPU receives the information from the main CPU.

The gaming machine 200 is a gaming machine similar to the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment, but does not have an upper tray 128 (see FIG. 1) like the gaming machine 100, so that the player cannot directly touch the gaming balls. The number of balls lent from the dedicated unit 2300, the number of balls fired, the number of game balls acquired, etc. are electromagnetically recorded and managed by the CPU of the frame control board 2340, and displayed on the game ball number display device 2125. When the game ends, the number of game balls managed by the gaming machine 200 is transmitted to the dedicated unit 2300 by pressing the counting switch 2136, and the management is transferred. The gaming balls used are non-magnetic. The minimum number of game balls required for firing by the gaming machine 200 alone are circulated within the main body, and a launching mechanism 2190, a ball polishing mechanism 2385, and a game ball circulation mechanism 2380 are provided during the circulation. The launch mechanism 2190 has the same launch performance as the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment, but is provided in the back mechanism section 2170 so as to be located at the upper left of the gaming board 2102. The ball polishing mechanism 2385 has polishing cloths for removing dirt from the gaming balls stored in a cassette, and this cassette is replaced at regular intervals. In the gaming machine 200, performance information, gaming machine installation information, and fraud monitoring information are transmitted to the dedicated unit 2300, and are transmitted from the dedicated unit 2300 to the gaming machine information center 2450 described later. Information output to the hall computer 2402 is output from the dedicated unit 2300, and commercial power (100V) is used as the power source. The gaming machine 200 and the dedicated unit 2300 are connected by a dedicated unit cable for communicating the number of gaming balls, etc., and communicate according to the frame control board-dedicated unit interface (hereinafter referred to as "dedicated PIF") protocol.

As shown in FIG. 16-4, the management system for the gaming machine 200 is a system in which the sales office 2400, data center 2420, and gaming machine information center 2450 transmit and receive various data between each other to manage the data. The sales office 2400 has a plurality of gaming machines 200 and a dedicated unit 2300, and is equipped with a hall computer 2402 for managing the plurality of gaming machines 200, and a management computer 2405. The dedicated unit 2300 has an SC board built into the unit control unit for transmitting confidential information, such as performance information, from the gaming machine information received from the gaming machine 200 to the gaming machine information center 2450, and communication between the SC board and the gaming machine information center 2450 is encrypted so that it cannot be decrypted mid-communication. In addition, the various information output from the game information output terminal board 309 (see FIG. 3) in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment is received by the dedicated unit 2300 via the dedicated PIF and output from the dedicated unit 2300 to the hall computer 2402, which receives various gaming machine information from the gaming machine 200, performs counting management, and monitors the gaming balls. The management computer 2405 is installed in the sales office 2400 and is connected to a data center 2420 outside the sales office 2400, and receives encrypted confidential information transmitted from the SC board and transmits it to the data center 2420. The data center 2420 transmits the encrypted confidential information transmitted from the SC board to the gaming machine information center 2450 without any modification.

The gaming machine information center 2450 is an information center that centrally manages various information outside the sales office 2400, and includes a machine history server 2452, a fraud monitoring server 2453, a performance information server 2455, a player information server 2457, etc. The machine history server 2452 is a server for managing information regarding the movement history of gaming machines 200 installed at the sales office 2400 and gaming machines 200 that have been moved second-hand and reinstalled at the sales office 2400. In this way, information regarding the movement history is grasped (monitored) until the gaming machine 200 is finally discarded, which leads to the detection of gaming machines 200 that are installed via routes other than the regular distribution route and the prevention of illegal dumping by identifying the final owner. Specifically, when a new gaming machine is installed, first, the gaming machine manufacturer requests a control chip supply company to purchase chips for the main board for production, then the control chip supply company registers the manufacturing information (chip ID number, etc.) of each control chip sold to the gaming machine manufacturer in the machine history server 2452, and then, when the gaming machine is shipped, the gaming machine manufacturer registers shipping information such as the manufacturing numbers of the gaming board and frame, the manufacturing information of each control chip (chip ID number, etc.), and information about the sales office to which the machine is to be delivered. The gaming machine 200 shipped from the manufacturer is then installed in the sales office 2400, and when the gaming machine 200 is turned on, the chip ID numbers of the main and frame control chips are automatically transmitted to the machine history server 2452 via the dedicated unit 2300, which then manages the installation confirmation of the gaming machine 200 and the installation period, etc. In addition, when the gaming machine 200 that has been confirmed as installed is removed during the transfer of the used machine, the dedicated unit 2300 notifies the machine history server 2452 of an error of communication interruption, and when the gaming machine 200 is installed in a new business office after the transfer, the chip ID number and the like are transmitted to the machine history server 2452 in the same manner as described above, and the name of the business office to which the gaming machine was transferred is also updated, so that the transfer of the used machine can be confirmed. Furthermore, when the gaming machine 200 removed from the business office 2400 is disposed of by a disposal company during removal or disposal, the gaming machine manufacturer registers the disposal information in the machine history server 2452. Note that, if the chip ID number of the gaming machine removed from the business office 2400 is not transmitted to the machine history server 2452 even after a certain period of time has elapsed, it is determined that the business office 2400 has stored the gaming machine in a warehouse, or that the processing company that does not have a means of contacting the gaming machine manufacturer has disposed of the gaming machine. It is possible to confirm whether the gaming machine has been disposed of or not by checking with the last business office 2400 where the gaming machine was installed, and whether the gaming machine has been stored in a warehouse or disposed of.

The fraud monitoring server 2453 is a server for receiving information such as performance information, player information, fraud monitoring information, and installation information of the gaming machine 200, and also generates a communication key for realizing encrypted communication between the gaming machine information center 2450 and the dedicated unit 2300 and decrypts the received information. Furthermore, it is possible to determine the fraud monitoring information and notify peripheral equipment including the hall computer 2402 via the dedicated unit 2300 in the business office 2400. The performance information server 2455 is a server for centrally managing the performance information of each gaming machine 200 installed in the business office 2400. The player information server 2457 is a server for collecting and managing information on the declaration items described in the declaration form from each gaming machine 200 installed in business offices nationwide based on the declaration form from the player and his/her family regarding addiction countermeasures, and aims to impose a play restriction when the player reaches the declaration limit (amount of consumption, number of games, play time, etc.). Specifically, player information such as the amount spent, number of games played, playing time, and member card ID number is received and compiled from each dedicated unit 2300 installed in business offices nationwide, and a third-party organization can use the collected information to determine whether a declarant has exceeded the declared limit when entering a store to play, making it possible to implement gaming restrictions at business offices nationwide.

As shown in Figures 16-5 and 16-6, the launching device is a device that launches less than 100 game balls per minute, one at a time, by driving a launch solenoid inside the launching device, and is composed of a launching mechanism 2190 and a handle 2103, etc., and has a touch detection function, a launch stop function, a launch strength adjustment function, a shot strength adjustment function, etc. The handle 2103 is composed of a launch stop button, a launch stop switch, a handle lever, a touch sensor, a handle volume, and a ring, all of which are not shown, and the launching mechanism 2190 is composed of a valve, a launch solenoid, a launch pad, and a pestle, all of which are not shown. The game balls cannot be launched unless directly operated by the player. The touch detection function is a function that detects whether the player is touching the handle 2103 using a touch sensor. The launch stop function is a function that stops the launch of game balls when the touch state is not detected, when the launch stop switch is pressed, when the game ball number display device 2125 is counting, when the game ball number is "0", when a launch stop signal is output from the main control board 2310, when a connection signal generated from the dedicated unit power supply of the dedicated unit 2300 is not output, and when an error that causes launch to be stopped is detected. The launch strength adjustment function is a function that adjusts the strength of the handle volume provided inside the handle 2103 by operating the handle 2103, and launches game balls to any position on the game board. The shot strength adjustment function is a function that adjusts the launch strength voltage when the handle lever is in the origin position state by adjusting the variable resistor mounted on the launch adjustment board 2355. Specifically, when the handle 2103 is operated by the player, the operation, stop, and launch strength of the launch solenoid can be changed, and when the launch stop button is operated, game balls can be launched one by one. For example, when a player touches the ring of the handle 2103, the touch sensor connected to the ring outputs a detection signal to the launch control board 2355, and when the launch control board 2355 detects this signal, it becomes possible to energize the launch solenoid. If the player is not touching the ring of the handle 2103, it is not possible to energize the launch solenoid regardless of the state of the handle 2103. Before the player turns the handle lever, the launch stop button is pressed by the handle lever and the launch stop switch is pressed down, and when the player turns the handle lever, the pressing of the launch stop switch is released, the detection voltage of the handle volume changes, and the strength of the current flowing to the launch solenoid changes depending on the angle of the turn. As a result, the flight distance of the game ball changes, and the player can launch the game ball to any position on the game board. Furthermore, when the touch sensor detects the player's operation, the handle volume is turned clockwise, and the launch stop switch is in an open state, it becomes possible to energize the launch solenoid. When the player presses the launch stop button during play, the launch solenoid cannot be energized regardless of the state of the handle 2103. When the player stops pressing the launch stop button and the launch stop switch is in an open state, the launch solenoid can be energized. The launch mechanism 2190 can launch a game ball onto the game board when the launch solenoid can be energized due to the launch permission signal from the main control board 2310 and the state of the handle 2103 due to the player's direct operation. When the launch solenoid is activated, a subtraction reference signal that is linked to the launch solenoid is output from the launch control board 2355 to the frame control board 2340. The subtraction reference signal is a reference for energizing the subtraction solenoid in the subtraction mechanism. When the launch solenoid is driven, the pestle is activated to launch the game ball stopped on the launch pad, and the launched game ball passes through a valve and is launched onto the game board. The valve is designed to return to its original position after the game ball passes through.

As shown in FIG. 16-5, the game ball number display device 2125 has a structure that allows the player to easily check the display contents, displays the added or subtracted game ball number and an error code, and is a device composed of a game ball number display device, a subtraction mechanism mounted on the back of the launch mechanism, and a counting switch. The subtraction mechanism is composed of a subtraction solenoid, a subtraction mechanism entrance sensor, a subtraction mechanism exit sensor, and a movable piece, the counting switch is composed of an LED display unit and a photosensor detection unit, and the game ball number display device is composed of an LED display unit. Furthermore, the game ball number display device 2125 has functions such as an addition function, a subtraction function, a game ball number display function, and an error display function. The addition function is a function that adds the received number of loaned balls when a loan notification is received from the dedicated unit 2300, and adds the received number of acquired game balls when the acquired game ball number is received from the main control board 2310. The subtraction function is a function that subtracts the number of counted balls transmitted to the dedicated unit 2300 when the counting switch is pressed, or subtracts one from the number of game balls by the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor provided in the subtraction mechanism when the subtraction solenoid is operated to send game balls to the launch pad. The game ball number display function is a function that displays the number of game balls added or subtracted by the addition function and the subtraction function, and the error display function is a function that alternately displays the number of game balls and an error code when an error occurs. Specifically, the subtraction mechanism converts the game balls recorded by the electromagnetic method into real balls by energizing the subtraction solenoid and moving the movable piece based on the subtraction reference signal, and sends them to the launch mechanism, and when the game balls pass the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor, subtracts the number of game balls and displays it on the game ball number display. For example, when there are game balls at the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor and there are no game balls at the subtraction mechanism exit sensor and there are game balls, the subtraction solenoid is energized after the subtraction reference signal is output. When the subtraction solenoid is energized, the movable piece is actuated to move one game ball into the movable piece, and the game ball that entered the movable piece is sent to the launch pad of the launch mechanism by the actuation of the movable piece. Also, when the subtraction solenoid is energized and the game ball moves to the movable piece, the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor detects the passage of one game ball. Then, the game ball number display device 2125 detects the passage of the game ball with the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor, subtracts one game ball from the number of game balls, and displays it on the game ball number display. Furthermore, when the subtraction solenoid is de-energized, the game ball sent to the launch mechanism 2190 is detected by the subtraction mechanism exit sensor. Also, when the count for confirming the connection of the dedicated unit is supplied, the photo sensor detection unit and the LED display unit become operable. When the photo sensor detection unit and the LED display unit are operable and the number of game balls is not "0", the counting is enabled, and the LED display unit displays "counting possible". When counting is possible in this way, if the counting switch is pressed and the photosensor detection unit detects obstruction, the number of counted balls sent by the frame control board in the count ball notification is subtracted from the number of game balls, and the result is displayed on the game ball count display. While the counting switch is being pressed, the LED display unit shows that counting is in progress. The game ball count display then displays the added or subtracted number of game balls, and if an error occurs, it alternates between displaying the number of game balls and an error code.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (B), the power supply unit 2360 is provided at the bottom of the rear mechanism section 2170, and is composed of an AC 100V input section, an AC-DC converter section, a main power supply generating section, a sub power supply generating section, an overload output cut-off section, and a DC output section, and has functions such as a main power supply generating function, a sub power supply generating function, a display function, and a switch function. The main power supply generating function is a function that generates a main power supply from AC 100V and supplies it to the main control board 2310 via the frame control board 2340. The DC 24V used for the gaming machine frame is generated within the frame control board 2340 and supplied from the frame control board 2340. The sub power supply generating function is a function that generates a sub power supply system from AC 100V and supplies it to the gaming board from the power supply unit 2360. The power used by the front decoration 2120 and the operation section 2130 is supplied via the gaming board 2102. The display function is a function of displaying the power supply state by mounting an LED on each of the main power supply and the sub power supply. The switch function is a function of switching between supplying and cutting off AC 100V by the mounted main switch. Specifically, the AC 100V input section supplies the input AC 100V to the ACDC converter section through the main switch, fuse, line filter, and inrush current protection. The main switch is used for power cutoff, the fuse is used for short circuit protection, and the line filter is used for noise removal, and a noise filter for noise removal is used for the AC 100V FG. A relay is used for inrush current protection, and a varistor and a spark killer are also used for surge and overvoltage protection. The ACDC converter section employs a switching method using an LLC resonant converter with an insulating transformer, and rectifies and smooths the AC voltage supplied from the AC 100V input section using a diode bridge and a capacitor to generate a DC voltage on the primary side. The generated DC voltage is chopped by a switching power supply control IC and an FET, and is output as a square wave voltage to the secondary side via an insulating transformer. The square wave voltage output to the secondary side is rectified and smoothed by a rectifier diode and a capacitor to generate a 36V power supply. An FB circuit for stabilizing the power supply operation and an efficiency improvement circuit for increasing the power factor are provided. The main system power supply generation unit generates DC 36V generated by the ACDC converter unit, and is equipped with an overcurrent protection function for each power supply system. In addition, various types of power are generated by a DCDC converter or a switching regulator, or supplied via a fuse. The sub system power supply generation unit generates the sub system power supply from the power generated by the ACDC converter unit, as with the main system power supply, and is equipped with an overcurrent protection function for each power supply system. In addition, various types of power are generated by a DCDC converter, or supplied via a fuse and a FET switch. The overload output cutoff unit detects the current value of the power generated by the ACDC converter unit to limit the total output of the power supply unit to a predetermined value. When the total output exceeds a predetermined value for a certain period of time, the output of the sub system power supply is stopped, but the output of the main system power supply is continued without stopping. The DC output unit displays the power supply status using LEDs installed in each of the main and sub power supplies, and is equipped with an overvoltage protection function for each power supply system.

The main control board 2310 has a function for detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame, a function for stopping launch, a function for detecting fraud, a backup function, etc. The function for detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame is a function for detecting the open state of the glass frame 2150 and the back mechanism part 2170 of the gaming machine frame by the glass frame opening switch and the back mechanism part opening switch. The function for stopping launch is a function for outputting a launch stop signal to the frame control board 2340 when the launch is stopped, and the function for detecting fraud is a function for outputting a serial signal (command format) to the frame control board 2340 when a predetermined fraud is detected. In addition, the backup function is a function for storing the game state in RAM when a power interruption detection signal output from the backup circuit in the frame control board 2340 is detected, and is a function for backing up the jackpot state (including the number of rounds), the high probability/time-saving state, the random number value of the reserved memory (special pattern, normal pattern), the normal electric device, the first type special electric device, the error state, etc. The recovery process is performed depending on the pressed state of the RAM clear switch mounted on the frame control board 2340 when the power is turned on.

The main control board 2310 also has an acquired ball equivalent information storage area in the main RAM (not shown), which is a storage area for storing acquired ball equivalent information. The acquired ball equivalent information represents the number of game balls paid out to the player based on winning in the big prize device or the like during the big win game state. The number represented by the acquired ball equivalent information stored in the acquired ball equivalent information storage area (also called the acquired ball equivalent number) is added by the number of prize balls (for example, 15) each time a game ball enters the big prize device. In other words, the number represented by the acquired ball equivalent information is the number of game balls that entered the big prize device during the big win game state multiplied by the number of prize balls. The acquired ball equivalent information stored in the acquired ball equivalent information storage area is reset (erased) by the main CPU when the time-saving game state ends. Therefore, the number represented by this information on the equivalent number of winning balls is the sum of the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state at the time of the first jackpot and the number of game balls paid out when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state again before the time-saving game state after the first jackpot ends. In other words, the number of winning balls equivalent while the time-saving game state continues is added to the number of game balls paid out in the jackpot game state each time the game state transitions to a jackpot game state.

The performance control board 2320 has an acquired ball equivalent information storage area in a sub-RAM (not shown), which is a storage area for storing acquired ball equivalent information by executing an acquired ball equivalent information storage process. Specifically, as the acquired ball equivalent information storage process, when an acquired ball equivalent information command is received from the main control board 2310, a process is executed to store the acquired ball equivalent information represented by the command. Note that the acquired ball equivalent information is information that is overwritten and saved each time an acquired ball equivalent information command is sent.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (A), the frame control board 2340 is provided under the rear mechanism section 2170 and covered by the rear cover 2600 to control the number of game balls, and has a communication function with the main control board 2310, a communication function with the dedicated unit 2300, a launch permission signal generation function, a power generation function, a backup function, an error detection function, etc. The communication function with the main control board 2310 is a function that receives the number of acquired game balls, gaming machine installation information, hall control information, and fraud monitoring information by the frame control CPU through the communication function with the main control board 2310, and receives the launch stop signal without going through the CPU. The reception results of each piece of information are transmitted from the frame control CPU. The communication function with the dedicated unit 2300 is a function that receives the loan notification by the frame control CPU through the communication function with the dedicated unit 2300, and receives the connection signal generated from the dedicated unit's VL (power supply for the dedicated unit) without going through the CPU. The counting notification, gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information, and loan receipt results are transmitted from the frame control CPU. The generation of the launch permission signal is a function of generating a launch permission signal and outputting it to the launch control board 2350 when the launch stop signal from the main control board 2310 is released, a connection signal generated from the VL (power supply for the dedicated unit) of the dedicated unit is output, and there is no error in the gaming machine 200 that will cause launch to be stopped. The power generation function is a function of storing the power supplied from the power supply unit 2360 in a capacitor mounted on the frame control board 2340 and using it as a backup power supply for the main control board 2310 and the frame control board 2340. In addition, the power supplied from the power supply unit 2360 is used to generate power that is used only by the gaming machine frame. The backup function is a function of monitoring the power supplied from the power supply unit 2360 by a backup circuit, and when a drop in power supply is detected, transmitting a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 2310 and storing the game state in the RAM. In addition, when the power is turned on, recovery processing is performed depending on the pressed state of the game ball clear switch and the RAM clear switch. Specifically, when the game ball clear switch is pressed, the game ball count information is initialized, and when it is not pressed, the game ball count information is restored to the state before the power was cut off using the information stored in the RAM. In addition, when the RAM clear switch is pressed, the game information is initialized, and when it is not pressed, the game information is restored to the state before the power was cut off using the information stored in the RAM. Items backed up in the frame control board 2340 include game ball count information, game information, performance information, etc.

The error detection function in the frame control board 2340 is a function that detects specific errors depending on the state of each device and mechanism, such as a dedicated PIF cable disconnection error which detects a disconnection between the dedicated unit 2300 and the gaming machine frame, a communication no-response error between the gaming machine 200 and the dedicated unit 2300 which detects a communication no-response between the dedicated unit 2300 and the gaming machine frame, a communication abnormality within the gaming machine which detects a communication no-response or no connection between the gaming board 2102 and the gaming machine frame, a subtraction mechanism inlet sensor abnormality which detects when the subtraction mechanism inlet sensor detects a ball jam or when the subtraction mechanism inlet sensor has failed, a ball polishing mechanism abnormality which detects when the polishing motor does not rotate, a gaming ball circulation mechanism abnormality which detects when the lifting motor does not rotate, and an error between the discharge ball passage and the ball polishing mechanism 2385. These include an abnormality in the discharge ball passage which detects ball clogging, an abnormality in the winning ball passage which detects ball clogging between the winning ball passage and the ball polishing mechanism 2385, an abnormality in the ball polishing mechanism passage which detects ball clogging within the ball polishing mechanism 2385, an abnormality in the game ball circulation mechanism passage which detects ball clogging within the game ball circulation mechanism 2380, an error where a cassette is not installed in the ball polishing mechanism 2385, an over game ball number error in which the number of game balls exceeds a specified number (for example, 40,000), an under-circulated ball number error which detects an insufficient number of circulating balls, an excessive circulating ball number error which detects an excessive number of circulating balls, and an abnormality in the proximity sensor of the game machine frame which detects an abnormality in various sensors (winning ball passage count sensor, non-winning passage count sensor, ball passage ball clogging monitoring sensor, polishing entrance sensor or lifting entrance sensor). The fraud detection function is a function that detects specific fraud based on the state of each device and mechanism, and examples of such functions include glass frame open, which is the detection of the opening of the glass frame 2150; rear mechanism open, which is the detection of the opening of the rear mechanism part 2170; illegal radio wave detection, which is the detection of abnormal radio waves in the gaming machine frame; game ball count clear, which is the detection of the clearing of the number of game balls; winning ball count abnormality, in which the difference between the number of winning balls detected by the main control board 2310 and the number of winning balls detected by the frame control board 2340 is a specific number of balls (e.g., 100) or more; winning ball count abnormality, in which the difference between the number of fired balls and the total number of returned balls (winning passage count sensor + non-winning passage count sensor) is a specific number of balls (e.g., 100) or more; small ball detection, which is the detection of balls smaller than a specific size; and iron ball detection, which is the detection of iron balls. In addition, actions to be taken after detecting an error or fraud include an overview of the abnormality being reported by the frame audio notification mechanism 2131, an error code being displayed by the game ball count display device 2125, the subtraction mechanism being stopped to make it impossible to play, the details of the abnormality being reported by a speaker, an error being displayed on an LCD, and lights being turned on so that the abnormality can be easily seen from outside.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (B), the ball polishing mechanism 2385 is a mechanism for polishing the game balls in the game machine 200, which is provided at the bottom of the rear mechanism section 2170, and is controlled by the frame control board 2340, and automatically polishes the game balls using a cassette equipped with a polishing cloth. The ball polishing mechanism 2385 is also composed of a polishing motor, a cassette motor, a cassette, a ball inlet, a ball outlet, a cassette switch, a polishing motor sensor, a polishing inlet sensor, a polishing relay board, a movable piece, a ball removal lever, a discharge passage, and a ball discharge port, all of which are not shown. The ball polishing mechanism 2385 also has a ball polishing function, a polishing motor rotation detection function, and a cassette detection function. The ball polishing function is a function for polishing the game balls by driving the polishing motor and moving the game balls so as to press them against the polishing cloth. The polishing cloth is a replaceable structure mounted on a cassette, and is moved to wind up the cloth at regular intervals by driving the cassette motor. The polishing motor rotation detection function is a function that detects the rotation of the polishing motor using a polishing motor sensor. The cassette detection function is a function that detects the presence or absence of a cassette equipped with a polishing cloth using a cassette switch. The ball polishing mechanism 2385 is structured to automatically wind up the wiping section at the same time as polishing the game ball, and is capable of replacing cassettes that need to be replaced due to their lifespan or the like, and the frame control board 2340 detects the cassette equipped with the polishing cloth. Specifically, when a game ball enters the ball inlet, the ball polishing mechanism 2385 detects the game ball using the polishing inlet sensor, drives the polishing motor and cassette motor, and detects the rotation of the polishing motor using the polishing motor sensor. In addition, the push plate presses the cassette switch to detect that a cassette is attached.

As shown in Figures 16-6 (A) and (B), the game ball circulation mechanism 2380 is provided on the left side of the rear mechanism section 2170, and is a mechanism that circulates game balls in the game machine 200 by driving a lift motor to move the game balls to the launch mechanism 2190. The game ball circulation mechanism 2380 is also composed of a ball inlet, a lift inlet sensor, a lift motor, a screw, a lift relay board, a lift motor sensor board, and a lift outlet sensor, all of which are not shown. Furthermore, the game ball circulation mechanism 2380 has a lift function that drives the lift motor to move the game ball to the launch mechanism, and a lift motor rotation detection function that detects the rotation of the lift motor using the lift motor sensor. Specifically, the game ball circulation mechanism 2380 drives the lift motor when a game ball enters from the ball inlet and is detected by the lift inlet sensor. When the lift motor rotates, the lift motor sensor board detects the rotation of the motor through a slit in the gear. When the lift motor is driven, the motor gear attached to the lift motor rotates, and when the motor gear rotates, the gear rotates in tandem, causing the screw gear to rotate. The screw gear is equipped with a screw, and when the screw gear rotates, the screw rotates, and the gaming balls are transported to the top of the gaming machine 200 as the screw rotates, and after being transported, they are handed over to the launch mechanism 2190. The gaming balls that enter from the ball inlet are aligned, and when the ball feed cam, which is driven by the lift motor, rotates, the gaming balls are taken into the ball feed cam, transported, and handed over to the screw.

The outer frame security mechanism, not shown, is a mechanism that prevents foreign objects from being inserted through gaps between the gaming machine 200 and the dedicated unit 2300, and is composed of a right plate, a left plate, a right security plate, a left security plate, and fixing screws within the outer frame. The outer frame security mechanism is installed by loosening the fixing screws and moving the right security plate and the left security plate to the adjustable range, and then tightening the fixing screws to fix the right security plate and the left security plate. At this time, the mechanism can move until it hits the surrounding environment or within the movement range of the holes in the right security plate and the left security plate.

As shown in FIG. 16-6 (B), the iron ball detection mechanism 2650 is provided at the bottom of the rear mechanism section 2170, and is composed of a ball passage, a ball passage ball clogging monitoring sensor, a release lever, and a magnet (not shown). It is a mechanism that stops the supply of game balls to the ball polishing mechanism by the magnet, and detects the iron ball by the ball passage ball clogging monitoring sensor. In addition, upon detection of an iron ball, the frame control board 2340 transmits fraud monitoring information to the dedicated unit 2300. In addition, as a detection cancellation function, the game ball can be released from the magnet by operating the release lever in the ball polishing mechanism 2385, and the detection of the iron ball can also be cancelled. Specifically, when an iron ball gets mixed in the gaming machine 200, the iron ball detection mechanism 2650 holds the iron ball by the magnet attached to the tip of the release lever. Then, the game ball and the iron ball in the ball passage are retained in the passage, and the frame control board 2340 detects it by the ball passage ball clogging monitoring sensor. Furthermore, by moving the release lever in the direction of the arrow, the iron ball will separate from the magnet and the ball jam will be released.

As shown in FIG. 16-5, the frame audio notification mechanism 2131 is provided at the bottom of the operation unit 2130, and is a mechanism that issues audio notifications in response to frame notification commands output by the frame control board 2340, and is composed only of a frame audio alarm. Specifically, the frame audio notification mechanism 2131 repeatedly notifies audio notification content such as that the game balls have been cleared, that an attendant is to be called, that counting is to be performed, etc. in response to frame notification commands output by the frame control board 2340. However, notifications that counting has been completed and that caution is required not to forget to remove cards are not issued repeatedly, but only once.

The door opening detection mechanism, not shown, is a mechanism that detects the opening of the door of the gaming machine 200, and is composed of a glass frame opening switch, sheet metal, a switch retainer, and a rear mechanism opening switch. The door opening detection mechanism also has a glass frame opening detection function that detects the opening and closing of the glass frame 2150 by the glass frame opening switch, and a rear mechanism opening detection function that detects the opening and closing of the rear mechanism 2170 by the rear mechanism opening switch. The frame control board 2340 is configured to transmit fraud monitoring information to the dedicated unit 2300 in response to detection of the opening of the glass frame 2150 or the rear mechanism 2170. Specifically, when the glass frame 2150 is in the closed state, the glass frame opening switch of the rear mechanism unit 2170 is pressed against the metal plate of the glass frame 2150 and goes into a pressed state, and when the glass frame 2150 is in the open state, the glass frame opening switch goes into a non-pressed state, thereby detecting the open state with the glass frame opening switch; when the rear mechanism unit 2170 is in the closed state, the rear mechanism unit opening switch of the rear mechanism unit 2170 is pressed against the switch presser of the outer frame 2160 and goes into a pressed state, and when the rear mechanism unit 2170 is in the open state, the rear mechanism unit opening switch goes into a non-pressed state, thereby detecting the open state with the rear mechanism unit opening switch.

The radio wave detection mechanism, not shown, is a mechanism that detects abnormal radio waves using a radio wave sensor for the frame, and upon detection of abnormal radio waves, the frame control board 2340 transmits fraud monitoring information to the dedicated unit 2300.

The ball removal mechanism, not shown, is a mechanism for discharging game balls in the game machine 200 out of the game machine 200, and is composed of the game ball circulation mechanism 2380, the launching device, the iron ball detection mechanism 2650, the ball polishing mechanism 2385, and the ball removal switch mounted on the frame control board 2340. The ball removal function of the ball removal mechanism is that when a launch permission signal is generated by the frame control board 2340 and the number of game balls is "0", when the power is turned on while pressing the ball removal switch, the ball can be removed by launching, and when the number of game balls is other than "0", the ball cannot be removed. Note that while this function is operating, communication between the game machine 200 and the dedicated unit 2300 is also disabled. Specifically, when the ball removal mechanism is in a state where ball removal is possible, when the ball removal lever of the ball polishing mechanism is set in the discharge direction, the movable piece blocking the discharge passage moves to the top, and the discharge passage is opened. Then, by launching a game ball with the discharge passage open, the game ball that has circulated through the game ball circulation mechanism 2380, the launching device, and the iron ball detection mechanism 2650 is discharged from the discharge port of the ball polishing mechanism 2385.

As shown in FIG. 16-5, the effect switch unit 2135 is composed of a vibration motor, a weight, a spring, an effect button, an effect switch, an upper adjustment button, a lower adjustment button, a left adjustment button, a right adjustment button, an effect board, and an upper adjustment switch, a lower adjustment switch, a left adjustment switch, and a right adjustment switch mounted on the effect switch board, and selects and determines the effect of the gaming machine 200 by the player's operation, and vibrates the effect button by a signal from the effect control board 2320. The effect switch unit 2135 also has functions such as an effect selection function that allows the effect to be selected by operating the upper adjustment button, the lower adjustment button, the left adjustment button, and the right adjustment button, a vibration effect function that drives the vibration motor by a signal from the effect control board 2320 to vibrate the effect button, and an effect determination function that allows the effect to be determined by operating the effect button. Specifically, when the upper adjustment button is pressed, the upper adjustment button moves and the upper adjustment switch is pressed, and when the button is no longer pressed, the reaction force on the adjustment switch returns the upper adjustment button to its normal state. In addition, the structure is such that pressing the down adjustment button activates the down adjustment switch, pressing the left adjustment button activates the left adjustment switch, and pressing the right adjustment button activates the right adjustment switch. When the vibration motor rotates, the weight pressed into the vibration motor shaft becomes eccentric, causing the performance button to vibrate. Furthermore, when the performance button is pressed, the light shield connected to the performance button moves, and the performance switch detects that the performance button has been pressed. When the button is no longer pressed, the reaction force of the four springs returns the button to its normal state.

As shown in Fig. 16-7 (A) and (B), the decorative unit 2180 is a member provided on the upper part of the glass frame 2150 so as to cover the upper LED 2720 provided on the upper part of the front decoration 2120, and is a member formed on the front side with a translucent member with a predetermined decoration specific to the model of the gaming machine 200. When such a decorative unit 2180 is provided, a light-emitting performance is performed in which the predetermined decoration specific to the model of the gaming machine 200 is lit by illuminating the covered upper LED 2720. Note that, although not shown in detail, the decorative unit 2180 is configured such that a part of the decorative unit 2180 is sandwiched between the glass frame 2150 and the outer frame 2160 and can be attached and detached when the glass frame 2150 is opened with a predetermined key. In addition, six reflective sensors 2183a to 2183f are provided around the upper LED 2720 of the front decoration 2120 to irradiate a signal light to a detection object and receive and detect the reflected light from the detection object. Furthermore, the decorative unit 2180 has five reflective sections 2184a-2184e on the inside where detection objects (e.g., aluminum members) that can be detected by the reflective sensors 2183a-2183f are provided. The upper LED 2720 and the reflective sensors 2183a-2183f are controlled by a gaming machine performance LED board 2322 that is connected to the performance control board 2320 so that various signals can be sent and received, and the reflective sensors 2183a-2183f can be operated to send the detection results to the performance control board 2320 via the gaming machine performance LED board 2322.

[Replacement of components in gaming machine 200]
In the gaming machine 200 of the second embodiment having the above-mentioned configuration, various detachable members can be replaced, as in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment. For example, the decorative unit 2180 and the performance control board 2320 can be replaced from the one with the specifications before the change (for example, one with a different design) to the one corresponding to the specifications of the gaming machine 100. When the decorative unit 2180 is replaced in this way, a predetermined signal is transmitted from the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322 to the performance control board 2320 based on the detection results of the six reflective sensors 2183. Then, the performance control board 2320 executes a judgment process based on the received predetermined signal, and judges whether the decorative unit 2180 replaced by the replacement work is appropriate or not.

The judgment process for the decorative unit 2180 etc. described above will now be described in more detail. The specified signal is a 6-bit signal generated by the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322, and just like in the first embodiment described above, the six reflective sensors 2183a-2183f irradiate the back surface of the decorative unit 2180 with signal light, and the signal indicates the detection result of which position of the reflective sensors 2183a-2183f from the decorative unit 2180 the reflected light corresponding to is irradiated.

Referring to FIG. 16-7(B), specifically, in the front decoration 2120 and the decorative unit 2180, there are six reflective sensors 2183a-2183f and five reflective sections 2184a-2184e, so the 6-bit signal generated by the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322 based on the detection results of the reflective sensors 2183a-2183f is "011111". Next, the generated signal is transmitted from the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322 to the performance control board 2320. Then, when the performance control board 320 receives the 6-bit signal of "011111" generated by the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322, it uses the comparison information "011111" previously stored in the sub-ROM to execute a determination process as to whether or not the decorative unit 2180 is an appropriate attachment part. In this example, all bit-corresponding values of the received 6-bit signal "011111" and the comparison information "011111" match, so the performance control board 2320 determines that the installed decorative unit 2180 was correct.

In response to this, for example, assume that the comparison information stored in the sub-ROM becomes "001111" due to the replacement of the performance control board 2320 due to a change in model or specification. Even in this case, when the decorative unit 2180 is attached, the 6-bit signal "011111" is generated by the gaming machine frame performance LED board 2322 as described above, and the signal is transmitted to the performance control board 2320. In this case, the performance control board 2320 determines that the attached decorative unit 2180 is not appropriate because the received 6-bit signal "001111" does not match the comparison information "011111". As a result, the performance control board 2320 displays the attachment error display 2050a to 2050c as shown in Figs. 14-1 (A) to (C) on the main display 2327, and notifies the outside that the attached decorative unit 2180 is not appropriate. The performance control board 2320 may also output a sound from the speakers 2132, 2133 indicating that the attached parts are different, or may cause the upper LED 2720 of the front decoration 2120 to emit light in a manner indicating that the attached parts are different. In this way, by comparing the 6-bit signal generated using the detection results of the reflective sensors 2183a-2183f with the matching information stored specific to the model or specifications, it is possible for the worker performing the replacement work to reliably recognize whether or not the correct parts have been replaced.

In the first and second embodiments described above, it is preferable to avoid configurations in which all bit-corresponding numerical values, such as "000000" or "111111", are the same for the 6-bit signal and the matching information. For example, there is a risk that a 6-bit signal of "000000" will be generated due to a malfunction of the reflected light detection function of the reflective sensors 1583a-1583f, 2183a-2183f, or that all 6-bit signals sent from the lantern control unit will be rewritten to "111111" due to the influence of noise, etc. If a configuration of "000000" or "111111" is adopted for the 6-bit signal and the matching information, not only will it be difficult to determine the cause of such malfunctions or defects, but there is also a risk that the performance control board 320, 2320 will not make an error judgment even if an inappropriate component is installed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first and second embodiments, a 6-bit signal is used as the specified signal, but the bit length of the signal is not limited to 6 bits. If it is a 1-bit length configuration, two types of signals, "0" and "1", can be output, and if it is an 8-bit length configuration, two types of signals, "0" and "1" x 8 factorial = 256 types of signals can be output. The bit length of the signal can be set appropriately taking into consideration the planned number of model changes and the number of types of sales specifications.

[Other embodiments]
In the above-mentioned embodiment, the result of the judgment process in the performance control board 320 or the like is notified by displaying the mounting error display 2050a or the like on the main display device 131 or the like, outputting sound from the speaker 1820 or the like, or emitting light from various lights (LEDs) or the like, but any other mode may be used as long as it can be reliably recognized by the worker performing the replacement work. Specifically, for example, in the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, the fact that the mounting member is different (for example, a display such as the mounting error display 2050b) may be displayed over the entire display area of the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133 so as not to impede the visibility of the display related to the performance such as the decorative pattern, the hold display, and the variable icon on the main display device 131. In addition, if the replaced member is a unit equipped with lighting such as LEDs, when the judgment result of the judgment process by the performance control board 320 or the like is determined to be inaccurate, only the lighting such as LEDs of the unit may be lit. Specifically, for example, in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment described above, when the upper unit 180 is replaced and is determined to be an inappropriate part in the determination process of the performance control board 320, the LED of the upper unit 180 is illuminated but other lights and the like provided in the gaming machine 100 are not illuminated. According to such an embodiment, since only the inappropriate part is illuminated after the replacement work, the operator can accurately recognize the inappropriate part.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the result of the judgment process in the performance control board 320, etc., is that the main display device 131, etc. displays the mounting error display 2050a, etc., but the display of the decorative pattern change, etc., shows that the gaming machine 100, etc. is in a state where the game can be played. In other words, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the operator recognizes that the correct part has not been replaced only by the display of the mounting error display 2050a, etc., on the main display device 131, etc., when the game can be played, but any mode that is easier for the operator to recognize may be used. For example, if the performance control board determines in the judgment process that the correct part is not installed, it may be changed to a mode such as a replacement mode that more clearly urges the operator to replace it again. More specifically, in the case of the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the performance control board 320 changes to the replacement mode, it may display on the main display device 131 that the mode is replacement mode, and control so that the parts determined to be inappropriate in the judgment process are not activated. Also, for example, the component to be replaced may be one that, when the power is turned on after replacement, moves to a position where replacement is more difficult than the replaced position. If the determination process for such a component determines that the component is inaccurate, the performance control board may move the component to a position where replacement is easier when switching to replacement mode. Furthermore, in a gaming machine that can be switched to replacement mode in this way, the replacement of components may be possible only in replacement mode.

In the above-described embodiment, the method for detecting whether or not a component is appropriate is a so-called non-contact reflected wave detection method that combines a reflective sensor with a detection object, but any method that can detect the detected part in a non-contact manner may be used. Here, specific methods that can be adopted as detection methods for the lantern component 1580 of the gaming machine 100 and the decorative unit 2180 of the gaming machine 200 in the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a table that describes various detection methods as other embodiments.

As shown in FIG. 17, other embodiments of the detection method include a magnetic detection method, a color detection method, and an ID detection method. The magnetic detection method uses a Hall IC as a detection sensor and a magnet as a detection object, and detects the presence or absence of a magnet by detecting the Hall voltage generated by the current flowing through the Hall element of the Hall IC and the magnetic field of the magnet. In the magnetic detection method, the Hall voltage increases in proportion to the magnetic flux density, so the distance that can be detected by the Hall IC can be adjusted according to the strength of the magnetic force of the magnet of the detection object. If such a magnetic detection method is adopted in the decoration unit 2180 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 200, six Hall ICs will be provided in the front decoration 2120 and five magnets will be provided in the decoration unit 2180. The predetermined signal used in the judgment process is a signal based on the detection result of the presence or absence of a magnet at the corresponding position on the decoration unit 2180 side by the six Hall ICs.

The color detection method uses a color sensor as the detection sensor and a color sticker as the detection object, and identifies the color pattern of the color sticker by calculating the ratio of color values from the reflected light of the light projected on the color sticker. In addition, since the color detection method can identify each color pattern of the color sticker, it is possible to enable multiple types of identification by changing the color pattern for each of the multiple color stickers. If such a color detection method is adopted for the decoration unit 2180 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 200, for example, one color sensor and a white LED for projecting light can be provided in the front decoration 2120, and one color sticker can be provided in the decoration unit 2180. Then, the predetermined signal used for the judgment process is a signal based on the color pattern of the color sticker on the decoration unit 2180 side detected by the color sensor. More specifically, the sub-ROM of the performance control board 2320 stores information based on the color pattern XXX, which is a predetermined color pattern, as collation information. If the color sticker of the decorative unit 2180 is of color pattern XYZ, the performance control board 2320 executes a discrimination process based on the received signal based on color pattern XYZ and the comparison information as a predetermined signal resulting from the detection of the replaced decorative unit 2180. In this case, since the received signal based on color pattern XYZ does not match the information based on color pattern XXX, which is the comparison information, it is determined that the decorative unit 2180 is not an appropriate attachment member for the gaming machine equipped with the performance control board 2320.

Furthermore, the ID detection method is a method in which a reader circuit equipped with a reader/writer and an antenna is used as the detection sensor, and an IC tag equipped with a coil-shaped antenna (e.g., RFID (Radio Frequency Identifier)) is used as the detection object, and the reader circuit reads the ID information stored in the IC tag by short-range wireless communication. Since the IC tag is composed of a one-chip integrated circuit, the amount of information that can be stored in the IC tag can be increased depending on the integrated circuit. If such an ID detection method is adopted in the decorative unit 2180 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 200, for example, one reader circuit can be provided in the front decoration 2120, and one IC tag can be provided in the decorative unit 2180. The specified signal used in the judgment process is a signal based on the ID information stored in the IC tag. More specifically, the sub-ROM of the performance control board 2320 stores the specified ID information, that is, ID information X, as matching information. If the ID information stored in the IC tag of the decorative unit 2180 is ID information Y, the performance control board 2320 executes a discrimination process based on the ID information Y and the matching information received as a predetermined signal upon detection of the replaced decorative unit 2180. In this case, since the received ID information Y does not match the matching information, ID information X, it is determined that the decorative unit 2180 is not an appropriate attachment member for the gaming machine equipped with the performance control board 2320.

Instead of the above-mentioned color detection method and ID detection method, a barcode reading method may be used in which a barcode reader is used as the detection sensor and a barcode sticker with a barcode printed on it is used as the detection object. If such a barcode reading method is adopted in the decorative unit 2180 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 200, for example, one barcode reader can be provided in the front decoration 2120 and one barcode sticker can be provided in the decorative unit 2180. In addition, the predetermined signal, the matching information, and the judgment process in the performance control board 2320 can be the same as in the above-mentioned color detection method and ID detection method.

In the above embodiment, whether the replaced parts are the correct ones is detected after the replacement operation, and the result of the determination process based on the detection result is notified to the operator, allowing the operator to recognize whether the replaced attached parts are the correct ones. In addition, these replaceable attached parts may be provided with an identification marking that is visible to the operator. For example, this identification marking may be unique according to the model or specifications, and may be a marking expressed by numbers, letters, symbols, etc. that are engraved so as to be identifiable from the surface of the part. If such an identification marking is provided on the replaced attached parts, the operator can visually confirm whether the combination of parts is correct before performing the replacement operation. In other words, if a gaming machine has replaceable attached parts provided with such an identification marking, it is possible to further prevent the installation of inappropriate parts during the replacement operation.

In the above embodiment, whether the part is the correct one or not is detected after the replacement operation and is notified by the main display device, etc., but the structure may be such that the replacement mounting part cannot be attached to the mounting position. Specifically, the mounting position and the mounting part may each have a concave/convex shape, and if the part is the correct one, they can be fitted together and attached. In particular, if the concave/convex shapes are unique according to the model and specifications, it is possible to prevent the fitting of an inappropriate part because the concave/convex shapes do not fit together. In other words, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the part from being replaced with an inappropriate part, and it is possible to further prevent the fitting of an inappropriate part during the replacement operation. In addition, such a configuration may be adopted for the sword handle unit 135 in the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment described above. For example, the first blade handle lock hole 1780 and the second blade handle lock hole 1770 of the blade handle unit 135 may be formed in different shapes for each model, and the first blade handle fixing pin 1887a and the second blade handle fixing pin 1897b of the glass frame 150 may also be formed in different shapes for each model so as to correspond to the first blade handle lock hole 1780 and the second blade handle lock hole 1770. More specifically, the shapes of the first and second handle lock holes 1780 and 1770 of the handle unit 135 and the first and second handle fixing pins 1887a and 1897b of the glass frame 150 are different between "Model XXX" and "Model YYY", and the first and second handle lock holes 1780 and 1770 of the handle unit 135 are configured so that the first and second handle fixing pins 1887a and 1897b of the handle unit 135 cannot fit into the first and second handle lock holes 1780 and 1770 of the handle unit 135. In other words, the configuration makes it impossible to attach the handle unit 135 of ...

In the above-mentioned embodiment, in the sword handle unit 135 and upper unit 180, the judgment process is executed by the performance control board 320 based on a predetermined signal from the control unit of the drive unit 1570 and the control unit of the mechanism unit 1755, but other detection means may be provided on these detachable members. Specifically, a reflector may be provided at the location where the mounting member is attached, and a reflective sensor may be provided on the mounting member side of the sword handle unit, etc., so that the detection results are transmitted from the mounting member to the performance control board 320. Even with this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the sword handle unit, etc. replaced by the replacement work is correct or not, and the same effect as the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved.

In the above embodiment, the performance control board or the like is configured to determine whether or not the part is the correct one, but it may be possible to make the determination using a specified terminal. For example, a code that displays specified information when photographed with a camera of a specified terminal may be displayed on the part to be replaced, and the result of the determination of whether or not the part is the correct one may be displayed on a specified terminal by photographing the code. Alternatively, image data of the entire gaming machine with the correct part attached may be stored in a specified server or the like outside the gaming machine, and whether or not the correct part is attached may be determined by image processing such as comparing the image data with an image of the entire gaming machine after the replacement work taken with a camera of a specified terminal. With such a method, the person performing the replacement work can easily know the result of the determination of whether or not the part is the correct one.

[Features of this embodiment]

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320, which are control means for controlling the game, the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are multiple notification means capable of executing notifications of predetermined types, and the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d, which are multiple detection means capable of detecting predetermined information, the control means is capable of detecting a first abnormal state and a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state by the multiple detection means, The notification means can execute the first abnormality notification based on the detection of the first abnormality state, which is an upper decorative part not attached error notification, the lower decorative part not attached error notification, and the upper unit not attached error notification (FIG. 14-1 (A) etc.), and the second abnormality notification based on the detection of the second abnormality state, which is an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, the lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, and the upper unit incorrect attachment error notification (FIG. 14-1 (B) etc.), and can be configured such that when the first abnormality state is eliminated during the execution of the first abnormality notification by a predetermined detection means among the multiple detection means, the first abnormality notification being executed is continued for a predetermined period (FIG. 14-1 (C)). With such a gaming machine, the first abnormality notification by the notification means is continued for a predetermined period even after the first abnormality state is eliminated, so that the replacement worker can recognize, for example, even if an abnormality occurs due to the replacement work, more reliably and easily than in the past. In the above description, the first abnormality notification is a state corresponding to an error notification such as an upper decorative part not being attached, and the second abnormality notification is a state corresponding to an error notification such as an upper decorative part being attached incorrectly, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (particularly, a state corresponding to a switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, an operator can easily recognize that an abnormal state has occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320, which are control means for controlling the game, the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are multiple notification means capable of executing notification of a predetermined mode, and the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, which are multiple detection means capable of detecting predetermined information, the control means detects the first abnormal state and The first abnormality notification means can detect a second abnormality state different from the first abnormality state, and the multiple notification means can execute a first abnormality notification based on the detection of the first abnormality state, such as an upper decorative part not being attached error notification, a lower decorative part not being attached error notification, and an upper unit not being attached error notification (FIG. 14-1(A) etc.), and a second abnormality notification based on the detection of the second abnormality state, such as an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, a lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, and an upper unit incorrect attachment error notification (FIG. 14-1(B) etc.), and the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be configured to be executed so that they have different priorities. With such a gaming machine, the person replacing the detachable member can easily recognize whether the first abnormality state and the second abnormality state, such as whether the correct detachable member is normally attached or not, have occurred with respect to the detachable member attached by the replacement work, by the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. Also, for example, if the second abnormal state is an abnormality that is more serious in the progress of the game than the first abnormal state, the priority of the second abnormal state notification can be set higher than the first abnormal state notification, so that the operator can easily recognize the occurrence of the second abnormal state at a more accurate timing than before. Note that, in the above description, the first abnormal state is a state corresponding to an upper decorative part not being attached error notification, and the second abnormal state is a state corresponding to an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (particularly, a state corresponding to a switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, the operator can easily recognize whether the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320 are control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a first means capable of executing a performance, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700 are second means to which the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750 can be attached, and the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342 are multiple notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the second means detects predetermined information related to the second means. In a gaming machine equipped with a game board connector 1620 and reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d, which are possible detection means, an upper decoration part 800, a lower decoration part 900, etc., which are third means different from the first means, can be attached to the second means, and the control means can be configured to execute an upper decoration part incorrect attachment error notification, a lower decoration part incorrect attachment error notification, and an upper unit incorrect attachment error notification (Figure 14-1 (B) etc.), which are abnormality notifications, by the notification means when the third means is attached to the second means. With such a gaming machine, the replacement worker can easily recognize, for example, that the member attached to the second means in the replacement work is a third means different from the first means, which is the original correct member, at an appropriate timing compared to conventional gaming machines, by the abnormality notification by the notification means. In the above description, the first means is a removable upper role decoration part 600, the second means is an upper role main body part 650, and the third means is an upper role decoration part 800, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first means may be various switches, the second means may be a main control board 300 and a performance control board 320 to which the various switches are connected, and the third means may be various switches different from the first means. Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, the operator can easily recognize the occurrence of an abnormal state at the correct timing compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320, which are control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a first means capable of executing a performance, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are second means to which the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750 can be attached, the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are multiple notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, which are detection means capable of detecting predetermined information related to the second means, the second means is a third means different from the first means, A certain upper decorative part 800 and a lower decorative part 900 can be attached, and when an abnormal attachment state occurs in which a third means is attached to the second means, the control means can execute a first abnormality alert, which is an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error alert, a lower decorative part incorrect attachment error alert, or an upper unit incorrect attachment error alert (Figure 14-1 (B) etc.), based on detection by the detection means, and when a specified abnormality state occurs that is different from the abnormal attachment state, the alert means can execute a second abnormality alert, which is different from the first abnormality alert, an upper decorative part not being attached error alert, a lower decorative part not being attached error alert, or an upper unit not being attached error alert (Figure 14-1 (A) etc.), and the first abnormality alert and the second abnormality alert can be configured to be executed so that they have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the replacement worker can easily recognize whether an installation abnormality state and a predetermined abnormality state, such as whether the correct detachable member is normally attached, have occurred with respect to the detachable member attached by the replacement work, by the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. In addition, for example, if the predetermined abnormality state is an abnormality that is more serious than the installation abnormality state in the progress of the game, the priority of the notification in the second abnormality notification can be set higher than that of the first abnormality notification, so that the worker can easily grasp the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality state at a more accurate timing than conventional gaming machines. In the above description, the predetermined abnormality state is a state corresponding to an upper decorative part not attached error notification, etc., but is not limited to this, and for example, the predetermined abnormality state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (particularly a state corresponding to a switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, the worker can easily recognize whether an installation abnormality state and a predetermined abnormality state have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320, which are control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a first means capable of executing a performance, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are second means to which the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750 can be attached, the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means capable of executing a notification of a predetermined type, and the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, which are detection means capable of detecting predetermined information related to the second means, the second means is different from the first means. The control means can be configured to execute the first abnormality notification, which is an upper decorative part not being attached error notification, the lower decorative part not being attached error notification, and the upper unit not being attached error notification (FIG. 14-1(A) etc.), by the notification means based on the detection by the detection means when the first means is in the first abnormality state where the first means is not normally attached, and to execute the second abnormality notification, which is different from the first abnormality notification, an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, a lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, and an upper unit incorrect attachment error notification (FIG. 14-1(B) etc.), by the notification means based on the detection by the detection means when the second abnormality state where the third means is attached is in the second abnormality state. With such a gaming machine, the replacement worker can easily recognize whether the first abnormality state and the second abnormality state, such as whether the correct member is normally attached or not, have occurred with respect to the member attached by the replacement work, by the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. In the above description, the first abnormal installation state corresponds to an error notification such as an upper decorative part not being attached, and the second abnormal installation state corresponds to an error notification such as an upper decorative part being incorrectly attached. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (particularly, a state corresponding to a switch connection error notification). Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, an operator can easily recognize whether the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320, which are control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, which is a first means capable of executing a performance, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are second means to which the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750 can be attached, the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, which are detection means capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means, the upper role decoration part 800 and the lower role decoration part 900, which are third means different from the first means, can be attached to the second means, and the control means detects when the first means is normally attached. In the case of a first abnormal installation state in which the third means is not attached, the alarm means can execute a first abnormality alarm, such as an upper decorative part not being attached error alarm, a lower decorative part not being attached error alarm, or an upper unit not being attached error alarm (Figure 14-1 (A) etc.), based on detection by the detection means; in the case of a second abnormal installation state in which the third means is attached, the alarm means can execute a second abnormality alarm different from the first abnormality alarm, such as an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error alarm, a lower decorative part incorrect attachment error alarm, or an upper unit incorrect attachment error alarm (Figure 14-1 (B) etc.); in the case of a specified abnormality state different from the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state, the alarm means can execute various alarms (Figures 15-1 to 15-11), which are third abnormality alarms, and the alarm means can be configured to be executable so that the first abnormality alarm or the second abnormality alarm and the third abnormality alarm have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the replacement worker can easily recognize whether the first and second abnormal installation states, such as whether the correct member is normally installed, have occurred in the member installed by the replacement work, by the first and second abnormality notifications by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. In addition, for example, if the predetermined abnormal state is an abnormality that is more serious than the first and second abnormal installation states in the progress of the game, the priority of the notification in the third abnormality notification can be set higher than the first or second abnormality notification, so that the worker can easily grasp the occurrence of the predetermined abnormal state at a more accurate timing than conventionally. In the above description, the first abnormal installation state is a state corresponding to an upper decorative part not attached error notification, and the second abnormal installation state is a state corresponding to an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the first and second abnormal installation states may be any state corresponding to various notifications (particularly, a state corresponding to a switch connection error notification). Even with this type of gaming machine, as described above, the operator can easily determine whether the first and second abnormal installation states have occurred, compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment includes the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are detachable members, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are main body members to which the detachable members are attached, and the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means capable of issuing a notification of a predetermined type, and the main body member includes the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensor 68, which are detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable members. 0a-680d, 780a-780d, and the control means can execute the predetermined event notification by the notification means, such as an upper decorative part not being attached error notification, a lower decorative part not being attached error notification, and an upper unit not being attached error notification (FIG. 14-1 (A) etc.), when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, and can execute the predetermined event notification by the notification means, such as an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, a lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, and an upper unit incorrect attachment error notification (FIG. 14-1 (B) etc.). With such a gaming machine, the person replacing the detachable member can easily recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event, such as whether the correct detachable member is properly attached or not, have occurred with respect to the detachable member attached by the replacement work, by the predetermined event notification by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. In particular, in the audio output device 331, for example, the upper decorative part not-attached error notification and the upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification have the same output content that allows the target of the specified event to be identified, so the operator can recognize it more easily. Note that in the above description, the first specified event is an event corresponding to the upper decorative part not-attached error notification, etc., and the second specified event is an event corresponding to the upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, etc., but this is not limited to this, and for example, the first specified event and the second specified event may be any event corresponding to various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, as described above, the operator can easily recognize whether the first specified event and the second specified event have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the gaming machine 100 includes the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are detachable detachable members, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are main body members to which the detachable members are attached, and the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the main body member has the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, which are detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable members, and the control means issues a notification when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs. The notification means can issue predetermined event alerts such as an upper decorative part not being attached error alert, a lower decorative part not being attached error alert, and an upper unit not being attached error alert (Figure 14-1 (A) etc.), and if a second predetermined event based on predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, the notification means can issue predetermined event alerts such as an upper decorative part incorrectly attached error alert, a lower decorative part incorrectly attached error alert, and an upper unit incorrectly attached error alert (Figure 14-1 (B) etc.), and if a third predetermined event different from the first and second predetermined events occurs, the notification means can issue various alerts (Figures 15-1 to 15-11) which are specific event alerts different from the predetermined event alerts, and the configuration can be such that the predetermined event alert and the specific event alert have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the operator who replaces the detachable member can easily recognize whether the first and second predetermined events, such as whether the correct detachable member is normally attached, have occurred with respect to the detachable member attached by the replacement work, by the predetermined event notification by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. In particular, in the sound output device 331, for example, the upper decorative part non-attachment error notification and the upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification have the same output content that allows the operator to identify the target of the predetermined event, so the operator can recognize it more easily. Furthermore, for example, if the third predetermined event is an abnormality that is more serious in the progress of the game than the first and second predetermined events, the priority of the specific event notification can be set higher than the predetermined event notification, so the operator can easily grasp the occurrence of the third predetermined event at a more accurate timing than before. In the above description, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to an error notification such as an upper decorative part not being attached, and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to an error notification such as an upper decorative part being incorrectly attached, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications. As described above, even with such a gaming machine, the operator can easily recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the gaming machine 100 includes the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are detachable members, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are main body members to which the detachable members are attached, and the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the main body member includes the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensor 680a, which are detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable members. 14-680d, 780a-780d, and the control means, when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, can execute a predetermined first event notification by the notification means, such as an upper decorative part not being attached error notification, a lower decorative part not being attached error notification, and an upper unit not being attached error notification (FIG. 14-1 (A) etc.), and when a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, can execute a predetermined second event notification by the notification means, such as an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, a lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, and an upper unit incorrect attachment error notification (FIG. 14-1 (B) etc.). With such a gaming machine, the person replacing the detachable member can easily recognize whether or not a first predetermined event and a second predetermined event have occurred, such as whether or not the correct detachable member is normally attached, with respect to the detachable member attached by the replacement work, by the first event notification and the second event notification by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. In the above description, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to an error notification such as an upper decorative part not being attached, and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to an error notification such as an upper decorative part being incorrectly attached, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications. As described above, even with such a gaming machine, the operator can easily recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment includes the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are detachable members, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are main body members to which the detachable members are attached, and the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the main body member has the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, which are detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable members, and the control means controls the notification means when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs. Therefore, it is possible to execute predetermined first event alerts such as an upper decorative part not being attached error alert, a lower decorative part not being attached error alert, and an upper unit not being attached error alert (Figure 14-1 (A) etc.), and when a second predetermined event based on predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, the alert means can execute predetermined second event alerts such as an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error alert, a lower decorative part incorrect attachment error alert, and an upper unit incorrect attachment error alert (Figure 14-1 (B) etc.), and when a third predetermined event different from the first and second predetermined events occurs, the alert means can execute various alerts (Figures 15-1 to 15-11) which are third event alerts different from the first and second event alerts, and the configuration can be such that the first event alert and the third event alert can be executed with different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the worker who replaces the detachable member can easily recognize whether the first and second predetermined events, such as whether the correct detachable member is normally attached, have occurred with respect to the detachable member attached by the replacement work, by the first and second event notifications by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. In addition, since the first and second event notifications are different in type, the worker can more easily recognize that the first or second predetermined event has occurred. Furthermore, for example, if the third predetermined event is an abnormality or the like that is more serious in the progress of the game than the first and second predetermined events, the priority of the notification in the specific event notification can be set higher than the first event notification, so that the worker can easily grasp the occurrence of the third predetermined event at a more accurate timing than before. In the above description, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to an error notification such as an upper decorative part not being attached, and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to an error notification such as an upper decorative part being incorrectly attached, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications. As described above, even with such a gaming machine, the operator can easily recognize whether the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event have occurred compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320, which are control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are first means capable of executing a performance, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are second means different from the first means, the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are multiple notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d, which are detection means capable of detecting predetermined information regarding the second means, the control means can be configured to be able to execute an installation error notification (Figures 14-1 to 14-4), which is an abnormality notification, by the notification means when the second means is in a predetermined abnormal state. With such a gaming machine, the worker replacing the detachable member can more easily recognize, by the abnormality notification from the notification means, whether a predetermined abnormal state has occurred with respect to the detachable member installed by the replacement work, such as whether the correct detachable member is installed properly. Note that, in the above description, the predetermined abnormal state is a state corresponding to an attachment error notification, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the predetermined abnormal state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (particularly a state corresponding to a switch connection error notification). With such a gaming machine, as described above, the worker can more easily recognize whether a predetermined abnormal state has occurred, compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the main control board 300 and the performance control board 320 are control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700 are second means to which the upper unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750 are attached, which are first means capable of executing a performance, the main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342 are multiple notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d are first detection means capable of detecting first information related to the second means, and the second detection means capable of detecting second information different from the first information related to the two means. In a gaming machine having a performance control board 320 which is a stage, the control means is capable of executing a first abnormality alert, which is an upper decorative part not being attached error alert, a lower decorative part not being attached error alert, or an upper unit not being attached error alert (Figure 14-1 (A) etc.), by the alarm means based on detection by the first detection means, when the installation state of the first means is a predetermined first abnormality state, and when it is a predetermined second abnormality state different from the first abnormality state, the control means is capable of executing a second abnormality alert, which is an upper decorative part incorrectly attached error alert, a lower decorative part incorrectly attached error alert, or an upper unit incorrectly attached error alert (Figure 14-1 (B) etc.), by the alarm means based on detection by the second detection means, and the first abnormality alert and the second abnormality alert can be configured to be executed so that they have different priorities. In such a gaming machine, the replacement worker can easily recognize whether the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state, such as whether the correct member is normally attached, have occurred in the member attached by the replacement work, by the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification by the notification means, compared to conventional gaming machines. In addition, for example, if the first abnormal state is an abnormality that is more serious than the second abnormal state in the progress of the game, the priority of the notification in the first abnormality notification can be set higher than that of the second abnormality notification, so that the worker can easily grasp the occurrence of the first abnormal state at a more accurate timing than conventionally. In the above description, the first abnormal state is a state corresponding to an upper decorative part not attached error notification, etc., and the second abnormal state is a state corresponding to an upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, etc., but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the first abnormal state and the second abnormal state may be any state corresponding to various notifications (particularly, a state corresponding to a switch connection error notification). Even with this type of gaming machine, as described above, the operator can easily recognize whether the first and second abnormal conditions have occurred, compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the gaming machine 100 includes the performance control board 320, which is a performance control means for controlling the performance according to the progress of the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are performance members controlled by the performance control means and configured to be attached and detached in a predetermined procedure, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are main body members to which the performance members are attached, which are controlled by the performance control means, and the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means controlled by the performance control means and capable of executing notifications of a predetermined type. 42, the main body member has a game board connector 1620 and reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d, which are detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the performance member, and the performance control means can execute a mounting error notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4) which is a first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event by the notification means when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a first predetermined event, and can execute various notifications (FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11) which are second event notifications corresponding to the second predetermined event by the notification means when a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs. With such a gaming machine, for example, the first event notification by the notification means allows the replacement worker to easily recognize whether the performance member installed by the replacement work is the correct member or not, compared to conventional gaming machines. Furthermore, by notifying the operator of the second event using the notification means, the operator can more easily recognize whether or not a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event has occurred, compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the gaming machine 100 includes the performance control board 320, which is a performance control means for controlling the performance according to the progress of the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are performance members controlled by the performance control means and configured to be attached and detached in a predetermined procedure, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are main body members to which the performance members are attached, which are controlled by the performance control means, and the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means controlled by the performance control means and capable of executing notifications of a predetermined type, and the main body member includes the game board connector 1620 and the reflective sensors 680a to 680d, which are detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the performance members. , 780a to 780d, and the performance control means, when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a first predetermined event, can execute a mounting error notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4) which is a first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event by the notification means, when a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs, can execute various notifications (FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11) which are second event notifications corresponding to the second predetermined event by the notification means, when a third predetermined event different from the first and second predetermined events occurs, can execute various notifications (FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11) which are third event notifications corresponding to the third predetermined event by the notification means, and can be configured to be executable so that the priority of notifications is different between the first event notification and the third event notification. With such a gaming machine, for example, the first event notification by the notification means allows the replacement worker to easily recognize whether the performance member attached by the replacement work is the correct member or not, compared to conventional gaming machines. Furthermore, the second and third event notifications by the notification means allow the operator to more easily recognize whether or not not only the second predetermined event, which is different from the first predetermined event, but also the third predetermined event has occurred, as compared to conventional gaming machines. Furthermore, for example, if the third predetermined event is an abnormality or the like that is more serious in the progress of the game than the first and second predetermined events, the third event notification can be given a higher priority than the first and second event notifications, so the operator can easily recognize the occurrence of the third predetermined event at a more accurate timing than before.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment includes the presentation control board 320, which is a presentation control means for controlling presentations according to the progress of the game, the upper unit 180, which is a first presentation member controlled by the presentation control means and configured to be detachable in a predetermined procedure, the role unit 102B, which is a main body member to which the first presentation member is attached, which is controlled by the presentation control means, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156, which are second presentation members controlled by the presentation control means and execute a predetermined type of operating presentation according to the progress of the game, and the notification means, which is controlled by the presentation control means and is capable of executing a predetermined type of notification. The main display device 131, the audio output device 331, the performance board illumination device 341, and the performance frame illumination device 342 are provided, and the main body member has a game board connector 1620 which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the first performance member, and the performance control means can execute a predetermined event notification corresponding to the predetermined event, such as an upper unit not installed error notification and an upper unit incorrect installation error notification (FIG. 14-3), by the notification means when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a predetermined event, and can be configured to execute an operation in a predetermined manner by the second performance member regardless of the occurrence of the predetermined event. With such a gaming machine, the replacement worker can easily recognize the occurrence of a predetermined event, such as whether the first performance member installed by the replacement work is an appropriate member and is normally installed, compared to conventional gaming machines, by the predetermined event notification by the notification means. In addition, by performing an initial operation by the second performance member regardless of the occurrence of the predetermined event, for example, if no abnormality or the like occurs in the second performance member, the worker can easily recognize that no abnormality or the like occurs compared to conventional gaming machines.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment includes the performance control board 320, which is a performance control means for controlling the performance according to the progress of the game, the upper unit 180, which is a first performance member controlled by the performance control means and configured to be detachable in a predetermined procedure, the role unit 102B, which is a main body member to which the first performance member is attached, the upper role unit 154 and the lower role unit 156, which are second performance members controlled by the performance control means and execute a predetermined type of operating performance according to the progress of the game, and the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means controlled by the performance control means and capable of executing a predetermined type of notification. The main body member is the first performance member. The game machine has a game board connector 1620 which is a detection means for detecting the predetermined information related to the above, and the performance control means, when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a first predetermined event, can execute a first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event, such as an upper unit not installed error notification or an upper unit incorrect installation error notification (FIG. 14-3), by the notification means, and can execute an operation in a predetermined manner by the second performance member regardless of the occurrence of the first predetermined event, and when a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs, can execute various notifications (FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11) which are second event notifications corresponding to the second predetermined event by the notification means, and can be configured to be executable so that the first event notification and the second event notification have different priorities. With such a gaming machine, the first event notification by the notification means allows the replacement worker to easily recognize the occurrence of the first predetermined event, such as whether the first performance member installed by the replacement work is an appropriate member or not, compared to conventional gaming machines. In addition, by performing an initial operation by the second performance member regardless of whether the first predetermined event occurs, for example, when no abnormality occurs in the second performance member, the operator can more easily recognize that the abnormality has not occurred than in the past. Furthermore, by notifying the second event by the notifying means, the operator can more easily recognize whether a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event has occurred than in the past gaming machines. And, for example, when the second predetermined event is an abnormality that is more serious in the progress of the game than the first predetermined event, the second event notification can be given a higher priority than the first event notification, so the operator can easily recognize the occurrence of the second predetermined event at a more accurate timing than in the past.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the main control board 300 is a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, the presentation control board 320 is a presentation control means for controlling presentations according to the progress of the game, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body 650, and the lower role main body 750 are main body members controlled by the presentation control means, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700 are presentation members that are controlled by the presentation control means and can be attached to and detached from the main body member, and the main display 102B is an alarm means controlled by the presentation control means and can execute a predetermined alarm. The gaming machine includes a device 131, an audio output device 331, a performance board lighting device 341, a performance frame lighting device 342, and an identification display unit 1532, 632, 732 that is a display unit that displays predetermined information related to the attachment and detachment of the performance member, and the performance control means can execute an attachment judgment as to whether the performance member is normally attached to the main body member, and if the attachment judgment determines that the performance member is not normally attached and is in an abnormal state, the notification means can execute an attachment error notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4) that is an abnormal notification corresponding to the abnormal state. With such a gaming machine, the person replacing the performance member can perform the replacement work more easily in accordance with the predetermined information on the display unit than with conventional gaming machines that do not have such a display unit. In addition, the abnormal notification by the notification means allows the replacement worker to recognize whether the performance member installed by the replacement work is normally attached or not more easily than with conventional gaming machines.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, there is a main control board 300 which is a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control board 320 which is a presentation control means for controlling presentations according to the progress of the game, a role unit 102B which is a main body member controlled by the presentation control means, an upper role main body part 650, a lower role main body part 750, an upper unit 180 which is a presentation member that can be attached to and detached from the main body member, an upper role decoration part 600, a lower role decoration part 700 which are controlled by the presentation control means, a main display device 131 which is an alarm means that can execute a predetermined alarm, a sound output device 331, a performance board lighting device 341, a performance frame lighting device 342 which are controlled by the presentation control means, and an identification table which is a display unit that displays predetermined information related to the attachment and detachment of the performance member. The game machine includes a display unit 1532, 632, 732, and the performance control means can execute an attachment determination as to whether or not the performance member is normally attached to the main body member, and when the attachment determination determines that the performance member is not normally attached to the first abnormal state, the notification means can execute a mounting error notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4) which is a first abnormality notification corresponding to the first abnormality state, and can execute an abnormality determination as to whether or not the performance member is in a second abnormality state different from the first abnormality state, and when the abnormality determination determines that the performance member is in a second abnormality state, the notification means can execute various notifications (FIGS. 15-1 to 15-11) which are second abnormality notifications, and the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification have different priorities. With such a game machine, a person who replaces the performance member can easily perform the replacement work in accordance with the predetermined information on the display unit compared to a conventional game machine that does not have such a display unit. Furthermore, the first abnormality notification by the notification means allows the replacement worker to more easily determine whether the performance member installed by the replacement work is installed normally, as compared to conventional gaming machines. Furthermore, the second abnormality notification by the notification means allows the worker to more easily determine whether a second abnormality different from the first abnormality has occurred, as compared to conventional gaming machines. And, for example, if the second abnormality is an abnormality that is more serious in the progress of the game than the first abnormality, the second abnormality notification can be executed with a higher priority, so the worker can easily grasp the occurrence of the second abnormality at a more accurate timing than before.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment includes an inner frame 170, which is a first frame that is rotatably supported relative to an outer frame 160, which is a gaming machine frame, and can be maintained in a closed or open state, a glass frame 150, which is a second frame that is rotatably supported relative to the first frame and can be maintained in a closed or open state, and a RAM clear switch 302a and a setting key switch 302b, which are setting means that can set a setting value that determines the probability of a special game being executed that is advantageous to the player, to a predetermined value, and the setting means can be configured such that when the first frame is in an open state and the second frame is in an open state, the setting value can be set to a predetermined value, and when the first frame is in a closed state but the second frame is in an open state, the setting value can be set to a predetermined value. With such a gaming machine, the worker can change the settings associated with replacement work in accordance with changes to the gaming machine's specifications, etc., simply by opening the second frame, the glass frame 150, regardless of whether the first frame, the inner frame 170, is in the open or closed state. This makes it easier to perform this work than in the past, when the setting value could not be changed unless both the first and second frames were open.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment includes an inner frame 170, which is a first frame that is rotatably supported relative to an outer frame 160, which is a gaming machine frame, and can be maintained in a closed or open state, a glass frame 150, which is a second frame that is rotatably supported relative to the first frame and can be maintained in a closed or open state, and a RAM clear switch 302a and a setting key switch 302b, which are setting means that can set a setting value that determines the probability of a special game being executed that is advantageous to the player, to a predetermined value, and the setting means can be configured such that when the first frame is in an open state and the second frame is in an open state, the setting value can be set to a predetermined value, and when the first frame is in an open state but the second frame is in a closed state, the setting value can be set to a predetermined value. With such a gaming machine, the worker can change the settings associated with replacement work in accordance with changes to the gaming machine's specifications, etc., simply by opening the first frame, the inner frame 170, regardless of whether the second frame, the glass frame 150, is open or closed. This makes it easier to perform this work than in the past, when the setting value could not be changed unless both the first and second frames were open.

As described above, the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment includes the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are detachable members, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are main body members to which the detachable members are attached, the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means capable of executing notifications of a predetermined type, and the RAM clear switch 302a and the setting key switch 302b, which are setting means capable of setting a setting value that determines the probability of a special game being executed, and the main body member detects predetermined information related to the detachable members. The game machine has a game board connector 1620 as a detection means and reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d, and the control means is capable of executing a setting change notification (FIG. 15-3) which is a specific event notification by the notification means when a first predetermined event for which a setting value can be set by the setting means occurs, and is capable of executing a mounting error notification (FIGS. 14-1 to 14-4) which is a specific event notification different from the specific event notification by the notification means when a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, and is capable of executing a specific event notification without executing a specific event notification by the notification means when the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occur. With such a game machine, the notification means executes a setting change notification without executing a mounting error notification when the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occur, so that the operator can easily recognize the setting change notification which is more important in the progress of the game than the mounting error notification compared to the conventional method. In the above description, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to a setting change, and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to an attachment error notification, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the first predetermined event may be any event corresponding to an attachment error notification or various notifications, and the second predetermined event may be any event corresponding to an attachment error notification or various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment described above, the gaming machine 100 includes the performance control board 320, which is a control means for controlling the game, the upper unit 180, the upper role decoration part 600, and the lower role decoration part 700, which are detachable members, the role unit 102B, the upper role main body part 650, and the lower role main body part 750, which are main body members to which the detachable members are attached, and the main display device 131, the sound output device 331, the performance board lighting device 341, and the performance frame lighting device 342, which are notification means capable of issuing notifications of a predetermined type. 42, the main body member has a game board connector 1620, which is a detection means for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable member, and reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d, and the control means can be configured to execute a mounting error notification and a switch connection error notification (FIG. 15-6(C)) which are predetermined event notifications by the notification means when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means and a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occur. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a first predetermined event corresponding to the mounting error notification and a second predetermined event corresponding to the switch connection error notification occur, the notification means executes a mounting error notification and a switch connection error notification, so that the operator can easily recognize both the mounting error notification and the switch connection error notification, which are important in the progress of the game, compared to the conventional method. In the above description, the first predetermined event is an event corresponding to an attachment error notification, and the second predetermined event is an event corresponding to a switch connection error notification, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first predetermined event may be any event corresponding to various notifications, and the second predetermined event may be an attachment error notification and any event corresponding to various notifications. Even with such a gaming machine, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with a radio wave detection sensor 305b which is a first detection means capable of detecting a first fraud from outside the gaming machine, a magnetic detection sensor 305a which is a second detection means capable of detecting a second fraud from outside the gaming machine, a main control board 300 and a performance control board 320 which are control means for controlling the game, and a main display device 131, a sound output device 331, a performance board lighting device 341, and a performance frame lighting device 342 which are multiple notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, the control means is configured to be capable of executing a radio wave error notification, which is a first abnormality notification, by the notification means, when a first abnormality is based on detection by the first detection means, and to be capable of executing a magnetic error notification, which is a second abnormality notification, by the notification means, when a second abnormality is based on detection by the second detection means, and to be configured to execute a first abnormality notification for a predetermined period of time even if the second abnormality has occurred, when both the first abnormality and the second abnormality have occurred and the first abnormality occurred before the second abnormality. With such a gaming machine, even if both the first and second abnormalities occur, the first abnormality that occurred first will be executed for a specified period of time, allowing the operator to accurately grasp the serious abnormality that occurred first in the progress of the game.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 100 of the above-mentioned embodiment, in a gaming machine equipped with a radio wave detection sensor 305b which is a first detection means capable of detecting a first fraud from outside the gaming machine, a magnetic detection sensor 305a which is a second detection means capable of detecting a second fraud from outside the gaming machine, a main control board 300 and a performance control board 320 which are control means for controlling the game, and a main display device 131, a sound output device 331, a performance board lighting device 341, and a performance frame lighting device 342 which are multiple notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, the control means is configured so that when a first abnormality is detected based on the first detection means, the notification means can execute a radio wave error notification which is a first abnormality notification of a predetermined type, and when a second abnormality is detected based on the second detection means, the notification means can execute a magnetic error notification which is a second abnormality notification of a predetermined type, and the second abnormality notification can be configured to be executed so that the second abnormality notification has a higher priority than the first abnormality notification. In such a gaming machine, for example, if the second abnormal condition is a more serious abnormality in the progress of the game than the first abnormal condition, the second abnormality notification can be given a higher priority than the first abnormality notification, allowing the operator to easily grasp the occurrence of the second abnormal condition at a more accurate timing than before.

[Third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
(Game status)
As shown in FIG. 18, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as in the conventional gaming machine, there are cases where the game state transitions from the "normal gaming state" to the "time-saving gaming state (first advantageous gaming state)" via the "jackpot game" ((A) → (B)), and cases where the "time-saving gaming state (first advantageous gaming state or second advantageous gaming state)" executes a "jackpot game" when a jackpot is determined by the jackpot determination process ((C)), and cases where the game state transitions to the "normal gaming state" when a jackpot is not determined ((E)). Furthermore, unlike the conventional gaming machine, when a "predetermined condition is met" in the "normal gaming state", it is possible to transition to the "time-saving gaming state (second advantageous gaming state)" ((B)) without going through a jackpot game. In addition, when a game state transitions from a "normal game state" to a "time-saving game state" via a "jackpot game", the number of times that a game can be played in the "high-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state)" is a predetermined number such as "80 times" or "100 times", and the number of times that a game can be played in the "low-probability time-saving game state (second time-saving game state)" is a predetermined number such as "80 times" or "100 times". On the other hand, when a game state transitions from a "normal game state" to a "low-probability time-saving game state (third or fourth time-saving game state)" without a "jackpot game", the number of times that a game can be played is, for example, "700 times". In other words, the number of times that the "time-saving game state" can be played is greater when the "time-saving game state" is transitioned from the "normal game state" to the "time-saving game state" by "establishment of a predetermined condition" without going through the "jackpot game" than when the "normal game state" is transitioned to the "time-saving game state" via the "jackpot game". For example, in this embodiment, the number of times that the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state can be set to "700 times" so that the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal game state is about 3.8 times or less of the reciprocal of the lowest probability (1/300 when the set value is "1"). The first time-saving game state and/or the second time-saving game state may be referred to as the first advantageous game state. The third time-saving game state and/or the fourth time-saving game state may be referred to as the second advantageous game state.

The number of times that the "fourth time-saving game state" can be played may be set differently depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbol is displayed. For example, when the time-saving symbol is displayed in the "time-saving game state", the number of times that the game can be played may be set to be greater than when the time-saving symbol is displayed in the "normal game state", or may be set to be less than when the time-saving symbol is displayed in the "normal game state".

Here, in this embodiment, the "establishment of a predetermined condition" refers to a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition. The first predetermined condition is when the cumulative number "n", which is the number of times the variable display of the special symbol executed from the "starting point", reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the main RAM 301c is provided with an area for counting and storing the cumulative number "n", which is the number of times the variable display of the special symbol in the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" reaches a predetermined number, and when the cumulative number "n" counted and stored in the area reaches a predetermined number, the "low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state)" is shifted to the "low probability time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)". The second predetermined condition is when the game stops on a preset "time-saving pattern (specific losing pattern)", and in this case, the game is shifted from the "normal game state" to the "low probability time-saving game state (fourth time-saving game state)". The ratio at which the "time-saving pattern" is determined may be any ratio. For example, the probability may be the same as or close to the probability of determining a jackpot for each set value, or may be a probability that is more difficult to determine than the probability of determining a jackpot for each set value, or may be a probability that is easier to determine. In addition, "the fulfillment of a specified condition" may include only one of the first and second specified conditions, or may include both conditions, or may include conditions other than these conditions.

The predetermined number of times in the first predetermined condition can be set to any number according to the probability of being determined as a jackpot for each set value. For example, in this embodiment, the predetermined number of times can be set to "800 (times)" so that the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the normal game state is about 2.5 times or more and about 3.0 times or less of the reciprocal of the highest probability (1/270 when the set value is "4"). Furthermore, the "starting point" can be set to, for example, the time when the "jackpot game" ends or the time when the RAM is cleared when the setting is changed as described above. In other words, in the area in the main RAM 301c that counts and stores the cumulative number of times "n" is initialized at the time of transition to the "jackpot game" or the end of the "jackpot game", or when the RAM is cleared. In addition, multiple types of patterns may be set in advance as the "time-saving pattern" in the second predetermined condition, and the number of times that can be played in the time-saving game state 4 may be set to different numbers for each type of "time-saving pattern".

This allows the player to decide whether or not to play, and reduces the number of players who play randomly. Also, for example, if the predetermined number of times is about "800 times", it is a relief for players who have not won a big win for a long time.
This leads to the prevention of players abandoning games, etc. Furthermore, when a "time-shortened game state" is entered due to "the satisfaction of a predetermined condition," the number of possible play times in the "low-probability time-shortened game state (third or fourth time-shortened game state)" is greater than when a "low-probability time-shortened game state (second time-shortened game state)" is entered via a "jackpot game," so that players are encouraged to actively try playing the "low-probability non-time-shortened game state (normal game state)," and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Example of normal game mode)
An example of the change in the normal game state will be described below.

(Performance design - normal design)
In the normal game state, a normal pattern is set as the performance pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 131, which is basically composed of an identification part consisting of a number part (identification number) and a decoration part consisting of decorations such as characters and frames. The normal pattern may be used in common in different performance modes, but multiple types of normal patterns may be set, such as using normal patterns of different forms in the first and second variable paths described below, or using normal patterns of different forms in the performance modes A and B. For example, in the first variable path shown in FIG. 19, the normal pattern as the performance pattern 70a is composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). In the second variation path shown in FIG. 20, the normal pattern as the performance pattern 70a is composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a decorative portion consisting of a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character, and an identification portion consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number portion (identification character), and even if it has the same identification number as the first variation path, the form is different. Note that the normal pattern used in the normal game state is not limited to one composed of the above-mentioned decorative portion (character image, etc.) and identification portion, but may be a simple configuration consisting of only the identification portion or the identification portion and a pattern frame. In addition, the normal pattern may have a decorative portion (character, etc.) arranged in the identification portion (number).

(Performance design - unique design)
As the performance pattern 70a, a special pattern may be set in addition to the normal pattern having an identification part (identification information) by numbers such as "1" to "9" or symbols such as "A" to "Z". As the special pattern, for example, a change pattern (a first change pattern indicating that the reserved icon changes to a display mode with a one-step higher expectation level, a second change pattern indicating that the reserved icon changes to a display mode with a two-step higher expectation level) that is displayed in a stopped state to suggest (notify) the occurrence of an icon change notice, or a pseudo consecutive pattern that is displayed in a stopped state to suggest (notify) the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive performance, etc. can be set.

In normal game mode, the background images corresponding to the multiple presentation modes set will scroll left and right (in a reciprocating motion).

Even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state), the basic flow is the same as in the normal game state. Specifically, the first reserved number, the first special symbol memory designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 120, the first special symbol reserved display 123, the sub-first variable display (not shown), the sub-first reserved display (not shown), the first reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp symbol, and the first starting device 112 can be read as the second reserved number, the second special symbol memory designation command, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 122, the second special symbol reserved display 124, the sub-second variable display (not shown), the sub-second reserved display (not shown), the second reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp symbol, and the second starting device 115. In the special game state, the background image corresponding to each of the multiple types and numbers of set presentation modes scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion). Also, in the special game state, the presentation pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 131 is composed only of an identification section consisting of a number section (identification character). The items exemplified in the normal game state may be applied to the special game state, and vice versa.

(Example of variation 1)
FIG. 19 shows the case of presentation mode A in the normal gaming state.

When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command (start cd) sent as start commands from the main control unit 110m, the display of the variations of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and first lamp symbol on the sub first variation display begins (see FIG. 19(a)). At this time, the display of the variations of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display 120.

On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left, center and right columns is displayed changing along a vertical scrolling path that flows from top to bottom. The special symbol TZ is displayed changing along a path in which the numbers change on the spot. The first lamp symbol and the first special symbol are displayed changing along a path that is caused by the illumination (flashing) of a single or multiple LEDs and changes in the illumination position. In this way, the path of the performance symbol 70a is different from the special symbol TZ, the first lamp symbol and the first special symbol.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance patterns 70a slightly sway (swaying display) up and down from the predetermined stopping position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 19 (b)). In this way, during the variable stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop, a variable stop suggestion performance is executed that includes the swaying motion of the performance pattern 70a itself at the time of the temporary stop and the swaying motion (performance action) of the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE.

In this way, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, it is possible to execute a fluctuation stop suggestion effect and a fluctuation stop display of the effect pattern 70a. Note that the fluctuation suggestion effect may be the period from when the fluctuation stop suggestion effect starts until the effect pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, the "fluctuation stop display" of the effect pattern 70a includes a provisionally stopped state of the effect pattern 70a, and is not limited to a definite stop state in which the effect pattern 70a has been confirmed and stopped.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 120. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see FIG. 19(c)), and the first lamp pattern stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub first variable display.

When the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the first special pattern display 120 starts displaying the variation of the first special pattern. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance pattern designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the variation display of the one lamp pattern on the sub first variation display are started. Note that the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the operation of a part of the decorative part or the whole or part of the decorative part expanding and contracting as in this embodiment (see FIG. 19 (d)). In this way, when the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, a variation start performance is executed, including the swinging operation of the performance pattern 70 and the performance operation of moving the arms of the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a. After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image continues. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performative) (see FIG. 19(e)).

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed, and the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a are displayed in a temporary stopped state in a losing state ("164"), indicating that the fluctuation has stopped. In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH (performance operation) continue (see FIG. 19(f)).

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 120. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see FIG. 19(g)), and the first lamp pattern on the sub first variable display stops in a losing state (for example, off).

When the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 120 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol on the sub first variation display start displaying. At this time, the variation start performance of the performance symbol 70a is executed, and the performance symbol 70a scrolls (see FIG. 19(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 19(i)).

In this way, in presentation mode A, the first change path change presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a flows from top to bottom is repeated. In addition, the change start presentation and change stop suggestion presentation for the first change path performance are basically repeated unless a special presentation such as a pre-reading presentation or teasing is executed.

(Example of variation 2)
FIG. 20 shows the case of presentation mode B in the normal gaming state.

When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command (start cd) sent as start commands from the main control unit 110m, the display of the variations of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variation display begins (see FIG. 20(a)). At this time, the display of the variations of the first special symbol begins on the first special symbol display 120.

On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left, center, and right columns is displayed in a variable path that flows in a horizontal circular shape. Also, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable path in which the numbers change on the spot. Here, for convenience, the combination of the variable paths in the left, center, and right columns in performance mode B is referred to as the second variable path. Note that the first lamp symbol and the first special symbol are displayed in a variable path that changes due to the illumination (flashing) of a single or multiple LEDs and changes in the illumination position. In this way, the second variable path of the performance symbol 70a is different from the special symbol TZ, the first lamp symbol, and the first special symbol. Even in the variable performance of the second variable path, the variable path and variable display mode of the special symbol TZ, the first lamp symbol, and the first special symbol are the same as in the variable performance of the first variable path.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns are temporarily stopped in a losing state ("285"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly shaking (swinging display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, a part of the character image CG constituting the performance pattern 70a moves (waving arms), and the pattern effect image ZE performs a shaking movement (performance movement). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance movement) (see FIG. 20 (b)). In this way, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period suggesting that the performance pattern 70a will be stopped, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed that includes the shaking movement of the performance pattern 70a itself at the time of the temporary stop, the movement (performance movement) of a part of the character image CG, and the fluctuation movement (performance movement) of the pattern effect image ZE. Therefore, even in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance and the fluctuation stop display of the performance pattern 70a can be executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period.

During the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation presentation of the second fluctuation path, a fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the same type as that of the first fluctuation path may be executed, but in the embodiment, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, a fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of a different type is executed for the first fluctuation path and the second fluctuation path. In this way, not only the fluctuation paths are different, but also the impression can be changed by the difference in the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, between the fluctuation performances of different fluctuation paths, the overall appearance of the performance elements that make up the fluctuation stop suggestion performance (for example, performances such as the movement (change) of the performance pattern 70a itself, such as swinging or rotating, performances such as the movement (change) and light emission of the pattern components such as the character image and identification part that make up the performance pattern 70a, and performances such as the movement (change) and light emission of the associated elements such as effects and characters that accompany the performance pattern 70a) may be different. Between the fluctuation performances of different fluctuation paths, the appearance of some of the performance elements that make up the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be different (for example, the movement appearance of the character image), and other parts of the performance elements (for example, the swing appearance of the performance pattern 70a) may be the same.

The different aspects of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect may mean that the timing at which the fluctuation stop suggestion effect is executed is different, or the length of the execution period of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect is different. In addition, the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the second fluctuation path may be the same length or different lengths.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 120. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see FIG. 20(c)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (for example, off) on the sub first variable display.

When the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the first special pattern display 120 starts displaying the variation of the first special pattern. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance pattern designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the variation display of the one lamp pattern on the sub first variation display are started. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after a preparatory operation such as a part of the character image CG moving, or a whole or part of it swinging or expanding/shrinking (see FIG. 20(d)). In this way, when the performance pattern 70a starts to change (during the variation start period), a variation start performance including a swinging operation of the performance pattern 70 and a performance operation such as moving the neck of the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a is executed. After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performative) (see FIG. 20(e)).

During the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path, a fluctuation start performance of the same type as that of the first fluctuation path may be executed, but in the embodiment, during the fluctuation start period, a fluctuation start performance of a different type is executed for the first fluctuation path and the second fluctuation path. In this way, not only the fluctuation paths are different, but also the impression can be changed by the difference in the fluctuation start performance, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, between the fluctuation performances of different fluctuation paths, the overall appearance of the performance elements that make up the fluctuation start performance (for example, performances such as the movement (change) of the performance pattern 70a itself, such as swinging or rotating, performances such as the movement (change) and light emission of the pattern components such as the character image and identification part that make up the performance pattern 70a, and performances such as the movement (change) and light emission of the associated elements such as effects and characters that accompany the performance pattern 70a) may be different. Between the fluctuation performances of different fluctuation paths, the appearance of some of the performance elements that make up the fluctuation start performance may be different (for example, the movement appearance of the character image), and other parts of the performance elements (for example, the swing appearance of the performance pattern 70a) may be the same.

Different fluctuation start effects may mean that the timing at which the fluctuation start effects are executed is different, or that the duration of the execution period of the fluctuation start effects is different. In addition, the fluctuation start period of the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation start period of the second fluctuation path may be the same length or different lengths.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, a change stop suggestion performance is executed. In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH (performance operation) continue (see FIG. 20(f)).

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 120. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see FIG. 20(g)), and the first lamp symbol stops in a losing state (e.g., off) on the sub first variable display.

When the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 120 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol on the sub first variation display start displaying. At this time, the variation start performance of the performance symbol 70a is executed, and the performance symbol 70a is scrolled (see FIG. 20(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 20(i)).

In this way, in presentation mode B, the presentation of the second variation path in which the presentation symbols 70a flow in a horizontal circular shape is repeated. In presentation mode B, the presentation symbols 70a in the left row and the presentation symbols 70a in the right row flow in symmetrical directions on a circular variation path with the axis being vertical. In presentation mode B, the presentation symbols 70a in the middle row have a circular variation path like the left and right rows, but because the axis of the variation path in the middle row is tilted, the variation path appears different to the player from the left and right rows.

The gaming machine of the embodiment has a presentation mode A capable of executing a first change path (vertical scroll) change presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a changes from top to bottom, and a presentation mode B capable of executing a second change path (annular scroll) change presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a changes in a circular shape different from the change path of presentation mode A. In this way, by having multiple types of change paths, the difference in the change paths can give the player a big difference in impression, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, in the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a stop sound A (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop. In the variation performance of the second variation path of circular scrolling, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a stop sound B (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop. In addition, it is possible to execute different types of specific sound performance in the case of the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling and the case of the variation performance of the second variation path of circular scrolling. In this way, the difference between the variation paths can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be increased. Here, different types include differences in the content of the tone of the stop sound, volume, execution timing, execution period, etc.

In presentation mode A, the presentation patterns 70a in the left, center and right columns have the same change path (vertical scroll). In contrast, in presentation mode B, the presentation patterns 70a in the left and right columns have the same change path (annular scroll), but the presentation patterns 70a in the middle column have a different change path pattern from the left and right columns, and multiple types of change paths are mixed within the same change presentation. In this way, when a change presentation is performed using multiple columns of presentation patterns 70a, having multiple types of change paths can give the player a unique impression and increase the player's interest.

During the fluctuation start period of the performance mode B, the same fluctuation start performance as that of the performance mode A may be executed, but in the embodiment, during the fluctuation start period, different fluctuation start performances are executed in the performance mode A and the performance mode B. Note that, between different performance modes, all of the performance elements constituting the fluctuation start performance (for example, performances such as the movement (change) of the performance pattern itself such as swinging or rotating, performances such as the movement (change) and light emission of the pattern components such as the character image and the identification part constituting the performance pattern, and performances such as the movement (change) and light emission of the associated elements such as the effect and the character accompanying the performance pattern) may be different. Between different performance modes, some of the performance elements constituting the fluctuation start performance may be different (for example, the movement mode of the character image, etc.), and other parts of the performance elements (for example, the swing mode of the performance pattern, etc.) may be the same.

As in the embodiment, by executing different types of fluctuation start effects between fluctuation effects with different fluctuation paths, it is possible to give the player a big difference in impression, thereby increasing the player's interest.

During the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the presentation mode B, the same type of fluctuation stop suggestion presentation as that of the presentation mode A may be executed, but in the embodiment, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, different types of fluctuation stop suggestion presentations are executed in the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B. Note that, between different presentation modes, all of the aspects of the presentation elements constituting the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation (for example, the performance such as the movement (change) of the presentation pattern itself such as swinging or rotating, the performance such as the movement (change) and light emission of the pattern components such as the character image and the identification part constituting the presentation pattern, the performance such as the movement (change) and light emission of the associated elements such as the effect and the character accompanying the presentation pattern) may be different. Between different presentation modes, some of the aspects of the presentation elements constituting the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation may be different (for example, the movement aspect of the character image, etc.), and other parts of the presentation elements (for example, the swing aspect of the presentation pattern, etc.) may be the same.

As in the embodiment, by executing different types of fluctuation stop suggestion effects between fluctuation effects with different fluctuation paths, it is possible to give the player a big difference in impression, thereby increasing the player's interest.

(Example of change route)
The movement path is not limited to the vertical scrolling and circular scrolling mentioned above, but can be configured alone or in combination with, for example, horizontal scrolling in which the performance pattern 70a flows from right to left or left to right, front and back scrolling in which the performance pattern appears from the back of the screen to the front, axial scrolling in which the performance pattern 70a rotates on a horizontal or vertical axis, circular scrolling centered on a front and back axis, and roulette scrolling in which a roulette spins.

Here, the same change path means that the direction of the change of the performance pattern 70a, the magnitude of the change of the performance pattern 70a, the shape of the path recognized by the change of the performance pattern, etc. are the same, and it does not mean that the change paths overlap. That is, in the change performance example 1 shown in Figure 19, the performance patterns 70a in the right-center-left column are displayed changing in different places, but the direction of the change display flowing from top to bottom and the size and shape of the change display flowing from the top to bottom of the screen are the same, so the change paths of the performance patterns 70a in the right-center-left column are said to be the same. Different change paths means that one or more of the direction of the change of the performance pattern 70a, the magnitude of the change of the performance pattern 70a, the shape of the path recognized by the change of the performance pattern, etc. are different.

The variation performance example 1 shown in Figure 19 is composed of a single variation path in which the variation starts with the performance pattern 70a varying from top to bottom, the variation speed increases, the performance pattern 70a varies from top to bottom at high speed, and then the variation speed decreases, and the performance pattern 70a that has been varying from top to bottom temporarily stops at a predetermined position.

The variation performance example 2 shown in FIG. 20 is composed of a variation path in which the performance pattern 70a starts to vary diagonally downward, the variation speed increases, the performance pattern 70a varies rapidly in a circular shape, and then the variation speed decreases, and the performance pattern 70a that varies diagonally from above temporarily stops at a predetermined position. The variation path in the left column is a trajectory that rotates clockwise, and the variation paths in the middle column and right column are trajectories that rotate counterclockwise. In this way, as in the variation performance example 2 shown in FIG. 20, the direction of the variation path, the size of the path, and the shape of the path may differ depending on the column of the performance pattern 70a.

The variable path refers to the route through which the performance pattern 70a moving in the variable performance passes (appears to pass), and the variable path itself may be displayed on the screen, but it is not necessary to display the variable path itself as in the embodiment. The variable path can be grasped by the performance pattern 70a in a state in which the identification information can be distinguished (slow rotation) or the performance pattern 70a in a state in which the identification information cannot be distinguished (high rotation). In addition, it is also possible to make the player recognize that the performance pattern 70a is changing outside the screen by the performance pattern 70a displayed on the screen or the silhouette of the performance pattern 70a. In addition, the variable path can be divided as follows.
- The starting route taken by the stopped performance pattern 70a when it starts to move: The starting route taken when the stopped performance pattern 70a starts to change and (gradually) accelerates until the identification information of the performance pattern 70a becomes indistinguishable or goes off the screen; - The stopping route taken by the changing performance pattern 70a before it stops (or is about to stop): The stopping route taken by the changing performance pattern 70a (gradually) decelerates until the identification information of the performance pattern 70a goes from indistinguishable to distinguishable and stops (definitely stopped or temporary stopped), or until the performance pattern 70a that has appeared from off the screen stops (definitely stopped or temporary stopped); - The intermediate route of the performance pattern 70a while it is changing: The route taken by the silhouette of the performance pattern 70a whose identification information is indistinguishable, or the route taken from off the screen until it appears off the screen; - The route recognized after a performance that covers part or all of the screen (for example, a cut-in image or eye-catcher)

The movement path may be configured by combining multiple modes. For example, the movement path may be configured with multiple movement paths, such as the performance pattern 70a starting to move from top to bottom, then increasing in movement speed, the performance pattern 70a moving in a circular ring shape at high speed, then decreasing in movement speed, and the performance pattern 70a moving from the back of the screen to the front temporarily stopping at a predetermined position. In this way, the movement path may change midway.

The changing performance will be explained in detail by dividing it into a start period from when the performance pattern 70a starts to change until it changes at high speed, a high-speed change period during which the performance pattern 70a changes at high speed, and a stop suggestion period from the high-speed change period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped changing (confirmed stop or temporary stop). Note that although performance mode A is shown as an example, the same can be done for performance mode B.

(Preview performance)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the normal game state and the advantageous game state, multiple types of advance notice effects (which may include pre-reading) that expect (suggest) a jackpot (a transition to a jackpot game) can be executed. In the normal game state and the advantageous game state, a dedicated advance notice effect may be set, a common advance notice effect may be set, or a combination of these may be used. In addition, the number of types of advance notice effects that can be executed in the normal game state may be greater than the number of types of advance notice effects that can be executed in the advantageous game state, or vice versa, so that the number of types of advance notice effects may be different between the normal game state and the advantageous game state. For example, if the number of types of advance notice effects that can be executed in the normal game state is greater than the number of types of advance notice effects that can be executed in the advantageous game state, a sense of expectation can be created by the relatively large number of types of advance notice effects that appear in the normal game state, and the player can be attracted even in the normal game state. The number of types of advance notice effects may be the same in the normal game state and the advantageous game state.

As shown in FIG. 21, examples of advance notice effects include light-emitting effects such as the starter lamp (FIG. 21(a)), hold change effects (FIG. 21(b), FIG. 21-5), character action change effects of the performance pattern 70a due to effects, etc. (FIG. 21(a)), pseudo advance notice effects suggesting continuous changes in the performance pattern 70a (FIG. 21(c)), button effects such as vibration and light emission of the operation button 135 (FIG. 21-2(a)), and movable role effects such as the operation and light emission of the movable roles 73, 74 (FIG. 21-2(b)). The hold change effects are not limited to changes in the color or shape of the hold icon, and may also change the color or shape of the icon (FIG. 21-5).

As shown in FIG. 21-7, an action effect (in an embodiment, represented by an arrow pointing towards the reserved icon) suggesting a change in the reserved icon (the icon in question) may be executed by displaying a mini character, icon, symbol, effect, etc., or by sound effect. If the action effect is successful, a reserved change effect may be executed in which the shape or color of the reserved icon (the icon in question) changes, and if the action effect is unsuccessful, the execution of the reserved change effect may be restricted. An effect that suggests a change in an element recognizable to the player (for example, the appearance of the effect pattern) may be called an action effect, not limited to a suggestion of a change in the reserved icon.

As shown in FIG. 21-3, the preview performance may be an image such as a cut-in image (cut-in video). In the example of FIG. 21-3, the second cut-in image is displayed with a higher expectation level than the first, and the third cut-in image is displayed with a higher expectation level than the second cut-in image, but the expectation level does not have to be changed. Also, in the example of FIG. 21-3, the first preview performance is performed with a blue effect, the second preview performance with a green effect, and the third preview performance with a red effect. In this way, when a performance that includes the same medium (for example, a cut-in image or effect) is performed repeatedly, a performance in which the content recognized (displayed) by the medium changes stepwise is sometimes called a change performance or a step-up performance.

As an example of the advance notice performance, a pre-reading chance eye performance (light emitting display performance when a chance eye stops) is also exemplified (Fig. 21-6). In the pre-reading chance eye performance (light emitting display performance when a chance eye stops), instead of using a fixed rule such as "556" or "667", the numbers of the odd numbers among the performance patterns are red and the numbers of the even numbers are blue, and the same color patterns in which the numbers of the three performance patterns 70a are all red, such as "135" or "357", or the same color patterns in which the numbers of the three performance patterns 70a are all blue, such as "246" or "468", may be temporarily stopped (stopped) and the expectation of a big win may be higher when the same color patterns in red are temporarily stopped than when the same color patterns in blue are temporarily stopped.

Here, when the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, a same-color pattern stop sound may be output during the variation stop suggestion period until the same-color pattern is temporarily stopped (stopped display). In this case, the stop sound may be the same as the stop sound output during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a other than the same-color pattern, or it may be different. If the stop sound output during the variation stop suggestion period during which the same-color pattern is displayed as having stopped varying is different from the stop sound output during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a other than the same-color pattern, the player's sense of anticipation can be heightened, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the pre-read chance eye effect (light-emitting display effect when chance eye stops), instead of performing an effect in which a light-emitting effect image is displayed around the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right at the timing when the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right temporarily stop and an effect sound effect is output, an effect image is displayed around the temporarily stopped performance symbols 70a and a light-emitting effect sound effect is output (for example, every 0.5 seconds) each time the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right temporarily stop in order (for example, each time a bound is displayed), so that the timing at which the three (three columns) performance symbols 70a on the left, center, and right light up can be made different.

In addition, while it is possible to execute the pre-reading chance eye effect in the normal game state, it is also possible not to execute the pre-reading chance eye effect in the specific game state (at least one of the time-saving game state and the probability variation game state) in which the right-hit image is displayed.

Preview performances that combine figures (characters), letters, symbols, and patterns (e.g., zebra patterns) are sometimes called group performances. For example, FIG. 21-4 shows a group performance in which multiple figures (face figures) fall from top to bottom. The group performance in FIG. 21-4 is a combination of figures of the same type (same facial expression), but it may also be a combination of figures of different types (different facial expressions). However, even if the combination is of different types of figures with different motifs (such as face figures and flower figures), it is preferable to align the figures with the same motif (face figure) because this creates a sense of unity. In this way, the examples in FIG. 21-4(a), FIG. 21-4(b), and FIG. 21-4(c) use different figures for the performance, but since the motif of the face is the same, it can be said that the motif of the group preview is the same.

Preview performances may use different types of performances in different modes. Also, preview performances may use the same type of performances in different modes. When making a special distinction between such preview performances, they may be called mode-common previews.

The preview performance may be repeated in one or more variable performances. When the preview performance is repeated, it may be performed in blue the first time, in green the second time, and in red the third time, as shown in FIG. 21-3, or the display content may be changed to create a change performance (step-up performance) that gradually changes the sense of expectation.

The preview performance may be performed using various parts of the gaming machine 1, such as the light-emitting device of the gaming board, the light-emitting device of the gaming frame, the movable object, and the launching device.

The preview performance can be performed at various times. For example, it can start before the start of the fluctuation performance, during the fluctuation start period in the fluctuation performance, during the high-speed fluctuation period in the fluctuation performance, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation performance, after the fluctuation performance, etc., and can be performed for a specified period.

Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation start period and fluctuation stop suggested period according to the number of reserved memories.

(When the variable start period - reserved memory number is a specified number)
When the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 1), after the character image CG of the left row performance pattern 70a performs a performance action of moving its arms (see FIG. 22 (a1)), the left row performance pattern 70a swings up once and then starts to change downward (see FIG. 22 (b1)). In accordance with the start of the change of the left row performance pattern 70a, a change start sound such as "Pon" is output from the audio output device 331. Next, after the character image CG of the middle row performance pattern 70a performs a performance action of moving its arms (see FIG. 22 (b1)), the middle row performance pattern 70a swings up once and then starts to change downward (see FIG. 22 (c1)). In accordance with the start of the change of the middle row performance pattern 70a, a change start sound such as "Pon" is output from the audio output device 331. Next, after the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a in the right column moves its arms (see FIG. 22(c1)), the performance pattern 70a in the right column swings up once and then starts to change downward (see FIG. 22(d1)). In accordance with the start of the change of the performance pattern 70a in the right column, a change start sound such as "Pong" is output from the sound output device 331. In this way, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number, during the change start period, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns start to change with a shift in timing, and the change start performance is executed with a shift in timing.

(When the variable start period - reserved memory number is a specific number)
When the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 4), the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a in the left, center, and right columns moves its arms (see FIG. 22(a2)), and then the performance pattern 70a in the left, center, and right columns swings up once and then starts to change downward (see FIG. 22(b2)). At this time, a change start sound, such as "popoon", different from the case where the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number is output from the sound output device 331 in accordance with the start of the change of the performance pattern 70a. In this way, when the number of reserved memories is a specific number, the performance pattern 70a in the left, center, and right columns starts to change in time (or in a shorter period than when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number), and the change start performance is executed in time (or in a shorter period than when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number). And, the change start period is shorter for the change performance when the number of reserved memories is a specific number than for the change performance when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number.

In the embodiment, a sound effect that outputs a sound effect to start the change can be executed as the change start effect. The sound effect of the change start effect when the reserved memory is a predetermined number and the sound effect of the change start effect when the reserved memory is a specific number are different aspects. In the embodiment, in the change effect of the first change path by vertical scrolling and the change effect of the second change path by circular scrolling, it is possible to execute a change start effect of a different aspect in the change start period including the execution period of the change start effect when the reserved memory is a predetermined number and when the reserved memory is a specific number. Note that, although the sound effect is given as an example of different aspects, the aspects of the performance such as the operation of the performance pattern 70a itself, the performance such as the operation of the components of the performance pattern 70a, the performance such as the operation of the associated elements of the performance pattern 70a, etc. may be different. For example, even if different or the same actions are performed, it can be said that the performance period is also different, such as the performance period being shorter in the change start effect when the reserved memory is a specific number than in the change start effect when the reserved memory is a predetermined number.

As described above, when starting the variation performance, it is possible to execute a variation start performance regardless of whether it is the first variation path of vertical scrolling or the second variation path of circular scrolling. In the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, a different type of variation start performance can be executed in the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start performance when the reserved memory is a predetermined number (e.g., 1 item) and when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4 items more than the predetermined number). Also, in the variation performance of the second variation path of circular scrolling, a different type of variation start performance can be executed in the variation start period including the execution period of the variation start performance when the reserved memory is a predetermined number (e.g., 1 item) and when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4 items more than the predetermined number).

By doing this, the sense of expectation and presentation of the start of fluctuation effect can be changed depending on whether there is a predetermined number of reserved memories or a specific number of reserved memories, increasing the interest of the game. In particular, when there is a specific number of reserved memories that is greater than the predetermined number, the start of fluctuation effect can be simplified or shortened to increase the speed at which the game is completed, increasing the interest of the player.

(period of rapid fluctuation)
During the high-speed fluctuation period, the performance pattern 70a (the identification information of the performance pattern 70a) becomes indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish. During the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation path may be indicated by a trajectory display such as a silhouette or line of the performance pattern 70a, but the display of the fluctuation path of the performance pattern 70a displayed during the fluctuation start period and/or the fluctuation stop suggestion period may give the player the illusion that the performance pattern 70a is fluctuating along a predetermined fluctuation path. During the high-speed fluctuation period, various performances (cut-ins, mini character performances, effects, etc.) are executed by superimposing them on the fluctuation path or by changing them into the fluctuation path. Here, during the high-speed fluctuation period, the wider the range of the performance that overlaps with the fluctuation path, the easier it may be for the player to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

(Period suggesting halt in fluctuations)
The variation stop suggestion period may be not only the period until the performance pattern 70a is fixed (full stop), but also the period until the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and the period of the temporary stop state. In other words, since the performance pattern 70a may repeat temporary stops during the variation performance, there may be multiple variation stop suggestion periods during the variation period. A stop suggestion performance may be executed during the variation stop suggestion period.

(When the fluctuation stop indication period - the number of reserved memories is a specified number)
A case where the reserved memory number is a predetermined number (for example, 1) will be described. On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance patterns 70 in the left, center, and right columns is displayed in a vertical scroll variation path flowing from top to bottom (see FIG. 24 (a1)). When a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation performance, the performance pattern 70a in the left column is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 24 (b1)). At this time, the performance pattern 70a in the left column moves slightly downward from the temporary stop position and then moves back upward to temporarily stop. In addition, in the temporary stop state, the performance pattern 70a in the left column slightly swings (swing display) up and down a predetermined stop position, and a variation stop suggestion performance is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the performance pattern 70a swing (performance operation). In addition, when the performance pattern 70a in the left column is temporarily stopped, a stop sound performance (for example, "ton") is executed from the audio output device.

Next, the right-row performance pattern 70a temporarily stops (see FIG. 24 (c1)). At this time, the right-row performance pattern 70a moves slightly below the temporary stop position and then moves back up to temporarily stop. In addition, in the temporary stop state, the right-row performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stop position, and a variable stop suggestion performance is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a swing (performance action). In addition, when the right-row performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a stop sound performance (for example, a "thud") is executed from the audio output device.

Next, the middle row performance pattern 70a temporarily stops (see FIG. 24 (d1)). At this time, the middle row performance pattern 70a moves slightly below the temporary stop position and then moves back up to temporarily stop. In addition, in the temporary stop state, the middle row performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down the predetermined stop position, and a variable stop suggestion performance is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a swing (performance action). In addition, when the middle row performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, a stop sound performance (for example, a "thud") is executed from the audio output device.

When the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing mode on the first special symbol display 120. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is carried out to end the changing performance, and the performance symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped stops properly at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops properly in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 24 (e1)).

In this way, when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns are temporarily stopped with shifted timing, and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed with shifted timing.

(Stop suggestion period - when the number of reserved memories is a certain number)
A case where the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) will be described. On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance patterns 70 in the left, center, and right columns is displayed in a vertical scroll variation path that flows from top to bottom (see FIG. 24 (a2)). When a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation performance, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 24 (b1)). At this time, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns move slightly downward from the temporary stop position and then move back upward to temporarily stop. In addition, in the temporary stop state, the performance patterns 70a in each column slightly swing (swing display) up and down a predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the performance pattern 70a swing (performance operation), and a variation stop suggestion performance is executed. In addition, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, a stop sound performance (for example, a "tone") different from the case where the reserved memory is a predetermined number is executed from the sound output device.

When the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing mode on the first special symbol display 120. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is carried out to end the changing performance, and the performance symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped stops properly at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops properly in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 24 (e1)).

In this way, when the number of reserved memories is a specific number, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns are temporarily stopped in time (or for a shorter period than when the number of reserved memories is a specified number) during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed in time (or for a shorter period than when the number of reserved memories is a specified number). And, the fluctuation stop suggestion period is shorter for the fluctuation performance when the number of reserved memories is a specific number than for the fluctuation performance when the number of reserved memories is a specified number.

In the embodiment, a sound effect that outputs a sound of a fluctuation stop can be executed as a fluctuation stop suggestion effect. The sound effect of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect when the reserved memory is a predetermined number and the sound effect of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect when the reserved memory is a specific number are different aspects. In the embodiment, in the fluctuation effect of the first fluctuation path by vertical scrolling and the fluctuation effect of the second fluctuation path by circular scrolling, it is possible to execute a fluctuation stop suggestion effect of a different aspect in the fluctuation stop suggestion period including the execution period of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect when the reserved memory is a predetermined number and when the reserved memory is a specific number. Note that, although sound effects are given as an example of different aspects, the aspects of the performance such as the operation of the performance pattern 70a itself, the performance such as the operation of the components of the performance pattern 70a, the performance such as the operation of the associated elements of the performance pattern 70a, etc. may be different. For example, even if different or the same actions are performed, it can be said that the performance period is also different, such as the performance period being shorter for the fluctuation stop suggestion effect when the reserved memory is a specific number than for the fluctuation stop suggestion effect when the reserved memory is a predetermined number.

In this way, the sense of expectation and the way the fluctuation stop suggestion effect is presented can be changed depending on whether there is a predetermined number of reserved memories or a specific number of reserved memories, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In particular, when there is a specific number of reserved memories that is greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation stop suggestion effect can be simplified or shortened to increase the speed at which the game is completed and increase the interest of the player.

In the variation presentation of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, when the reserved memory is a predetermined number, a specific sound presentation is executed in which the stop sounds of each row sound in sequence, for example, "knock knock knock." In the variation presentation of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number, a specific sound presentation is executed in which the stop sounds of each row sound combined, for example, "tone."
In the variation presentation of the second variation path of the annular scroll, when the reserved memory is a predetermined number, a specific sound presentation is executed in which the stop sounds of each row sound in sequence, for example, "Tan, tan, tan." In the variation presentation of the second variation path of the annular scroll, when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number, a specific sound presentation is executed in which the stop sounds of each row sound combined together, for example, "turn."
In this way, in the variation presentation of the first variation path of vertical scrolling and the variation presentation of the second variation path of circular scrolling, different patterns of specific sound presentation are executed when the reserved memory is a predetermined number and when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number.
In this way, the expectation and atmosphere of the specific sound effects can be changed between when there is a predetermined number of reserved memories and when there is a specific number of reserved memories, thereby increasing the interest of the player. In particular, when there is a specific number of reserved memories that is greater than the predetermined number, the specific sound effects can be simplified or shortened to increase the speed at which the game is completed, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In either the first vertical scroll variation path or the second circular scroll variation path, the variation start performance can be executed in the variation start period when the variation performance starts. The variation start performance includes a basic first mode using the performance pattern 70a itself, the components of the performance pattern 70, or elements associated with the performance pattern 70a, and a second mode (a second mode different from the first mode) in which the performance mode and expectation level are different by changing the color of the basic first mode, adding effects to the first mode, or performing a notice performance as shown in Figures 21-1 to 21-7 in addition to or instead of the basic first mode. The variation start performance of the second mode may be a same-color pattern (same-color chance eye). As shown in Figure 22-2 (a1), in the variation start period of the variation performance of the first variation path, the character image constituting the performance pattern 70a performs a performance action of moving its arms as the variation start performance of the first mode. As shown in FIG. 22-2(a2), during the start of the second path of the performance, the character image constituting the performance pattern 70a performs a head movement as the first mode of the performance start. As shown in FIG. 22-2(a3), during the start of the first path of the performance, the character image constituting the performance pattern 70a performs an arm movement as the second mode of the performance start, in addition to an effect display. As shown in FIG. 22-2(a4), during the start of the second path of the performance, the character image constituting the performance pattern 70a performs a head movement as the second mode of the performance start.

The second mode of the fluctuation start effect may be set to what is called a pre-reading (targeting a specific reserved memory, making it easier for effects that have a high probability of transitioning to a jackpot or that encourage a transition to a jackpot to be executed), or it may be unrelated to pre-reading.

In the variation presentation of the first vertical scroll variation path, the predetermined presentation that anticipates a jackpot is more likely to be executed when the variation start presentation of the second mode is executed than when the variation start presentation of the first mode is executed during the variation start period that includes the execution period of the variation start presentation. Also, in the variation presentation of the second circular scroll variation path, the predetermined presentation that anticipates a jackpot is more likely to be executed when the variation start presentation of the second mode is executed than when the variation start presentation of the first mode is executed during the variation start period that includes the execution period of the variation start presentation. In this way, even if the variation paths are different, the relationship between the variation start presentation and the predetermined presentation is set to be the same. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot and improve the enjoyment of the game.

For example, when a notice performance is executed as the second mode of fluctuation start performance, a notice performance related to or different from the notice performance of the fluctuation start period is likely to be executed at the timing after the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation start period, in the high-speed fluctuation period, or in the fluctuation stop suggestion period. Even if a notice performance is not executed as the second mode of fluctuation start performance, for example, a notice performance as shown in Figures 21 to 21-7 is likely to be executed at the timing after the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation start period, in the high-speed fluctuation period, or in the fluctuation stop suggestion period. When a look-ahead is set, the second mode of fluctuation start performance and the predetermined performance are more likely to be executed than when a look-ahead is not set. The predetermined performance may be a development performance, a cut-in performance such as a sound or image, a step-up performance, a reserved icon, or other color change performance. The expectation level may be higher for the predetermined performance (e.g., a red effect, etc.) executed after the second mode of fluctuation start performance (e.g., a blue effect, etc.).

In the embodiment, different types of fluctuation start effects can be executed on the first fluctuation path and the second fluctuation path, but when an additional effect is added to the first type of fluctuation start effect to create a second type of fluctuation start effect, the same additional effect can be added to the first fluctuation path and the second fluctuation path.

The variation start performance may be, for example, a mode in which the performance pattern 70a moves upward from the stop position, moves downward, and scrolls vertically, and the performance pattern 70a performs one action. The variation start performance may be, for example, a mode in which the performance pattern 70a moves upward from the stop position, rotates around the vertical axis, moves downward, and scrolls vertically, and the performance pattern 70a performs two actions. The number of actions may be three or more.
The number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the change start performance may be the same whether it is the change performance of the first change path or the change performance of the second change path, but the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the change start performance may be different between the change performance of the first change path and the change performance of the second change path. In this case, the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the change start performance may be less or more in the change performance of the second change path than in the change performance of the first change path.

Whether it is a normal game state change presentation or an advantageous game state change presentation, the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the presentation pattern 70a in the change start presentation may be the same, but the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the presentation pattern 70a in the change start presentation may be different between the normal game state change presentation and the advantageous game state change presentation. In this case, the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the presentation pattern 70a in the change start presentation may be fewer or more in the advantageous game state change presentation than in the normal game state change presentation.

The fluctuation stop indication effect may be, for example, a form in which the performance pattern 70a performs an action, such as moving from top to bottom, passing the stop position, and then moving back to the stop position to display the fluctuation stop.
The variation stop suggestion performance may be, for example, a performance pattern 70a moving from top to bottom, passing the stop position, moving back to the stop position, rotating around the vertical axis, and then displaying the variation stop. The performance pattern 70a may perform two actions. Note that the number of actions may be three or more.
The number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be the same whether it is the first fluctuation path fluctuation performance or the second fluctuation path fluctuation performance, but the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be different between the first fluctuation path fluctuation performance and the second fluctuation path fluctuation performance. In this case, the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be less or more in the second fluctuation path fluctuation performance than in the first fluctuation path fluctuation performance.

Whether it is a normal game state fluctuation presentation or a favorable game state fluctuation presentation, the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the presentation pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation may be the same, but the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the presentation pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation may be different between the normal game state fluctuation presentation and the favorable game state fluctuation presentation. In this case, the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the presentation pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation may be fewer or more in the favorable game state fluctuation presentation than in the normal game state fluctuation presentation.

The actions of the performance pattern 70a include the movement of the entire performance pattern 70a (such as enlarging/reducing, moving, rotating, etc.), the movement of a component of the performance pattern 70a (such as a part or the whole of an identification part such as a number or a decorative part such as a character, etc.) (such as enlarging/reducing, moving, rotating, etc.), and elements associated with the performance pattern 70a (such as effects, lighting, etc.).

The number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation start performance may be the same as the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance, but the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be greater than the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation start performance.
The number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be less than the number of actions (number of types of actions) of the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation start performance.
The fluctuation stop indication effect may have more actions due to elements of the effect pattern 70a, such as decorative parts, than the fluctuation start effect.
The number of actions (number of types of actions) due to elements of the performance pattern 70a, such as decorative parts, may be fewer in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance than in the fluctuation start performance.

The number of actions (number of types of actions) in the fluctuation start presentation may be the same when the reserved memory is a predetermined number (for example, 1) and when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, 4 more than the predetermined number), but the number of actions (number of types of actions) in the fluctuation start presentation may be fewer when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, 4 more than the predetermined number) than when the reserved memory is a predetermined number (for example, 1).
The number of actions (number of types of actions) in the variable start performance may be greater when the number of reserved memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, four, which is more than the predetermined number) than when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, one).

The number of actions (number of types of actions) in the fluctuation stop suggestion display may be the same when the reserved memory is a predetermined number (for example, 1) and when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, 4 more than the predetermined number), but the number of actions (number of types of actions) in the fluctuation stop suggestion display may be fewer when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, 4 more than the predetermined number) than when the reserved memory is a predetermined number (for example, 1).
The number of actions (number of types of actions) in the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be greater when the number of reserved memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (for example, four, which is more than the predetermined number) than when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, one).

(Example of variation 3)
FIG. 25(a) shows the case of the presentation mode A in the normal game state. The presentation patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns are temporarily stopped in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the presentation pattern 70a slightly shakes (shakes) up and down the predetermined stop position, and the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the presentation pattern 70a perform a shaking action (presentation action). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (presentation action) (see FIG. 25(b)). In this way, when the presentation pattern 70a moves toward a fluctuating stop (stop suggestion period), a fluctuating stop suggestion presentation is executed, which includes the shaking action of the presentation pattern 70a itself at the time of the temporary stop and the shaking action (presentation action) of the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 120. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped comes to a real stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a real stop in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see FIG. 25(b)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a real stop in a losing state (e.g., off) on the sub first variable display.

When the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the first special pattern display 120 starts displaying the variation of the first special pattern. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance pattern designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the variation display of the one lamp pattern on the sub first variation display are started. Note that the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as the operation of a part of the decorative part or the whole or part of the decorative part being expanded or contracted as in this embodiment (see FIG. 25 (c)). In this way, when the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, a variation start performance is executed, including the swinging operation of the performance pattern 70 and the performance operation of moving the arms of the character image CG of the performance pattern 70a. After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image continues. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are rotating (performative) (see FIG. 25(c)).

When a change performance is being performed on the vertical scroll change path, a specified switching performance (predetermined performance) is performed (see FIG. 25(d)). In the switching performance of the embodiment, a specified performance image is enlarged and displayed from the back side of the screen on which the change performance is being performed on the vertical scroll change path (FIG. 25(c)), covering the silhouette of the performance pattern 70a, etc., to hide the vertical scroll change path (see FIG. 25(d)). In addition, a specified performance action (e.g., waving hands, etc.) is performed by the specified performance image to execute a specified change sound performance. In the embodiment, the reserved icon including the icon disappears in the switching performance, but the icon or the reserved icon may be displayed in the switching performance.

Then, when the specified performance image disappears (end of switching performance), each of the performance patterns 70 in the left, center, and right columns on the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal display) is displayed changing along a horizontal circular flowing changing path (Figure 25 (e)). In this way, after the switching performance is executed, the vertical scrolling changing path changes to a circular scrolling changing path. Also, the screen displays Mode B, which is the mode name associated with the second changing path. Note that the mode name is erased when the changing performance has been executed a specified number of times.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, in addition to the performance patterns 70a slightly shaking (swinging display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, part of the character image CG constituting the performance pattern 70a moves (waving arms), and the pattern effect image ZE performs a shaking movement (performance movement). In addition, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance movement) (see FIG. 25 (f)). In this way, when the performance pattern 70a moves toward a fluctuation stop (the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation performance), a fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed, including the shaking movement of the performance pattern 70a itself at the time of the temporary stop, the movement of part of the character image CG (performance movement), and the shaking movement (performance movement) of the pattern effect image ZE.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 120. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("164") (see FIG. 25(g)), and the first lamp pattern on the sub first variable display stops in a losing state (for example, off).

When the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol display 120 starts displaying the variation of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the one-lamp symbol on the sub first variation display start displaying. At this time, the variation start performance of the performance symbol 70a is executed, and the performance symbol 70a is scrolled (see FIG. 25(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variation display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 25(i)).

In an embodiment, a changeover effect can be executed to switch from the changeover effect of the first vertical scrolling changeover path to the changeover effect of the second circular scrolling changeover path. In this way, the sense of discomfort felt when changing the changeover path can be reduced, and the sense of anticipation caused by the changeover path can be improved.

Even if the mode name associated with the variable path is not displayed on the screen, after executing a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect, it is possible to display the mode name associated with the variable path after the switching effect is executed.

Even if the mode name linked to the variable path is displayed on the screen, the mode name can be erased while a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance is being executed. Then, after the switching performance is executed, the mode name linked to the variable path after the switching performance is executed can be displayed.

The mode name may be displayed once or twice or more times during the changeover performance after the display starts, or it may be displayed at all times except for a specified period such as the period during which the changeover performance is being performed.

A switching effect may be executed from the variation effect of the second variation path of the circular scroll to the variation effect of the first variation path of the vertical scroll. Here, the mode of the switching effect when switching from vertical scrolling to circular scrolling and the mode of the switching effect when switching from circular scrolling to vertical scrolling may be the same or different. Note that even when a switching effect is executed, there may be cases where the variation path is not switched. For example, if the switching effect is the same mode, it becomes difficult to tell which variation path is switching, which can attract the player's interest. Furthermore, if the switching effect is a different mode, it can build up anticipation for the destination of the switch.

In the fluctuation start period of the first fluctuation path, the first fluctuation start performance can be executed, and in the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the first fluctuation path, the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be executed. In the fluctuation start period of the second fluctuation path, the second fluctuation start performance of a different aspect from the first fluctuation start performance can be executed, and in the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the second fluctuation path, the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a different aspect from the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be executed. And, when the switching performance is executed, it is preferable that the switching of the fluctuation path is executed more easily than when it is not switched. In this case, the switching may be always executed. Even when the first fluctuation start performance is executed, when the switching performance is executed, the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be executed more easily than the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in the fluctuation stop suggestion period. Even when the second fluctuation start performance is executed, when the switching performance is executed, the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be executed more easily than the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in the fluctuation stop suggestion period.

In the example of Figure 25, a switching effect was executed during the high-speed fluctuation period to change the fluctuation path, but the timing of the change in the fluctuation path (execution of a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect) is not limited to this, and the fluctuation path can be changed (execution of a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect) at various times.

In the example of Figure 25-2, a switching effect is executed during the fluctuation start period, and after the switching effect ends, the first fluctuation path (vertical scroll) before the switching effect is replaced by a changed second fluctuation path (annular scroll) in a state of high-speed scrolling (high-speed fluctuation period), and after a period indicating that fluctuation has stopped according to the second fluctuation path, the fluctuation is displayed as stopped by the performance pattern 70a according to the second fluctuation path.

In the example of FIG. 25-3, a switching effect is executed during the fluctuation start period, and after the switching effect ends, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed with the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the second fluctuation path after a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation path, without going through a state of high-speed scrolling (high-speed fluctuation period) on the first fluctuation path (vertical scroll) before the switching effect and the changed second fluctuation path (annular scroll). Here, after the switching effect ends, the fluctuation stop may be displayed with the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the second fluctuation path, without going through a state of high-speed scrolling (high-speed fluctuation period) on the first fluctuation path (vertical scroll) before the switching effect and the changed second fluctuation path (annular scroll) or a fluctuation stop suggestion period (when the switching effect disappears, the performance pattern 70a displays a fluctuation stop (temporarily stopped)).

In the example of Figure 25-4, a switching effect is executed simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation, and after the switching effect ends, the first fluctuation path (vertical scroll) before the switching effect and the changed second fluctuation path (annular scroll) are scrolled at high speed (high-speed fluctuation period), and after a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation path, the fluctuation is stopped and displayed with the performance pattern 70a according to the second fluctuation path. In Figure 25-4, the fluctuation start effect according to the first fluctuation path is not executed (the start of the fluctuation of the first fluctuation path is not visible), and when the switching effect disappears, the fluctuation path is changed to the second fluctuation path.

In the example of FIG. 25-5, a switching effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, and after the switching effect ends, the fluctuation is stopped and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the second fluctuation path passes through a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation path, without going through a state (high-speed fluctuation period) of high-speed scrolling on the first fluctuation path (vertical scroll) before the switching effect and the changed second fluctuation path (annular scroll), and the fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Here, after the switching effect ends, the fluctuation may be stopped and the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the second fluctuation path passes through, without going through a state (high-speed fluctuation period) of high-speed scrolling on the first fluctuation path (vertical scroll) before the switching effect and the changed second fluctuation path (annular scroll) or the fluctuation stop suggestion period (when the switching effect disappears, the performance pattern 70a displays a fluctuation stop (temporarily stopped)).

In the example of Fig. 25-6, the switching performance is executed at the same time as the fluctuation starts, and after the switching performance ends, the fluctuation start performance corresponding to the first fluctuation path (vertical scroll) before the switching performance and the changed second fluctuation path (annular scroll) is executed, and then the state of high-speed scrolling (high-speed fluctuation period) is entered, and after a fluctuation stop suggestion period according to the second fluctuation path, the fluctuation stop is displayed with the performance pattern 70a according to the second fluctuation path. In Fig. 25-4, the fluctuation start performance according to the first fluctuation path is not executed (the fluctuation start of the first fluctuation path is not visible), and when the switching performance disappears, the fluctuation starts with the performance pattern 70a corresponding to the second fluctuation path (annular scroll).

The second variable path has been changed.

Even if a switching performance is executed, there may be cases where the variable path is not changed and the variable path before the switching performance is executed, and cases where the switching performance is executed and the variable path is different from the variable path before the switching performance is executed. In this case, the aspect of the switching performance that executes the variable path change and the aspect of the switching performance that does not execute the variable path change may be the same or different.

In an embodiment, even if a switching effect is executed and the movement path is changed, the special pattern TZ in the movement effect of the movement path before the change and the special pattern TZ in the movement effect of the movement path after the change are displayed with a common pattern (e.g., numbers), are displayed with a common movement path (e.g., numbers switching on the spot), have a common movement start mode (e.g., there is no movement of numbers or other effects), and have a common movement stop mode (e.g., there is no movement of numbers or other effects).

In a fluctuation performance using a performance pattern 70a in a manner corresponding to a first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), (after a switching performance is executed) a fluctuation stop can be displayed using a performance pattern 70a in a manner corresponding to a second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling) different from the first fluctuation path. In a fluctuation performance in which a fluctuation start performance in a manner corresponding to a first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) is executed, (after a switching performance is executed) a fluctuation stop suggestion performance in a manner corresponding to a second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling) different from the first fluctuation path can be executed.

(Example 4 of variable effects - continuous effects)
26 shows a case where a continuous performance is executed in one or more variable performances as a kind of look-ahead performance targeting the fourth reserved memory (target reserved memory). Note that the continuous performance can be executed in the variable performance of the first variable path of vertical scrolling and the variable performance of the second variable path of circular scrolling, and can be executed in the variable performance of multiple types of variable paths.

When a variable performance starts based on the reserved memory three memory units before the target reserved memory, the first continuous performance is executed in the start period with cut-in image A displayed on the screen (Fig. 26(b)). When a variable performance starts based on the reserved memory two memory units before the target reserved memory, the second continuous performance is executed in the start period with cut-in image B displayed on the screen (Fig. 26(c)). When a variable performance starts based on the reserved memory one memory unit before the target reserved memory, the third continuous performance is executed in the start period with cut-in image C displayed on the screen (Fig. 26(d)). And when a variable performance starts based on the target reserved memory, the fourth continuous performance is executed in the start period with cut-in image D displayed on the screen (Fig. 26(e)).

Continuous performances can be performed with different levels of expectation depending on the color, effect, content, etc., for example, a cut-in image with red text can have a higher expectation level than a cut-in image with blue text. In this case, the expectation level of the second performance can be higher than that of the first performance, performances with the same expectation level can be performed consecutively, or performances with different expectation levels can be combined. Furthermore, continuous performances can be performed by repeating the same type of performance, or by combining different types of performances. For example, continuous performances can be assembled from multiple performances to form a single story.

Although the case where a continuous performance is executed in the variable performance of the first variable path has been described, a continuous performance may also be executed in the variable performance of the second variable path. A continuous performance executed in the variable performance of the first variable path may be referred to as a first continuous performance, and a continuous performance executed in the variable performance of the second variable path may be referred to as a second continuous performance.

In an embodiment, during the period in which the first continuous performance is executed and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start performance in the change performance of the change path of the vertical scroll, it is possible to restrict switching from the first change path of the vertical scroll to the second change path of the annular scroll. During the period in which the second continuous performance is executed and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start performance in the change performance of the change path of the annular scroll, it may be possible to switch from the second change path of the annular scroll to the first change path of the vertical scroll, but in an embodiment, switching from the second change path of the annular scroll to the first change path of the vertical scroll is also restricted. In this way, by restricting the change path switching during the period in which the continuous performance is executed and the change start period overlap, the expectation that the continuous performance will be executed continuously is not hindered by the change path switching. This can increase the interest in the game.

In the embodiment, the switching of the variable path is restricted during the period when the continuous performance is being executed. Alternatively, during the period when the first continuous performance is being executed, it may be possible to either restrict switching from the first variable path to the second variable path during a variable start period that includes the execution period of the variable start performance in the variable performance of the first variable path, or restrict switching from the second variable path to the first variable path during a variable start period that includes the execution period of the variable start performance in the variable performance of the second variable path, during the period when the second continuous performance is executed.

In the embodiment, the switching of the fluctuation path is restricted during the fluctuation start period, but the switching of the fluctuation path may be restricted if the period corresponds to the execution period of the continuous performance during the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + fluctuation stop suggestion period.

In the embodiment, the execution of the aforementioned switching performance (predetermined performance) can be restricted during the period when the first continuous performance is executed and during the start period including the execution period of the change start performance in the change performance of the first change path of the vertical scroll. The aforementioned switching performance (predetermined performance) may be allowed to be executed during the period when the second continuous performance is executed and during the start period including the execution period of the change start performance in the change performance of the second change path of the circular scroll, but in the embodiment, the execution of the aforementioned switching performance (predetermined performance) is restricted. Thus, by restricting the execution of the switching performance in the start period during the period when the continuous performance is executed, the expectation that the continuous performance will be executed continuously is not hindered by the switching of the change path. This can increase the interest in the game.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching performance is restricted during the period when the continuous performance is being executed. Alternatively, it may be possible to either restrict the execution of the switching performance during the period when the first continuous performance is being executed, during a fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path, or restrict the execution of the switching performance during the period when the second continuous performance is being executed, during a fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching effect is restricted during the fluctuation start period, but the execution of the switching effect may be restricted if the period corresponds to the execution period of the continuous effect during the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + fluctuation stop suggestion period.

(Example 5 of the variation effect - the operation of the gadget)
27 shows a case where the movable role 73 is operated in one or more variable performances as a type of pre-reading performance targeting the fourth reserved memory (target reserved memory). The movable role 73 can be operated in the first variable path vertical scroll and the second variable path circular scroll, and can be operated in multiple types of variable path performances.

When a variable performance starts based on the reserved memory three memory units before the target reserved memory, the first operation performance of the movable role 73 is executed in the variable start period (Fig. 27(b)). When a variable performance starts based on the reserved memory two memory units before the target reserved memory, the second operation performance of the movable role 73 is executed in the variable start period (Fig. 27(c)). When a variable performance starts based on the reserved memory one memory unit before the target reserved memory, the third operation performance of the movable role 73 is executed in the variable start period (Fig. 27(d)). And when a variable performance starts based on the target reserved memory, the fourth operation performance of the movable role 73 is executed in the variable start period (Fig. 27(e)).

The actuation of the movable role object 73 can be performed with different levels of expectation depending on the color, effect, and operation content (number of times, range of operation, etc.), for example, red light emission can have a higher expectation than blue light. In this case, the expectation level of the second performance can be higher than that of the first performance, performances with the same expectation level can be performed consecutively, or performances with different expectation levels can be combined. The actuation performance can be performed by repeating the same type of performance, or by combining different types of performances. For example, consecutive performances can be assembled from multiple performances to gradually increase the expectation level.

In the embodiment, during the period when the movable role 73 is operated and during the start of the change period including the execution period of the change start performance of the first change path of the vertical scroll, it is possible to restrict switching from the first change path of the vertical scroll to the second change path of the annular scroll. During the period when the movable role 73 is operated and during the start of the change period including the execution period of the change start performance of the second change path of the annular scroll, it may be possible to switch from the second change path of the annular scroll to the first change path of the vertical scroll, but in the embodiment, switching from the second change path of the annular scroll to the first change path of the vertical scroll is also restricted. In this way, by restricting the change path switching during the period when the movable role 73 is operated and during the start of the change period overlap, the expectation that the movable role 73 will continue to be executed is not hindered by the change path switching. This can increase the interest in the game.

In the embodiment, the switching of the movement path is restricted during the period when the operation performance of the movable role 73 is being executed. Alternatively, it is possible to either restrict switching from the first movement path to the second movement path during the period when the operation performance of the movable role 73 is being executed and during the movement start period including the execution period of the movement start performance in the movement performance of the first movement path, or restrict switching from the second movement path to the first movement path during the period when the operation performance of the movable role 73 is being executed and during the movement start period including the execution period of the movement start performance in the movement performance of the second movement path.

In the embodiment, the change in the change path is restricted during the change start period, but the change in the change path may be restricted during the entire change period, the high-speed change period, the change stop suggestion period, the start period + high-speed change period, or the high-speed change period + change stop suggestion period, if the period corresponds to the execution period of the operation performance of the movable role object 73.

In the embodiment, the execution of the above-mentioned switching performance (predetermined performance) can be restricted during the period when the movable role 73 is operated and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start performance in the change performance of the first change path of the vertical scroll. The above-mentioned switching performance (predetermined performance) may be allowed during the period when the movable role 73 is operated and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start performance in the change performance of the second change path of the circular scroll, but in the embodiment, the execution of the above-mentioned switching performance (predetermined performance) is restricted during the period when the movable role 73 is operated and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start performance in the change performance of the second change path of the circular scroll. In this way, by restricting the execution of the switching performance during the change start period during the period when the movable role 73 is operated, the expectation that the movable role 73 will continue to be executed is not hindered by the switching of the change path. This can increase the interest of the player.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching performance is restricted during the period when the operation performance of the movable role piece 73 is being executed. Alternatively, during the period when the operation performance of the movable role piece 73 is being executed, it is possible to either restrict the execution of the switching performance during the fluctuation start period including the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path, or restrict the execution of the switching performance during the period when the operation performance of the movable role piece 73 is executed, including the execution period of the fluctuation start performance in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching effect is restricted during the fluctuation start period, but the execution of the switching effect may be restricted if it corresponds to the execution period of the operation effect of the movable role object 73 during the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + fluctuation stop suggestion period.

(Example 6 of the change effect – button operation suggestion effect)
28 shows a case where an operation suggestion effect is executed on the screen as one type of effect, which encourages the player to operate the operation button 135. Note that the operation suggestion effect can be executed in the variation effect of the first variation path of vertical scrolling and the variation effect of the second variation path of circular scrolling, and can be executed in the variation effect of multiple types of variation paths.

In the variable presentation, suppose that an operation suggestion presentation that encourages the player to operate the operation button 135 is executed on the screen (FIG. 28(a)). The operation suggestion presentation is set with a predetermined operation valid period, and when the operation button 135 is operated during the operation valid period, the button operation is reflected in the presentation content. In the embodiment, the operation valid period is set with a countdown display (FIGS. 28(a)-(c)), and the operation button 135 is operated when the count reaches "3". In the embodiment, the operation of the operation button 135 triggers a predetermined image presentation to be executed on the screen (FIG. 28(d)).

In the embodiment, during the period when the operation suggestion presentation is executed and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start presentation in the change presentation of the first change path of the vertical scroll, it is possible to restrict switching from the change path of the vertical scroll to the change path of the circular scroll. During the period when the operation suggestion presentation is executed and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start presentation in the change presentation of the second change path of the circular scroll, it is possible to allow switching from the second change path of the circular scroll to the first change path of the vertical scroll, but in the embodiment, during the period when the operation suggestion presentation is executed and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start presentation in the change presentation of the second change path of the circular scroll, switching from the second change path of the circular scroll to the first change path of the vertical scroll is restricted. In this way, by restricting the switching of the change path during the return start period during the period when the operation suggestion presentation is executed, the expectation that the operation suggestion presentation will continue to be executed is not hindered by the switching of the change path. This can increase the interest in the game.

In the embodiment, the switching of the movement path is restricted during the period in which the operation suggestion display is executed. Alternatively, it may be possible to either restrict switching from the first movement path to the second movement path during the period in which the operation suggestion display is executed and during a movement start period that includes the execution period of the movement start display in the movement display of the first movement path, or restrict switching from the second movement path to the first movement path during the period in which the operation suggestion display is executed and during a movement start period that includes the execution period of the movement start display in the movement display of the second movement path.

In the embodiment, the switching of the fluctuation path is restricted during the fluctuation start period, but the switching of the fluctuation path may be restricted if it corresponds to the execution period of the operation suggestion performance during the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + fluctuation stop suggestion period.

In the embodiment, the execution of the above-mentioned switching effect (predetermined effect) can be restricted during the period when the operation suggestion effect is executed and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start effect in the change effect of the first change path of the vertical scroll. The above-mentioned switching effect (predetermined effect) may be allowed to be executed during the period when the operation suggestion effect is executed and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start effect in the change effect of the second change path of the annular scroll, but in the embodiment, the execution of the above-mentioned switching effect (predetermined effect) is restricted during the period when the operation suggestion effect is executed and during the change start period including the execution period of the change start effect in the change effect of the second change path of the annular scroll. In this way, by restricting the execution of the switching effect during the period when the operation suggestion effect is executed and the change start period overlap, the expectation that the operation suggestion effect will continue to be executed is not hindered by the switching of the change path. This can increase the interest in the game.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching effect is restricted during the period in which the operation suggestion effect is executed. Alternatively, during the period in which the operation suggestion effect is executed, it may be possible to either restrict the execution of the switching effect during a fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start effect in the fluctuation effect of the first fluctuation path, or restrict the execution of the switching effect during a fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start effect in the fluctuation effect of the second fluctuation path, during the period in which the operation suggestion effect is executed.

In the embodiment, the execution of the switching effect is restricted during the fluctuation start period, but the execution of the switching effect may be restricted if it is during the execution period of the operation suggestion effect during the entire fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation stop suggestion period, the fluctuation start period + high-speed fluctuation period, or the high-speed fluctuation period + fluctuation stop suggestion period.

When a switching effect (e.g., an eye-catch) is executed in the variable effect of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), the execution of consecutive effects executed in one or more variable effects may be restricted.
When a switching effect (e.g., an eye-catching effect, etc.) is executed in the variable effect of the second variable path (e.g., a circular scroll), the execution of consecutive effects performed in one or more variable effects may be restricted.
When a switching effect (e.g., an eye-catch, etc.) is executed in a variable performance, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), the execution of continuous effects executed in one or more variable performances may be restricted.

In the change performance of the first change path (e.g. vertical scrolling), when a switching performance (e.g. eye-catching, etc.) is executed, the execution of the operation performance of the movable part 73 may be restricted.
In the change performance of the second change path (e.g., circular scroll), when a switching performance (e.g., an eye-catching performance, etc.) is executed, the execution of the operation performance of the movable part 73 may be restricted.
In the variable performance, whether it is the first variable path (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scrolling), when a switching performance (e.g. eye-catching, etc.) is executed, the execution of the operation performance of the movable part 73 may be restricted.

In the change presentation of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling), when a switching presentation (e.g., an eye-catching effect, etc.) is executed, the execution of an operation suggestion presentation that prompts the user to operate the operation button 135 may be restricted.
In the variation presentation of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), when a switching presentation (e.g., an eye-catching effect, etc.) is executed, the execution of an operation suggestion presentation that prompts the user to operate the operation button 135 may be restricted.
In the variable presentation, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), when a switching presentation (e.g., an eye-catching effect) is executed, the execution of an operation suggestion presentation that prompts the user to operate the operation button 135 may be restricted.

In the case of changing the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) to another variable path, the execution of continuous effects performed in one or more variable effects may be restricted.
In the case of changing the second change path (e.g., circular scroll) to another change path, the execution of continuous effects performed in one or more change effects may be restricted.
When changing to another variable path in a variable presentation, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), the execution of continuous presentations performed once or multiple times in the variable presentation may be restricted.

In the case of changing the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) to another change path, the execution of the operation performance of the movable part 73 may be restricted.
When changing the second movement path (e.g., circular scroll) to another movement path, the execution of the operation performance of the movable part 73 may be restricted.
When changing to another variable path during a variable presentation, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), the execution of the operation presentation of the movable part 73 may be restricted.

In the case of changing the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) to another change path, the execution of the operation suggestion effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 135 may be restricted.
In the case of changing the second change path (e.g., circular scroll) to another change path, the execution of the operation suggestion effect that prompts the user to operate the operation button 135 may be restricted.
When changing to another variable path during the variable presentation, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), the execution of the operation suggestion presentation that prompts the user to operate the operation button 135 may be restricted.

When a continuous performance performed with one or more fluctuation performances, an operation performance of the movable role 73, or an operation suggestion performance that encourages the operation of the operation button 135 is executed, restrictions are not limited to the execution of the aforementioned change in the fluctuation path or switching performance, but may also include restrictions on other things, such as the stopping sound of patterns such as same-color patterns, sound output, lighting, effects, etc.

The restriction on changing the change path or executing a switching effect is not limited to continuous effects performed in one or more change effects, operation effects of the movable role 73, or operation suggestion effects that encourage the operation of the operation button 135, but may also be, for example, when the player is in a specified (e.g., advantageous to the player) zone (execution of a suggestion effect that suggests a transition to a zone) or other such cases.

When a switching effect (such as an eye-catcher for changing the variable path) is being executed, the execution of a hold change effect in which the hold icon or the color or shape of the icon changes may be restricted.
When a switching effect (such as an eye-catcher for changing the variable path) is being executed, the execution of an action effect that suggests the execution of a hold change effect in which the hold icon or the color or shape of the icon changes may be restricted.
When a switching effect (such as an eye-catcher for changing the variable path) is being executed, the execution of reach-inducing effects that suggest or give the expectation of a reach may be restricted.
Even if the aforementioned effects are restricted when a switching effect (such as an eye-catcher for changing the variable path) is being executed, a specific effect may be executed, such as an effect that uses a winning sound (including a changing sound) that is output when the game ball wins.

The change performance of the change path after the switching performance is executed may be made easier to execute a reach-inducing performance that suggests or gives hope of a reach than the change performance of the change path before the switching performance is executed.
It may be possible to make it easier for a player to reach a favorable state (such as a reach being achieved) by using a reach-provoking effect that suggests or gives the expectation of a reach, which is executed in the change performance of the change performance of the change performance of the change performance before the change performance is executed, rather than a reach-provoking effect that suggests or gives the expectation of a reach.
It may be possible to make it easier for a player to expect a favorable state (such as the achievement of a reach) to be executed in a reach-teasing performance that suggests or gives the player the expectation of a reach, and is executed in a change performance of the change performance of the change performance path after the switch performance is executed, than in a reach-teasing performance that suggests or gives the player the expectation of a reach, and is executed in a change performance of the change performance path before the switch performance is executed.

(Example 7 of variation performance - pseudo consecutive performance)
The variation performance example 7 shown in FIG. 29 is a case where a pseudo consecutive performance is executed. Here, the "pseudo consecutive performance" refers to a special mode of performance pattern variation display in which all performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped and then start to vary again once or multiple times within a special pattern variation time determined for a winning (ball entry) to a single starting device (first starting device 112, second starting device 115) in order to make it look as if the variation display of the performance pattern 70a has been executed multiple times for a jackpot determination based on winning (ball entry) to a single starting device (first starting device 112, second starting device 115). Note that there are also cases where it is called a variation continuation performance or a continuous performance. Note that although the case of a normal game state is given, it may also be applied to an advantageous game state.

(First variation path)
For example, when the performance pattern 70a is fluctuating on the first fluctuation path (FIG. 29(a1)), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left column and the performance pattern 70a on the right column are temporarily stopped. At this time, during the stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70a on the left column and the right column, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode A corresponding to the first fluctuation path is executed. As one type of fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode A, when the performance patterns 70a on the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped, a stop sound A is output (FIG. 29(b1)). Also, as one type of fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the performance patterns 70a on the left column and the right column, a performance action (e.g., waving a stick) of the character image, which is a component of the performance pattern 70a, is performed. Furthermore, a motion performance in which the performance patterns 70a on the left column and the right column as a whole swing up and down is performed.

In the middle row, the special symbol "NEXT" arrives as the performance symbol 70a on the first movement path (Figure 29 (c1)). During the stop suggestion period when the special symbol in the middle row temporarily stops at a predetermined position, a movement stop suggestion performance using the special symbol is executed. The movement stop suggestion performance of the special symbol is executed in mode T, which is different from mode A of the movement stop suggestion performance of the first movement path. As a type of variation stop suggestion effect for mode T, a stop sound T in a different mode from when the left and right column effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped is output (Fig. 29 (d1). At this time, the unique pattern in the middle row does not have the action effect of the components of the unique pattern executed, which is different from the left and right column effect patterns 70a. The entire unique pattern in the middle row may be in a temporarily stopped state with an effect action that swings up and down, like the right and left column effect patterns 70a, but in the embodiment, the effect action mode differs from that of the right and left columns in that an effect action is executed in which the entire unique pattern in the middle row expands and contracts.

In an embodiment, when the special symbol temporarily stops (pseudo consecutive performance: successful), a predetermined variation continuation performance is executed (Fig. 29 (e1)), and then the performance symbol 70a changes again. The variation continuation performance may be omitted. Also, in an embodiment, when the special symbol does not temporarily stop (pseudo consecutive performance: failed), for example, because the special symbol goes too far, a normal symbol is displayed as the performance symbol 70a in the middle row, and a variation stop suggestion performance of mode A that matches the variation path A is executed.

(Second variation path)
For example, when the performance pattern 70a fluctuates on the second fluctuation path (FIG. 29(a2)), the left column performance pattern 70a and the right column performance pattern 70a temporarily stop when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation performance. At this time, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the left and right column performance patterns 70a, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode B corresponding to the second fluctuation path is executed. As one type of fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode B, when the left and right column performance patterns 70a temporarily stop, a stop sound B is output (FIG. 29(b2)). Also, as one type of fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the left and right column performance patterns 70a, a performance action (e.g., waving hands) of the character image, which is a component of the performance pattern 70a, is performed. Furthermore, a motion performance in which the entire left and right column performance patterns 70a swing up and down is performed. Thus, here, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode B is different from the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode A.

In the middle row, the unique pattern "NEXT" arrives as the performance pattern 70a on the first moving path of the vertical scroll, not the second moving path of the annular scroll (Figure 29 (c2)). During the change stop suggestion period until the unique pattern in the middle row is displayed as having stopped changing at a predetermined position, a change stop suggestion performance using the unique pattern is executed. The change stop suggestion performance of the unique pattern is executed in mode T, which is different from mode B of the change stop suggestion performance of the second moving path. As one type of variation stop suggestion effect for mode T, a stop sound T in a different mode is output from when the left and right column effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (Fig. 29 (d2)). At this time, the unique pattern in the middle column does not have the motion effect of the components of the unique pattern executed, which is different from the left and right column effect patterns 70a. The entire unique pattern in the middle column may be in a temporarily stopped state with a performance action of swinging up and down, like the right and left column effect patterns 70a, but in the embodiment, the performance action mode differs from that of the right and left columns in that a performance action is executed in which the entire unique pattern in the middle column expands and contracts.

In an embodiment, when the special symbol temporarily stops (pseudo consecutive performance: successful), a predetermined variation continuation performance is executed (Fig. 29 (e2)), and then the performance symbol 70a changes again. The variation continuation performance may be omitted. Also, in an embodiment, when the special symbol does not temporarily stop (pseudo consecutive performance: failed), for example, because the special symbol goes too far, a normal symbol is displayed as the performance symbol 70a in the middle row, and a variation stop suggestion performance of mode B that matches the variation path B is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, in a variation effect including a pseudo consecutive effect (pseudo variation), before a "reach" is finally achieved or missed, the left and right symbols "X" and "Y" (or "X" and "X") stop, then the center symbol "NEXT" stops, and the left and right center symbols are temporarily stopped in a predetermined pattern "X NEXT Y" (or "X NEXT X"), after which the left and right center symbols restart, creating a pseudo consecutive effect, and the number of times this occurs (for example, 1 to 3 times) is the number of pseudo consecutive effects.

When a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, it is easier to transition to a reach performance than not to transition to a reach performance. Also, for example, a re-change after a second pseudo consecutive performance is executed is easier to transition to a reach performance than a re-change after a first pseudo consecutive performance is executed, and the more times the pseudo consecutive performance is repeated, the easier it is to execute a reach performance.

And before the left and right middle row performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop pattern "XXX" (winning pattern), for example, in the case of an "SP reach", a mission failure presentation is performed, and then in the case of an "SPSP reach", a battle defeat presentation is performed, and then the performance patterns are temporarily stopped in the pre-end temporary stop pattern "XYX" corresponding to a missed reach, and a revival suggestion presentation is executed which suggests a revival from this pre-end temporary stop pattern "XYX" to the final temporary stop pattern "XXX" (see, for example, FIG. 37). In other words, it may be configured so that a revival suggestion presentation is executed and not executed.

For example, (1) the left, right and center symbols are in a temporary stop state in the temporary stop pattern "XYX" before the end, (2) a revival suggestion effect is executed, and then (3) the left, right and center symbols are restored from the temporary stop pattern "XYX" before the end to the final temporary stop pattern "XXX", and temporarily stop in the final temporary stop pattern "XXX", and (4) the final temporary stop pattern "XXX" is used as the stop pattern and the reel is permanently stopped.

The order of jackpots favorable to the player may be second jackpot < third jackpot < first jackpot. For example, the stop pattern corresponding to the first jackpot may be "777", the stop patterns corresponding to the second jackpot may be "222", "444", "666", "888", and the stop patterns corresponding to the third jackpot may be "111", "333", "555", "999".

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, before the left and right middle row performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the final temporary stop pattern "XXX", they may be temporarily stopped at the pre-end temporary stop pattern "XaXaXa" corresponding to the second or third jackpot, and a promotion suggestion performance may be executed that suggests the possibility of upgrading from the pre-end temporary stop pattern "XaXaXa" (such as "222") corresponding to the second jackpot to the final temporary stop pattern "XXX" (such as "333" or "777") corresponding to the third or first jackpot, and the possibility of upgrading from the pre-end temporary stop pattern "XaXaXa" (such as "333") corresponding to the third jackpot to the final temporary stop pattern "XXX" ("777") corresponding to the first jackpot. In other words, the configuration may be such that the promotion suggestion performance may or may not be executed.

For example, (1) the left and right middle row performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the temporary stop mode "222" before the end, (2) a promotion suggestion performance is executed, and then (3) the left and right middle row performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the final temporary stop mode "222" which is the same as the temporary stop mode before the end, and (4) the final temporary stop mode "222" is actually stopped as the stop mode. Or, after (2) a promotion suggestion performance is executed, (5) the left and right middle row performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the final temporary stop mode "333" which is one step up from the temporary stop mode before the end, and (6) the final temporary stop mode "333" is actually stopped as the stop mode. Or, after (2) a promotion suggestion performance is executed, (7) the left and right middle row performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped at the final temporary stop mode "777" which is two steps up from the temporary stop mode before the end, and (8) the final temporary stop mode "777" is actually stopped as the stop mode.

Also, (1) the left and right center symbols are in a temporary stop state in the temporary stop pattern "333" before the end, (2) a promotion suggestion effect is executed, and then (3) the left and right center symbols are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop pattern "333" which is the same as the temporary stop pattern before the end, and (4) the final temporary stop pattern "333" is used as the stop pattern to actually stop. Alternatively, (2) after the promotion suggestion effect is executed, (5) the left and right center symbols are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop pattern "777" which is one step up from the temporary stop pattern before the end, and (6) the final temporary stop pattern "777" is used as the stop pattern to actually stop.

Therefore, in a variable presentation in which a promotion suggestion presentation is executed, if the final provisional stop mode "XXX" is not promoted from the provisional stop mode before the end "XaXaXa" via the promotion suggestion presentation, the provisional stop mode before the end "XaXaXa" may be set to be the same as the stop mode initially determined, and if the final provisional stop mode "XXX" is promoted from the provisional stop mode before the end "XaXaXa" via the promotion suggestion presentation, the provisional stop mode before the end "XaXaXa" may be set to be the same as the stop mode corresponding to a jackpot that is less advantageous than the jackpot corresponding to the initially determined stop mode.

The fluctuation stop suggestion display can be executed using display elements in display pattern 70a, such as the operation of display pattern 70a itself, the operation of components of display pattern 70a, and the appearance of associated elements associated with display pattern 70a, display elements using images on a screen other than display pattern 70a, and display elements using output devices other than a screen, such as audio output device 331 and light-emitting devices, either alone or in combination.
Even if the performance pattern 70a is a unique pattern, the variation stop suggestion performance may be executed by using performance elements in the unique pattern, such as performance elements of the unique pattern itself, performance elements of the components of the unique pattern, and performance elements of an associated element associated with the unique pattern, performance elements based on an image on a screen other than the unique pattern, and performance elements based on an output device other than a screen, such as an audio output device 331 or a light-emitting device, either alone or in combination.

As described above, during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in the variation performance of the first variation path of the vertical scroll will stop, it is possible to execute a variation stop suggestion performance of mode A and a variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a. Also, during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in the variation performance of the second variation path of the circular scroll will stop, it is possible to execute a variation stop suggestion performance of mode B that is different from mode A of the first variation path and a variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a.

In an embodiment, in the variation performance of the first variation path of the vertical scroll, for example, after a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern is executed, a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T different from the mode A of the variation stop suggestion performance by the normal pattern can be executed. Also, in the variation performance of the second variation path of the circular scroll, a mode B different from the mode A of the first variation path is executed as a variation stop suggestion performance by a normal pattern. However, in the variation performance of the second variation path of the circular scroll, for example, after a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern is executed, a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T different from the mode B of the variation stop suggestion performance by the normal pattern can be executed. That is, in either the first variation path or the second variation path, when a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern is executed, a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T different from the mode A of the first variation path and the mode B of the second variation path is executed. In addition, regardless of whether it is the first or second variation path, when a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern is executed, it can be said that a common variation stop suggestion performance of mode T is executed. In this way, by executing a variation stop suggestion performance of mode T that is different from modes A and B, the value of the pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved. Here, different modes include differences in the performance content, performance period, number of performance elements, presence or absence of a performance, etc.

In the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, for example, after a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern is executed, a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T different from the mode A of the variation stop suggestion performance by the normal pattern may be executed, or in the variation performance of the second variation path of circular scrolling, for example, after a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern is executed, a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T different from the mode B of the variation stop suggestion performance by the normal pattern may be executed. For example, only when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed on the first variation path, a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode T is executed, whereas after a pseudo consecutive performance is executed on the second variation path, a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode different from the modes B and T is executed, or the execution of part or all of the variation stop suggestion performance is restricted, or a variation stop suggestion performance of a mode B is executed. The above relationship between the first variation path and the second variation path may be interchanged.

As an example of a specific effect, a pseudo consecutive effect in which the effect pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern has been given, but this is not limited to this. For example, a transition effect such as an eye-catcher used to change the fluctuation path, a return effect for returning from an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect to the normal presentation state (to attract the player's attention), or other effects executed in a fluctuation effect may be used as a key for executing the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode T.

In the embodiment, when the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode T is executed, a pseudo consecutive effect (specific effect) is executed, so that the reach effect is more likely to be executed when the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode T with the pseudo consecutive effect (specific effect) is executed than when the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode A or mode B without the pseudo consecutive effect (specific effect) is executed. And, when the effect patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns are aligned to become "Atari", it is assumed that the effect patterns 70a in the left column and the effect patterns 70a in the right column are aligned to execute the reach effect. And, when the effect patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns are aligned to become "Atari", the game moves from the normal game state to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Therefore, it can be said that it is easier to move from the normal game state to an advantageous game state (such as time reduction or big win) when the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode T is executed than when the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode A or mode B is executed. If the game is in a time-saving game mode, it is easier to transition from the time-saving game mode to a jackpot if the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode T is executed than if the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode A or mode B is executed.

In an embodiment, in the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, when a variation stop suggestion performance of mode T different from mode A, which is the normal mode, is executed during the stop suggestion period from when the variation stop suggestion performance starts until the variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a is executed, the player is more likely to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player than when the variation stop suggestion performance of mode T is not executed. In the variation performance of the second variation path of circular scrolling, when a variation stop suggestion performance of mode T different from mode B, which is the normal mode, is executed during the stop suggestion period from when the variation stop suggestion performance starts until the variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a is executed, the player is more likely to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player than when the variation stop suggestion performance of mode T is not executed. In this way, the expectation of the variation stop suggestion performance of mode T being executed can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, when a variation stop suggestion performance of mode T different from mode A, which is the normal mode, is executed during the stop suggestion period from the start of the variation stop suggestion performance to the execution of the variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a, it is easier to transition to a game state advantageous to the player than when the variation stop suggestion performance of mode T is not executed. However, in the variation performance of the second variation path of circular scrolling, when a variation stop suggestion performance of mode T different from mode B, which is the normal mode, is executed during the stop suggestion period from the start of the variation stop suggestion performance to the execution of the variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a, it may be easier to transition to a game state advantageous to the player than when the variation stop suggestion performance of mode T is not executed, even if it is more difficult to transition to a game state advantageous to the player. In addition, the above relationship between the first variation path and the second variation path may be interchanged.

According to the example of FIG. 29, whether it is the first or second variable path variable performance, the pseudo consecutive performance (predetermined performance) of the same motif can be executed. In the embodiment, whether it is the first or second variable path variable performance, the same unique pattern is used in the pseudo consecutive performance. Even if the shape of the unique pattern of the first variable path and the unique pattern of the second variable path are partially or completely different, the motif can be said to be the same when the content suggesting the continuation (development) of the fluctuation is the same. In addition, it may be easier for the player to transition to an advantageous game state when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the second variable path variable performance than when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the first variable path variable performance. In this way, the expectation level changes depending on which variable path variable performance is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Not limited to the above relationship, it may be easier for the player to transition to a favorable game state when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path than when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path.

As shown in FIG. 29-2, during the variation stop suggestion period until the unique pattern in the middle row displays the variation stop at a predetermined position, the execution of part or all of the variation stop suggestion performance may be restricted. In the embodiment, during the variation stop suggestion period of the unique pattern, the output of the stop sound and the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance by the components of the unique pattern are restricted. In the variation performance of the first variation path of the vertical scroll, for example, after a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a unique pattern is executed, the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance of the unique pattern can be restricted to execute the variation stop display of the unique pattern (FIG. 29-2 (a1) to (e1)). In the variation performance of the second variation path of the circular scroll, for example, after a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a unique pattern is executed, the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance of the unique pattern can be restricted to execute the variation stop display of the unique pattern (FIG. 29-2 (a2) to (e2)). By doing this, the value of the pseudo consecutive performance can be increased by the difference in performance after the pseudo consecutive performance, and the excitement of the game can be improved.

In the vertical scroll first variable path variable performance, for example, after a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern is executed, the execution of the variable stop suggestion performance may be restricted, or in the circular scroll second variable path variable performance, for example, after a pseudo consecutive performance (specific performance) in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a specific pattern is executed, the execution of the variable stop suggestion performance may be restricted. For example, only when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed on the first variable path, the execution of the variable stop suggestion performance may be restricted in the variable stop suggestion period of the specific pattern in the middle row, and after a pseudo consecutive performance is executed on the second variable path, the variable stop suggestion performance may be executed in the variable stop suggestion period of the specific pattern in the middle row. The above relationship between the first variable path and the second variable path may be reversed.

According to the example of FIG. 29, in the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, the performance pattern 70a in the normal pattern state can be displayed as a first stop mode with a stop suggestion action such as flowing from top to bottom and bouncing back beyond a predetermined stop display position, or a variation stop suggestion performance accompanied by the above-mentioned stop sound A, etc. In the variation performance of the second variation path of the circular scroll, the performance pattern 70a in the normal pattern state can be displayed as a second stop mode with a stop action such as flowing from diagonally top to diagonally bottom and bouncing back beyond a predetermined stop display position, or a variation stop suggestion performance by the above-mentioned stop sound B, etc. In the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, when the performance pattern 70a in the middle row is changed to a normal pattern and a performance (predetermined performance) by the variation display of a unique pattern is executed (after being executed), the variation stop can be displayed in a third stop mode with a stop suggestion action (for example, not bouncing) different from the first stop mode described above or a variation stop suggestion performance by a different stop sound T, etc. In the variation performance of the second variation path of the annular scroll, when the performance pattern 70a in the middle row is changed to a normal pattern and a performance (predetermined performance) by the variation display of the unique pattern is executed (after being executed), the variation stop display can be performed in a third stop mode accompanied by a variation stop suggestion performance by a stop suggestion action (for example, not bouncing) different from the second stop mode described above or a different stop sound T. Note that the third stop mode is not limited to a mode that arrives through a predetermined variation path, and may be a mode that does not pass through a variation path (the variation path is unknown) such that the unique pattern suddenly appears. Also, even when a performance by a unique pattern is executed in the middle row, the performance patterns 70a in the right and left rows can be displayed in a variation stop mode according to the variation path. Thus, in the embodiment, regardless of whether it is the first variation path or the second variation path, after a predetermined performance in which a unique pattern appears in the middle row is executed, the unique pattern in the middle row is displayed in a variation stop mode in a third stop mode different from the first and second stop modes. This can increase the sense of anticipation that the variable stop display of the third stop mode will occur, improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the example of FIG. 29-2, as in the example of FIG. 29-1, in the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, the performance pattern 70a in the normal pattern state can be displayed as a stop suggestion action such as flowing from top to bottom and bouncing back beyond a predetermined stop display position, or in the first stop mode accompanied by a variation stop suggestion performance accompanied by the above-mentioned stop sound A, etc. In the variation performance of the second variation path of circular scrolling, the performance pattern 70a in the normal pattern state can be displayed as a stop suggestion action such as flowing from top to bottom diagonally and bouncing back beyond a predetermined stop display position, or in the second stop mode accompanied by a variation stop suggestion performance by the above-mentioned stop sound B, etc. According to the example of FIG. 29-2, in the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling, when the performance pattern 70a in the middle row is changed to a normal pattern and a performance (predetermined performance) by the variation display of a unique pattern is executed (after being executed), the variation stop can be displayed in a third stop mode without a variation stop suggestion performance, unlike the first stop mode described above. In the variation performance of the second variation path of the circular scroll, when the performance pattern 70a in the middle row is changed to a normal pattern and a performance (predetermined performance) by the variation display of a unique pattern is executed (after being executed), the variation stop display can be performed in a third stop mode that does not involve a variation stop suggestion performance, unlike the second stop mode described above. Note that the third stop mode is not limited to a mode that arrives through a predetermined variation path, and may be a mode that does not follow a variation path (the variation path is unknown) such that a unique pattern suddenly appears. Also, even when a performance by a unique pattern is executed in the middle row, the performance patterns 70a in the right and left columns can be displayed in a variation stop mode according to the variation path. Thus, in the example of FIG. 29-2, whether it is the first variation path or the second variation path, after a predetermined performance in which a unique pattern appears in the middle row is executed, the unique pattern in the middle row is displayed in a variation stop mode different from the first and second stop modes. By doing so, the expectation that the variation stop display of the third stop mode will be performed can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in Figs. 1 and 2, in the first and second variation path variation performances, it is possible to execute a specific variation performance (a variation performance in which a losing symbol is displayed as being stopped) in which the performance symbols 70a are displayed as being stopped in a specific sequence (sequence in which the identification information is not aligned) including performance symbols 70a with different identification information. In the specific variation performance, a specific sound performance is executed in which a specific sound (stop sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period from when the performance symbol 70a starts the variation stop suggestion performance until it is displayed as being stopped. As shown in Figs. 29, 29-2, and 29-3, the specific variation performance may include the unique symbol "NEXT" as the performance symbol 70a with different identification information.

In the example shown in FIG. 29, even in the case of a specific variation effect including a unique symbol, a specific sound effect is executed in which a specific sound (stop sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period from when the unique symbol starts the variation stop suggestion effect until the variation stop is displayed. More specifically, a specific sound effect is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the left column of performance patterns 70a, a specific sound effect is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the right column of performance patterns 70a, and a specific sound effect is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the middle column of unique symbols.

In the example shown in FIG. 29-2, a specific sound effect is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the left-hand performance pattern 70a, and a specific sound effect is executed during the variation stop suggestion period of the right-hand performance pattern 70a, but the execution of the specific sound effect is restricted during the variation stop suggestion period of the special pattern in the middle row. In this way, in a special variation effect including a special pattern, the specific sound effect that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) is restricted during the variation stop suggestion period from when the special pattern starts the stop suggestion effect to when the variation stop is displayed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 29-2, whether it is the special variation effect of the first variation path or the special variation effect of the second variation path B, when the effect (special effect) by the variation display of the special pattern changed to the normal pattern is executed (after execution), the execution of the specific sound effect that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) can be restricted. In this way, the expectation of the pseudo consecutive performance can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific variable performance of the first variable path, when a performance (specific performance) by a variable display of a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern is executed (after execution), execution of a specific sound performance that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) may be restricted, while in the specific variable performance of the second variable path, when a performance (specific performance) by a variable display of a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern is executed (after execution), execution of a specific sound performance that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) may not be restricted. Also, in the specific variable performance of the second variable path, when a performance (specific performance) by a variable display of a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern is executed (after execution), execution of a specific sound performance that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) may be restricted, while in the specific variable performance of the first variable path, when a performance (specific performance) by a variable display of a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern is executed (after execution), execution of a specific sound performance that outputs a specific sound (stop sound) may not be restricted.

In the example shown in FIG. 29, in the first variation path variation performance, during the variation stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion performance to when the variation stop is displayed, a first sound performance can be executed to output a predetermined sound (a stop sound linked to a normal pattern according to the variation path). Also, in the second variation path variation performance, during the variation stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion performance to when the variation stop is displayed, a first sound performance can be executed to output a predetermined sound (a stop sound linked to a normal pattern according to the variation path). In the variation performance of the first variation path variation performance, during the variation stop suggestion period, a second sound performance can be executed to output a specific sound (a stop sound linked to a unique pattern) different from the predetermined sound. Also, in the variation performance of the second variation path variation performance, during the variation stop suggestion period, a second sound performance can be executed to output a specific sound (a stop sound linked to a unique pattern) different from the predetermined sound.

In the example shown in FIG. 29, in the first variation path variation performance, the first sound performance is more likely to be executed in the losing variation performance in which a normal pattern different from the special pattern (performance pattern 70a having predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information) is displayed as a stop, than in the losing variation performance in which the special pattern "NEXT" (performance pattern 70a having specific identification information) is displayed as a stop. Also, in the second variation path variation performance, the first sound performance is more likely to be executed in the losing variation performance in which a normal pattern different from the special pattern (performance pattern 70a having predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information) is displayed as a stop, than in the losing variation performance in which the special pattern "NEXT" (performance pattern 70a having specific identification information) is displayed as a stop. By doing this, the expectation of the pseudo consecutive performance can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, during the variation stop suggestion period, both the first sound effect and the second sound effect may be executed for at least one of the normal and special symbols, but even in this case, it is preferable to make it easier for the first sound effect to be executed in a losing variation effect in which a normal symbol different from the special symbol (a performance symbol 70a having predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information) is displayed as having stopped varying, than in a losing variation effect in which the special symbol "NEXT" (a performance symbol 70a having specific identification information) is displayed as having stopped varying.

Here, even in a losing variation effect where a normal symbol is displayed as being stopped from varying, if certain conditions are met (for example, an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot or a reach is being executed), the second sound effect may be executed, but in this case too, it is preferable to make the first sound effect more likely to be executed than the second sound effect (execution rate of the second sound effect < execution rate of the first sound effect). Note that in the embodiment, in a losing variation effect where a normal symbol different from the special symbol (performance symbol 70a having a predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information) is displayed as being stopped from varying, execution of the second sound effect is restricted and the first sound effect is executed.

The first sound effect and the second sound effect may differ in some or all of their elements, such as the content of the tone, the volume of the sound, the timing of execution within the fluctuation stop suggestion period, and the length of the execution period, and as long as some of the elements are different, the remaining elements may be the same. Also, even if some or all of the accompanying effects, such as effects, executed in conjunction with the first sound effect and the second sound effect are different, some or all of the accompanying effects may be the same.

Figures 29-3 (a1) to 29-3 (e1) show a case where the performance pattern 70a is displayed changing along the third change path. The first change path is a case where the performance pattern 70a rotates around the vertical axis on the screen. For example, when the performance pattern 70a is changing along the third change path of vertical axis scrolling (Figure 29-3 (a2)), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change performance, the performance pattern 70a in the left column and the performance pattern 70a in the right column temporarily stop. At this time, during the change stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70a in the left column and the right column, a change stop suggestion performance of mode C corresponding to the third change path is executed. As a type of fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode C, a stop sound C is output during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the left and right column performance patterns 70a are displayed as a fluctuation stop (temporary stop) (Fig. 29 (b2)). Here, the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of mode C may be the same as mode A or mode B, but in this embodiment, a fluctuation stop suggestion effect of a different mode from modes A and B is executed. Then, in the middle column, the unique pattern "NEXT" arrives as the performance pattern 70a in a vertical scroll different from the third fluctuation path of the up and down axis scroll (Fig. 29-3 (c2)) and temporarily stops (Fig. 29-3 (d1)).

According to the example of FIG. 29-3, when a performance (predetermined performance) by a variable display of a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern is executed (after execution) in the variable performance of the second variable path of the circular scroll, it is possible to display the unique pattern in a vertical scroll variable path different from the second variable path without going through the normal circular scroll of the second variable path. Similarly, when a performance (predetermined performance) by a variable display of a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern is executed (after execution) in the variable performance of the third variable path of the vertical axis scroll, it is possible to display the unique pattern in a vertical scroll variable path different from the third variable path without going through the normal vertical axis scroll of the third variable path. Thus, in the example of FIG. 29-3, even if the variable performance is a different variable path, when a performance (predetermined performance) by a variable display of a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern is executed, the variable path is switched to one that corresponds to the unique pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation of a pseudo consecutive performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 29-2, when a performance (predetermined performance) is executed (after execution) in the performance of the second variable path of the circular scroll by varying and displaying a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern, the unique pattern is displayed in a stopped state in a vertical scroll variable path different from the second variable path without going through the normal mode of circular scroll as the second variable path, while when a performance (predetermined performance) is executed (after execution) in the performance of the first variable path of the vertical scroll by varying and displaying a unique pattern changed to a normal pattern, the unique pattern is displayed in a stopped state in a vertical scroll variable path in the normal mode as the second variable path. Note that the relationship may be reversed to that described above.

In the pseudo consecutive performance, the performance pattern 70a in the middle row is changed from a normal pattern to a unique pattern, but this is not limited to the above. As shown in FIG. 29-4, a variable performance using a unique pattern may be executed in addition to the normal pattern in the middle row. In this case, the timing of the display of the stop of the variable of the normal pattern in the middle row and the timing of the display of the stop of the variable of the unique pattern in the middle row may be the same or different. During the period when the normal pattern in the middle row is suggested to stop variable, a variable stop suggestion performance according to the variable path may be executed or the execution may be restricted. During the period when the unique pattern in the middle row is suggested to stop variable, a variable stop suggestion performance according to the variable path may be executed or the execution may be restricted.

Regarding the matters described above with reference to pseudo consecutive performances in which the performance pattern 70a is changed from a normal pattern to a unique pattern or a unique pattern is added, the above-mentioned control may be applied when, for example, a transition performance such as an eye-catcher used to change the variable path, a return performance for returning from an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance to the normal performance state (to attract the player's attention), or other performances executed in a variable performance are applied.

Furthermore, in regard to matters to be explained by giving examples of pseudo consecutive performances, for example, in the case of transition performances such as eye-catches used to change the variable path, return performances to return from SP reach performances or SPSP reach performances to the normal performance state (to attract the player's attention), and other performances executed in variable performances, the above-mentioned control does not have to be applied, and control different from that of the pseudo consecutive performances, such as control opposite to that of the pseudo consecutive performances, may be used.

When the display of the variable stop of the performance pattern 70a (full stop, temporary stop) is displayed, the performance pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined state (miss state, jackpot state, etc.) that indicates the result of the jackpot lottery. A jackpot state (special result state) is a combination of the same performance patterns such as "777" or a combination of performance patterns 70a with regularity such as "357" (e.g., chance numbers, etc.), and a miss state is any other state.

(Reach performance)
In addition, while the changing display of the performance pattern 70a is being performed, various performance images and movies such as reach effects, background images, characters, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 131 (main LCD) and the second image display devices 132, 133 (sub-LCDs) depending on the result of the jackpot lottery, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of the execution of a jackpot (special game) (hereinafter referred to as the ``expectation of winning a jackpot'').

Here, "reach effect" refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of effect patterns 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other effect patterns 70a change. For example, when a combination of effect patterns 70a with three digits, "777," is set as the combination of effect patterns 70a that indicates a jackpot (jackpot result mode), this refers to a mode in which two effect patterns 70a temporarily stop at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect patterns 70a change in the center area.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect."

A "normal reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed in a state where the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the central area to form a reach state.

The "SP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after a normal reach effect, in which the effect pattern 70a in the reach state is displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the screen, and a movie (video, animation, etc.) is played that has a stronger effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach effect.

An "SPSP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect, and in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) with a higher effect (higher expectation of a big win) than a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect is played. Note that even in an SPSP reach effect, the effect pattern 70a in the state in which the reach state is formed may be displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the screen.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes slowly when all the combinations of multiple performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot are in place. In this embodiment, this reach effect is executed only when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of winning a jackpot related to the reach effect increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect < full rotation reach effect (guaranteed jackpot).

(Example of normal reach variation)
Fig. 30 (a1) shows the case of the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling in the normal game state. The performance patterns 70a having the same identification information in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped in the first variation path of vertical scrolling, resulting in a reach (Fig. 30 (b1)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns, the variation stop suggestion performance of mode A is executed, and for example, a stop sound A is output. Note that the variation stop display of the provisional stop state is executed in which the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns slightly swing (swing display) so that the performance patterns 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position.

As shown in FIG. 30(c1), the middle row performance symbol 70a, which has different identification information from the left and right rows, temporarily stops on the first movement path, resulting in a miss. At this time, during the movement stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a, a movement stop suggestion performance of mode A is executed, and for example, a stop sound A is output and a movement stop display in the temporary stop state is executed. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a stops permanently at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops permanently in a predetermined miss mode (FIG. 30(d1)).

When a performance pattern 70a with the same identification information as the left and right columns temporarily stops in the middle row, it is a win, and after the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a stops permanently at the stop position, a predetermined winning performance is executed, and then the game state shifts to an advantageous state for the player. When a win occurs, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a in the middle row, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a different mode (for winning) from the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode A that is normally executed may be executed.

Figure 30 (a2) shows the case of a variation effect of the second variation path of the circular scroll in the normal game state. In the left and right columns, the performance patterns 70a with the same identification information temporarily stop in the second variation path of the circular scroll, resulting in a reach (Figure 30 (b2)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns, a variation stop suggestion effect of mode B is executed, and for example, a stop sound B is output. Note that a variation stop display of a temporary stop state is executed, in which the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns slightly swing (swing display) so that the performance patterns 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position.

As shown in FIG. 30(c2), the middle row performance symbol 70a, which has different identification information from the left and right rows, temporarily stops on movement path B, resulting in a miss. At this time, during the movement stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbol 70a, a movement stop suggestion performance of mode B is executed, and for example, a stop sound B is output and a movement stop display in the temporary stop state is executed. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a stops permanently at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops permanently in a predetermined miss mode (FIG. 30(d2)).

When a performance pattern 70a with the same identification information as the left and right columns temporarily stops in the middle row, it is a win, and after the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a stops permanently at the stop position, a predetermined winning performance is executed, and then the game state shifts to an advantageous state for the player. When a win occurs, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a in the middle row, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a different mode (for winning) from the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of mode B that is normally executed may be executed.

In this way, in the case of a normal reach that results in a miss, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a in the middle row, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a type that corresponds to the fluctuation path is executed, and a stopping sound of a type that corresponds to the fluctuation path is output.

(Example of SP (SPSP) reach variation)
Fig. 31 (a1) shows the case of the variation performance of the first variation path of vertical scrolling in the normal game state. The performance patterns 70a having the same identification information in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped in the first variation path of vertical scrolling, resulting in a reach (Fig. 31 (b1)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns, the variation stop suggestion performance of mode A is executed, and a stop sound A is output. Note that the variation stop display of the provisional stop state is executed in which the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns slightly swing (swing display) so that the performance patterns 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position.

After that, if the game progresses to an SP reach performance (specific performance), a development performance (predetermined performance) is executed to develop the game into an SP reach performance (attract the player's attention). A single development performance can be set, or multiple development performances can be set, such as a first development performance and a second development performance. When multiple development performances are executed, it is possible to make it so that the first development performance is more likely to be executed (high execution rate) when a jackpot game is not executed, and the second development performance is more likely to be executed (high execution rate) when a jackpot game is executed. In other words, it is preferable to make the second development performance a performance with a higher jackpot expectation than the first development performance. Note that the normal reach performance may be executed for a predetermined period of time before switching to the SP reach performance. Note that the development performance is executed by displaying predetermined images such as whiteout, blackout, and effects, either alone or in combination.

As shown in FIG. 31(c1), in the SP reach performance, the background is switched from the mode A background to the SP background. Then, the performance pattern 70a in the left column is switched to a different form (for example, a simple form with only the identification part) from the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped, and is reduced in size from the time of the temporary stop and moved to a different position such as the upper left of the screen, and the variable stop display is executed in the temporary stop state. In addition, in the SP reach performance, the pattern whose configuration or size has changed from the normal pattern is sometimes called a changed pattern. Also, the performance pattern 70a in the right column is switched to a different form (for example, a simple form with only the identification part) from the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped, and is reduced in size from the time of the temporary stop and moved to a different position such as the upper right of the screen, and the variable stop display is executed in the temporary stop state. At this time, the changed patterns, which are the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns that are reduced and temporarily stopped and displayed, repeat a predetermined performance operation such as swinging left and right.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c1), in the SP reach performance of the embodiment, the performance pattern 70a in the middle row also switches to a different form (for example, a simple form with only the identification part) from the normal pattern of the performance pattern 70a in the first variation path, and switches to an SP variation path different from the first variation path (scrolling diagonally from the upper right to the lower left in the embodiment). The performance pattern 70a in the middle row may remain on the first variation path, but in the embodiment, it is configured to switch to a variation path different from the first variation path. Then, as necessary, a provocative performance such as an animation cut-in or a battle performance (not shown) is executed.

And, when the result of the variation performance is "miss", as shown in FIG. 31 (d1), the performance patterns "2", "8", and "2", which are the combination of misses, are temporarily stopped on the screen. The change patterns in the middle row scrolling on the variation path for the SP reach performance are displayed as stopped in the center of the screen after performing the variation stop suggestion performance for the SP reach during the variation stop suggestion period. Then, the change patterns in the left row, which were reduced in the upper left corner of the screen, are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the left area of the screen, and the change patterns in the right row, which were reduced in the upper right corner of the screen, are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the right area of the screen. At this time, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right rows, which are lined up in a provisionally stopped state, are performing a swaying performance operation. During the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70 in the middle row, the variation stop suggestion performance of the mode A corresponding to the first variation path is not performed, and the variation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode may be performed, or the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance may be restricted. In addition, during the period when the middle row performance pattern 70 indicates that it is about to stop, a stop sound A corresponding to the first movement path may be output, or a stop sound for the SP mode may be output without outputting the stop sound A, or the output of the stop sound may be limited. In addition, when the middle row performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Miss" may be displayed to notify that it is a miss.

After that, when the SP reach performance ends, as shown in FIG. 31 (e1), a return performance (predetermined performance) is executed on the screen to return (attract the player's attention) from the SP reach performance (specific performance). Specifically, a return image (e.g., a door image) is displayed on the screen so that the viewing of the performance images (performance patterns, background images, etc.) of the SP reach performance is restricted. At this time, the special pattern TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return performance ends, as shown in FIG. 31 (f1), the background for SP is switched to the background for mode A, the performance pattern 70a of the changed pattern is switched to the normal performance pattern 70a of the first variable path A (visual recognition is permitted), and the performance patterns "2", "8", and "2" of the first variable path are displayed as normal patterns. That is, before the return performance is executed, the changed patterns were displayed as stopped, but after the return performance is executed, they return to the normal patterns. Also, the performance patterns 70a of each column do not stop from the variable state of the first variable path, but when the return performance ends, they appear as normal patterns in a temporarily stopped state at a predetermined position on the left, center, or right of the screen. Furthermore, after the return performance is executed, the display is displayed as stopped in a temporarily stopped state without executing the variable stop suggestion performance. Also, the output of the stop sound is limited. Then, after the actual stop, the next variable performance is executed.

On the other hand, when the result of the variation performance is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 31-3 (d1), the winning combination of the performance patterns "2", "2", and "2" is temporarily stopped on the screen. The change patterns in the middle row scrolling on the variation path for the SP reach performance are displayed as stopped in the center of the screen after performing the variation stop suggestion performance for the SP reach during the variation stop suggestion period. Then, the change patterns in the left row, which were reduced in the upper left corner of the screen, are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the left area of the screen, and the change patterns in the right row, which were reduced in the upper right corner of the screen, are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the right area of the screen. At this time, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right rows, which are lined up in a temporary stop state, are performing a swaying performance operation. During the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70 in the middle row, the variation stop suggestion performance of the mode A corresponding to the first variation path is not performed, and the variation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode may be performed, or the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance may be restricted. In addition, during the period when the middle row performance pattern 70 indicates that it is about to stop, a stop sound A corresponding to the first movement path may be output, or a stop sound for a winning mode may be output without outputting a stop sound A, or the output of the stop sound may be limited. In addition, when the middle row performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Win" may be displayed to notify that it is a win.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 31-3 (e1), a return effect (predetermined effect) is executed on the screen to return (attract the player's attention) from the SP reach effect (specific effect). Specifically, a return image (e.g., a door image) is displayed on the screen so that the visual recognition of the effect images (effect patterns, background images, etc.) of the SP reach effect is restricted. At this time, the special pattern TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return performance ends, as shown in FIG. 31-3 (f1), the background for SP is switched to the background for mode A, the performance pattern 70a for SP is switched to the normal performance pattern 70a of the first variable path (visibility is permitted), and the performance patterns "2", "2", and "2" of the first variable path are displayed as normal patterns. That is, before the return performance is executed, the changed patterns were displayed as stopped, but after the return performance is executed, they return to the normal patterns. Also, the performance patterns 70a of each column do not stop from the variable state of the first variable path, but appear as normal patterns in a state where they are temporarily stopped at a predetermined position on the left, center, or right of the screen when the return performance ends. Furthermore, after the return performance is executed, they are displayed as stopped in a temporary state without executing the variable stop suggestion performance. Also, the output of the normal stop sound may be restricted, and a winning stop sound may be output. After that, the performance pattern 70a stops for real, and the opening performance of the big win game is executed.

When a win occurs, the return effect (Fig. 31-3 (e1) and (Fig. 31-3 (f1)) may be omitted, and the opening effect for the jackpot game may be executed after the effect symbol 70a has stopped.

Figure 31 (a2) shows the case of the variation effect of the second variation path of the circular scroll in the normal game state. In the left and right columns, the performance patterns 70a with the same identification information temporarily stop in the second variation path of the circular scroll, resulting in a reach (Figure 31 (b1)). At this time, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns, a variation stop suggestion effect of mode B is executed and a stop sound B is output. Note that a variation stop display in a temporary stop state is executed in which the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns slightly swing (swing display) so that the performance patterns 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position.

After that, if the game progresses to an SP reach performance (specific performance), a development performance (predetermined performance) is executed to develop the game into an SP reach performance (attract the player's attention). A single development performance can be set, or multiple development performances can be set, such as a first development performance and a second development performance. When multiple development performances are executed, it is possible to make it so that the first development performance is more likely to be executed (high execution rate) when a jackpot game is not executed, and the second development performance is more likely to be executed (high execution rate) when a jackpot game is executed. In other words, it is preferable to make the second development performance a performance with a higher jackpot expectation than the first development performance. Note that the normal reach performance may be executed for a predetermined period of time before switching to the SP reach performance. Note that the development performance is executed by displaying predetermined images such as whiteout, blackout, and effects, either alone or in combination.

As shown in FIG. 31(c2), in the SP reach performance, the background is switched from the mode B background to the SP background. Then, the left column performance pattern 70a is switched to a different form (for example, a simple form with only the identification part) from the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a, and is reduced in size from the time of the temporary stop and moved to a different position such as the upper left of the screen, and the variable stop display is executed in the temporary stop state. In addition, in the SP reach performance, the pattern whose configuration or size has changed from the normal pattern is sometimes called a changed pattern. Also, the right column performance pattern 70a is switched to a different form (for example, a simple form with only the identification part) from the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a, and is reduced in size from the time of the temporary stop and moved to a different position such as the upper right of the screen, and the variable stop display is executed in the temporary stop state. At this time, the changed patterns, which are the left and right column performance patterns 70a that are reduced and temporarily displayed, repeat a predetermined performance operation such as swinging left and right.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c2), in the SP reach performance of the embodiment, the performance pattern 70a in the middle row also switches to a different form (for example, a simple form with only the identification part) from the normal pattern of the performance pattern 70a of the second variation path, and switches to an SP variation path different from the second variation path (scrolling diagonally from the upper right to the lower left in the embodiment). The performance pattern 70a in the middle row may remain on the second variation path, but in the embodiment, it is configured to switch to a variation path different from the second variation path. Then, as necessary, a provocative performance such as an animation cut-in or a battle performance (not shown) is executed.

And, when the result of the variation performance is "miss", as shown in FIG. 31 (d2), the performance patterns "2", "8", and "2", which are the combination of misses, are temporarily stopped on the screen. The change patterns in the middle row scrolling on the variation path for the SP reach performance are displayed as stopped in the center of the screen after performing the variation stop suggestion performance for the SP reach during the variation stop suggestion period. Then, the change patterns in the left row, which were reduced in the upper left corner of the screen, are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the left area of the screen, and the change patterns in the right row, which were reduced in the upper right corner of the screen, are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the right area of the screen. At this time, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right rows, which are lined up in a provisionally stopped state, are performing a swaying performance operation. During the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70 in the middle row, the variation stop suggestion performance of the mode B corresponding to the second variation path is not performed, and the variation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode may be performed, or the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance may be restricted. In addition, during the period when the middle row performance pattern 70 indicates that it is about to stop, a stop sound B corresponding to the second movement path may be output, or a stop sound for the SP mode may be output without outputting the stop sound B, or the output of the stop sound may be limited. In addition, when the middle row performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Miss" may be displayed to notify that it is a miss.

After that, when the SP reach performance ends, as shown in FIG. 31 (e2), a return performance (predetermined performance) is executed on the screen to return (attract the player's attention) from the SP reach performance (specific performance). Specifically, a return image (e.g., a door image) is displayed on the screen so that the viewing of the performance images (performance patterns, background images, etc.) of the SP reach performance is restricted. At this time, the special pattern TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return performance ends, as shown in FIG. 31 (f2), the background for SP is switched to the background for mode B, the performance pattern 70a of the changed pattern is switched to the normal performance pattern 70a of the second variable path (visibility is permitted), and the performance patterns "2", "8", and "2" of the second variable path are displayed as normal patterns. That is, before the return performance is executed, the changed patterns were displayed as stopped, but after the return performance is executed, they return to the normal patterns. Also, the performance patterns 70a of each column do not stop from the variable state of the second variable path, but appear as normal patterns in a temporarily stopped state at a predetermined position on the left, center, or right of the screen when the return performance ends. Furthermore, after the return performance is executed, the display is displayed as stopped in a temporarily stopped state without executing the variable stop suggestion performance. Also, the output of the stop sound is limited. Then, after the actual stop, the next variable performance is executed.

On the other hand, when the result of the variation performance is a "jackpot," as shown in FIG. 31-3 (d2), the winning combination of performance patterns "2," "2," and "2" is temporarily stopped on the screen. The change patterns in the middle row scrolling on the variation path for the SP reach performance are displayed as stopped in the center of the screen after performing the variation stop suggestion performance for the SP reach during the variation stop suggestion period. Then, the change patterns in the left row, which were reduced in the upper left corner of the screen, are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the left area of the screen, and the change patterns in the right row, which were reduced in the upper right corner of the screen, are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the right area of the screen. At this time, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right rows, which are lined up in a provisionally stopped state, are performing a swaying performance operation. During the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70 in the middle row, the variation stop suggestion performance of the mode B corresponding to the first variation path is not performed, and the variation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode may be performed, or the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance may be restricted. In addition, during the period when the middle row performance pattern 70 indicates that it is about to stop, a stop sound B corresponding to the second movement path may be output, or a stop sound for a winning mode may be output without outputting stop sound B, or the output of the stop sound may be limited. In addition, when the middle row performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, text information such as "Win" may be displayed to notify that it is a win.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 31-3 (e2), a return effect (predetermined effect) is executed on the screen to return (attract the player's attention) from the SP reach effect (specific effect). Specifically, a return image (e.g., a door image) is displayed on the screen so that the visual recognition of the effect images (effect patterns, background images, etc.) of the SP reach effect is restricted. At this time, the special pattern TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return performance ends, as shown in FIG. 31-3 (f2), the background for SP is switched to the background for mode A, the performance pattern 70a for SP is switched to the normal performance pattern 70a of the second variable path (visibility is permitted), and the performance patterns "2", "2", and "2" of the second variable path are displayed as normal patterns. That is, before the return performance is executed, the changed patterns were displayed as stopped, but after the return performance is executed, they return to the normal patterns. Also, the performance patterns 70a of each column do not stop from the variable state of the second variable path, but appear as normal patterns in a state where they are temporarily stopped at a predetermined position on the left, center, or right of the screen when the return performance ends. Furthermore, after the return performance is executed, they are displayed as stopped in a temporary state without executing the variable stop suggestion performance. Also, the output of the normal stop sound may be restricted, and a winning stop sound may be output. After that, the performance pattern 70a stops for real, and the opening performance of the big win game is executed.

In addition, when a win occurs, the return effect (Figure 31-3 (e2) and (Figure 31-3 (f2)) may be omitted, and the opening effect for the jackpot game may be executed after the effect pattern 70a has stopped.

If the result of the variable presentation is a "jackpot," the presentation pattern 70a, which is the combination for a jackpot, is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (d2). After that, (after the execution of the return presentation (which may be a different form from the return presentation when a miss occurs)) the presentation pattern 70a will stop properly, and the opening presentation for the jackpot game will be executed. At this time, a stop sound (a hit suggestion sound) may be output during the stop suggestion period until the temporary stop, and a stop sound (a hit confirmation sound) may be output during the stop suggestion period after the return presentation.

SP reach has been used as an example, but the same procedure may be used for SPSP reach.

In the variation performance of the first variation path of the vertical scroll, a specific variation performance can be executed in which the variation patterns 70a are displayed in different arrangements (missing mode) and the variation stops. Similarly, in the variation performance of the second variation path of the circular scroll, a specific variation performance can be executed in which the variation patterns 70a are displayed in different arrangements (missing mode). In the specific variation performance of the first variation path, which is a miss, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the variation pattern 70a will stop. In the specific variation performance of the second variation path, which is a miss, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the variation pattern 70a will stop.

In the first and second variable path variable performances, there are misses where the reach performance is not performed and misses where the reach performance is performed. In the first variable path variable performance, in the case of a miss where the reach performance is not performed, a stop sound A is output as a sound performance executed in the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a of a specific row (e.g., the middle row). In contrast, in the first variable path variable performance, in the case of a miss where the reach performance is performed, the sound performance executed in the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a of a specific row (e.g., the middle row) includes the output of a stop sound for SP and a silent state after the return performance. In the second variable path variable performance, in the case of a miss where the reach performance is not performed, a stop sound B is output as a sound performance executed in the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a of a specific row (e.g., the middle row). In contrast, in the case of a miss in which a reach effect is executed in the fluctuation effect of the second fluctuation path, the sound effect executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a of a specific row (for example, the middle row) includes the output of a SP stop sound or a silent state after the return effect.

According to the embodiment, in the first variation path variation performance, the performance mode of the sound performance executed during the stop suggestion period from the start of the variation stop suggestion performance in the performance pattern 70a of the specific row (middle row) to the display of the variation stop is different between the loss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the loss variation performance in which the reach performance is executed. Similarly, in the second variation path variation performance, the performance mode of the sound performance executed during the stop suggestion period from the start of the variation stop suggestion performance in the performance pattern 70a of the specific row (middle row) to the display of the variation stop is different between the loss variation performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the loss variation performance in which the reach performance is executed.
In this way, it is possible to increase the expectation when the reach effect is executed, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the variable performance of the first variable path, the display modes when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped include a normal pattern (first display mode) corresponding to the first variable path, and a modified pattern for SP that is different from the normal pattern (second display mode different from the first display mode). Also, in the variable performance of the second variable path, the display modes when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped include a normal pattern (first display mode) corresponding to the second variable path, and a modified pattern for SP that is different from the normal pattern (second display mode different from the first display mode).

In a losing variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed, when the performance pattern 70a in the left or right column (first column) is displayed as stopped, there are cases where a normal pattern corresponding to the variable path is displayed, and cases where a changed pattern for SP is displayed. In a losing variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed, when the performance pattern 70a in the middle column (second column) is displayed as stopped, there are cases where a normal pattern corresponding to the variable path is displayed, and cases where a changed pattern for SP is displayed. In a losing variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed, the right and left columns are displayed as stopped with normal patterns when a reach is reached, and are also displayed as stopped with normal patterns after the execution of the return performance. In contrast, in a losing variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed, the middle column is displayed as stopped with SP changed patterns in the SP reach performance, and is displayed as stopped with normal patterns only after the execution of the return performance.

In the first variation path variation performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in the stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion performance to when the variation stop is displayed. In the first variation path variation performance of a loss in which the SP reach performance is executed, the right and left columns can execute a specific sound performance in the variation stop suggestion period in which the variation stop is displayed with a normal pattern when it becomes a reach, but the execution of the specific sound performance is restricted in the variation stop suggestion period in which the variation stop is displayed with a normal pattern after the execution of the return performance. In the second variation path variation performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in the stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the variation stop suggestion performance to when it becomes a stop. In the second variation path variation performance of a loss in which the SP reach performance is executed, the right and left columns can execute a specific sound performance in the variation stop suggestion period in which the variation stop is displayed with a normal pattern when it becomes a reach, but the execution of the specific sound performance is restricted in the variation stop suggestion period in which the variation stop is displayed with a normal pattern after the execution of the return performance.

In this way, in the embodiment, in the case of a losing variation performance in which a reach performance is executed in the first variation path, it is more difficult to execute the output of a stop sound (specific sound performance) when the middle row performance pattern 70a is displayed as a normal pattern (first display mode) than when the left or middle row output pattern 70a is displayed as a stopped variation performance. Also, in the case of a losing variation performance in which a reach performance is executed in the second variation path, it is more difficult to execute the output of a stop sound (specific sound performance) when the middle row performance pattern 70a is displayed as a normal pattern (first display mode) than when the left or middle row output pattern 70a is displayed as a stopped variation performance. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation when a reach performance is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the first variation path variation performance, a specific stop performance that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as being stopped. In the second variation path variation performance, a specific stop performance that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as being stopped. The specific stop performance has a first performance mode in which a sound performance that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) is executed, and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode. Here, the specific sound performance of the first performance mode is executed during the variation stop suggestion period when the performance patterns 70a in the right and left columns are in a reach state. Examples of the second performance mode include an SP stop sound output during the variation stop suggestion period of the SP change pattern, and a silent state after the return performance. In the embodiment, the execution of the specific sound performance of the first performance mode is restricted during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance pattern in the middle row, and only the second performance mode with the SP stop sound or silent state is executed.

In this way, in the case of a losing variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed in the first variable performance path, the specific stop performance of the second performance mode is more likely to be executed when the performance pattern 70a in the middle row (second row) is displayed as stopped, than when the performance patterns 70a in the left and right rows (first row) are displayed as stopped. Also, in the case of a losing variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed in the second variable performance path, the specific stop performance of the second performance mode is more likely to be executed when the performance pattern 70a in the middle row (second row) is displayed as stopped, than when the performance patterns 70a in the left and right rows (first row) are displayed as stopped. By doing this, it is possible to increase the expectation when a reach performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the case of a bara miss in which a reach effect is not executed in the first variation path variation performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in the middle row (specific row) will stop. In the case of a bara miss in which a reach effect is not executed in the first variation path variation performance, when a specific sound performance is executed, a normal pattern (displayed as a variation stop in the first display mode) is displayed as a variation stop. In the case of a bara miss in which an SP reach effect is executed in the first variation path variation performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in the middle row (specific row) will stop. However, in the case of a bara miss in which an SP reach effect is executed in the first variation path variation performance, when a variation stop is displayed in the normal pattern (first display mode) after the return effect, the execution of the specific sound performance is restricted, and when a variation stop is displayed in the SP change pattern (second display mode) before the return effect, the specific sound performance can be executed.

In the case of a bara miss in which a reach effect is not executed in the second variation path variation performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound is output during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in the middle row (specific row) will stop. In the case of a bara miss in which a reach effect is not executed in the second variation path variation performance, when the specific sound performance is executed, a normal pattern (displayed as a stop in the first display mode) is displayed as a stop. In the case of a bara miss in which an SP reach effect is executed in the second variation path variation performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound is output during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in the middle row (specific row) will stop. However, in the case of a bara miss in which an SP reach effect is executed in the second variation path variation performance, when the normal pattern (first display mode) after the return effect is displayed as a stop, the execution of the specific sound performance is restricted, and when the SP change pattern (second display mode) before the return effect is displayed as a stop, the specific sound performance can be executed.

Therefore, in the first variation path variation presentation, it can be said that a specific sound presentation is more likely to be executed when stopped and displayed with a normal pattern (first display mode) in a losing variation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed than in a losing variation presentation in which a reach presentation is executed. Similarly, in the second variation path variation presentation, it can be said that a specific sound presentation is more likely to be executed when stopped and displayed with a normal pattern (first display mode) in a losing variation presentation in which a reach presentation is not executed than in a losing variation presentation in which a reach presentation is executed. By doing this, it is possible to increase the expectation when a reach presentation is executed, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the case of a losing variation performance in the variation performance of the first variation path, a first sound performance can be executed in which a stop sound (predetermined sound: losing stop sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the stop suggestion performance until the variation stop is displayed (see FIG. 24, FIG. 31 (b1)). In the case of a losing variation performance in the variation performance of the second variation path, a first sound performance can be executed in which a stop sound (predetermined sound: losing stop sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the stop suggestion performance until the variation stop is displayed (see FIG. 24, FIG. 31 (b2)). In particular, in a losing variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed, the first sound performance is executed once during the execution period of the variation performance. In particular, in a losing variation performance in which a SP reach performance is executed in which the variation stop display and re-variation of the performance pattern are repeated, the first sound performance may be executed multiple times during the execution period of the variation performance.

As shown in FIG. 31-3, when the SP reach performance (reach performance) is executed in the first variable path variable performance, if the result of the variable performance is a "jackpot", in the variable variation suggestion period in which the performance pattern 70a, which is a combination of a jackpot, is temporarily stopped, a second sound performance that outputs a winning suggestion stop sound (specific sound: winning stop sound) is executed (FIG. 31-3 (d1)), and then a third sound performance that outputs a winning confirmation sound (special sound) may be executed (FIG. 31-3 (f1)). Similarly, when the SP reach performance (reach performance) is executed in the variable performance of the second variable path, if the result of the variable performance is a "jackpot", in the variable variation suggestion period in which the performance pattern 70a, which is a combination of a jackpot, is temporarily stopped, a second sound performance that outputs a winning suggestion stop sound (specific sound: winning stop sound) is executed (FIG. 31-3 (d2)), and then a third sound performance that outputs a winning confirmation sound (special sound) may be executed (FIG. 31-3 (f2)). This can make the transition to the big win more exciting and increase the excitement of the game.

The first sound effect is executed in the normal (when reach effect, pseudo consecutive effect, etc. are not executed) stop display of a miss, and the sound output at this time may be called the first specific sound. The second sound effect is executed, for example, when the effect pattern 70a is aligned for the first time after the deciding effect, and the sound output at this time may be called the second specific sound. The third sound effect is executed when a specific effect pattern (the effect pattern in the middle row) 70a among the three effect patterns 70a displayed as the jackpot pattern after the second sound effect is executed is displayed so that it occupies a larger area on the screen than the other effect patterns 70a, and the sound output at this time may be called the third specific sound. Here, the third sound effect includes a fourth specific sound when the jackpot pattern stops in the promotion effect after the output of the third specific sound, and a fifth specific sound when the effect pattern 70a in which only the identification part is changed changes to the normal mode consisting of the decoration part and the identification part after the output of the fourth specific sound and is finally confirmed. The output of the first to fifth specific sounds may be limited in the time-saving game state as an effect executed in the normal game state. In other words, the normal game state can have a greater number of executable specific sounds than the time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, various display processes are carried out in a short period of time, so that it is possible to carry out multiple situations at the same time when the first specific sound is being output, in which the first to fifth specific sounds are output in the normal game state, in which situations 1 to 5 on the display are output.

As described above, in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the fluctuation stop suggestion performance to when the fluctuation stop is displayed, it is possible to control whether to execute a specific sound performance that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) or not execute a specific sound performance, such as after the return performance of the SP reach performance. Similarly, in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period from when the performance pattern 70a starts the fluctuation stop suggestion performance to when the fluctuation stop is displayed, it is possible to control whether to execute a specific sound performance that outputs a stop sound (specific sound) or not execute a specific sound performance, such as after the return performance of the SP reach performance.

In the embodiment, the variable performance is executed in the order of the variable stop display by the SP changed pattern, the return performance, and the variable stop display by the normal pattern. In the variable stop display by the SP changed pattern, a specific sound performance is executed, but in the variable stop display by the normal pattern after the return performance, the execution of the specific sound performance is restricted. In other words, in the variable performance of the first variable path, it can be said that the return performance (predetermined performance) is more likely to be executed when the specific sound performance is not executed than when the specific sound performance is executed. Similarly, in the variable performance of the second variable path, it can be said that the return performance (predetermined performance) is more likely to be executed when the specific sound performance is not executed than when the specific sound performance is executed. In this way, the difference between the return performance and not executing the specific sound performance can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the first variation path variation performance, during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in a predetermined mode (normal pattern), a first variation stop suggestion performance in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output, or a second variation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound (specific sound) is restricted, can be executed. In the second variation path variation performance, during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in a predetermined mode (normal pattern), a first variation stop suggestion performance in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output, or a second variation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound (specific sound) is restricted, can be executed. Here, the second stop suggestion performance is basically executed when the SP reach or SPSP reach is executed. And, as described above, in the reach performance of the SP reach or SPSP reach, a change performance is executed in which the display position of the performance pattern 70a moves between the normal position in the center of the screen and the corner of the screen.

Therefore, in the first variation path variation performance, the variation performance in which the display position of the performance pattern 70a changes is more likely to be executed in the variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (without stop sound) is executed when the normal pattern is displayed in a variable stop state than in the variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (with stop sound) is executed when the normal pattern is displayed in a variable stop state. Similarly, in the second variation path variation performance, the variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (without stop sound) is executed when the normal pattern is displayed in a variable stop state is more likely to be executed in the variation performance in which the display position of the performance pattern 70a changes than in the variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (with stop sound) is executed when the normal pattern is displayed in a variable stop state. In this way, the impression given to the player can be changed depending on whether or not the variation performance is executed and the type of stop suggestion performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As described above, in the first fluctuation path fluctuation performance, a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be executed in which a stop sound A (specific sound) is output during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. Also, in the first fluctuation path fluctuation performance, when an SP reach performance is executed, a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be executed in which the output of the stop sound A (specific sound) is restricted during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part after the return performance.

As described above, in the second fluctuation path fluctuation performance, a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be executed in which a stop sound B (specific sound) is output during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. Also, in the second fluctuation path fluctuation performance, when an SP reach performance is executed, a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance can be executed in which the output of the stop sound B (specific sound) is restricted during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part after the return performance.

In the variation performance of the first variation path, when an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is executed, it is easier to execute a change performance in which predetermined information displayed on the screen changes, such as a hold change performance (notice performance: see FIG. 21(b)) in which the hold icon T1 changes from a normal state to a special state before the reach performance is performed, when the SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is executed than when the SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is not executed. Similarly, in the variation performance of the second variation path, when an SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is executed, it is easier to execute a change performance in which predetermined information displayed on the screen changes, such as a hold change performance (notice performance: see FIG. 21(b)) in which the hold icon T1 changes from a normal state to a special state before the reach performance is performed.

Here, as the change effect, as shown in FIG. 21-5, the shape or color of the icon may be changed to stimulate a sense of expectation. In other words, in a losing variable effect in which an SP reach effect is executed, the change effect is executed before the SP reach effect to stimulate the establishment of a reach, and the change effect is executed less frequently to stimulate the establishment of a reach, in a losing variable effect in which an SP reach effect is not executed. Note that the change effect is not limited to an example in which the shape or color of the reserved icon is changed, but includes effects in which the information display is changed (in a manner that gives the player a sense of expectation), such as changing the color or shape of the performance pattern 70a, or changing the color or shape of letters or symbols displayed on the screen. Here, the change effect may be set to be executed in the order of likelihood, for example, of a variable effect in which a reach effect is not executed≦a variable effect in which a normal reach effect is executed≦a variable effect in which an SP reach effect is executed≦a variable effect in which an SPSP reach effect is executed.

Therefore, since the second stop suggestion effect is premised on the execution of an SP reach effect (a return effect after an SP reach effect), it can be said that in the first change path change effect, a change effect of a specified information display is more likely to be executed in a change effect in which the second stop suggestion effect is executed (a miss in the execution of an SP reach) than in a change effect in which the first stop suggestion effect is executed (a miss in the execution of a SP reach). Similarly, since the second stop suggestion effect is premised on the execution of an SP reach effect (a return effect after an SP reach effect), it can be said that in the second change path change effect, a change effect of a specified information display is more likely to be executed in a change effect in which the second stop suggestion effect is executed (a miss in the execution of an SP reach) than in a change effect in which the first stop suggestion effect is executed (a miss in the execution of a no reach). By doing this, the difference from before the execution of the second stop suggestion effect can be made larger, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the variation performance of the first variation path, when an SP reach performance is executed, it is easier to execute a change performance in which the expectation level represented by the preview performance changes gradually, such as a hold change performance (preview performance) in which the hold icon T1 gradually changes from a normal state to a special state before the reach performance is executed, or a change performance in which the display mode of a cut-in image gradually changes, than when an SP reach performance is not executed. Similarly, in the variation performance of the second variation path, when an SP reach performance is executed, it is easier to execute a change performance in which the expectation level represented by the preview performance changes gradually, such as a hold change performance (preview performance) in which the hold icon T1 gradually changes from a normal state to a special state before the reach performance is executed, or a change performance in which the display mode of a cut-in image gradually changes, than when an SP reach performance is not executed.

In other words, in a losing variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed, the change performance is executed before the SP reach performance to encourage the reaching to be established, and the frequency of the change performance is high, whereas in a losing variable performance in which the SP reach performance is not executed, the change performance is executed to encourage the reaching to be established less frequently. Note that the change performance is not limited to an example in which the shape or color of the reserved icon changes, but also includes a performance in which the information display changes (in a manner that gives the player a sense of expectation), such as a change in the color or shape of the performance pattern 70a, or a change in the color or shape of letters or symbols displayed on the screen. Here, the change performance may be set to be executed in the following order, for example: a variable performance in which no reach performance is executed ≦ a variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed ≦ a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed ≦ a variable performance in which an SPSP reach performance is executed.

Therefore, since the second stop suggestion effect is premised on the execution of an SP reach effect (a return effect after an SP reach effect), it can be said that in the first change path change effect, a change effect in which the expectation level changes stepwise is more likely to be executed in a change effect in which the second stop suggestion effect is executed (a miss in the execution of an SP reach) than in a change effect in which the first stop suggestion effect is executed (a miss in the execution of a no-reach). Similarly, since the second stop suggestion effect is premised on the execution of an SP reach effect (a return effect after an SP reach effect), it can be said that in the second change path change effect, a change effect in which the expectation level changes stepwise is more likely to be executed in a change effect in which the second stop suggestion effect is executed (a miss in the execution of an SP reach) than in a change effect in which the first stop suggestion effect is executed (a miss in the execution of a no-reach). By doing this, the difference from before the execution of the second stop suggestion effect can be made larger, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first variable path variable performance, when the SP reach performance is executed, the pre-reading chance eye performance in which the same color pattern is displayed is more likely to be executed before the reach performance than when the SP reach performance is not executed. In the second variable path variable performance, when the SP reach performance is executed, the pre-reading chance eye performance in which the same color pattern is displayed is more likely to be executed before the reach performance than when the SP reach performance is not executed. In other words, in a miss variable performance in which the SP reach performance is executed, the pre-reading chance eye performance is executed before the SP reach performance to encourage the establishment of the reach, whereas in a miss variable performance in which the SP reach performance is not executed, the pre-reading chance eye performance is executed to encourage the establishment of the reach less frequently. Here, the pre-reading chance eye performance may be set to be executed in the order of, for example, a variable performance in which the reach performance is not executed ≦ a variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed ≦ a variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed ≦ a variable performance in which an SPSP reach performance is executed.

Therefore, since the second stop suggestion performance is premised on the execution of an SP reach performance (return performance after an SP reach performance), it can be said that in the first change path change performance, a change performance in which the second stop suggestion performance is executed (missing execution of an SP reach) is more likely to have a pre-reading chance eye performance executed in the change performance than a change performance in which the first stop suggestion performance is executed (missing change without a reach). Similarly, since the second stop suggestion performance is premised on the execution of an SP reach performance (return performance after an SP reach performance), it can be said that in the second change path change performance, a change performance in which the second stop suggestion performance is executed (missing execution of an SP reach) is more likely to have a pre-reading chance eye performance executed in the change performance than a change performance in which the first stop suggestion performance is executed (missing change without a reach).

In the first variation path variation performance, a first stop suggestion performance in which a stop sound A (specific sound) is output can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. In addition, in the first variation path variation performance, when the SP reach performance is executed, a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound A (specific sound) is restricted can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part after the return performance. In the first variation path variation performance, when the pre-reading chance eye performance is executed, a same-color pattern stop sound different from the stop sound A (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop. In this way, in the first stop suggestion performance, there is a normal stop sound A (first specific sound) and a same-color pattern stop sound (second specific sound) specific to the pre-reading chance eye performance. In addition, in the second stop suggestion performance, the same color pattern stop sound is not output.

In the second variation path variation performance, a first stop suggestion performance in which a stop sound B (specific sound) is output can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. In addition, in the second variation path variation performance, when the SP reach performance is executed, a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound B (specific sound) is restricted can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part after the return performance. In the second variation path variation performance, when the pre-reading chance eye performance is executed, a same-color pattern stop sound different from the stop sound B (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop. In this way, in the first stop suggestion performance, there is a normal stop sound B (first specific sound) and a same-color pattern stop sound (second specific sound) specific to the pre-reading chance eye performance. In addition, in the second stop suggestion performance of this embodiment, the same color pattern stop sound is not output.

And, in the first change path change presentation, the same color pattern stop sound (second specific sound) is more likely to be output in the change presentation in which the first stop suggestion presentation is executed than in the change presentation in which the second stop suggestion presentation is executed. Also, in the second change path change presentation, the same color pattern stop sound (second specific sound) is more likely to be output in the change presentation in which the first stop suggestion presentation is executed than in the change presentation in which the second stop suggestion presentation is executed. By doing this, the difference from before the second stop suggestion presentation is executed can be made larger, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In the variable performance of the first variable path, when the SP reach performance is executed, the various advance notice performances (pre-notification performances) described above are more likely to be executed before the reach performance when the SP reach performance is executed than when the SP reach performance is not executed. Similarly, in the variable performance of the second variable path, when the SP reach performance is executed, the various advance notice performances (pre-notification performances) described above are more likely to be executed before the reach performance when the SP reach performance is executed than when the SP reach performance is not executed. In other words, in the variable performance of a failure in which the SP reach performance is executed, the advance notice performances (pre-notification performances) are executed before the SP reach performance to encourage the establishment of a reach, whereas in the variable performance of a failure in which the SP reach performance is not executed, the advance notice performances (pre-notification performances) are executed less frequently to encourage the establishment of a reach.

The preview performance that notifies the expectation of a jackpot is not particularly limited, but may be, for example, a pre-reading chance eye performance in which the same color pattern is displayed, as well as an activation performance in which the movable gadget 73 is activated. In addition, the preview performance may be a development performance that suggests a transition to a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as a reach performance developing into an SP reach performance, during the change. Here, the preview performance may be set so that it is more likely to be executed in the following order: a change performance in which no reach performance is executed ≦ a change performance in which a normal reach performance is executed ≦ a change performance in which an SP reach performance is executed ≦ a change performance in which an SPSP reach performance is executed.

Therefore, since the second stop suggestion effect is premised on the execution of an SP reach effect (return effect after an SP reach effect), it can be said that in the first change path change effect, the change effect in which the second stop suggestion effect is executed (missed execution of SP reach) is more likely to have a notice effect executed in the change effect than in the change effect in which the first stop suggestion effect is executed (missed change without a reach). Similarly, since the second stop suggestion effect is premised on the execution of an SP reach effect (return effect after an SP reach effect), it can be said that in the second change path change effect, the change effect in which the second stop suggestion effect is executed (missed execution of SP reach) is more likely to have a notice effect executed in the change effect than in the change effect in which the first stop suggestion effect is executed (missed change without a reach). By doing this, the difference from before the execution of the second stop suggestion effect can be made larger, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first variation path variation performance, a first stop suggestion performance in which a stop sound A (specific sound) is output can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. In addition, in the first variation path variation performance, when the SP reach performance is executed, a second stop suggestion performance in which the output of the stop sound A (specific sound) is restricted can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part after the return performance. In the second variation path variation performance, a first stop suggestion performance in which a stop sound B (specific sound) is output can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a variation stop in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. In addition, in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path, when the SP reach performance is executed, after the return performance, a second stop suggestion performance can be executed in which the output of the stop sound B (specific sound) is limited during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as a fluctuation stop in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the decorative part and the identification part.

When the SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is executed in the first variable path variable performance, a pattern change performance is executed in which the reach target patterns (the left and right column performance patterns 70a) change position and are displayed in a reduced size. Also, when the SP reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is executed in the second variable path variable performance, a pattern change performance is executed in which the reach target patterns (the left and right column performance patterns 70a) change position and are displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, if the SP reach performance (SPSP reach) is not executed in the first variable path variable performance (in the case of normal variation or normal reach performance), a pattern change performance is not executed in which the left and right column performance patterns 70a change position and are displayed in a reduced size. Also, if the SP reach performance (SPSP reach) is not executed in the second variable path variable performance (in the case of normal variation or normal reach performance), a pattern change performance is not executed in which the left and right column performance patterns 70a change position and are displayed in a reduced size.

Therefore, in the variation performance of the first variation path, it can be said that the variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to execute a pattern change performance in which the performance pattern 70a that is the target of reach in the reach performance in the variation performance changes than the variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance is executed. Similarly, in the variation performance of the second variation path, it can be said that the variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to execute a pattern change performance in which the performance pattern 70a that is the target of reach in the reach performance in the variation performance changes than the variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance is executed. By doing this, it is possible to add variety to the variation performance, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The pattern change effect may be an effect in which the color of the effect pattern 70a changes in addition to or instead of a position change or reduced display. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-6, the color of the identification numbers that make up the effect pattern 70a may change from blue to red.

In an embodiment, in the variation presentation of the first variation path in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a group presentation or a mode-common presentation (predetermined presentation: see FIG. 21-4). Also, in the variation presentation of the second variation path in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a group presentation or a mode-common presentation with the same motif as the group presentation or mode-common presentation that can be executed in the variation presentation of the first variation path. Here, the same motif means that the subject matter is the same within the scope of the concept, such as animals, flowers, cars, etc. For example, a group preview executed with a dog figure on the first variation path and a group preview executed with a cat figure on the second variation path can be said to be group previews with the same motif, that is, animals.

It may be easier for the player to transition to an advantageous gaming state when a group performance or a mode common performance is executed in the variable performance of the second variable path than when a group performance or a mode common performance is executed in the variable performance of the first variable path. Here, the ease of transitioning to an advantageous gaming state can be differentiated by setting it so that a reach performance (achievement of a reach) is easier to execute when a group performance or a mode common performance is executed in the variable performance of the second variable path than when a group performance or a mode common performance is executed in the variable performance of the first variable path, or by setting variable path B so that a reach performance is easier to develop even if the ease of executing the reach performance (achievement of a reach) is the same. In this way, it is possible to create differences in expectations depending on the difference in the variable paths, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, it may be easier for the player to transition to an advantageous gaming state when a group performance or a mode common performance is executed in the variable performance of the first variable path than when a group performance or a mode common performance is executed in the variable performance of the second variable path. Also, the ease of transitioning to an advantageous gaming state for the player may be the same when a group performance or a mode common performance is executed in the variable performance of the first variable path and when a group performance or a mode common performance is executed in the variable performance of the second variable path.

In the embodiment, in the variation presentation of the predetermined variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) in the advantageous game state, a group presentation or a mode common presentation (predetermined presentation) can be executed. Here, in the predetermined variation path in the advantageous game state, a group presentation or a mode common presentation with the same motif as the group presentation or the mode common presentation that can be executed in the variation presentation of the first variation path or the second variation path in the normal game state may be executed. In this case, since it is easier to win in the advantageous game state than in the normal game state and the variation time is shorter, it can be said that it is easier to transition to an advantageous game state (jackpot) that is advantageous for the player when a group presentation or a mode common presentation is executed in the variation presentation of the predetermined variation path in the advantageous game state than when a group presentation or a mode common presentation is executed in the variation presentation of the first and second variation paths in the normal game state. In this way, it is possible to create a difference in expectation depending on the difference in the variation path, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, even in advantageous game states, the same fluctuation path as in normal game states may be set.

In reach effects (such as SP (SPSP) reach effects), a change effect in which a predetermined (e.g., middle row) effect pattern 70a is enlarged more than a specific (e.g., right row or left row) effect pattern 70a may be more easily executed in an advantageous game state than in a normal game state.

(Example of full rotation reach variation)
In the embodiment, the full rotation reach is a reach effect executed as an extension of the normal reach, the SP reach, or the SPSP reach. Here, before the left and right center symbols are temporarily stopped in the final temporary stop mode "XXX", the left and right center symbols are temporarily stopped in the pre-finish temporary stop mode "XaXaXa" corresponding to the second or third jackpot, and a promotion suggestion effect can be executed that suggests the possibility of promotion from the pre-finish temporary stop mode "XaXaXa"("222" etc.) corresponding to the second jackpot to the final temporary stop mode "XXX"("333" etc. or "777") corresponding to the third or first jackpot, and the possibility of promotion from the pre-finish temporary stop mode "XaXaXa"("333" etc.) corresponding to the third jackpot to the final temporary stop mode "XXX"("777") corresponding to the first jackpot, that is, the promotion suggestion effect can be executed or not executed.

As shown in FIG. 21-4(a), assume that the performance symbols 70 in the left, center, and right columns are displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) by a line of "222". At this time, during the change stop suggestion period until the performance symbols 70a are displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped), a hit suggestion sound A corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Then, when the performance symbols 70a stop with a line of "222", during the change stop suggestion period until the change stop is displayed, a hit confirmation sound I corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Note that the hit suggestion sound A and the hit confirmation sound I are in different forms.

When the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop mode "222" before the end and a promotion suggestion performance is executed, the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows move in a movement path that rotates around the horizontal axis in synchronization (Figure 21-4 (b)). After the promotion suggestion performance is executed, the performance symbols 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop in the final temporary stop mode "333", which is promoted by one step from the temporary stop mode before the end, and the final temporary stop mode "333" is used as a stop mode and is stopped (Figure 21-4 (c)). At this time, during the change stop suggestion period until the performance symbols 70a are displayed as a change stop, a hit suggestion sound B corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Then, when the performance symbols 70a are permanently stopped with a line of "333", during the change stop suggestion period until the change stop is displayed, a hit confirmation sound B corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Note that the hit suggestion sound B and the hit suggestion sound A are different in form, and in the embodiment, the hit suggestion sound B is executed with a higher sound effect that greatly stimulates the expectation than the hit suggestion sound A. The hit confirmation sound B and the hit confirmation sound I are different in form, and in the embodiment, the hit confirmation sound B is executed with a higher sound effect that greatly stimulates the expectation than the hit confirmation sound I. Also, the hit suggestion sound B and the hit confirmation sound B are different in form.

Alternatively, after the promotion suggestion effect is executed, the effect patterns 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop in the final temporary stop pattern "222" which is the same as the temporary stop pattern before the end, and the final temporary stop pattern "222" is used as the stop pattern to stop permanently (Fig. 21-4 (a)). At this time, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the effect patterns 70a are displayed as a fluctuation stop, a hit suggestion sound A corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Then, when the effect patterns 70a stop in a "222" arrangement, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed, a hit confirmation sound A corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331.

After the promotion suggestion effect is executed, the effect patterns 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop at the final temporary stop state "777", which is promoted by two more steps from the temporary stop state before the end, and the final temporary stop state "777" is used as the stop state to stop permanently (Fig. 21-4 (e)). At this time, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the effect patterns 70a are displayed as a fluctuation stop, a hit suggestion sound C corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Then, when the effect patterns 70a stop with a "777" arrangement, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed, a hit confirmation sound H corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Note that the hit suggestion sound C is different from the hit suggestion sound A and the hit suggestion sound B, and in the embodiment, a high sound effect that greatly stimulates the expectation is executed for the hit suggestion sound C compared to the hit suggestion sound A and the hit suggestion sound B. The hit confirmation sound Ha is different from the hit confirmation sound I and the hit confirmation sound path, and in the embodiment, the hit confirmation sound Ha is executed with a higher sound effect that greatly stimulates the expectation than the hit confirmation sound I and the hit confirmation sound B. Also, the hit suggestion sound C is different from the hit confirmation sound Ha.

When the left and right center row performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the pre-end temporary stop mode "333" and a promotion suggestion performance is executed, the left and right center row performance symbols 70a move in a synchronous movement path that rotates around the horizontal axis (Fig. 21-4 (d)). After the promotion suggestion performance is executed, the left and right center row performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in the final temporary stop mode "777", which is one step higher than the pre-end temporary stop mode, and the final temporary stop mode "777" is used as the stop mode and is stopped (Fig. 21-4 (e)). At this time, during the change stop suggestion period until the change stop display of the performance symbols 70a, a hit suggestion sound C corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Then, when the performance symbols 70a stop in the "777" alignment, during the change stop suggestion period until the change stop display is displayed, a hit confirmation sound Ha corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331.

Alternatively, after the promotion suggestion effect is executed, the effect patterns 70a in the left and right middle rows temporarily stop in the final temporary stop pattern "333" which is the same as the temporary stop pattern before the end, and the final temporary stop pattern "333" is used as the stop pattern for actual stopping (Fig. 21-4 (c)). At this time, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the effect patterns 70a are displayed as a fluctuation stop, a hit suggestion sound B corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331. Then, when the effect patterns 70a stop in a "333" arrangement, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the fluctuation stop is displayed, a hit confirmation sound C corresponding to the type of identification information is output from the audio output device 331.

Examples of sounds that have different aspects include different tones, different volumes, different lengths, and different timing.

It is also possible to have the ID promoted two levels, from "222" to "777". It is also possible to have the ID switched to a different ID without promoting it.

In an embodiment, in a variable presentation in which a promotion suggestion presentation is executed, if the final provisional stop mode "XXX" is not promoted from the provisional stop mode before the end "XaXaXa" via the promotion suggestion presentation, the provisional stop mode before the end "XaXaXa" is set to be the same as the stop mode initially determined, and if the final provisional stop mode "XXX" is promoted from the provisional stop mode before the end "XaXaXa" via the promotion suggestion presentation, the provisional stop mode before the end "XaXaXa" is set to be the same as the stop mode corresponding to a jackpot that is less advantageous than the jackpot corresponding to the initially determined stop mode.

In the first variation path variation performance, when a promotion suggestion performance is executed, a specific sound performance of a different type can be executed depending on whether the performance pattern 70a having the first identification information (e.g., "222") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period or whether the performance pattern having the second identification information different from the first identification information (e.g., "333" or "777") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period. Also, in the second variation path variation performance, when a promotion suggestion performance is executed, a specific sound performance of a different type can be executed depending on whether the performance pattern 70a having the first identification information (e.g., "222") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period or whether the performance pattern having the second identification information different from the first identification information (e.g., "333" or "777") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period. In this way, a sense of expectation can be aroused by the difference in identification information, and interest in the game can be increased.

The specific sound effects include a first sound effect (a hit suggestion sound) that is executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the first stage is displayed as a stop in fluctuation, and a second sound effect (a hit confirmation sound) that is executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period until the second stage is displayed as a stop in fluctuation toward a real stop. The first sound effect and the second sound effect are different in form.

In the first variation path variation performance, when a promotion suggestion performance is executed, a first sound performance of a specific sound performance of a different type can be executed in the case where a performance pattern 70a having a first identification information (e.g., "222") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period, and in the case where a performance pattern having a second identification information different from the first identification information (e.g., "333" or "777") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period. Also, in the second variation path variation performance, when a promotion suggestion performance is executed, a first sound performance of a specific sound performance of a different type can be executed in the case where a performance pattern 70a having a first identification information (e.g., "222") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period, and in the case where a performance pattern having a second identification information different from the first identification information (e.g., "333" or "777") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period. In this way, a sense of expectation can be aroused by the difference in identification information, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the first variation path variation performance, when a promotion suggestion performance is executed, a second sound performance of a specific sound performance of a different type can be executed in the case where a performance pattern 70a having a first identification information (e.g., "222") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period, and in the case where a performance pattern having a second identification information different from the first identification information (e.g., "333" or "777") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period. Also, in the second variation path variation performance, when a promotion suggestion performance is executed, a second sound performance of a specific sound performance of a different type can be executed in the case where a performance pattern 70a having a first identification information (e.g., "222") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period, and in the case where a performance pattern having a second identification information different from the first identification information (e.g., "333" or "777") is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period. In this way, a sense of expectation due to the difference in identification information can be aroused, and interest in the game can be increased.

(Example of advantageous game state presentation)
An example of a change in advantageous gaming state will be described below.

(Performance design - normal design)
In the advantageous game state, a normal pattern basically composed of an identification part consisting of a number part (identification number) is set as the effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 131. The normal pattern may be used in common in different advantageous modes, but multiple types of normal patterns may be set, for example, normal patterns of different forms may be used in advantageous mode A and advantageous mode B. Note that, as in the above-mentioned normal game state, the normal pattern used in the advantageous game state may be one composed of a decorative part (character image, etc.) and an identification part.

(Performance design - unique design)
Even in the advantageous game state, a special pattern may be set as the performance pattern 70a in addition to the normal pattern having an identification part (identification information) by numbers such as "1" to "9" or symbols such as "A" to "Z". As the special pattern, for example, a change pattern (a first change pattern indicating that the reserved icon changes to a display mode with a one-step higher expectation, a second change pattern indicating that the reserved icon changes to a display mode with a two-step higher expectation) that suggests (notifies) the occurrence of an icon change notice by being stopped and a pseudo consecutive pattern that suggests (notifies) the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive performance by being temporarily stopped can be set.

In the advantageous game state, the background image corresponding to each of the multiple advantageous modes set will scroll left and right (in a reciprocating motion).

(Example of variation 10)
FIG. 1 shows the case of advantageous mode A in the advantageous game state. Here, in the embodiment, an example in which only one advantageous mode is set is given, but multiple advantageous modes may be set. In this case, if the number of types of modes set in the advantageous game state is made smaller than the number of types of modes set in the normal game state (see FIG. 35), there is an advantage in that the switching of modes in the advantageous game state can be suppressed, and the speed of playing can be increased.

When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command (start cd) sent as start commands from the main control unit 110m, the display of the variations of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and second lamp symbol on the sub second variation display begins (see FIG. 32(a)). At this time, the display of the variations of the second special symbol begins on the second special symbol display 122.

On the screen of the first image display device 131 (main liquid crystal), each of the performance symbols 70 in the left, center and right columns is displayed changing along a vertical scrolling change path A that flows from top to bottom. The special symbol TZ is also displayed changing along a change path in which the numbers change on the spot. The second lamp symbol and the second special symbol are displayed changing along a change path that is caused by the illumination (flashing) of a single or multiple LEDs and changes in the illumination position. In this way, the change path of the performance symbol 70a is different from the special symbol TZ, the second lamp symbol and the second special symbol.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation performance, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns temporarily stop in a losing state ("285"). At this time, the performance patterns 70a slightly shake (shaking display) to move up and down the predetermined stop position. In addition, the reserved icon T2 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 32 (b)). Here, when the performance pattern 70a moves toward the fluctuation stop display (fluctuation stop suggestion period), the fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed by the shaking movement of the performance pattern 70a itself at the time of the temporary stop, the illumination of the performance pattern 70a, the performance operation such as enlarging/reducing or rotating, and the display of an effect accompanying the performance pattern 70a. Note that as the fluctuation stop suggestion performance, a stop sound may be output or may not be output, and in the embodiment, a stop sound is output.

Here, the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path in the normal game state have the same feature of vertically scrolling the presentation pattern 70a, but the form of the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period may be different between the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path in the normal game state. For example, by reducing the number of presentation types or shortening the presentation period for the stop suggestion presentation form in the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state compared to the form of the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation form in the first fluctuation path in the normal game state, there is an advantage in that the speed at which the game is completed can be increased in the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

Although the vertical scrolling fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the second circular scrolling fluctuation path in the normal game state are different in form, the form of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect executed in the fluctuation stop suggestion period may be the same or different between the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the second fluctuation path in the normal game state. For example, by reducing the number of types of effects or shortening the presentation period for the stop suggestion effect in the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state compared to the fluctuation stop suggestion effect in the second fluctuation path in the normal game state, there is an advantage in that the speed at which the game is completed can be increased in the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

The fluctuation path A of the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path of the normal game state have in common the fact that the performance pattern 70a scrolls vertically, but the manner of the stop sound (special sound) performance executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period may be the same or different between the fluctuation path A of the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path of the normal game state. In this way, by making the manner of the stop sound during the fluctuation stop suggestion period different between the fluctuation path A of the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path of the normal game state (such as by making the type of stop sound different or by making the stop sound present or absent), it is possible to change the atmosphere for each game state even with the same vertical scrolling fluctuation path.

Although the vertical scrolling fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the second circular scrolling fluctuation path in the normal game state are of different modes, the mode of the stop sound (special sound) effect executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period may be the same or different between fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the second fluctuation path in the normal game state. In this way, by making the mode of the stop sound during the fluctuation stop suggestion period different between fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the second fluctuation path in the normal game state (such as different types of stop sound or the presence or absence of a stop sound), the atmosphere can be changed for each game state, coupled with the difference in the fluctuation paths.

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the second special symbol display 122. At this timing, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m, processing to end the variable performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248") (see FIG. 32(c)), and the second lamp symbol stops in a losing state (e.g., off) on the sub-second variable display.

When the stop time of the special pattern has elapsed, the second special pattern display 122 starts displaying the variation of the second special pattern. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance pattern designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the variation of the second lamp pattern on the sub second variation display are started. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a performance operation such as a rotation operation as in this embodiment during the variation start period (see FIG. 32 (d)). In this way, when the performance pattern 70a starts to vary (during the variation start period), a variation start performance including a performance operation such as a swinging operation of the performance pattern 70 and a rotation of the performance pattern 70a is executed. After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon T2 and the icon TH are rotating (performative action) (see FIG. 32(e)). Note that as the change start effect, the start sound may or may not be output during the change start period, and in this embodiment, the start sound is output.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("164"). At this time, a change stop suggestion performance is executed. In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH (performance operation) continue (see FIG. 32(f)).

When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state on the second special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (abbreviated as stop cd in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable performance is performed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("164") (see FIG. 32(g)), and the second lamp symbol on the sub-second variable display stops in a losing state (for example, off).

When the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol display 122 starts displaying the change in the second special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command, and change pattern designation command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the display of the change in the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the second lamp symbol on the sub second change display starts. At this time, the change start performance of the performance symbol 70a is executed, and the performance symbol 70a scrolls (see FIG. 32(h)). After that, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the display of the change in the performance symbol 70a has started, the reserved icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating (performance) (see FIG. 32(i)).

In this way, the change effect of the change path in which the effect pattern 70a flows from top to bottom is repeated. In addition, the change start effect and the change stop suggestion effect for advantageous mode A are basically repeated unless a special effect such as a pre-reading effect is executed.

Here, the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path in the normal game state have in common the vertical scrolling of the performance pattern 70a, but the manner of the fluctuation start performance executed in the fluctuation start period in the fluctuation performance may be the same or different between the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path in the normal game state. For example, by reducing the number of types of performance or shortening the performance period in the fluctuation start performance manner in the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state compared to the fluctuation start performance manner in the first fluctuation path in the normal game state, there is an advantage in that the speed at which the game is completed can be increased in the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

Although the vertical scrolling fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the second circular scrolling fluctuation path in the normal game state are different in form, the form of the fluctuation start presentation executed in the fluctuation start period in the fluctuation presentation may be the same or different between the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state and the second fluctuation path in the normal game state. For example, by reducing the number of presentation types or shortening the presentation period for the fluctuation start presentation form in the fluctuation path A in the advantageous game state compared to the fluctuation start presentation form in the second fluctuation path in the normal game state, there is an advantage in that the speed at which the game is completed can be increased in the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

The fluctuation path A of the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path of the normal game state have in common the fact that the performance pattern 70a scrolls vertically, but the manner of the start sound performance executed in the fluctuation start period may be the same or different between the fluctuation path A of the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path of the normal game state. In this way, by making the manner of the start sound in the start period different between the fluctuation path A of the advantageous game state and the first fluctuation path of the normal game state (such as by changing the type of start sound or by changing the presence or absence of a start sound), it is possible to change the atmosphere for each game state even with the same vertical scrolling fluctuation path.

Although the vertical scrolling change path A in the advantageous game state and the second circular scrolling change path in the normal game state are of different modes, the mode of the start sound effect executed in the change start period may be the same or different between change path A in the advantageous game state and the second change path in the normal game state. In this way, by making the mode of the start sound in the start period different between change path A in the advantageous game state and the second change path in the normal game state (such as different types of start sound or the presence or absence of a start sound), the atmosphere can be changed for each game state, coupled with the difference in the change paths.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the embodiment, three types of normal fluctuation paths are set in the normal game state, whereas one type of normal fluctuation path is set in the advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In other words, the normal game state (first game state) has a greater number of types of fluctuation paths of the presentation pattern 70a in the fluctuation presentation than the advantageous game state (second game state). This has the advantage of reducing the time required to switch the fluctuation path in the advantageous game state, and making it possible to speed up the game in the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

The number of types of change paths of the display pattern 70a in the change display may be greater in the advantageous game state (second game state) than in the normal game state (first game state).

In the advantageous game state, the following variable effects can be executed in the same way as in the normal game state. In the variable stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (miss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) that indicates the result of the jackpot lottery. A jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect patterns such as "777" or a combination of effect patterns with a pattern such as "357", and a miss mode is any other mode.

(Reach performance)
While the changing display of the performance pattern 70a is being performed, various performance images and movies such as reach effects, background images, characters, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 131 (main LCD) and the second image display devices 132, 133 (sub-LCDs) depending on the result of the jackpot lottery, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of a jackpot (special game) being executed (hereinafter referred to as the ``expectation of winning a jackpot'').

Even in a favorable game state, "reach effect" refers to a change mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed, such as when some of the combinations of effect patterns 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other effect patterns 70a change. For example, when the combination of effect patterns 70a with three digits "777" is set as the combination of effect patterns 70a that indicate a jackpot (jackpot result mode), this refers to a mode in which two effect patterns 70a temporarily stop at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect patterns 70a change in the center area.

Even in the advantageous game state, in this embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect." Note that the number of types and aspects of reach effects may be the same or different between the advantageous game state and the normal game state.

A "normal reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed in a state where the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the central area to form a reach state.

The "SP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after a normal reach effect, in which the effect pattern 70a in the reach state is displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the screen, and a movie (video, animation, etc.) is played that has a stronger effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach effect.

An "SPSP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect, and plays a movie (video, animation, etc.) that has a higher effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes slowly when all the combinations of multiple performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot are in place. In this embodiment, this reach effect is executed only when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of winning a jackpot related to the reach effect increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect < full rotation reach effect (guaranteed jackpot).

(Example of normal reach variation – advantageous game state)
33 shows the case of advantageous mode A in the advantageous gaming state. Note that the matters described in the normal gaming state may also be applied.

In the left and right columns, the performance symbols 70a with the same identification information are displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) on the vertically scrolled movement path A, resulting in a reach (Fig. 33 (b)). At this time, during the movement stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns, the movement stop suggestion performance of mode YA is executed and a stop sound YA is output. Note that the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns are in a temporarily stopped state in which the performance symbols 70a slightly sway (swaying display) up and down a predetermined stop position. Note that the movement stop suggestion performance during a reach may be different from the movement stop performance when a reach does not occur, but it may be the same. Also, the movement stop suggestion performance during a reach in a favorable game state may be the same as in a normal game state, or it may be different.

As shown in FIG. 33(c), a performance pattern 70a having different identification information from the left and right columns temporarily stops on the movement path A in the middle row, resulting in a loss. At this time, during the change stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a in the middle row, a change stop suggestion performance of mode YA is executed, a stop sound YA is output, and a change stop display in the temporary stop state is executed. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a stops properly at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops properly in a predetermined loss mode (FIG. 33(d)). In addition, a performance pattern 70a having the same identification information as the left and right columns temporarily stops in the middle row, resulting in a win, and after the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a stops properly at the stop position, a predetermined winning performance is executed, and then the game state transitions to one advantageous to the player.

In this way, in the case of a normal reach, during the fluctuation stop suggestion period of the middle row performance pattern 70a, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a type corresponding to the game state and fluctuation path is executed, and a stopping sound of a type corresponding to the game state and fluctuation path is output.

(Example of SP (SPSP) reach variation)
34 shows the case of advantageous mode A in the advantageous gaming state. Note that the matters described in the normal gaming state may also be applied.

In the left and right columns, the performance symbols 70a with the same identification information temporarily stop on the movement path A, resulting in a reach (Figure 34 (b)). At this time, during the movement stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns, a movement stop suggestion performance of mode YA is executed, and a stop sound YA is output. Note that a movement stop display of a temporary stop state is executed in which the performance symbols 70a in the left and right columns slightly sway (swaying display) so that the performance symbols 70a move up and down a predetermined stop position.

After that, if the game progresses to an SP reach performance (specific performance), a development performance (predetermined performance) is executed to develop the game into an SP reach performance (attract the player's attention). A single development performance can be set, or multiple development performances can be set, such as a first development performance and a second development performance. When multiple development performances are executed, it is possible to make it so that the first development performance is more likely to be executed (high execution rate) when a jackpot game is not executed, and the second development performance is more likely to be executed (high execution rate) when a jackpot game is executed. In other words, it is preferable to make the second development performance a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first development performance. Note that the normal reach performance may be executed for a predetermined period of time before switching to the SP reach performance. Note that the development performance is executed as a predetermined image display such as a whiteout, blackout, or effect, either alone or in combination.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the SP reach performance, the background is switched from the advantageous A background to the SP background. Then, the performance pattern 70a in the left column is switched to a different form from the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped (for example, a simple form without the decoration attached to the identification part), and is reduced in size from the time of the temporary stop and moved to a different position such as the upper left of the screen, and the variable stop display is executed in the temporary stop state. In addition, in the SP reach performance, a pattern whose configuration or size has changed from the normal pattern in the advantageous game state is sometimes called a changed pattern. Also, the performance pattern 70a in the right column is switched to a different form from the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped (for example, a simple form without the decoration attached to the identification part), and is reduced in size from the time of the temporary stop and moved to a different position such as the upper right of the screen, and the variable stop display is executed in the temporary stop state. At this time, the changed patterns, which are the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns that are reduced and temporarily stopped and displayed, repeat a predetermined performance operation such as swinging left and right. The change patterns in the advantageous play state and the change patterns in the normal play state may be the same or different.

In this way, the presentation mode of the performance pattern 70a that is reduced and temporarily stopped in the variable presentation of the advantageous game state is the same as the presentation mode of the performance pattern 70a that is reduced and temporarily stopped in the variable presentation of the normal game state, swaying from side to side. Note that in the embodiment, the arrangement position of the performance pattern 70a that is reduced and temporarily stopped is the same in the advantageous game state and the normal game state, but it may be in a temporary stop state in different positions with similar presentation modes. In the normal game state, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced form with reduced components, but it may be displayed in a reduced form in the advantageous game state with fewer types of components of the performance pattern reduced than in the normal game state, or it may be displayed in a reduced form in the advantageous game state with the same configuration used for normal variable presentation.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the SP reach performance of the embodiment, the vertical scroll variation path A is switched to a different SP variation path (in the embodiment, it is scrolled so as to come out from the back to the front). Then, as necessary, a provocative performance such as an animation cut-in or a battle performance (not shown) is executed. Here, the performance pattern 70a of the middle row may also be switched to a different form from the performance pattern 70a of the variation path A (for example, a simple form such as reducing the components of the performance pattern) like the performance patterns 70a of the left and right rows that are displayed in a reduced size. The performance pattern 70a of the middle row may remain the variation path A, but in the embodiment, it is switched to a variation path different from the variation path A. Then, as necessary, a provocative performance such as an animation cut-in or a battle performance (not shown) is executed.

When the result of the variation effect is a "miss", as shown in FIG. 34(d), the combination of the effect symbols "2", "8", and "2" that are the miss combination are temporarily stopped on the screen. At this time, the effect symbols 70a in the left, center, and right columns that are in the temporarily stopped state are performing a swinging effect. During the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70 in the middle row, a variation stop suggestion effect of the mode YA corresponding to the variation path A may be performed, a variation stop suggestion effect of the SP mode may be performed, or the execution of the variation stop suggestion effect may be restricted. Also, during the variation stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70 in the middle row, a stop sound YA corresponding to the variation path A may be output, or a stop sound of the SP mode may be output without outputting the stop sound YA, or the output of the stop sound may be restricted. Note that when the performance symbols 70a in the middle row are temporarily stopped, text information such as "miss" may be displayed to notify that it is a miss.

After that, when the SP reach performance ends, as shown in FIG. 34(e), a return performance (predetermined performance) is executed on the screen to return (attract the player's attention) from the SP reach performance (specific performance). Specifically, a return image (e.g., a door image) is displayed on the screen so that the viewing of the performance images (performance patterns, background images, etc.) of the SP reach performance is restricted. At this time, the special pattern TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return performance ends, as shown in FIG. 34(f), the background for SP is switched to the background for advantageous A, the performance pattern 70a of the changed pattern is switched to the normal performance pattern 70a of the variable path A (visual recognition is permitted), and the performance patterns "2", "8", and "2" are displayed as normal patterns. That is, before the return performance is executed, the changed patterns were displayed as variable and stopped, but after the return performance is executed, they return to the normal patterns. Also, the performance patterns 70a of each column do not stop from the variable state of the variable path A, but when the return performance ends, they appear as normal patterns in a state where they are temporarily stopped at a specified position on the left, center, or right of the screen. Furthermore, after the return performance is executed, they are displayed as variable and stopped in a temporary stop state without executing the variable stop suggestion performance. Also, the output of the stop sound is limited. Then, after the actual stop, the next variable performance is executed.

On the other hand, when the result of the variation performance is a "jackpot", the winning combination of the performance patterns "2", "2", and "2" is temporarily stopped on the screen at the timing of FIG. 34 (d). The change patterns in the middle row scrolling on the variation path for the SP reach performance are displayed as stopped in the center of the screen after performing the variation stop suggestion performance for the SP reach during the variation stop suggestion period. Then, the change patterns in the left row that were reduced in the upper left corner of the screen are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the left area of the screen, and the change patterns in the right row that were reduced in the upper right corner of the screen are enlarged and displayed as stopped in the right area of the screen. At this time, the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right rows that are lined up in a temporary stop state are performing a swaying performance operation. During the variation stop suggestion period of the performance patterns 70 in the middle row, the variation stop suggestion performance of the mode corresponding to the variation path A is not performed, and the variation stop suggestion performance of the SP mode may be performed, or the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance may be restricted. In addition, during the period when the middle row performance pattern 70 indicates that it is about to stop, a stop sound corresponding to the movement path may be output, or a stop sound for a winning mode may be output without outputting stop sound A, or the output of the stop sound may be limited. In addition, when the middle row performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, text information such as "Win" may be displayed to notify that it is a win.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends, a return effect (predetermined effect) is executed on the screen to return (attract the player's attention) from the SP reach effect (specific effect). Specifically, a return image (e.g., a door image) is displayed on the screen so that the visual recognition of the effect images (effect patterns, background images, etc.) of the SP reach effect is restricted. At this time, the special pattern TZ is displayed.

Then, when the return performance ends, the background for SP is switched to the background for advantageous A, the performance pattern 70a for SP is switched to the normal performance pattern 70a (visibility is permitted), and the performance patterns "2", "2", and "2" are displayed as normal patterns. That is, before the return performance is executed, the changed patterns were displayed as stopped, but after the return performance is executed, they return to the normal patterns. Also, the performance patterns 70a of each row do not stop from the changing state of the change path A, but when the return performance ends, they appear as normal patterns in a temporarily stopped state at a predetermined position on the left, center, or right of the screen. Furthermore, after the return performance is executed, they are displayed as stopped in a temporarily stopped state without executing the stop indication performance. Also, the output of the normal stop sound may be restricted, and a winning stop sound may be output. After that, the performance pattern 70a stops for real, and the opening performance of the big win game is executed.

When a win occurs, the return effect may be omitted, and the opening effect for the jackpot game may be executed after the effect pattern 70a stops.

Note that although SP reach has been used as an example, the same procedure may be used for SPSP reach.

As described above, in the SP reach effect in the advantageous game state, in the temporarily stopped state of the reduced-sized left and right column performance patterns 70a (changed patterns), each of the left and right column performance patterns 70a swings left and right. Also, in the SP reach effect in the normal game state, in the temporarily stopped state of the reduced-sized left and right column performance patterns 70a (changed patterns), each of the left and right column performance patterns 70a swings left and right. In this way, in the normal game state (first game state) and the advantageous game state (second game state), the operation mode of the performance patterns 70a in the temporarily stopped state in the reach effect is the same. By doing so, even in the normal game state, a sense of expectation can be given in the same way as in the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Here, in the SP reach effect in the normal game state, in both the first and second change paths, the normal state (first state) of the effect pattern 70a that has started to change is changed to a reduced state (second state) in which the pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and in both the first and second change paths, the effect becomes the same state of swinging left and right in the reduced state. In this way, regardless of which change path is used in the normal game state, a similar sense of expectation can be given when a reach effect is executed, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In the variation presentation of the vertical scroll variation path A, in the SP reach presentation in the advantageous game state, in the temporarily stopped state of the reduced-displayed left and right column performance patterns 70a (changed patterns), each of the left and right column performance patterns 70a is in a performance mode of swinging left and right. Also, in the variation presentation of the first vertical scroll variation path, in the SP reach presentation in the normal game state, in the temporarily stopped state of the reduced-displayed left and right column performance patterns 70a (changed patterns), each of the left and right column performance patterns 70a is in a performance mode of swinging left and right. In this way, in the vertical scroll variation path in the normal game state (first game state) and the vertical scroll variation path in the advantageous game state (second game state), the operation mode of the performance pattern 70a in the temporarily stopped state in the reach presentation is the same. By doing so, even in the normal game state, a sense of expectation can be given in the same way as in the advantageous game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In a reach performance, the operation mode of the performance pattern 70a in a provisionally stopped state being the same does not necessarily mean that the operation mode is exactly the same, but may be the same in part, such as the swinging direction of the performance pattern 70a being the same or the moving part of the performance pattern 70a being the same.

As described above, in the variation presentation of the first vertical scrolling variation path in the normal game state, when a losing stop occurs without going through the SP reach presentation, a first variation stop suggestion presentation can be executed in which a stop sound A (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. In the variation presentation of the first vertical scrolling variation path in the normal game state, when a losing stop occurs after going through the SP reach presentation (return presentation), a second stop suggestion presentation can be executed in which the output of the stop sound A (specific sound) is restricted during the stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part.

In the variation presentation of the second variation path of the annular scroll in the normal game state, when a losing stop occurs without going through the SP reach presentation, a first variation stop suggestion presentation can be executed in which a stop sound B (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part. In the variation presentation of the second variation path of the annular scroll in the normal game state, when a losing stop occurs without going through the SP reach presentation (return presentation), a second stop suggestion presentation can be executed in which the output of the stop sound B (specific sound) is restricted during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of a decorative part and an identification part.

In the variation presentation of the vertical scrolling variation path A in a favorable game state, when a losing stop occurs without going through the SP reach presentation, a first stop suggestion presentation can be executed in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of an identification section. In the variation presentation of the vertical scrolling variation path A in a favorable game state, when a losing stop occurs after going through the SP reach presentation (return presentation), a second stop suggestion presentation can be executed in which the output of the stop sound (specific sound) is restricted during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of an identification section.

In addition, in the advantageous game state, a variation path B may be set in a manner different from the vertical scrolling variation path A (for example, around a vertical axis or circular scroll). In this case, in the variation presentation of the variation path B in the advantageous game state, when a miss stop occurs without going through the SP reach presentation, a first stop suggestion presentation may be made executable in which a stop sound (specific sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the identification unit. In the variation presentation of the variation path B in the advantageous game state, when a miss stop occurs after going through the SP reach presentation (return presentation), a second stop suggestion presentation may be made executable in which the output of the stop sound (specific sound) is restricted during the variation stop suggestion period until the performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped in the normal mode (predetermined mode: normal pattern) consisting of the identification unit.

The stop sounds for the first stop suggestion effect include the first stop sound (such as stop sound A or stop sound B) that is normally played when there is a miss, the second stop sound (same-color pattern stop sound) that is output during a period when same-color patterns are suggesting a stop of movement, and the third stop sound (jackpot stop sound) that is output when there is a hit.

In the first variable path of the vertical scroll in the normal game mode, it is possible to execute a first reach stimulation effect (for example, a preview effect such as a reserve change or the operation of a movable role) that stimulates the player to expect a reach. Also, in the second variable path of the circular scroll in the normal game mode, it is possible to execute a first reach stimulation effect (for example, a preview effect such as a reserve change or the operation of a movable role) that stimulates the player to expect a reach.

In the vertical scrolling change path A of the favorable game state, it is possible to execute a second reach stimulation effect (for example, a preview effect such as a reserve change or the operation of a movable role) that creates a sense of anticipation that a reach will occur. Similarly, when the favorable game state change path B is set, it is possible to execute a second reach stimulation effect (for example, a preview effect such as a reserve change or the operation of a movable role) that creates a sense of anticipation that a reach will occur.

Due to differences in time-saving settings and winning probabilities, it is easier to transition to a jackpot in the advantageous game state than in the normal game state. In other words, even if the variation paths are the same, the variation stop suggestion effect is more likely to be executed by the third stop sound (jackpot stop sound) output when a hit occurs in the vertical scrolling variation path A in the advantageous game state than in the vertical scrolling first variation path in the normal game state. In this way, the sense of expectation of the variation path in the normal game state can be brought closer to the advantageous game state, and interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, even if the change paths are different, the change path A of the vertical scroll in the advantageous game state is more likely to execute the change stop suggestion effect by the third stop sound (jackpot stop sound) output when a hit is made than the second change path of the circular scroll in the normal game state. In this way, it is possible to create a difference in the sense of expectation depending on the change path, and to increase the excitement of the game.

In a favorable game state, it is easier to execute a reach-inducing effect that induces anticipation of a reach than in a normal game state. In other words, even if the variation path is the same, the variation stop suggestion effect using the second stop sound (same-color pattern stop sound) that induces anticipation of a transition to a favorable situation such as a transition to a reach is more easily executed for the variation path A of the vertical scroll in the favorable game state than for the first variation path of the vertical scroll in the normal game state. In this way, the sense of expectation for the variation path in the normal game state can be brought closer to the favorable game state, and interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, even if the change paths are different, the change path A of the vertical scroll in the advantageous game state is more likely to execute a change stop suggestion effect using the second stop sound (same-color pattern stop sound) that gives the player hope for a transition to a favorable situation, such as a transition to a reach, than the second change path of the circular scroll in the normal game state. In this way, it is possible to create a difference in the sense of expectation depending on the difference in the change path, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variation presentation of the vertical scrolling variation path, if a reach presentation is executed after a reach prompting, the third specific sound is more likely to be output in a variation presentation (advantageous game state) in which the second reach prompting presentation is executed than in a variation presentation (normal game state) in which the first reach prompting presentation is executed.In the variation presentation of the circular scrolling variation path, if a reach presentation is executed after a reach prompting, the third specific sound is more likely to be output in a variation presentation (advantageous game state) in which the second reach prompting presentation is executed than in a variation presentation (normal game state) in which the first reach prompting presentation is executed.By doing this, it is possible to create a difference in the sense of expectation due to the difference in the reach prompting presentation, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

When the type of the variable path in the variable performance is changed, the display mode (configuration mode) of the performance pattern 70a may be changed. For example, the performance pattern 70a of the first variable path of vertical scrolling may be configured with a decorative part and an identification part by the character image A, and the performance pattern 70a of the second variable path of circular scrolling may be configured with a decorative part and an identification part by the character image B of a different mode from the character image A, and the content of the components of the performance pattern 70a may be changed. Note that the different mode includes a character image with a dog motif, but with a different pose of the dog. In addition, the performance pattern 70a of the first variable path may be configured with an identification part, and the performance pattern 70a of the second variable path may be configured with a decorative part and an identification part by the character image B, and other modifications may be made, such as changing the number of types of components of the performance pattern 70a.

When the type of the variable path in the variable performance changes, the background display may be changed. For example, if the variable performance of the first variable path of vertical scrolling is a mode A background, a mode B background with a different aspect from the mode A background may be used in the variable performance of circular scrolling. Note that different aspects include a background image with a town motif, but also differences such as the difference between morning and evening.

Even if the type of change path in the change performance changes, the change start performance executed in the start period may be the same, but if the type of change path in the change performance changes, the mode of the change start performance executed in the start period may be changed. Note that changes in the mode also include changes in the performance content, the number of types of performance, and the performance period.

In a change start performance executed in a change performance of a specified change path, the performance patterns 70a with different identification information may have different performance modes, but may also have performance modes with the same motif. Here, the same motif includes taking the same pose, such as raising one's hands, even if the character images in the decorative parts are different.

Even if the type of change path in the change performance changes, the stop suggestion start performance executed in the stop suggestion period may be the same, but if the type of change path in the change performance changes, the mode of the stop suggestion start performance executed in the stop suggestion period may be changed. Note that changes in the mode also include changes in the performance content, the number of types of performance, and the performance period.

In a change suggestion effect that is executed in a change effect of a specified change path, the effect patterns 70a with different identification information may have different effect modes, but may also have the same motif. Here, the same motif includes taking the same pose, such as raising one's hand, even if the character images in the decorative parts are different.

The moving path may be configured so that the performance pattern 70a moves not only on the main (first image display device 131) screen, but also on the sub (second image display devices 132, 133) screens.

Regardless of whether the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) variable presentation is being executed, in certain presentations (e.g., reach presentations and pseudo-consecutive presentations), the presentation pattern 70a may be made switchable to a third variable path variation.
Here, the third movement path may be the same as either the first movement path or the second movement path (including the case where the movement paths of all or some of the columns of the multiple columns of the performance patterns 70 are the same), but different from the other (including the case where the movement paths of all or some of the columns of the multiple columns of the performance patterns 70 are different), or it may be different from both the first movement path and the second movement path (including the case where the movement paths of all or some of the columns of the multiple columns of the performance patterns 70 are different).
Furthermore, regardless of whether the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling) is being executed, it can be said that the player is more likely to transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to him or her by switching to the third fluctuation trajectory than by not switching to the third fluctuation path (the fluctuation path in the pseudo consecutive performance or reach performance).

When the change paths differ depending on the mode, this includes the case where, when comparing a predetermined number of rows of performance patterns 70a that change in a mode, the change paths of all or some of the rows of performance patterns 70 are different.

In an embodiment, the special pattern TZ, which is different from the performance pattern 70a, performs a performance of changing along a predetermined changing path (rotation on the spot) regardless of whether the performance of the first changing path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the performance of the second changing path (e.g. circular scroll) is being performed. And, regardless of whether the performance of the first changing path or the performance of the second changing path is being performed, when a specific performance (reach performance) is performed, the performance pattern 70a may be switched to a changing path of a common form to the predetermined changing trajectory, or may be switched to a changing path of a different form.

In the first variation path (e.g. vertical scroll), a first variation start performance is executed in the start period, and in the second variation path (e.g. circular scroll), a second variation start performance different from the first mode is executed in the start period. In either the first variation path or the second variation path, a third variation start performance different from the first and second modes (a type of advance notice performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot transition, such as enlargement of the pattern, pattern effects, or color changes of the pattern) may be executed. Then, when the third variation start performance operation is executed, it can be said that it is easier to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

When the pseudo consecutive and reach effects are performed, the stop suggestion effect of the middle row effect pattern 70a may be different from the stop suggestion effect in the normal mode when the pseudo consecutive and reach effects are not performed, or may be the same. The different mode includes not only a change in the content of the effect from the normal mode, but also a part of the effect such as the stop action or the whole effect is not performed.

In the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), it is possible to switch to the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) with a switching performance (e.g., eye-catching, etc.) in between. The switching direction of the variable path may be unidirectional, but in the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), it is also possible to switch to the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) with a switching performance (e.g., eye-catching, etc.) in between. Here, the switching performance when switching from the first variable path to the second variable path and the switching performance when switching from the second variable path to the first variable path may be the same, or may be different. It can also be said that in the variable performance of a predetermined mode, it is possible to switch between a predetermined mode and another mode.

It is possible to execute a variation presentation in which the variation path in the first period (start period, first half of variation, etc.) in the variation presentation is different from the variation path in the second period (stop suggestion period, second half of variation) in the variation presentation. Also, in the third period (after the return presentation (when a miss is confirmed after the reach presentation)), it is possible to set the stop display mode to be different from the variation path in the first and second periods.

When a specific performance (continuous performance, device operation performance, operation button operation suggestion performance, etc.) is being executed in the variable performance, switching from the first variable path to the second variable path (from the second variable path to the first variable path) is restricted. Also, when a specific performance (continuous performance, device operation performance, operation button operation suggestion performance, etc.) is being executed in the variable performance, execution of a switching performance is restricted. Here, when a specific performance is executed, the visibility of the variable path may change (become invisible), for example, by displaying an operation button operation suggestion image.

When a specific effect (for example, a continuous effect, a role device operation effect, or an operation button operation suggestion effect) is executed, switching from the first movement path to the second movement path (from the second movement path to the first movement path) is restricted, but when a switching effect (for example, an eye-catching effect) is executed, switching from the first movement path to the second movement path (from the second movement path to the first movement path) may be possible.

In either the first or second variable path variation performance, a first predetermined performance (a performance that builds expectations, such as a cut-in) and a second predetermined performance different from the first predetermined performance (a switching performance, such as an eye-catching scene change performance) can be executed as a performance that hides part or all of the variable path. In either the first or second predetermined performance, it can be executed at a position that overlaps with the variable path (a position that changes the visibility of the variable path (makes it invisible)). When the first predetermined performance is executed, switching from the first variable path to the second variable path (from the second variable path to the first variable path) is restricted, but when the second predetermined performance is executed, switching from the first variable path to the second variable path (from the second variable path to the first variable path) may be possible.

In periods such as the execution period of a continuous performance, the execution period of a role-operation performance, or the effective period during which the operation of an operation button is reflected in the performance, variable path switching restrictions, mode change restrictions, and execution restrictions for mode change switching may be implemented. Here, variable path switching, mode change, and mode change switching may be implemented more easily in variable performances that are executed after a specified reach performance such as an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach is executed and then missed than in variable performances that are executed after a specified reach performance such as an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach is not executed and then missed.

In the first and second variable path variable performances, a special performance (such as a cut-in) can be executed to hide (change visibility of) the variable path of the performance pattern 70a. In either the first or second variable path variable performance, when a special performance is executed, it may be easier to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, in either the first or second variable path variable performance, when a special performance is executed, it may be easier to transition to a third variable path variable performance (such as a reach performance or pseudo consecutive win). Furthermore, in either the first or second variable path variable performance, when the display of the variable path is restricted (by a performance such as a cut-in), it may be easier to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the performance mode A or the advantageous mode, one (when one roulette is displayed) or all columns are vertically scrolling change paths. In this way, in the change performance by the performance time pattern 70a of multiple columns, among the performance patterns of the multiple columns, there is a relationship of columns that change on a common (same) change path. On the other hand, in the performance mode B, in the first mode, the right and left columns rotate in a circular shape, and the middle column rotates horizontally. In this way, in the change performance by the performance time pattern 70a of multiple columns, among the performance patterns of the multiple columns, there is a relationship of columns that change on different change paths. Here, in either the first mode or the second mode, the change path of the performance pattern 70a of the middle column may be the same in the pseudo consecutive performance or reach performance, and in this case, it can be said that it is possible to execute a change performance of a common change path even in different modes.

The normal game state may have more, the same, or fewer types of modes than the advantageous game state. In this case, the normal game state may have more types of variable paths than the advantageous game state.

Whether it is the first or second fluctuation path, there are fluctuation effects that execute a special sound effect different from the specific sound effect (output of the fluctuation start sound) and fluctuation effects that do not execute a special sound effect. The specific sound effect is executed in the start period from when the performance pattern 70a, which was stopped (temporarily stopped), starts to fluctuate until the high-speed fluctuation period. In addition, the specific sound effect is basically executed at the start of fluctuation in the normal mode that does not involve other special effects such as preview effects, and a specific sound corresponding to the mode of the performance pattern 70a, the mode of the fluctuation path, etc. is output based on the timing when the performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate.

The special sound effects include a predetermined first sound effect (a fluctuation start sound with a low expectation) (FIG. 36 (f1)), and a second sound effect (a fluctuation start sound with a high expectation) that accompanies the start of a fluctuation effect in which a predetermined effect (such as a pre-reading effect or a continuous effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect) that gradually suggests the expectation level over one or more fluctuation effects is performed (FIG. 36 (f2)). The predetermined effect B that is executed when the second sound effect is executed is easier to execute than the predetermined effect A that is executed when the first sound effect is executed, which has a higher expectation of transitioning to a jackpot. In addition, the predetermined effect may be easier to execute when the second sound effect is executed than when the first sound effect is executed. The special sound effect can be executed from the start of the fluctuation of the effect pattern 70a until at least one effect pattern 70a stops (temporarily stops), and can be executed for a longer period than the specific sound effect. In addition, the special sound effect can be executed based on the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the effect pattern 70a. In particular, the second sound effect may be set to output a special sound corresponding to a predetermined effect (such as a reach stimulation effect, a display effect in front of the screen (light guide plate, 3D, etc.), a role effect, a hold change effect, etc.) including a preview effect that is executed at the same time as, before, or after the special sound effect.

In the gaming machine 1, sounds other than the change start sound are output, such as sounds associated with reach-teasing effects, sounds associated with display effects in front of the screen (light guides, 3D, etc.), sounds associated with gimmick effects, and sounds associated with hold changes. However, while the various effects mentioned above are executed based on the start of the effect, the specific sound effects and special sound effects are executed based on the start of the change in the effect pattern 70a, which is a difference.

The fluctuation stop sound output in the sound effect of the stop suggestion effect executed in the stop suggestion period of the fluctuation effect refers to the sound output in the stop suggestion period in which the normal form of the effect pattern 70a linked to the fluctuation path stops fluctuating (temporarily stops). For example, even if a sound is output when the effect pattern 70a in a reduced form different from the normal form is displayed stopped, such as in the SP reach effect, this sound effect is different from the fluctuation stop sound.

As shown in FIG. 19, when a special effect (revival effect) is executed in which the effect symbol temporarily stops in a losing state and then the lottery is started again, a stop sound effect may be executed or restricted when the effect symbol 70a in the changed state that has changed from the normal state temporarily stops, and further, when the effect symbol 70a that has returned to the normal state is displayed stopped after the return effect, a stop sound effect may be executed or restricted. In other words, when a revival effect is executed, even if an SP reach effect is executed, a stop sound may be output during the stop suggestion period of the effect symbol in the normal state after the SP reach effect (return effect).

In a losing variation where a unique pattern such as a pseudo consecutive pattern stops, the stop sound effect is likely to be restricted during the stop suggestion period of the middle row performance pattern 70a in the normal mode, since this can easily develop into an SP reach performance. However, even in a losing variation where a unique pattern such as a pseudo consecutive pattern stops, the stop sound effect is likely to be executed during the stop suggestion period where the left and right row performance patterns 70a stop in the normal mode.

In this disclosure, "the manner of sound effect (sound) (varying the manner of effect)" may include not only varying the type (content) of the sound effect, but also varying the volume or having no sound (limiting the sound output).

In a losing variation performance in which a normal reach performance is executed, a predetermined sound performance is executed in the stop suggestion period in which the performance symbols in the middle row are displayed stopped. In a losing variation performance in which a SP reach performance is executed, a sound performance of a different type from the predetermined sound performance is executed in the stop suggestion period in which the performance symbols in the middle row are displayed stopped in the normal mode. In this way, the performance type of the sound performance executed in the stop suggestion period of the performance symbols 70a in the middle row may be different between a losing variation performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and a losing variation performance in which a SP reach performance is executed.

In a losing variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed, a predetermined stop sound is output during the stop suggestion period in which the middle row performance symbols are displayed stopped. In a losing variable performance in which a SP reach performance is executed, the output of a predetermined stop sound is restricted during the stop suggestion period in which the middle row performance symbols are displayed stopped in the normal mode. In this way, the presence or absence of a predetermined stop sound output during the stop suggestion period of the middle row performance symbols 70a may differ between a losing variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and a losing variable performance in which a SP reach performance is executed.

(a) In a missing variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed, if a miss occurs after the deciding button operation is performed using the operation button 135, a predetermined stop sound is output during a stop suggestion period in which the middle row performance pattern 70a in a changed mode different from the normal mode is displayed stopped, but after the return performance, the output of the predetermined stop sound is restricted during a stop suggestion period in which the middle row performance pattern 70a in the normal mode is displayed stopped.
(b) In a missing variable performance in which an SP reach performance is executed, if a miss occurs after the deciding button operation is executed using the operation button 135, the output of a predetermined stop sound is limited during a stop suggestion period in which the middle row performance pattern 70a in a changed mode different from the normal mode is displayed stopped, and after the return performance, the output of a predetermined stop sound is limited during a stop suggestion period in which the middle row performance pattern 70a in the normal mode is displayed stopped.
Both patterns (a) and (b) may be set, and either (a) or (b) may be selected and executed depending on conditions such as the type of SP reach presentation.

The stop sound that is played when the reel provisionally stops in a winning state after a promotion teasing effect that teases the execution (transition) of a promotion effect may be different depending on whether a promotion effect is executed in which the reel provisionally stops in a winning state and then changes again, giving the player hope of a change to a winning state that is favorable to the player, or whether the promotion effect is not executed.

Even if the variable effect is a winning effect in a favorable game state (particularly a time-saving game state), the output of the stopping sound of the effect pattern 70a (particularly the middle row) may be more easily restricted during the stop suggestion period in a favorable game state (particularly a time-saving game state) than in a normal game state.

The effect pattern 70 may be divided into the following display modes. Note that the contents of the display modes are examples.
(a) First display of the performance pattern 70a: Display when the performance pattern 70a is stopped. The display area of the performance pattern 70a is opaque (low transparency). A state in which the background is difficult to see, difficult to see, or impossible to see through the display area of the performance pattern 70a. When the performance pattern 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped), there are various performance modes, such as the decorative part (character image) and the identification part (number) not performing, the decorative part (character image) and the identification part (number) performing so that the decorative part of the character shakes, or the effect display (fire or character image) included in the identification part (number) performing.
(b) Second display of the performance pattern 70a: The performance pattern 70a of the fluctuation start period in which the fluctuation start performance is executed
・When the performance pattern 70a starts to change, the performance pattern 70a may be scrolled after a start action such as lifting up. In this case, if the change path is from top to bottom, a start action that moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the change direction is noticeable.
When a start action is performed, an action effect display may be performed. For example, the action effect display may have a first mode used for advance notice performance (preview performance) or pseudo consecutive performance, and a second mode used for normal fluctuation, and the degree of expectation may be different depending on the mode.
In the second display of the performance pattern (displays after the second display), the components may remain the same as in the first display of the performance pattern, or the components may change from the first display of the performance pattern (increase or decrease in components, change in content of components, etc.). For example, the performance pattern 70a consisting of a decorative part and an identification part in the first display may change to only the identification part in the second display. Note that the displays after the second display also include displays used in reach performances and pseudo consecutive performances.
(c) Third display of the performance pattern 70a: Performance pattern 70a during the high-speed fluctuation period
A state in which the transparency of the display area of performance pattern 70a is higher (transparent display) compared to the first display of performance pattern 70, and the background display becomes easier to see through the display area of performance pattern 70a.
(d) Fourth display of performance pattern 70a: non-display of performance pattern in variable performance. A state in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in SP or SPSP reach performance, but some or all of the performance patterns 70a in the left, middle, and right columns are not displayed.
(e) Fifth display of performance pattern 70a: When the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns are temporarily stopped during a reach performance (SP or SPSP), the display of the performance patterns in the left and right columns is reduced (reduced display), the components change, and the shaking fluctuation changes to a state different from that of a normal reach performance.
In addition, the presentation action such as shaking of the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns that are in a temporarily stopped state in a normal reach presentation may be the same as the presentation action such as shaking of the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns in a missing variable presentation.
(f) Sixth display of performance pattern 70a: The performance pattern in the middle row in the reach performance/the performance pattern in the middle row slowly scrolls at a speed slower than the high-speed fluctuation period.
- The display has a lower transparency than the third display when encouraging development in a reach, making the middle row of performance patterns 70a easier to see than in the third display.
Slow scrolling may be easier to execute in normal reach effects than in SP and SPSP reach effects. In this case, execution of slow scrolling may be restricted in the SP and SPSP reach effects.
(g) 7th display of performance pattern 70a: The performance pattern in the middle row of the reach performance; the performance pattern 70a in the middle row is scrolled at a faster speed than the 6th display.
- The performance pattern 70a is displayed with a lower transparency than the third display, making the performance pattern 70a in the middle row easier to see than the third display.
- The performance pattern 70a is displayed with a higher transparency than the sixth display, making the performance pattern 70a in the middle row more difficult to see than the sixth display.
(h) Eighth display of the performance pattern 70a: A roulette display in which a unique pattern is added to the performance pattern in the middle row. This is a state used in the roulette performance that may occur before or after the execution of the reach performance, and is used to encourage pseudo consecutive performance or SP reach performance. In this case, it may be displayed transparently and scrolled at high speed.
(i) 9th display of performance pattern 70a: Transparent display when performance pattern 70a stops changing - the background display changes from an easily visible state to an easily visible state through the display area of performance pattern 70a.
(j) 10th display of the performance pattern 70a: Stop suggestion performance during the stop suggestion period of the performance pattern 70a ・The display area of the performance pattern 70a is opaque (low transparency). The background is difficult to see through the display area of the performance pattern 70a, and is displayed in a state where it is difficult to see, difficult to see, or impossible to see.
- A stop suggestion effect is displayed in a manner different from the second display (variation start effect).
・The effect pattern 70a may be displayed as a stop after performing a stop action such as bouncing during the stop suggestion period. In this case, if the movement path is from top to bottom, it is noticeable if the stop action goes too far in the same direction as the movement direction and then returns to the top. In addition, when performing a stop action, an effect such as a bound effect may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19, the variable presentation may be set so that after the stop display shows a loss (FIG. 19(g)), a specified revival presentation is executed (FIG. 19(h), FIG. 19(i)), and then a win occurs. In this case, in the stop display shown in FIG. 19(g) that shows a confirmed loss, the output of the stop sound may be restricted to make it look similar to a loss after an SP reach. In this case, the variable presentation in which the output of the stop sound of the middle row of presentation symbols 70a may be restricted during the stop suggestion period has a higher expectation of transitioning to a favorable gaming state due to the presence of a revival hit, than a variable presentation in which the output of the stop sound of the middle row of presentation symbols 70a is not restricted during the stop suggestion period.

When multiple variable paths are set, the manner of the stop sound output during the stop suggestion period may be different or the same depending on the variable path. Note that even for the same variable path, the manner of the stop sound may be different or the same depending on the difference in the stop suggestion period (such as a losing variable stop or a temporary stop when reaching a goal) or the difference in the row of the performance pattern 70a.

When multiple modes are set, the manner of the stop sound output during the stop suggestion period may be different or the same depending on the mode. Note that even in the same mode, the manner of the stop sound may be different or the same depending on the difference in the stop suggestion period (such as a variable stop on a miss or a temporary stop when reaching a goal) or the difference in the row of the performance pattern 70a.

When multiple variable paths are set, the display mode of the performance pattern may be different or the same depending on the variable path. Note that even if the variable path is the same, the display mode of the performance pattern may be different or the same depending on the difference in the performance (normal performance, reach performance, etc.) or the difference in the row of the performance pattern 70a.

When multiple change paths are set, the manner in which the change start performance occurs during the start period may be different or the same depending on the change path. Note that even if the change path is the same, the manner in which the change start performance occurs may be different or the same depending on differences in performance or start period (such as normal performance or reach performance), or differences in the rows of performance patterns 70a.

When multiple fluctuation paths are set, the manner in which the fluctuation stop suggestion effect is displayed during the stop suggestion period may be different or the same depending on the fluctuation path. Note that even if the fluctuation path is the same, the manner in which the stop suggestion effect is displayed may be different or the same depending on differences in the effect or stop suggestion period (such as normal effect or reach effect), or differences in the rows of the effect patterns 70a.

When multiple modes are set, the change path may be different or the same for all or some of the modes. Note that even in the same mode, the change path may be switched in reach effects, pseudo consecutive effects, etc.

The number of types of variable paths may be greater in the normal gaming state than in the time-saving gaming state.
The normal gaming state may have a greater number of types of modes and a greater number of types of variable paths than the time-saving gaming state.
The normal gaming state may have a greater number of types of modes and a smaller number of types of variable paths than the time-saving gaming state.
The normal gaming state may have fewer types of modes and more types of variable paths than the time-saving gaming state.
The number of types of modes and the number of types of variable paths may be smaller in the normal gaming state than in the time-saving gaming state.

The number of types of variable paths may be greater in a game state (e.g., normal) with a second winning probability lower than the first winning probability (e.g., special probability) than in a game state with a first winning probability (e.g., special probability).
A game state (e.g., normal) with a second winning probability lower than the first winning probability may have a larger number of types of modes and a larger number of types of variation paths than a game state with a first winning probability (e.g., special probability).
A game state (e.g., normal) with a second winning probability lower than the first winning probability may have a larger number of types of modes and a smaller number of types of variation paths than a game state with a first winning probability (e.g., special probability).
A game state (e.g., normal) with a second winning probability lower than the first winning probability may have fewer types of modes and more types of variation paths than a game state with a first winning probability (e.g., special probability).
The number of types of modes and the number of types of variation paths may be smaller in a game state (e.g., normal) with a second winning probability lower than the first winning probability than in a game state with a first winning probability (e.g., special probability).

Depending on the difference in the group of the number of reserved memories, the manner of the variable start presentation during the start period may be the same or different.
Depending on the difference in the group of the number of reserved memories, the length of the presentation period of the variable start presentation in the start period may be the same or different.
Depending on the group of the number of reserved memories, the manner of the stop suggestion presentation during the stop suggestion period may be the same or different.
Depending on the group of reserved memory numbers, the length of the presentation period of the stop suggestion presentation during the stop suggestion period may be the same or different.
Depending on the group of reserved memory numbers, the manner of the variable start sound during the start period may be the same or different.
Depending on the group of the number of reserved memories, the manner of the stop sound during the stop suggestion period may be the same or different.
In addition, the groups of reserved memory numbers can be divided in various ways, for example, into reserved memory numbers "0-3" and reserved memory number "4", or into "0-2" and "3-4", or individually.

The expectation of transitioning to a state advantageous to the player (a jackpot or time-saving effect) may be different or the same when a predetermined effect (a preview effect or other effect) is executed in the variable effect of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) and when a predetermined effect is executed in the variable effect of the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling).
It may be possible to make it easier for the player to transition to a favorable state (a jackpot or time-saving effect) when a specified effect (a preview effect or other effect) is executed in the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) than when a specified effect (a preview effect or other effect) is executed in the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll).
It may be possible to make it easier for the player to transition to a favorable state (a jackpot or time-saving effect) when a predetermined effect (a preview effect or other effect) is executed in the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) than when a predetermined effect (a preview effect or other effect) is executed in the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling).

The stop sound output during the stop suggestion period may be in a different form depending on the difference in identification information, the difference between the normal form and the modified form, the difference between the unique pattern and the normal pattern, etc. For example, the stop sound of the performance pattern 70a having the identification information "7" may be in a different form from the stop sound of the performance pattern 70a having other identification information such as "6".

When a promotion effect is executed, the stop suggestion effect (e.g., a stop sound effect) executed in the earlier stop suggestion period (e.g., a tentative stop at "666") may have a different appearance from the stop suggestion effect (e.g., a stop sound effect) executed in the later stop suggestion period (e.g., a tentative stop at "777"). In this case, the appearance of the stop suggestion effect may be changed before and after the stop suggestion period regardless of the identification information for the tentative stop, and the appearance of the stop suggestion effect may be changed before and after the stop suggestion period when the identification information for the tentative stop is different.

When a promotion effect is executed, the stop suggestion effect (e.g., a stop sound effect) executed in the earlier stop suggestion period (e.g., a tentative stop at "666") may have the same aspect as the stop suggestion effect (e.g., a stop sound effect) executed in the later stop suggestion period (e.g., a tentative stop at "666" or "222"). In this case, the aspect of the stop suggestion effect may be the same before and after the stop suggestion period regardless of the identification information for the tentative stop, and the aspect of the stop suggestion effect may be the same before and after the stop suggestion period when the identification information for the tentative stop is the same (same group).

Presentation mode A is configured with one type of change path in which the performance patterns 70a in the left, center, and right columns scroll vertically. Presentation mode B is configured with two types of change paths in which the performance patterns 70a in the left and right columns scroll in a circular pattern, and the performance pattern 70a in the middle column rotates horizontally. Thus, in the embodiment, there is a second mode in which the number of types of change paths of the performance patterns 70a in the change presentation is fewer than in the first mode.

The switching effect used when switching the variable path may be a still image, or a moving image (animation). For example, even if the switching effect is text, it can be made to appear while moving and spread across the screen. Here, if the switching effect involves a performance action, it is recommended that the switching effect end after the performance action is stopped.

The switching effect may be used not only for switching the variable path, but also for switching reach effects, or for switching between a normal game state and an advantageous game state. There may be one or more types of switching effects. When multiple types of switching effects are set, it is preferable to have switching effects with different performance contents that have different expectations for a jackpot. When multiple types of switching effects are set, even if the performance contents have the same expectations for a jackpot, they may have different expectations for transitioning to a revival effect.

Unique patterns such as pseudo consecutive patterns also include zone patterns that suggest zone switching. Note that the matters explained in the pseudo consecutive performance may be interpreted as performance using zone patterns.

The mode for comparing the variation paths is not limited to the relationship between normal game states, but may also be interpreted as the relationship between a normal game state and an advantageous game state, or the relationship between advantageous game states.

In the presentation disclosed herein, the term "same aspect" may refer to some or all of the elements that make up the presentation being the same. For example, the same aspect of the variable stop presentation during the stop suggestion period after the return presentation means that although the components that make up the presentation pattern are different when the variable path is different, there is no stopping action, there is no path to the stop, there is no stopping sound, etc. are the same.

In this disclosure, fluctuation suspension includes provisional suspension and permanent suspension.

The timing of the change in the movement path does not have to be during the movement performance, but can also be after the movement has stopped.

It may be possible to make it easier for a reach effect to develop when the variable path is switched compared to when the variable path is not switched.

The consecutive effects may include pseudo consecutive effects and pre-reading effects.

The operation of the movable role 73 may be performed during the start period of the miss variable performance if it is before the target reserved memory that is the subject of the pre-reading becomes the reserved memory. Even if the target reserved memory that is the subject of the pre-reading becomes the reserved memory, the operation of the movable role 73 may be performed.

In a normal reach performance, a stop sound can be output during the stop suggestion period of the middle row performance pattern 70a. In contrast, in a SP (SPSP) reach performance, the performance pattern 70a in the normal mode changes to a performance pattern 70a in a mode in which only the identification part is changed, and a stop sound can be output during the stop suggestion period of the middle row performance pattern 70a, but the output of the stop sound can be limited during the stop suggestion period leading to a confirmed stop of the miss mode after the return performance. And, the performance pattern 70a is more likely to be displayed stopped more frequently in a variable performance in which an SP (SPSP) reach performance is executed than in a variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed and a variable performance in which a reach performance itself is not executed.

The special pattern TZ does not execute a change start effect or a stop suggestion effect like the performance pattern. The special pattern TZ changes at a faster rate than the performance pattern 70a, making its identification information impossible or difficult to distinguish. It can be said that the start period of the special pattern TZ is shorter than that of the performance pattern 70a.

The identification information may be not only the numerical information of the identification part, but also the character image CG of the decorative part or the identification part alone or in combination, and may be any identifier that allows the player to recognize the difference in the presentation patterns.

Even if the form (e.g., color) of the identification portion (number, etc.) of the performance pattern 70a in the reach performance (e.g., SP (SPSP) reach performance) is the same, the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) in the second game state (advantageous game state) may be made easier to transition to a state advantageous to the player (e.g., a hit or a more advantageous state) than the change performance of the first change path (vertical scrolling) in the first game state (e.g., normal game state).
Even if the form (e.g., color) of the identification portion (numbers, etc.) of the performance pattern 70a in the reach performance (e.g., SP (SPSP) reach performance) is the same, the change performance of the second change path (e.g., circular scroll) in the second game state (advantageous game state) may be made easier to transition to a state advantageous to the player (e.g., a hit or a more advantageous state) than the change performance of the first change path (vertical scroll) in the first game state (e.g., normal game state).
Even if the form (e.g., color, etc.) of the identification portion (numbers, etc.) of the performance pattern 70a in the reach performance (e.g., SP (SPSP) reach performance~) is the same, the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) in the second game state (advantageous game state) may be made easier to transition to a state advantageous to the player (e.g., a hit or a more advantageous state, etc.) than the change performance of the second change path (annular scroll) in the first game state (e.g., normal game state).

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment includes a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m). The main control means (main control unit 110m) can store a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and can execute a judgment as to whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. The presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) can be controlled to a first mode in which a presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 131, second image display device 132, 133) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which a presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on a second changing path (e.g., circular scrolling) different from the first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 131, second image display device 132, 133) based on the judgment. Here, the first and second modes may both be modes set to the normal gaming state, or the first and second modes may both be modes set to the advantageous gaming state, or the first mode may be in the normal gaming state while the second mode is in the advantageous gaming state, or the second mode may be in the normal gaming state while the first mode is in the advantageous gaming state.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a fluctuation start performance (such as the movement or light emission of the performance symbol itself, the movement or light emission of the components of the performance symbol, the movement or light emission of the elements accompanying the performance symbol, and the performance of elements other than the performance symbol, such as sound performance, either alone or in combination) at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance. Here, it is sufficient that the fluctuation start performance is executed on at least one of the multiple fluctuation paths, and for example, the fluctuation start performance may be executed on both the first and second fluctuation paths, or the fluctuation start performance may be executed on the first fluctuation path while not executing the fluctuation start performance on the second fluctuation path, or the fluctuation start performance may be executed on the second fluctuation path while not executing the fluctuation start performance on the first fluctuation path.

It is possible to execute a different type of fluctuation start performance (some or all of the aspects of the fluctuation start performance are different) between the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) and the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling).
By doing this, the differences in the movement paths can be emphasized, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

The variation start performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) and the variation start performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling) may be configured to have a common aspect (part or all of the aspects of the variation start performance are the same).

In the embodiment, the gaming machine 1 can execute a fluctuation stop suggestion performance (such as the movement or light emission of the performance pattern itself, the movement or light emission of the components of the performance pattern, the movement or light emission of the elements associated with the performance pattern, and the performance of elements other than the performance pattern such as sound performance, alone or in combination) and a fluctuation stop display (temporary stop or final stop) of the performance pattern 70a during a fluctuation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in the fluctuation performance will stop (temporary stop or final stop). Here, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be performed on at least one of the multiple fluctuation paths. For example, the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be performed on both the first and second fluctuation paths, or the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be performed on the first fluctuation path while not executing the fluctuation stop suggestion performance on the second fluctuation path, or the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be performed on the second fluctuation path while not executing the fluctuation stop suggestion performance on the first fluctuation path.

It is possible to execute different aspects of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance (part or all of the aspects of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance are different) between the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scrolling) and the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g. circular scrolling).

In addition, a variation stop suggestion effect that is common (part or all of the variation start effect is the same) may be executed between the variation effect of the first variation path (e.g. vertical scrolling) and the variation effect of the second variation path (e.g. circular scrolling).

In the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as a pseudo consecutive performance or an eye-catching performance in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the execution of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be restricted (part or all of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may not be executed) and the fluctuation stop display may be executed.
In the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g., a circular scroll), after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as a pseudo consecutive performance or an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the execution of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be restricted (part or all of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may not be executed) and the fluctuation stop display may be executed.
Whether the fluctuation performance is of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling), after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as a pseudo consecutive performance or an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the execution of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance may be restricted (non-execution of part or all of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance) and the fluctuation stop display may be executed.

The mode of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect executed in the fluctuation effect of the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scroll) may be the same as the mode of the fluctuation stop suggestion effect executed in the fluctuation effect of the second fluctuation path (e.g. circular scroll), but the fluctuation stop suggestion effect of the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation stop effect of the second fluctuation path may be different modes (differences in the performance components, number of types of performance components, performance content, performance timing, performance period, etc., and some or all of the performance components may be different).

In the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as a pseudo consecutive performance or an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a different mode (differences in performance components, number of types of performance components, performance content, performance timing, performance period, etc., and some or all of the performance components are different) may be executed from the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the normal mode set on the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the normal mode set on the second fluctuation path.
In the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scroll), after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as a pseudo consecutive performance or an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a different mode (differences in performance components, number of types of performance components, performance content, performance timing, performance period, etc., with some or all of the performance components being different) may be executed from the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the normal mode set on the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the normal mode set on the second fluctuation path.
Whether the fluctuation performance is of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling), after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as a pseudo consecutive performance or an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of a different mode (differences in performance components, number of types of performance components, performance content, performance timing, performance period, etc., and some or all of the performance components are different) may be executed from the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the normal mode set on the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation stop suggestion performance of the normal mode set on the second fluctuation path.

During the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation presentation of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), it may be easier for the player to transition to a game state advantageous to the player (e.g., from a normal state to a favorable game state, or from a favorable game state to an even more favorable game state) when a fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of a third mode (differences in presentation components, number of types of presentation components, presentation content, presentation timing, presentation period, etc.) different from the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the normal mode set on the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the normal mode set on the second fluctuation path is executed, than when the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the third mode is not executed.
During the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation presentation of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scroll), it may be easier for the player to transition to a game state advantageous to the player (e.g., from a normal state to a favorable game state, or from a favorable game state to an even more favorable game state) when a fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of a third mode (differences in presentation components, number of types of presentation components, presentation content, presentation timing, presentation period, etc.) different from the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the normal mode set on the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the normal mode set on the second fluctuation path is executed, than when the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the third mode is not executed.
Whether it is the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation presentation of a first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the fluctuation stop suggestion period in the fluctuation presentation of a second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling), it may be easier for the player to transition to a game state advantageous to the player (e.g., from a normal state to a favorable game state, or from a favorable game state to an even more favorable game state) when a fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of a third mode (differences in presentation components, number of types of presentation components, presentation content, presentation timing, presentation period, etc., and some or all of the presentation components are different) that is different from the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the normal mode set on the first fluctuation path and the fluctuation stop suggestion presentation of the normal mode set on the second fluctuation path is not executed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in a changing presentation of a first changing path (e.g. vertical scrolling), the performance pattern 70a can be displayed as stopped in a first stop mode (e.g. moving from top to bottom and stopping (temporary stop)), and in a changing presentation of a second changing path (e.g. circular scrolling), the performance pattern 70a can be displayed as stopped in a second stop mode (e.g. moving diagonally from top to bottom and stopping (temporary stop)).
In the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), after a predetermined performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, a variable stop display may be executed in a third stop mode different from the first stop mode and the second stop mode (there is no display of the movement of the performance pattern until the stop, and it is displayed in a stopped (temporary stopped) state).
In the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), after a predetermined performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, a variable stop display may be executed in a third stop mode different from the first stop mode and the second stop mode (there is no display of the movement of the performance pattern until the stop, and it is displayed in a stopped (temporary stopped) state).
Whether the change presentation is of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), after a predetermined presentation (e.g., a return presentation such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach presentation) is executed, a change stop display may be executed in a third stop mode different from the first stop mode and the second stop mode (there is no display of the movement of the presentation pattern until the stop, and it is displayed in a stopped (temporary stopped) state).

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in a variation presentation of a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), the presentation pattern 70a can be displayed in a variable stop state from a first variation stop path (e.g., moving from top to bottom) corresponding to the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), and in a variation presentation of a second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling), the presentation pattern 70a can be displayed in a variable stop state from a second variation stop path (e.g., moving diagonally from top to diagonally downward) corresponding to the second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling).
In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), after a specified performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a may be executed without going through the first variation stop path (e.g., moving from top to bottom).
In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), after a specified performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the variation stop display of the performance pattern 70a may be executed without going through the first variation stop path (e.g., moving from top to bottom).
Whether the change presentation is along the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), after a specified presentation (e.g., a return presentation such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach presentation) has been executed, the change stop display of the presentation pattern 70a may be executed without going through the first change stop path (e.g., moving from top to bottom).

A predetermined effect (e.g., a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect) may be executed to switch from the effect of a first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) to the effect of a second change path (e.g., circular scrolling).
A predetermined effect (e.g., a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect) may be executed to switch from the effect of the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling) to the effect of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling).
By executing a predetermined effect (e.g., a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect), it is possible to switch from the variable effect of a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) to the variable effect of a second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), while it is also possible to restrict switching from the variable effect of the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling) to the variable effect of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), or to enable switching from a variable path of a different type from the second variable path to the first variable path.
By executing a predetermined effect (e.g., a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect), it is possible to switch from the variable effect of the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling) to the variable effect of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), while it is also possible to restrict switching from the variable effect of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) to the variable effect of the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), or to enable switching from a variable path of a different type from the first variable path to the second variable path.
In addition, the specified effects for switching the variable path (for example, switching effects such as eye-catching effects) may be common, or may differ depending on the destination or source of the switch.

In the embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is capable of executing a first continuous performance (e.g., a cut-in, step-up, reel activation, effect, etc.) that is carried out once or multiple times in a first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) change performance.
During the period when the first continuous performance is executed, switching from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) may be restricted. In the variable performance of the first variable path, during the period when the first continuous performance is executed, execution of a predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance) may be restricted.
In the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll), a second continuous performance (e.g., a cut-in, a step-up, a role device operation, an effect, etc.) performed in the variable performance once or multiple times can be executed. In the period in which the second continuous performance is executed, switching from the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) to the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) may be restricted. In the variable performance of the second variable path, in the period in which the second continuous performance is executed, execution of a predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance) may be restricted.
During a period in which a continuous performance (e.g., a performance such as a cut-in, step-up, operation of a role-playing device, or an effect) is being executed, switching to another variable path may be restricted, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll). During a period in which a continuous performance is being executed, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), execution of a predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance) may be restricted.

During the period when the movable role (first movable role 73, second movable role 74) is operated, the switching from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) may be restricted. During the period when the movable role (first movable role 73, second movable role 74) is operated, the execution of a predetermined performance (e.g., switching performance such as an eye-catching performance) may be restricted in the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) variable performance.
During the period when the movable role (first movable role 73, second movable role 74) is operated, switching from the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) to the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) may be restricted. During the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll), during the period when the movable role (first movable role 73, second movable role 74) is operated, the execution of a predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance) may be restricted.
During the period when the movable role (first movable role 73, second movable role 74) is operated, switching to another variable path may be restricted, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll). ...

During a period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means (operation button 135) is being executed, switching from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) may be restricted. In the variable effect of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll), during a period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means (operation button 135) is being executed, execution of a predetermined effect (e.g., a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect) may be restricted.
During a period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means (operation button 135) is being executed, switching from the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) to the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) may be restricted. In the variable effect of the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll), during a period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means (operation button 135) is being executed, execution of a predetermined effect (e.g., a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect) may be restricted.
During a period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts an operation of the operation means (operation button 135) is executed, switching to another variable path may be restricted, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling). During a period in which an operation suggestion effect that prompts an operation of the operation means (operation button 135) is executed, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), execution of a predetermined effect (e.g., a switching effect such as an eye-catching effect) may be restricted.

The main control means (main control unit 110m) can control a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (advantageous game state) in which the degree of advantage to the player is different from that of the first game state (normal game state). The presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) can execute a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation pattern 70a on the display means (first image display device 131, second image display devices 132, 133) whether in the first game state (normal game state) or the second game state (advantageous game state).
The first gaming state (normal gaming state) may have a greater number of types of change paths of the display pattern 70a in the change display than the second gaming state (advantageous gaming state).
The number of types of change paths of the presentation pattern 70a in the change presentation may be greater in the second game state (advantageous game state) than in the first game state (normal game state).

Whether the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g. circular scroll) is used, a specific variable performance (variable miss) in which the performance patterns 70a are displayed in different rows can be executed. Also, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g. stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance patterns 70a in the specific variable performance (variable miss) will stop.
In a specific variable effect (a variable effect resulting in a miss) on the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), the execution of a specific sound effect may be restricted after a specific effect (e.g., a return effect such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed.
In a specific variation effect (a variation effect that results in a miss) of the second variation path (e.g., a circular scroll), the execution of a specific sound effect may be restricted after a specific effect (e.g., a return effect such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach effect) is executed.
Whether it is a specific change performance (a change performance resulting in a miss) on the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or a specific change performance (a change performance resulting in a miss) on the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), the execution of a specific sound performance may be restricted after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) has been executed.

Whether the change presentation is of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), during the change stop suggestion period which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop, it is possible to execute a first sound presentation which outputs a predetermined sound (e.g., a stopping sound for a miss) and a second sound presentation which outputs a specific sound different from the predetermined sound (e.g., a stopping sound for a unique pattern such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern).
In the change presentation of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling), the first sound presentation (e.g., a presentation using a stopping sound for a miss) may be made easier to execute in the miss change presentation in which a specific change presentation pattern (e.g., a change presentation pattern (unique pattern) such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed as having stopped changing, than in the miss change presentation in which a specific change presentation pattern (e.g., a change presentation pattern (unique pattern) such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed as having stopped changing.
In the change presentation of the second change path (e.g., a circular scroll), the first sound presentation (e.g., a presentation using a stopping sound for a miss) may be made easier to execute in the miss change presentation in which a specific change presentation pattern (e.g., a change presentation pattern (unique pattern) such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed as having stopped changing, than in the miss change presentation in which a specific change presentation pattern (e.g., a change presentation pattern (unique pattern) such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed as having stopped changing.
Whether the change presentation is of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), the first sound effect (e.g., an effect using a stopping sound for a miss) may be more easily executed in the missing change presentation in which a specific change presentation pattern (e.g., a change presentation pattern (unique pattern) such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed as having stopped changing than in the missing change presentation in which a specific change presentation pattern (e.g., a change presentation pattern (unique pattern) such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed as having stopped changing.

In the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scrolling), the performance manner of the sound performance (e.g. sound performance using a stop sound) executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period suggesting that the reel will stop at the performance pattern 70a in a specific row (e.g. the middle row) may be different between a missing fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed and a missing fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed (differences in the presence or absence of sound, the content of the sound, the timing of sound output, the duration of sound output, etc.).
In the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scroll), the performance manner of the sound performance (e.g., sound performance using a stop sound) executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period suggesting that the reel will stop at the performance pattern 70a in a specific row (e.g., the middle row) may be different between a missing fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed and a missing fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed (differences in the presence or absence of sound, the content of the sound, the timing of sound output, the duration of sound output, etc.).
Whether the fluctuation performance is of the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (e.g. circular scrolling), the performance manner of the sound performance (e.g. sound performance using a stop sound) executed during the fluctuation stop suggestion period suggesting that the ball will stop at the performance pattern 70a in a specific row (e.g. the middle row) may be different between a missing fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is not executed and a missing fluctuation performance in which a reach performance is executed (differences in the presence or absence of sound, the content of the sound, the timing of sound output, the duration of sound output, etc.).

In the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) variable performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g. stop sound) is output during a period of time during which the performance pattern 70a is stopped. In the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) variable performance, the display mode when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped is a first display mode (e.g. identification part such as numbers + decoration part such as characters) and a second display mode different from the first display mode (e.g. only identification part such as numbers). In the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) variable performance, in the case of a miss variable performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, it may be more difficult to execute a specific sound performance (e.g. performance by a stop sound) when the performance pattern 70a of the second column (middle column) is displayed as stopped in the first display mode (e.g. identification part such as numbers + decoration part such as characters) than when the performance pattern 70a of the first column (right column or left column) is displayed as stopped.
In the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) variable performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) is output during a period of time during which the performance pattern 70a is stopped. In the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) variable performance, the display mode when the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state includes a first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) and a second display mode (e.g., only an identification part such as a number) different from the first display mode. In the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) variable performance, in the case of a miss variable performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the specific sound performance (e.g., a performance by a stop sound) may be executed more difficultly when the performance pattern 70a in the second column (middle column) is displayed in the first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) than when the performance pattern 70a in the first column (right column or left column) is displayed in a stopped state.
Whether the performance is of the first moving path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second moving path (e.g. circular scroll), a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g. stop sound) is output during a period of time indicating that the performance pattern 70a will be stopped. Whether the performance is of the first moving path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second moving path (e.g. circular scroll), the display mode when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as stopped may be a first display mode (e.g. identification part such as numbers + decoration part such as characters) or a second display mode different from the first display mode (e.g. only identification part such as numbers). Whether the change presentation is of the first change path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second change path (e.g. circular scroll), in the case of a miss change presentation in which a reach presentation (SP (SPSP) reach presentation) is executed, it may be made more difficult to execute a specific sound presentation (e.g. a presentation using a stop sound) when the presentation pattern 70a in the second column (middle column) is displayed in the first display mode (e.g. an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) than when the presentation pattern 70a in the first column (right column or left column) is displayed in the stopped state.

In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop, a specific stop performance (e.g., performance of the performance pattern itself, such as movement or light emission, performance of the components of the performance pattern, such as movement or light emission, performance of the elements accompanying the performance pattern, such as sound performance, or a performance by an element other than the performance pattern, either alone or in combination) can be executed. The specific stop performance includes a first performance mode in which a sound performance (e.g., a performance by a stop sound, etc.) is executed, and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode (e.g., no stop sound, the content of the sound, the output timing of the sound, the output period of the sound, etc. are different from the first performance sun).
In the case of a missing variable performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed in the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), the specific stop performance of the second performance mode (e.g., no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing, sound output period, etc. different from the first performance sun) may be more likely to be executed when the performance pattern 70a in the second column (middle column) is displayed in a stopped state than when the performance pattern 70a in the first column (right column or left column) is displayed in a stopped state.

In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop, a specific stop performance (e.g., performance of the performance pattern itself, such as movement or light emission, performance of the components of the performance pattern, such as movement or light emission, performance of the elements accompanying the performance pattern, such as sound performance, or a performance by an element other than the performance pattern, either alone or in combination) can be executed. The specific stop performance includes a first performance mode in which a sound performance (e.g., a performance by a stop sound, etc.) is executed, and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode (e.g., no stop sound, the content of the sound, the output timing of the sound, the output period of the sound, etc. are different from the first performance sun).
In the case of a missing variable performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed in the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), the specific stop performance of the second performance mode (e.g., no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing, sound output period, etc. different from the first performance sun) may be more likely to be executed when the performance pattern 70a in the second column (middle column) is displayed in a stopped state than when the performance pattern 70a in the first column (right column or left column) is displayed in a stopped state.

Whether the variation performance is of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) or the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a specific stop performance (e.g., performance of the performance pattern itself, such as movement or light emission, performance of the components of the performance pattern, such as movement or light emission, performance of the elements accompanying the performance pattern, such as sound performance, or performance by elements other than the performance pattern, either alone or in combination) can be executed during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will be stopped. The specific stop performance includes a first performance mode in which a sound performance (e.g., performance by a stop sound, etc.) is executed, and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode (e.g., no stop sound, the content of the sound, the output timing of the sound, the output period of the sound, etc. are different from the first performance sun).
Whether the fluctuation performance is of the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second fluctuation path (e.g. circular scroll), in the case of a missing fluctuation performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the specific stop performance of the second performance mode (e.g. no stop sound, sound content, sound output timing, sound output period, etc. different from the first performance sun) may be more likely to be executed when the performance pattern 70a of the second column (middle column) is displayed in a stopped state than when the performance pattern 70a of the first column (right column or left column) is displayed in a stopped state.

In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in a specific row (e.g., the middle row) will stop. In the variation stop suggestion period of the first variation path, the display mode when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as being stopped includes a first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) and a second display mode different from the first display mode (e.g., only an identification part such as a number).
In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a miss variation performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is not executed may be made more likely to execute the specific sound performance when displayed stopped in the first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) than a miss variation performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed.

In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., annular scroll), a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in a specific row (e.g., the middle row) will stop. In the variation stop suggestion period of the second variation path (e.g., annular scroll), the display mode when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as being stopped includes a first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) and a second display mode different from the first display mode (e.g., only an identification part such as a number).
In the variation presentation of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a miss variation presentation in which a reach presentation (SP (SPSP) reach presentation) is not executed may be made more likely to execute the specific sound presentation when displayed stopped in the first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) than a miss variation presentation in which a reach presentation (SP (SPSP) reach presentation) is executed.

In the variation performance, whether it is the first variation path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variation path (e.g. circular scroll), a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g. a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a in a specific row (e.g. the middle row) will stop. In the variation stop suggestion period, whether it is the first variation path (e.g. vertical scroll) or the second variation path (e.g. circular scroll), the display mode when the performance pattern 70a is displayed as being stopped includes a first display mode (e.g. an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) and a second display mode different from the first display mode (e.g. only an identification part such as a number).
In the variable performance, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), the specific sound performance may be more likely to be executed in a missing variable performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is not executed than in a missing variable performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, when the variable performance is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character).

In the variation presentation of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), in the case of a missing variation presentation, a first sound presentation can be executed in which a predetermined sound (e.g., a stopping sound when a miss occurs) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the presentation pattern 70a will stop.
In the case of a winning fluctuation performance in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), after a second sound performance is executed to output a specific sound (e.g., a stopping sound when a winning performance occurs) during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, a third sound performance may be executed to output a special sound (e.g., a changing sound when the size of a specified performance pattern changes, a stopping sound of a performance pattern during a promotion performance, or a final confirmed stopping sound when returning from a performance pattern with only the identification part to the original normal performance pattern).

In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), in the case of a missing variation performance, a first sound performance can be executed in which a predetermined sound (e.g., a stopping sound when a miss occurs) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop.
In the case of a winning fluctuation performance in the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scroll), after a second sound performance is executed to output a specific sound (e.g., a stopping sound when a winning is achieved) during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, a third sound performance may be executed to output a special sound (e.g., a changing sound when the size of a specified performance pattern changes, a stopping sound of a performance pattern during a promotion performance, or a final confirmed stopping sound when returning from a performance pattern with only the identification section to the original normal performance pattern).

In the case of a missing fluctuation performance, whether it is the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling), a first sound performance can be executed in which a predetermined sound (e.g., a stopping sound when a miss occurs) is output during a fluctuation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop.
In the case of a winning fluctuation performance, whether it is the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (e.g. circular scrolling), a second sound performance may be executed to output a specific sound (e.g. a stopping sound when a hit occurs) during the fluctuation stop suggestion period, and then a third sound performance may be executed to output a special sound (e.g. a changing sound when the size of a specified performance pattern changes, a stopping sound of a performance pattern during a promotion performance, or a final confirmed stopping sound when a performance pattern with only the identification part returns to the original normal performance pattern).

The change start performance (for example, the movement or light emission of the performance pattern itself, the movement or light emission of the components of the performance pattern, the movement or light emission of the elements accompanying the performance pattern, and the performance by elements other than the performance pattern such as sound performance, either alone or in combination) has a first mode (normal) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, pre-reading or pseudo-consecutive).
In the fluctuation presentation of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a predetermined presentation that anticipates a jackpot (e.g., anticipatory presentations such as operation presentations of reels and effects, presentations such as cut-ins, developments, step-ups, and pseudo consecutive presentations) may be more likely to be executed when the fluctuation presentation of the second mode is executed during a fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start presentation, than when the fluctuation start presentation of the first mode is executed.
In the fluctuation presentation of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scroll), a predetermined presentation that anticipates a jackpot (e.g., anticipatory presentation such as the operation presentation or effects of reels, presentations such as cut-ins, developments, step-ups, pseudo consecutive presentations, etc.) may be more likely to be executed when the second type of fluctuation presentation is executed during a fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start presentation, than when the first type of fluctuation start presentation is executed.
In a fluctuation performance, whether it is the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling), a predetermined performance that anticipates a jackpot (e.g., anticipatory performance such as the operation of a role or an effect, a performance such as a cut-in, development, step-up, or pseudo consecutive performance) may be more likely to be executed when the second type of fluctuation start performance is executed during a fluctuation start period that includes the execution period of the fluctuation start performance, than when the first type of fluctuation start performance is executed.

In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), during the variation stop suggestion period which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop, it is possible to control whether a specific sound performance is executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) is output, or whether the specific sound performance is not executed.
In the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a specified performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) may be more easily executed when the specific sound performance is not executed than when the specific sound performance is executed.

In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), during the variation stop suggestion period which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop, it is possible to control whether a specific sound performance is executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stopping sound) is output, or whether the specific sound performance is not executed.
In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a specified performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) may be made easier to execute when the specific sound performance is not executed than when the specific sound performance is executed.

In the variation performance, whether it is the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling), during the variation stop suggestion period which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop, it is possible to control whether a specific sound performance is executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stopping sound) is output, or whether the specific sound performance is not executed.
In the variable performance of the variable performance, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), it may be easier to execute a specified performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) when the specific sound performance is not executed than when the specific sound performance is executed.

In the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a variable start performance of a different form (e.g., different content of the performance, execution timing of the performance, execution period of the performance, etc.) may be executed during the variable start period including the execution period of the variable start performance when the pending memory is a predetermined number (e.g., 1 item) and when the pending memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4 items).
In the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), a variable start performance of a different form (e.g., different content of the performance, execution timing of the performance, execution period of the performance, etc.) may be executed during the variable start period including the execution period of the variable start performance when the pending memory is a predetermined number (e.g., 1) and when the pending memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4).
In a variable performance, whether it is a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or a second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), a variable start performance of a different form (e.g., different content of the performance, execution timing of the performance, execution period of the performance, etc.) may be executed during the variable start period including the execution period of the variable start performance when there is a predetermined number of pending memories (e.g., 1 item) and when the pending memories are a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4 items).

Whether the change presentation is along the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), it is possible to execute a predetermined presentation with the same motif (e.g., a group presentation or a mode-common announcement).
It may be easier for the player to transition to a favorable state when the specified effect (e.g., a group effect or a mode-common announcement) is executed in the fluctuation effect of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling in an advantageous gaming state) than when the specified effect (e.g., a group effect or a mode-common announcement) is executed in the fluctuation effect of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling in a normal gaming state).
It may be easier for the player to transition to a favorable state when the specified effect (e.g., a group effect or a mode-common announcement, etc.) is executed in the fluctuation effect of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling in a normal game state) than when the specified effect (e.g., a group effect or a mode-common announcement, etc.) is executed in the fluctuation effect of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling in a favorable game state).
Although the first fluctuation path is set to the normal game state, it may be set to the advantageous game state. Although the second fluctuation path is set to the advantageous game state, it may be set to the normal game state. In other words, the above control may be applied to different fluctuation paths in the normal game state, and the above control may be applied to different fluctuation paths in the advantageous game state.

Whether the change presentation is along the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), a specific sound presentation can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stopping sound) is output during the change stop suggestion period that indicates that the performance pattern 70a will stop.
The specific sound performance may be executed in a different manner (with some or all of the content, execution timing, execution period, etc. being different) between the case of a change performance along a first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) and the case of a change performance along a second change path (e.g., circular scrolling).
In the case of a change presentation along a first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) and in the case of a change presentation along a second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), the specific sound presentation may be executed in a common manner (with some or all of the content, execution timing, execution period, etc. being the same).

In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop.
In the fluctuation presentation of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), different types of specific sound presentations may be executed depending on whether a predetermined (e.g., identification section "6") performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating during the fluctuation stop suggestion period or whether a specific (e.g., identification section "7") performance pattern 70a different from the predetermined performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating during the fluctuation stop suggestion period.
In the variation presentation of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), different patterns of the specific sound presentation may be executed when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (e.g., 1) and when the number of reserved memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4).

In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop.
In the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scroll), different types of specific sound performance may be executed depending on whether a predetermined (e.g., identification section "6") performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating during the fluctuation stop suggestion period or whether a specific (e.g., identification section "7") performance pattern 70a different from the predetermined performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped fluctuating during the fluctuation stop suggestion period.
In the variation presentation of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), different patterns of the specific sound presentation may be executed when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (e.g., 1) and when the number of reserved memories is a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4).

In the variation performance, whether it is the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling), a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop.
In the variation performance, whether it is the first variation path (e.g. vertical scrolling) or the second variation path (e.g. circular scrolling), different types of specific sound performance may be executed depending on whether a predetermined (e.g. identification part "6") performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped varying during the variation stop suggestion period, or whether a specific (e.g. identification part "7") performance pattern 70a different from the predetermined performance pattern 70a is displayed as having stopped varying during the variation stop suggestion period.
In the variable performance, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), different patterns of the specific sound performance may be executed when there is a predetermined number of reserved memories (e.g., 1) and when the reserved memories are a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4).

Whether the change presentation is of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second change path (e.g., circular scrolling), in the reach presentation, the presentation pattern 70a can be changed from the first form (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) to the second form (e.g., only the identification part such as a number), and the change stop can be displayed in a temporary stop state accompanied by a predetermined operation form (movement such as up and down, left and right, rotation, etc.).
The presentation mode of the presentation pattern 70a displayed in the stopped state in the second mode (for example, the mode until the stopped state is displayed after a return presentation such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach presentation) may be the same between the reach presentation in the presentation of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) and the reach presentation in the presentation of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll).

In the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scrolling), during a fluctuation stop suggestion period which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop in a predetermined manner, it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output, or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is restricted.
In the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scroll), during a fluctuation stop suggestion period which suggests that the performance pattern 70a will stop in a predetermined manner, it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output, or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is restricted.
In the variation performance, whether it is the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling), during the variation stop suggestion period suggesting that the performance pattern 70a will stop in a predetermined manner, it is possible to execute a first variation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output, or a second variation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is restricted.

In a fluctuation performance of a first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a change performance (change in color, shape, etc.) of a specified information display (such as a hold icon, a hold display such as the icon, or other display that presents information to the player) may be more easily executed in a fluctuation performance in which the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a display in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed than in a fluctuation performance in which the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a display in which the output of a specific sound can be output).
In the variation presentation of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a variation presentation in which the second variation stop suggestion presentation (a presentation in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made more likely to execute a change presentation (a change in color, shape, etc.) of a specified information display (such as a hold icon, a hold display such as the icon, or other displays that present information to the player) than a variation presentation in which the first variation stop suggestion presentation (a presentation in which a specific sound can be output) is executed.
Whether the variation path is the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling), in the variation performance, a change performance (change in color, shape, etc.) of a specified information display (such as a hold icon, a hold display such as the icon, or other displays that present information to the player) may be more easily executed in a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a display in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed than in a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a display in which the output of a specific sound can be output).

In a variation performance of a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made easier to execute in a variation performance in which the expectation level changes stepwise (e.g., development, cut-in, step-up, activation of a role device, hold change, etc.) than a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is possible).
In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made easier to execute in which the expectation level changes gradually in the variation performance (e.g., development, cut-in, step-up, activation of a role device, hold change, etc.) than a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is possible) is executed.
In a variation performance, whether it is the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling), a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made easier to execute in a variation performance in which the expectation level changes gradually (e.g., development, cut-in, step-up, role device activation, hold change, etc.) than a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is possible).

In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made more likely to execute a change performance in which the display position of the performance pattern 70a changes (e.g., a change in the pattern position in the left or right column during a reach performance) than a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is possible) is executed.
In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made more likely to execute a change performance in which the display position of the performance pattern 70a changes (e.g., a change in the pattern position in the left or right column during a reach performance) than a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is possible) is executed.
In a variation performance, whether it is the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variation path (e.g., circular scrolling), a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made more likely to execute a change performance in which the display position of the performance pattern 70a changes in the variation performance (e.g., a change in the pattern position in the left or right column during a reach performance) than a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound can be output).

In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made easier to execute a change performance (e.g., a promotion performance) in which the performance pattern 70a that is the target of the reach in the reach performance in the variation performance changes, than a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is possible) is executed.
In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made easier to execute a change performance (e.g., a promotion performance) in which the performance pattern 70a that is the target of the reach in the reach performance in the variation performance changes, than a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is possible) is executed.
Even in the case of a first change path (e.g. vertical scroll), in a second change path (e.g. circular scroll) change performance, a change performance in which the second change stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is restricted) is executed may be made easier to execute a change performance (e.g. a promotion performance) in which the performance pattern 70a to be reached in the reach performance in the change performance changes, compared to a change performance in which the first change stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound can be output).

The specific sounds of the first variable stop suggestion effect (effect capable of outputting a specific sound) include a first specific sound (e.g., a normal stop sound) and a second specific sound different from the first specific sound (e.g., a special stop sound such as when a pseudo pattern or a same-color pattern temporarily stops).
In a fluctuation performance of a first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), the second specific sound (e.g., a special stopping sound such as a pseudo pattern or a pattern of the same color temporarily stopping) may be more likely to be output in a fluctuation performance in which the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound can be output) is executed than in a fluctuation performance in which the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is limited).
In a fluctuation performance of a second fluctuation path (e.g., a circular scroll), the second specific sound (e.g., a special stopping sound such as a pseudo pattern or a pattern of the same color temporarily stopping) may be more likely to be output in a fluctuation performance in which the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound can be output) is executed than in a fluctuation performance in which the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is limited).
In a fluctuation performance, whether it is the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second fluctuation path (e.g., circular scrolling), the second specific sound (e.g., a special stopping sound such as a pseudo pattern or a pattern of the same color temporarily stopping) may be more easily output in a fluctuation performance in which the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound can be output) is executed than in a fluctuation performance in which the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is limited).

In the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), a pre-notification performance (e.g., activation of a reel, display of a pre-reading pattern or a pattern effect) that notifies the expectation of a jackpot may be more easily executed in a fluctuation performance in which the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is limited) is executed than in a fluctuation performance in which the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is limited).
In the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which a specific sound can be output) is executed may be made more likely to execute a pre-notification performance (e.g., activation of a reel, display of a pre-reading pattern or a pattern effect) that notifies the player of the expected probability of a jackpot than a variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is limited).
In the variable performance, whether it is the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) or the second variable path (e.g., circular scrolling), a pre-notification performance (e.g., activation of a reel, display of a pre-reading pattern, pattern effects, etc.) that notifies the expectation of a jackpot may be more easily executed in a variable performance in which the first variable stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is limited) is executed than in a variable performance in which the second variable stop suggestion performance (a performance in which the output of a specific sound is limited).

The specific sounds of the first variable stop suggestion effect (effect capable of outputting specific sounds) include a first specific sound (for example, a stopping sound during normal play (missed combination)), a second specific sound different from the first specific sound (for example, a special stopping sound when pseudo patterns or same-color patterns temporarily stop), and a third specific sound different from the first and second specific sounds (for example, a stopping sound for a jackpot).
In the first mode (mode in the normal game state), a first reach prompting effect can be executed to prompt a player to expect a reach, and in the second mode (mode in the advantageous game state), a second reach prompting effect can be executed to prompt the player to reach the reach.
The third specific sound (e.g., a stopping sound for a jackpot) may be made more likely to be output in the variable performance in which the second reach encouraging performance is executed than in the variable performance in which the first reach encouraging performance is executed, when the reach performance is executed after the reach encouraging performance.

Regarding the control linked to the aforementioned variation path, if the control of the specified variation path is specified but the control of the other variation paths is not specified, the other variation paths may execute the same control as the specified variation path, may not execute the same control as the specified variation path, or may execute a control different from the specified variation path.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration 1-1 for solving the above problem includes a control means for controlling the game (main control board 300, performance control board 320), a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a notification in a predetermined manner, and a plurality of detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d) capable of detecting predetermined information, in which the control means is capable of detecting a first abnormal state and a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state by the plurality of detection means, The multiple notification means are capable of issuing a first abnormality notification based on the detection of the first abnormal state (upper decorative part not yet attached error notification, lower decorative part not yet attached error notification, upper unit not yet attached error notification: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.) and a second abnormality notification based on the detection of the second abnormal state (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.), and when the first abnormal state is resolved while a specific detection means among the multiple detection means is issuing the first abnormality notification, the first abnormality notification being issued is continued for a specific period of time (FIG. 14-1 (C)).

◆A gaming machine having a configuration 1-2 for solving the above problem includes a control means for controlling the game (main control board 300, performance control board 320), a plurality of notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342), and a plurality of detection means capable of detecting predetermined information (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d), and the control means detects a first abnormal state and The multiple notification means are capable of detecting a second abnormal state different from the first abnormal state, and are capable of executing a first abnormality notification (upper decorative part not yet attached error notification, lower decorative part not yet attached error notification, upper unit not yet attached error notification: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.) based on the detection of the first abnormal state, and a second abnormality notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.) based on the detection of the second abnormal state, and the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification can be executed with different priorities.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 1-3 for solving the above problems includes a control means for controlling the game (main control board 300, performance control board 320), a second means (play unit 102B, upper play main body 650, lower play main body 750) to which a first means (upper unit 180, upper play decoration part 600, lower play decoration part 700) capable of executing a performance can be attached, a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and a detector capable of detecting predetermined information related to the second means. In a gaming machine equipped with a notification means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d), a third means (upper gimmick decoration part 800, lower gimmick decoration part 900) different from the first means can be attached to the second means, and the control means, when the third means is attached to the second means, can execute an abnormality notification (upper gimmick part incorrect installation error notification, lower gimmick part incorrect installation error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Figure 14-1 (B), etc.) by the notification means based on detection by the detection means.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 1-4 for solving the above problem includes a control means for controlling the game (main control board 300, performance control board 320), a second means (play unit 102B, upper play main body 650, lower play main body 750) to which a first means capable of executing a performance (upper unit 180, upper play decoration part 600, lower play decoration part 700) can be attached, a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d) capable of detecting predetermined information related to the second means, in which a third means (upper play decoration part) different from the first means is attached to the second means, The control means is capable of attaching a third means to the second means, and when the control means is in an abnormal attachment state in which the third means is attached to the second means, the control means is capable of executing a first abnormality alert (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error alert, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error alert, upper unit incorrect attachment error alert: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.) based on detection by the detection means, and when the control means is in a predetermined abnormal state different from the abnormal attachment state, the notification means is capable of executing a second abnormality alert different from the first abnormality alert (upper decorative part not attached error alert, lower decorative part not attached error alert, upper unit not attached error alert: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and the first abnormality alert and the second abnormality alert can be executed with different priorities.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration 1-5 for solving the above problems includes a gaming machine having a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) for controlling the game, a second means (play unit 102B, upper play main body 650, lower play main body 750) to which a first means (upper unit 180, upper play decoration part 600, lower play decoration part 700) capable of executing a performance can be attached, a notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d) capable of detecting predetermined information related to the second means, wherein the second means is provided with a third means different from the first means. The gist of the invention is that the control means can be configured to attach a first abnormality notification (upper decorative part not attached error notification, lower decorative part not attached error notification, upper unit not attached error notification: Fig. 14-1 (A), etc.) based on detection by the detection means when the control means is in a first abnormal attachment state in which the first means is not normally attached, and that the notification means can be configured to issue a second abnormality notification different from the first abnormality notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: Fig. 14-1 (B), etc.) based on detection by the detection means when the control means is in a second abnormal attachment state in which the third means is attached.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration 1-6 for solving the above problem includes a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) for controlling the game, a second means (game unit 102B, upper gimmick main body 650, lower gimmick main body 750) to which a first means (upper unit 180, upper gimmick decoration part 600, lower gimmick decoration part 700) capable of executing a performance can be attached, a notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d) capable of detecting predetermined information related to the second means, in which a third means (upper gimmick decoration part 800, lower gimmick decoration part 900) different from the first means can be attached to the second means, and the control means detects when the first means is not normally attached. In the case of a first abnormal installation state, the notification means can execute a first abnormality notification (upper decorative part not yet attached error notification, lower decorative part not yet attached error notification, upper unit not yet attached error notification: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.) based on detection by the detection means, in the case of a second abnormal installation state in which the third means is attached, the notification means can execute a second abnormality notification different from the first abnormality notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.), in the case of a predetermined abnormality state different from the first abnormal installation state and the second abnormal installation state, the notification means can execute a third abnormality notification (various notifications: FIG. 15-1 to FIG. 15-11), and the first abnormality notification or the second abnormality notification can be executed so that the priority order is different from that of the third abnormality notification.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 1-7 for solving the above problems includes a control means for controlling the game (performance control board 320), detachable parts (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700), a main body member to which the detachable parts are attached (role unit 102B, upper role main body part 650, lower role main body part 750), and a notification means capable of issuing a notification in a predetermined manner (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342), and the main body member includes a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680b) for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable parts. 0d, 780a-780d), and the control means is capable of executing a specified event notification by the notification means when a first specified event based on the specified information detected by the detection means occurs (upper decorative part not yet attached error notification, lower decorative part not yet attached error notification, upper unit not yet attached error notification: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and when a second specified event based on the specified information detected by the detection means occurs, the notification means is capable of executing a specified event notification by the notification means (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.).

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-8 for solving the above problem includes a control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game, detachable parts (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700), a main body member to which the detachable parts are attached (part unit 102B, upper role main body part 650, lower role main body part 750), and a notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the main body member has a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d) for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable parts, and the control means, when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, issues the notification. The gist is that the notification means can issue a predetermined event notification (upper decorative part not yet attached error notification, lower decorative part not yet attached error notification, upper unit not yet attached error notification: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and when a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, the notification means can issue a predetermined event notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.), and when a third predetermined event different from the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occurs, the notification means can issue a specific event notification different from the predetermined event notification (various notifications: FIG. 15-1 to FIG. 15-11), and the predetermined event notification and the specific event notification can be issued with different priorities.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 1-9 for solving the above problems includes a control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game, detachable parts (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700), a main body member to which the detachable parts are attached (role unit 102B, upper role main body part 650, lower role main body part 750), and a notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of issuing a notification in a predetermined manner, and the main body member includes a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680b) for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable parts. d, 780a-780d), and the control means is capable of executing a predetermined first event notification by the notification means when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs (upper decorative part not yet attached error notification, lower decorative part not yet attached error notification, upper unit not yet attached error notification: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and when a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, the notification means is capable of executing a predetermined second event notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.).

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-10 for solving the above problem includes a control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game, detachable parts (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700), a main body member to which the detachable parts are attached (role unit 102B, upper role main body part 650, lower role main body part 750), and a notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, the main body member having a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d) for detecting predetermined information related to the detachable parts, and the control means, when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, controls the notification means to notify the user of the occurrence of the first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means. The gist of the invention is that the notification means can issue a predetermined first event notification (upper decorative part not yet attached error notification, lower decorative part not yet attached error notification, upper unit not yet attached error notification: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.), and when a second predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means occurs, the notification means can issue a predetermined second event notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.), and when a third predetermined event different from the first and second predetermined events occurs, the notification means can issue a third event notification different from the first and second event notifications (various notifications: FIG. 15-1 to FIG. 15-11), and the first event notification and the third event notification can be issued with different priorities.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-11 for solving the above problems includes a control means for controlling the game (main control board 300, performance control board 320), a first means for executing a performance (upper unit 180, upper role decoration section 600, lower role decoration section 700), a second means different from the first means (role unit 102B, upper role main body section 650, lower role main body section 750), and a plurality of notification means for executing a predetermined type of notification (main display device 131, audio In a gaming machine equipped with an output device 331, a performance board lighting device 341, and a performance frame lighting device 342) and a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d) capable of detecting predetermined information related to the second means, the gist is that when the second means is in a predetermined abnormal state, the control means is capable of issuing an abnormality notification (an attachment error notification: Figures 14-1 to 14-4) by the notification means.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-12 for solving the above problem includes a control means for controlling the game (main control board 300, performance control board 320), a second means (play unit 102B, upper role main body 650, lower role main body 750) to which a first means (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700) capable of executing a performance can be attached, a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, a first detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a to 680d, 780a to 780d) capable of detecting first information related to the second means, and a second detection means (performance control device) capable of detecting second information different from the first information related to the two means. In a gaming machine having a control board 320, the control means is capable of executing a first abnormality notification (upper decorative part not yet attached error notification, lower decorative part not yet attached error notification, upper unit not yet attached error notification: FIG. 14-1 (A), etc.) by the notification means based on detection by the first detection means when the attachment state of the first means is a predetermined first abnormality state, and is capable of executing a second abnormality notification (upper decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, lower decorative part incorrect attachment error notification, upper unit incorrect attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1 (B), etc.) by the notification means based on detection by the second detection means when the attachment state is a predetermined second abnormality state different from the first abnormality state, and is capable of executing the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification so that they have different priorities.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-13 for solving the above problem includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 320) for controlling presentation in accordance with the progress of the game, presentation members (upper unit 180, upper role decoration section 600, lower role decoration section 700) controlled by the presentation control means and configured to be detachable in a predetermined procedure, main body members (play unit 102B, upper role main body section 650, lower role main body section 750) controlled by the presentation control means and to which the presentation members are attached, and notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) controlled by the presentation control means and capable of executing notifications of a predetermined type. , the main body member has a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d) that detects predetermined information related to the performance member, and the performance control means is capable of executing a first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event by the notification means when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a first predetermined event (installation error notification: Figs. 14-1 to 14-4), and is capable of executing a second event notification corresponding to the second predetermined event by the notification means when a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs (various notifications: Figs. 15-1 to 15-11).

◆A gaming machine of configuration 1-14 for solving the above problem includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 320) for controlling presentation according to the progress of the game, presentation members (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700) controlled by the presentation control means and configured to be detachable in a predetermined procedure, a main body member (part unit 102B, upper role main body part 650, lower role main body part 750) controlled by the presentation control means and to which the presentation members are attached, and notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) controlled by the presentation control means and capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and the main body member includes a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a- 780d), and the performance control means is capable of executing a first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event by the notification means when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a first predetermined event (wearing error notification: Figs. 14-1 to 14-4), and is capable of executing a second event notification corresponding to the second predetermined event by the notification means when a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs (various notifications: Figs. 15-1 to 15-11), and is capable of executing a third event notification corresponding to the third predetermined event by the notification means when a third predetermined event different from the first and second predetermined events occurs (various notifications: Figs. 15-1 to 15-11), and is capable of executing the first event notification and the third event notification so that their notification priorities are different.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-15 for solving the above problem includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 320) that controls presentation in accordance with the progress of the game, a first presentation member (upper unit 180) that is controlled by the presentation control means and configured to be detachable in a predetermined procedure, a main body member (gimmick unit 102B) to which the first presentation member is attached that is controlled by the presentation control means, a second presentation member (upper gimmick unit 154, lower gimmick unit 156) that is controlled by the presentation control means and executes a predetermined type of operating presentation in accordance with the progress of the game, and an alarm means (main gimmick unit 102B) that is controlled by the presentation control means and is capable of executing a predetermined type of alarm. The main body member has a detection means (game board connector 1620) that detects predetermined information related to the first performance member, and the performance control means, when the detection means detects the predetermined information as a result of detection that indicates the occurrence of a predetermined event, can execute a predetermined event notification corresponding to the predetermined event by the notification means (upper unit not installed error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: FIG. 14-3), and can execute operation of the second performance member in a predetermined manner regardless of whether the predetermined event occurs or not.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-16 for solving the above problem comprises a presentation control means (presentation control board 320) for controlling presentation in accordance with the progress of the game, a first presentation member (upper unit 180) controlled by the presentation control means and configured to be detachable in a predetermined procedure, a main body member (gimmick unit 102B) controlled by the presentation control means and to which the first presentation member is attached, a second presentation member (upper gimmick unit 154, lower gimmick unit 156) controlled by the presentation control means for executing a predetermined type of operating presentation in accordance with the progress of the game, and notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) controlled by the presentation control means for executing a predetermined type of notification, and the main body member is configured to control a first presentation member related to the first presentation member. The device has a detection means (game board connector 1620) that detects predetermined information, and the presentation control means, when the detection result of the predetermined information by the detection means indicates the occurrence of a first predetermined event, can execute a first event notification corresponding to the first predetermined event by the notification means (upper unit not installed error notification, upper unit incorrect installation error notification: Fig. 14-3), can execute operation in a predetermined manner by the second presentation member regardless of whether the first predetermined event occurs, and, when a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occurs, can execute a second event notification corresponding to the second predetermined event by the notification means (various notifications: Figs. 15-1 to 15-11), and can be executed so that the first event notification and the second event notification have different notification priorities.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-17 for solving the above problem includes a game control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 320) for controlling presentation according to the progress of the game, a main body member (gimmick unit 102B, upper gimmick main body part 650, lower gimmick main body part 750) controlled by the presentation control means, presentation members (upper unit 180, upper gimmick decoration part 600, lower gimmick decoration part 700) controlled by the presentation control means and detachable from the main body member, and an alarm means (main table 102B) controlled by the presentation control means and capable of executing a predetermined alarm. The system is equipped with a display device 131, an audio output device 331, a performance board lighting device 341, and a performance frame lighting device 342), and a display unit (identification display unit 1532, 632, 732) that displays specific information related to attaching and detaching the performance member, and the performance control means is capable of executing an attachment determination as to whether the performance member is attached properly to the main body member, and if the attachment determination determines that the performance member is not attached properly and is in an abnormal state, the notification means can execute an abnormality notification (Figures 14-1 to 14-4) according to the abnormal state.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 1-18 for solving the above problem includes a game control means (main control board 300) for controlling the progress of the game, a presentation control means (presentation control board 320) for controlling presentation according to the progress of the game, a main body member (gimmick unit 102B, upper gimmick main body 650, lower gimmick main body 750) controlled by the presentation control means, presentation members (upper unit 180, upper gimmick decoration 600, lower gimmick decoration 700) controlled by the presentation control means and detachable from the main body member, notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, presentation board lighting device 341, presentation frame lighting device 342) controlled by the presentation control means and capable of executing a predetermined notification, and a display unit (identification display unit 15) for displaying predetermined information related to the attachment and detachment of the presentation members. 32, 632, 732), the performance control means is capable of executing an attachment determination as to whether the performance member is normally attached to the main body member, and if the attachment determination determines that the performance member is not normally attached to the main body member, the notification means is capable of executing a first abnormality notification corresponding to the first abnormality state (attachment error notification: Figs. 14-1 to 14-4), and is capable of executing an abnormality determination as to whether the performance member is in a second abnormality state different from the first abnormality state, and if the abnormality determination determines that the performance member is in the second abnormality state, the notification means is capable of executing a second abnormality notification (various notifications: Figs. 15-1 to 15-11), and the first abnormality notification and the second abnormality notification have different notification priorities.

◆The gaming machine of the configuration 1-19-1 for solving the above problem comprises a first frame (inner frame 170) rotatably supported relative to the gaming machine frame (outer frame 160) and capable of being maintained in a closed or open state, a second frame (glass frame 150) rotatably supported relative to the first frame and capable of being maintained in a closed or open state, and setting means (RAM clear switch 302a, setting key switch 302b) capable of setting a set value that determines the probability of a special game being executed that is advantageous to the player to a predetermined value, and the setting means is capable of setting the set value to a predetermined value when the first frame is in an open state and the second frame is in an open state, and is capable of setting the set value to a predetermined value when the first frame is in a closed state but the second frame is in an open state.

◆The gaming machine of the configuration 1-19-2 for solving the above problem comprises a first frame (inner frame 170) rotatably supported relative to the gaming machine frame (outer frame 160) and capable of being maintained in a closed or open state, a second frame (glass frame 150) rotatably supported relative to the first frame and capable of being maintained in a closed or open state, and a setting means (RAM clear switch 302a, setting key switch 302b) capable of setting a set value that determines the probability of a special game being executed that is advantageous to the player to a predetermined value, and the setting means is capable of setting the set value to a predetermined value when the first frame is in an open state and the second frame is in an open state, and is capable of setting the set value to a predetermined value when the first frame is in an open state but the second frame is in a closed state.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 1-20 for solving the above problem includes a control means (performance control board 320) for controlling the game, detachable members (upper unit 180, upper role decoration 600, lower role decoration 700), a main body member to which the detachable members are attached (role unit 102B, upper role main body 650, lower role main body 750), notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, and setting means (RAM clear switch 302a, setting key switch 302b) capable of setting a setting value that determines the probability of a special game being executed, and the main body member includes a detection means (game board 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of setting a setting value that determines the probability of a special game being executed, and the main body member includes a detection means (game board The device has a connector 1620, and reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d, and the control means is capable of issuing a specific event notification by the notification means when a first predetermined event occurs for which the setting value can be set by the setting means (setting change notification: FIG. 15-3), and when a second predetermined event occurs based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means, the notification means is capable of issuing a specific event notification different from the specific event notification (attachment error notification: FIG. 14-1-FIG. 14-4), and when both the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event occur, the notification means is capable of issuing the specific event notification without issuing the specific event notification.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 1-21 for solving the above problems includes a control means for controlling the game (performance control board 320), detachable parts (upper unit 180, upper role decoration part 600, lower role decoration part 700), a main body part to which the detachable parts are attached (role unit 102B, upper role main body part 650, lower role main body part 750), and notification means capable of executing a predetermined type of notification (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342), The main body member has a detection means (game board connector 1620, reflective sensors 680a-680d, 780a-780d) that detects predetermined information related to the detachable member, and the control means is capable of executing a predetermined event notification by the notification means when a first predetermined event based on the predetermined information detected by the detection means and a second predetermined event different from the first predetermined event occur (attachment error notification and switch connection error notification: FIG. 15-6 (C)).

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 1-22 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine having a first detection means (radio wave detection sensor 305b) capable of detecting a first fraud from outside the gaming machine, a second detection means (magnetic detection sensor 305a) capable of detecting a second fraud from outside the gaming machine, a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) for controlling the game, and a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of executing a predetermined type of notification, The control means is capable of executing a first abnormality notification (radio error notification) by the notification means when a first abnormality is detected based on detection by the first detection means, and is capable of executing a second abnormality notification (magnetic error notification) by the notification means when a second abnormality is detected based on detection by the second detection means, and is configured to execute the first abnormality notification for a predetermined period of time even if the second abnormality has occurred when both the first abnormality and the second abnormality have occurred and the first abnormality occurred before the second abnormality.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 1-23 for solving the above problem includes a first detection means (radio wave detection sensor 305b) capable of detecting a first fraud from outside the gaming machine, a second detection means (magnetic detection sensor 305a) capable of detecting a second fraud from outside the gaming machine, a control means (main control board 300, performance control board 320) for controlling the game, and a plurality of notification means (main display device 131, audio output device 331, performance board lighting device 341, performance frame lighting device 342) capable of issuing a notification of a predetermined type, and the gist of the control means is that, in the case of a first abnormality based on detection by the first detection means, the notification means can issue a first abnormality notification of a predetermined type (radio wave error notification), and, in the case of a second abnormality based on detection by the second detection means, the notification means can issue a second abnormality notification of a predetermined type (magnetic error notification), and the second abnormality notification can be issued with a higher priority than the first abnormality notification.

◆ A gaming machine having a configuration 2-1 for solving the above problems is a gaming machine having a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentations in response to signals from the main control means (main control unit 110m), wherein the main control means (main control unit 110m) It is possible to store a pending memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and to execute a judgment as to whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) is controllable between a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the judgment,
At a predetermined timing during the fluctuation start period of the fluctuation performance, a fluctuation start performance (such as the movement of the performance pattern itself or lighting, the movement of the components of the performance pattern or lighting, the movement of the elements accompanying the performance pattern or lighting, and performances by elements other than the performance pattern such as sound performance, either alone or in combination) can be executed, and it is characterized in that a fluctuation start performance of different aspects (some or all of the aspects of the fluctuation start performance are different) can be executed between the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scrolling) and the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g. circular scrolling).

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-2 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) is controlled to a first mode in which a presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which a presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a second changing path (e.g., circular scrolling) different from the first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. It is possible to execute a fluctuation stop suggestion performance (such as the movement or light emission of the performance pattern itself, the movement or light emission of the components of the performance pattern, the movement or light emission of the elements accompanying the performance pattern, and the performance of elements other than the performance pattern such as sound performance, either alone or in combination) and a fluctuation stop display of the performance pattern (70a) during a fluctuation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) in the fluctuation performance will be stopped, and it is characterized in that it is possible to execute a fluctuation stop suggestion performance of different aspects (part or all of the aspects of the fluctuation stop suggestion performance are different) between the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g. vertical scroll) and the fluctuation performance of the second fluctuation path (e.g. circular scroll).

◆A gaming machine of the second-third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment, and a second mode of a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. A second mode in which a variation performance that varies along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) is performed, and during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) in the variation performance will be stopped, a variation stop suggestion performance (such as the movement or light emission of the performance pattern itself, the movement or light emission of the components of the performance pattern, the movement or light emission of the elements associated with the performance pattern, and the performance of elements other than the performance pattern such as sound performance, either alone or in combination) and a variation stop display of the performance pattern (70a) can be executed, and after a specific performance (such as a pseudo consecutive performance or a return performance such as an eye-catching performance in a SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), the execution of the variation stop suggestion performance can be restricted and the variation stop display can be executed.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration 2-4 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit The display unit 130m can be controlled to a first mode in which a display pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes along a first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which a display pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the judgment, In the variation stop suggestion period suggesting that the performance pattern (70a) in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) will be stopped, a first mode of variation stop suggestion performance (such as the movement or light emission of the performance pattern itself, the movement or light emission of the components of the performance pattern, the movement or light emission of the elements associated with the performance pattern, and the performance of elements other than the performance pattern such as sound performance, or a combination thereof) and a variation stop display of the performance pattern can be executed, and in the variation stop suggestion period suggesting that the performance pattern (70a) in the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) will be stopped, a variation stop suggestion performance of a second mode different from the first mode and a variation stop display of the performance pattern can be executed, and in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as a pseudo consecutive performance or an eye-catching performance in a SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, a variation stop suggestion performance of a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode can be executed.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration 2-5 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine having a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m ) is controllable into a first mode in which a variation performance is performed in which the performance pattern (70a) varies along a first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which a variation performance is performed in which the performance pattern (70a) varies along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment, In a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) in the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) will be stopped, a variation stop suggestion performance of a first mode (a performance such as the movement or light emission of the performance pattern itself, a performance such as the movement or light emission of the components of the performance pattern, a performance such as the movement or light emission of the elements associated with the performance pattern, a performance by an element other than the performance pattern such as a sound performance, or a combination thereof) and a variation stop display of the performance pattern (70a) can be executed, and in a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) in the variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) will be stopped, a variation stop suggestion performance of a second mode different from the first mode and a variation stop display of the performance pattern (70a) can be executed, and the player is more likely to transition to a game state advantageous to the player when the variation stop suggestion performance of the third mode is executed than when the variation stop suggestion performance of the third mode different from the first and second modes is not executed during the variation stop suggestion period in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll).

◆A gaming machine having a configuration 2-6 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode for performing a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling), and a second mode for performing a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which the variable performance is performed in a second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll), in which the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) can be displayed in a first stop state (e.g., moving from top to bottom and stopping (temporary stop)), in which the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) can be displayed in a second stop state (e.g., moving diagonally from top to bottom and stopping (temporary stop)), and in which the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) can be displayed in a third stop state different from the first and second stop states (the movement of the variable performance pattern until the stop is not displayed and is displayed in a stopped (temporary stop) state) after a predetermined performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach performance) is performed.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-7 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a different variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the judgment. A second mode in which a variable performance that varies along two variable paths (e.g., circular scroll) is controlled, and in the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed as a variable stop from a first variable stop path (e.g., moving from top to bottom) corresponding to the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the variable performance of the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed as a variable stop from a second variable stop path (e.g., moving diagonally from top to bottom) corresponding to the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), and in the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll), after a predetermined performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in a SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the variable stop display of the performance pattern (70a) can be executed without going through the first variable stop path (e.g., moving from top to bottom).

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-8 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) displays a game on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. It can be controlled in a first mode in which the displayed pattern (70a) changes along a first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling), and in a second mode in which the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes the display pattern (70a) along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and is characterized in that it is possible to switch from the change path of the first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) to the change path of the second change path (e.g., circular scroll) by executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance).

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-9 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, A second mode in which the performance pattern (70a) on the second image display device (71) changes along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the change performance, it is possible to switch from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second change path (e.g., circular scroll), and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), it is possible to execute continuous performances (e.g., cut-in, step-up, activation of role devices, effects, etc.) performed in one or more of the change performances, and it is possible to limit the switching from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second change path (e.g., circular scroll) during the period in which the continuous performance is executed.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-10 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of performing a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode of performing a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. The first mode is capable of controlling the first and second modes, in which the first and second modes perform a variable performance that varies along a second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the variable performance, the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) can be switched to the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), and when switching from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), a predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance) can be executed, and in the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll), a continuous performance (e.g., a cut-in, a step-up, a role device operation, an effect, etc.) that is executed once or multiple times in the variable performance can be executed, and in the variable performance of the first variable path, the execution of the predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance) can be restricted during the period in which the continuous performance is executed.

◆A gaming machine of the 2-11th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) is capable of executing a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first change path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which, based on the judgment, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) performs a variable performance in which the performance pattern (70a) changes along a second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) different from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll). In the variable performance, the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) can be switched to the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll), and during the period in which the operation performance of the movable role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is executed, the switching from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second variable path (e.g., annular scroll) can be restricted.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-12 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. , a second mode in which the performance pattern (70a) changes on a second image display device (71) along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the change performance, it is possible to switch from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second change path (e.g., circular scroll), and when switching from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second change path, it is possible to execute a predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance), and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), it is possible to limit the execution of the predetermined performance (e.g., a switching performance such as an eye-catching performance) during the period in which the operation performance of the movable role object (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is executed.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-13 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) controls a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which, based on the determination, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) performs a variable performance in which the performance pattern (70a) changes along a second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll). In the variable performance, the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) can be switched to the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), and during a period in which an operation suggestion performance that encourages the operation of the operating means (operation button 135) is executed, the switching from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) to the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) can be restricted.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-14 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. The display device 71) can be controlled to a first mode in which the presentation pattern (70a) is changed along a second path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the first mode, the presentation pattern (70a) can be changed along a second path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first path (e.g., vertical scroll). When the first path (e.g., vertical scroll) is changed to the second path (e.g., circular scroll), a predetermined presentation (e.g., a switching presentation such as an eye-catching presentation) can be executed. In the first path (e.g., vertical scroll) presentation, the execution of the predetermined presentation (e.g., a switching presentation such as an eye-catching presentation) can be restricted during a period in which an operation suggestion presentation that prompts the user to operate the operation means (operation button 135) is executed.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-15 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), and the main control means (main control unit 110m) is controllable between a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (advantageous gaming state) in which the degree of advantage given to the player is different from that of the first gaming state (normal gaming state). The presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) can execute a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) is displayed variably on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) whether in the first game state (normal game state) or the second game state (advantageous game state), and the first game state (normal game state) has a greater number of types of variation paths for the presentation pattern (70a) in the variable presentation than in the second game state (advantageous game state).

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-16 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which the variation performance changes along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (crawl), and whether the variation performance is along the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) or along the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), a specific variation performance (variable miss variation performance) in which the variation stop display of the performance patterns (70a) is possible, a specific sound performance in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period suggesting that the performance patterns (70a) will stop in the specific variation performance (variable miss variation performance), and after a specific performance (e.g., a return performance such as an eye-catch in a SP (SPSP) reach performance) is performed in the specific variation performance (variable miss variation performance) of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), the execution of the specific sound performance can be restricted.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration 2-17 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine having a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentations in response to signals from the main control means (main control unit 110m), The main control means (main control unit 110m) can store a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and can execute a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. The presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) can control a first mode in which a presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which a presentation is performed in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a second changing path (e.g., circular scrolling) different from the first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling), and the first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) changing performance is performed. Whether the variation performance is a first variation path (e.g., circular scroll), during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will be stopped, a first sound performance that outputs a predetermined sound (e.g., a stop sound for a miss) and a second sound performance that outputs a specific sound different from the predetermined sound (e.g., a stop sound for a unique pattern such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) can be executed, and the first sound performance is more likely to be executed in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) in which a specific performance pattern (e.g., a performance pattern (unique pattern) such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed as stopped than in the variation performance of the miss in which a specific performance pattern (e.g., a performance pattern (unique pattern) such as a pseudo consecutive pattern or a development suggestion pattern) is displayed as stopped.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-18 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) causes a presentation pattern (70a) to vary along a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. The display device can be controlled to a first mode in which a variation performance is performed in which the performance pattern (70a) varies along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which a variation performance is performed in which the performance pattern (70a) varies along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), and is characterized in that in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), the variation performance of a miss in which a reach performance is not executed and the variation performance of a miss in which a reach performance is executed have different performance modes of a sound performance (e.g., a sound performance using a stop sound) executed during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests the game will stop on the performance pattern (70a) in a specific row (e.g., middle row).

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-19 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes along a first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode of presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes along a second changing path (e.g., circular scrolling) different from the first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. In the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) variable performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g. a stop sound) is output during a period of time during which the performance pattern (70a) is stopped, and in the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) variable performance, the display mode when the performance pattern (70a) is displayed in a stopped state includes a first display mode (e.g. an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) and a second display mode (e.g. only an identification part such as a number) different from the first display mode, and in the first variable path (e.g. vertical scroll) variable performance, in the case of a miss variable performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed, the specific sound performance is more difficult to execute when the performance pattern (70a) in the second column (middle column) is displayed in the first display mode (e.g. an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) than when the performance pattern (70a) in the first column (right column or left column) is displayed in a stopped state.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-20 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode of presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a second changing path (e.g., circular scrolling) different from the first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. In the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), during the variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will be stopped, a specific stop performance (e.g., performance of the performance pattern itself, such as movement or light emission, performance of the components of the performance pattern, such as movement or light emission, performance of the elements accompanying the performance pattern, performance of elements other than the performance pattern such as sound performance, or a combination thereof) can be executed, and the specific stop performance has a first performance mode in which a sound performance is executed, and a second performance mode (e.g., sound performance is not executed) different from the first performance mode, and in the case of a miss variation performance in which a reach performance (SP (SPSP) reach performance) is executed in the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), the specific stop performance of the second performance mode is more likely to be executed when the performance pattern (70a) of the second column (middle column) is displayed as a variable stop than when the performance pattern (70a) of the first column (right column or left column) is displayed as a variable stop.

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-21 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes along a first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode of presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes along a second changing path (e.g., circular scrolling) different from the first changing path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. A second mode for performing a variation performance can be controlled, and a specific sound performance can be performed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) in a specific row (e.g., the middle row) will be stopped in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), and the display mode when the performance pattern (70a) is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period includes a first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) and a second display mode (e.g., only an identification part such as a number) different from the first display mode, and the specific sound performance is more likely to be performed when the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) is stopped and displayed in the first display mode (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) than in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll).

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of 2-22 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) is capable of executing a first mode of performing a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode of performing a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) along the first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which the variation performance varies along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll). In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), in the case of a miss, a first sound performance can be executed in which a predetermined sound (e.g., a stop sound at the time of a miss) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will stop. In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), in the case of a hit, in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), a second sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound at the time of a hit) is output during the variation stop suggestion period, and then a third sound performance can be executed in which a special sound (e.g., a change sound when the size of a predetermined performance pattern changes, a stop sound of a performance pattern during a promotion performance, or a final confirmation stop sound when a performance pattern with only an identification part returns to the original normal performance pattern) is output.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-23 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes along a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on a display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. It is possible to control the display device to a first mode and a second mode in which the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) performs a variable performance in which the performance pattern (70a) varies along a second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the judgment. When the variable performance is started, a variable start performance (e.g., a performance of the performance pattern itself, such as movement or light emission, a performance of the components of the performance pattern, such as movement or light emission, a performance of the elements accompanying the performance pattern, such as sound performance, or a single or combination of performances by elements other than the performance pattern) can be executed. The variable start performance has a first mode (normal) and a second mode different from the first mode (e.g., pre-reading, pseudo-consecutive, etc.), In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), when the variation start performance of the second mode is executed during a variation start period including the execution period of the variation start performance, a predetermined performance that anticipates a big win (e.g., anticipatory performance such as the operation performance of a role or an effect, a performance such as a cut-in, development, step-up, or pseudo consecutive performance, etc.) is more likely to be executed than when the variation start performance of the first mode is executed.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-24 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, A second mode in which the performance pattern (70a) changes on a second image display device (71) along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), during a change stop suggestion period suggesting that the performance pattern (70a) will stop, a specific sound effect is executed to output a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) and the specific sound effect is not executed, and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), a predetermined effect (such as a return effect such as an eye-catch in an SP (SPSP) reach effect) is more likely to be executed when the specific sound effect is not executed than when the specific sound effect is executed.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-25 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode of variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in a second variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. A second mode in which a variable performance that varies along a second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) can be controlled, and when the variable performance starts, a variable start performance (e.g., a performance of the motion or light emission of the performance pattern itself, a performance of the motion or light emission of the components of the performance pattern, a performance of the motion or light emission of the elements accompanying the performance pattern, a performance of an element other than the performance pattern such as a sound performance, or a combination thereof) can be executed, and in the variable performance of the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll), when the reserved memory is a predetermined number (e.g., 1 piece) and when the reserved memory is a specific number different from the predetermined number (e.g., 4 pieces), a variable start performance of a different aspect (e.g., different content of the performance, timing of performance execution, period of performance execution, etc.) can be executed during the variable start period including the execution period of the variable start performance, depending on whether the reserved memory is a specific number (e.g., 4 pieces) different from the predetermined number.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-26 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which the presentation pattern (70a) is changed along a second path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first path (e.g., vertical scroll) on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. Whether the presentation is along the first path (e.g., vertical scroll) or along the second path (e.g., circular scroll), a predetermined presentation with the same motif (e.g., group presentation or mode-wide announcement) can be executed, and the player is more likely to transition to a favorable state when the predetermined presentation (e.g., group presentation or mode-wide announcement) is executed in the presentation of the second path (e.g., circular scroll) than when the predetermined presentation is executed in the presentation of the first path (e.g., vertical scroll).

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-27 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. The first mode is a controllable mode in which the effect pattern (70a) changes along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. Whether the effect pattern (70a) changes along the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) or along the second change path (e.g., circular scroll), a specific sound effect can be executed in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound) is output during a change stop suggestion period that suggests that the effect pattern (70a) will stop. The specific sound effect can be executed in different forms (different contents, execution timing, execution period, etc.) between the change path of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) and the change path of the second change path (e.g., circular scroll).

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-28 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment, and a second mode of variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. A second mode in which the performance pattern (70a) performs a performance in which the performance pattern (70a) changes along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) variation performance, a specific sound performance can be executed in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will be stopped, and in the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) variation performance, different types of specific sound performance can be executed when a specific (e.g., identification part "6") performance pattern (70a) different from the specific performance pattern (70a) is displayed as stopped during the variation stop suggestion period.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-29 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. A second mode in which the effect of the change is performed along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), a specific sound effect can be executed in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during a change stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will be stopped, and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), a specific sound effect can be executed in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output during a change stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will be stopped, and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), different patterns of the specific sound effect can be executed when the reserved memory is a specified number (e.g., 1) and when the reserved memory is a specified number different from the specified number (e.g., 4).

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-30 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which the performance changes along a second variable path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll). Whether the performance is along the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) or along the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll), the performance pattern (70a) can be changed from a first state (e.g., an identification part such as a number + a decorative part such as a character) to a second state (e.g., only an identification part such as a number) in the reach performance, and the performance pattern (70a) displayed in the stop state in the second state with a predetermined operation mode (movement such as up and down, left and right, or rotation) is the same in the reach performance in the first variable path (e.g., vertical scroll) and the reach performance in the second variable path (e.g., circular scroll).

◆A gaming machine of the configuration 2-31 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of performing a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment, and a second mode of performing a variable presentation in which the presentation pattern (70a) changes on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in a second variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) based on the judgment. A second mode in which a variation performance is performed in which the variation performance is performed along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will stop in a predetermined manner, a first variation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second variation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited can be executed, and in the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), the variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to execute a change performance (change in color, shape, etc.) of a predetermined information display (such as a hold icon, a hold display such as the icon, or other displays that present information to the player) in the variation performance than the variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance is executed.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-32 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment, and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which the first variation path (70a) varies along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll). In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will stop in a predetermined manner, a first variation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second variation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited can be executed. In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), the variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to execute a change performance in which the expectation level changes stepwise in the variation performance (e.g., development, cut-in, step-up, role activation, hold change, etc.) than the variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance is executed.

◆ A gaming machine having a configuration of No. 2-33 for solving the above problems is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentations in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), wherein the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a starting condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to a player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit The display control unit 130m can be controlled to a first mode in which a display pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes along a first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the determination, and a second mode in which a display pattern (70a) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) changes along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll) based on the determination,
In the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), during a fluctuation stop suggestion period suggesting that the performance pattern (70a) will stop in a predetermined manner, it is possible to execute a first fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output, or a second fluctuation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is restricted, and it is characterized in that in the fluctuation performance of the first fluctuation path (e.g., vertical scrolling), the fluctuation performance in which the second fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to execute a change performance in which the display position of the performance pattern (70a) changes in the fluctuation performance (e.g., a change in the pattern position in the left or right column during a reach performance) than the fluctuation performance in which the first fluctuation stop suggestion performance is executed.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-34 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variation path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which the display pattern (70a) changes along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll). In the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), during a change stop suggestion period that suggests that the display pattern (70a) will stop in a predetermined manner, a first change stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second change stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited can be executed. In the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), the change performance in which the second change stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to execute a change performance (e.g., a promotion performance) in which the display pattern (70a) that is the target of reach in the reach performance in the change performance changes than the change performance in which the first change stop suggestion performance is executed.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-35 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) selects, based on the judgment, a first mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and a second mode in which a variable presentation is performed in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. and a second mode in which the variation performance changes along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll). In the variation performance of the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll), during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will stop in a predetermined manner, a first variation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second variation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited can be executed. The specific sound includes a first specific sound (e.g., a normal stop sound) and a second specific sound different from the first specific sound (e.g., a special stop sound such as when a pseudo pattern or a same-color pattern is temporarily stopped), and in the variation performance of the first variation path, the variation performance in which the first variation stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to output the second specific sound (e.g., a special stop sound such as when a pseudo pattern or a same-color pattern is temporarily stopped) than the variation performance in which the second variation stop suggestion performance is executed.

◆A gaming machine of configuration 2-36 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) that controls presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a pending memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) performs a first mode of variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment, and a second mode of variable presentation in which a presentation pattern (70a) changes on a first variable path (e.g., vertical scrolling) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the judgment. A second mode in which the displayed pattern (70a) changes along a second change path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), during a change stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will stop in a predetermined manner, a first change stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (such as a stop sound) is output or a second change stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited can be executed, and in the change performance of the first change path (e.g., vertical scroll), the change performance in which the first change stop suggestion performance is executed is more likely to execute a pre-notification performance (e.g., activation of a role, display of a pattern for looking ahead, pattern effects, etc.) that notifies the expectation of a jackpot than the change performance in which the second change stop suggestion performance is executed.

◆A gaming machine having a configuration of No. 2-37 for solving the above problem is a gaming machine having a main control means (main control unit 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means (main control unit 110m), in which the main control means (main control unit 110m) is capable of storing a reserved memory based on the establishment of a start condition, and is capable of executing a judgment of whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the presentation control means (presentation control unit 130m) displays a display means (first image) based on the judgment. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be controlled to a first mode (mode in a normal game state) in which a variation presentation is performed in which the performance pattern (70a) varies along a first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and based on the judgment, a second mode (mode in an advantageous game state) in which a variation presentation is performed in which the performance pattern (70a) varies along a second variation path (e.g., circular scroll) different from the first variation path (e.g., vertical scroll) on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). Even in the case of a variation performance of the second variation path (e.g., circular scroll), during a variation stop suggestion period that suggests that the performance pattern (70a) will stop in a predetermined manner, a first variation stop suggestion performance in which a specific sound (e.g., a stop sound, etc.) is output or a second variation stop suggestion performance in which the output of the specific sound is limited can be executed, and as the specific sound, a first specific sound (e.g., a stop sound in a normal (missed) time), a second specific sound different from the first specific sound (e.g., a special stop sound when a pseudo pattern or a pattern of the same color is temporarily stopped), and a third specific sound different from the first specific sound and the second specific sound (e.g., a stop sound when a jackpot is hit) can be executed. In the first mode (mode in a normal game state), a first reach prompting performance can be executed to prompt a player to expect a reach, and in the second mode (mode in a favorable game state), a second reach prompting performance can be executed to prompt the player to reach, and the third specific sound (e.g., a stop sound for a big win) is more likely to be output in the variable performance in which the second reach prompting performance is executed than in the variable performance in which the first reach prompting performance is executed, when a reach performance is executed after the reach prompting.

The present invention has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-mentioned embodiments of the invention are intended to facilitate understanding of the present invention and do not limit the present invention. The present invention may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and the present invention includes equivalents thereof.

100...gaming machine, 102B...game unit (second means), 131...main display device (alarm means), 180...upper unit (first means), 300...main control board (control means), 320...performance control board (control means), 331...audio output device (alarm means), 341...performance board lighting device (alarm means), 342...performance frame lighting device (alarm means), 600...upper game decoration part (first means), 650...upper game main body part (second means), 680a to 680d...reflective sensor (detection means), 700...lower game decoration part (first means), 750...lower game main body part (second means), 780a to 780d...reflective sensor (detection means), 1620...game board connector (detection means).

Claims (1)

A game machine door that is disposed forward of a game board having a game area and can be opened and closed;
A control means for controlling presentations according to the progress of a game;
A first means for executing a performance;
A second means different from the first means;
A plurality of notification means capable of performing notification in a predetermined manner;
A detection means for detecting predetermined information regarding the attachment of the first means to the second means,
The control means
In a first abnormal state in which the first means appropriate for the second means is not attached ,
A first abnormality notification can be executed by the plurality of notification means,
In the case of a second abnormal state in which the gaming machine door is in an open state,
The second abnormality notification can be executed by the plurality of notification means,
In the first notification means, when the second abnormal state occurs during the first abnormal state, only the first abnormality notification can be executed in a visible state, and when a predetermined state corresponding to a RAM clear process capable of erasing information related to the progress of a game during the first abnormal state occurs, only the first abnormality notification can be executed in a visible state;
A gaming machine characterized in that in the second notification means, when the second abnormal state occurs while in the first abnormal state, only the first abnormality notification can be executed in an audible manner , and when the specified state occurs while in the first abnormal state, the specified notification to be executed when the specified state occurs can be executed in an audible manner, and then the first abnormality notification can be executed in an audible manner .